User’s Guide
Introduction
P3NK-4452-01ENZ0
Series
User's Guide
XG Series User’s Guide
Contents
Contents
Organization and Usage of This Manual ..........................................................................................................16
Target Readers and Required Knowledge ............................................................................................................... 16
Trademark Notification in This Manual .................................................................................................................. 17
How the Manuals for This Device Are Organized .................................................................................................. 18
Chapter 1 Features and Functions......................................................................... 22
Switch Specifications ............................................................................................................................... 23
10/100/1000BASE-T Port Specifications ................................................................................................ 28
Console Port Specifications ..................................................................................................................... 29
Software Specifications .........................................................................................................................30
Initial Values ............................................................................................................................................ 32
System Maximum Values ........................................................................................................................ 34
Chapter 2 Using the CLI .......................................................................................... 37
2.1.2.1 Command Operation Procedure ............................................................................................... 39
2.1.2.2 Executable commands .............................................................................................................. 42
2.2.1.1 Command execution function .................................................................................................. 43
2.2.1.2 Entry editing function .............................................................................................................. 43
2.2.1.3 Command name autocomplete function .................................................................................. 44
2.2.1.4 Command argument autocomplete function ............................................................................ 46
2.2.1.5 Abbreviated command entry function ...................................................................................... 46
2.2.1.6 Command alias function .......................................................................................................... 46
2.2.1.7 Configuration hierarchy function ............................................................................................. 47
2.2.1.8 Time of command execution display function ......................................................................... 48
2.2.1.9 Command history function ....................................................................................................... 48
2.2.1.10 List of shell key bindings ......................................................................................................... 52
Error Messages Common to All Commands ........................................................................................... 53
Characters that can be entered ................................................................................................................. 54
Chapter 3 Installation .............................................................................................. 55
Workflow for Initial Setup of the Device ..............................................................................................56
3
XG Series User’s Guide
Contents
MAC Address Table Management .......................................................................................................... 62
Jumbo Frame Support .............................................................................................................................. 63
Flow Control ............................................................................................................................................ 63
Frame Distribution Methods in Link Aggregation .................................................................................. 69
The Number of Ports That Require Linkup ............................................................................................. 70
Spanning Tree Protocol Port States ......................................................................................................... 72
Tag-Based (IEEE802.1Q) VLAN ............................................................................................................ 75
Quality of Service (QoS) .......................................................................................................................76
IGMP Snooping .....................................................................................................................................77
Managing Group Members ...................................................................................................................... 80
IGMP Querier .......................................................................................................................................... 81
Traffic Statistics ....................................................................................................................................... 83
SNMP Agent ............................................................................................................................................ 83
Chapter 5 Command Reference ............................................................................. 85
Ethernet Common Information ................................................................................................................ 90
5.1.1.1 forwardingmode ....................................................................................................................... 90
5.1.1.2 ether use ................................................................................................................................... 91
5.1.1.3 ether media ............................................................................................................................... 92
5.1.1.4 ether mode ................................................................................................................................ 93
5.1.1.5 ether duplex .............................................................................................................................. 94
5.1.1.6 ether mdi .................................................................................................................................. 95
5.1.1.7 ether flowctl ............................................................................................................................. 96
5.1.1.8 ether type .................................................................................................................................. 97
5.1.1.9 ether vlan tag .......................................................................................................................... 100
5.1.1.10 ether vlan untag ...................................................................................................................... 101
5.1.1.11 ether egress permission .......................................................................................................... 102
5.1.1.12 ether loopdetect use ................................................................................................................ 102
5.1.1.13 ether loopdetect frame ............................................................................................................ 103
5.1.1.14 ether startup ............................................................................................................................ 104
4
XG Series User’s Guide
Contents
5.1.1.15 ether recovery limit ................................................................................................................ 105
5.1.1.16 ether downrelay port .............................................................................................................. 106
5.1.1.17 ether downrelay recovery mode ............................................................................................. 107
5.1.1.18 ether downrelay recovery cause ............................................................................................. 108
5.1.1.19 ether description ..................................................................................................................... 109
5.1.1.20 linkaggregation algorithm ...................................................................................................... 110
5.1.1.21 linkaggregation mode ............................................................................................................. 111
5.1.1.22 linkaggregation type ............................................................................................................... 112
5.1.1.23 linkaggregation collecting minimum ..................................................................................... 113
5.1.1.24 linkaggregation icmpwatch address ....................................................................................... 114
5.1.1.25 linkaggregation icmpwatch interval ....................................................................................... 115
5.1.1.26 linkaggregation downrelay port ............................................................................................. 116
5.1.1.27 linkaggregation downrelay recovery mode ............................................................................ 117
5.1.1.28 linkaggregation downrelay recovery cause ............................................................................ 118
5.1.1.29 linkaggregation description .................................................................................................... 119
5.1.1.30 backup mode .......................................................................................................................... 120
5.1.1.31 backup standby ....................................................................................................................... 121
MAC Information .................................................................................................................................. 122
5.1.2.1 ether mac storm ...................................................................................................................... 122
5.1.3.1 ether stp use ............................................................................................................................ 124
5.1.3.2 ether stp domain cost .............................................................................................................. 125
5.1.3.3 ether stp domain priority ........................................................................................................ 126
5.1.3.4 ether stp force-version ............................................................................................................ 127
5.1.4.1 ether lldp mode ....................................................................................................................... 128
5.1.4.2 ether lldp info ......................................................................................................................... 129
5.1.4.3 ether lldp vlan ......................................................................................................................... 131
5.1.4.4 ether lldp notification ............................................................................................................. 131
Filter Information ................................................................................................................................... 132
5.1.5.1 ether macfilter ........................................................................................................................ 132
5.1.5.2 ether macfilter move .............................................................................................................. 136
QoS Information .................................................................................................................................... 137
5.1.6.1 ether qos aclmap ..................................................................................................................... 137
5.1.6.2 ether qos aclmap move ........................................................................................................... 142
5.1.6.3 ether qos priority .................................................................................................................... 143
5.1.6.4 ether qos mode ....................................................................................................................... 144
5.1.6.5 ether qos prioritymap ............................................................................................................. 145
LACP Information ................................................................................................................................. 146
5.1.7.1 ether lacp port-priority ........................................................................................................... 146
5.1.8.1 ether icmpwatch address ........................................................................................................ 147
5.1.8.2 ether icmpwatch interval ........................................................................................................ 148
5.1.9.1 ether snmp trap linkdown ....................................................................................................... 149
5.1.9.2 ether snmp trap linkup ............................................................................................................ 150
5.1.10 ether output rate control information ..................................................................................................... 151
5.1.10.1 ether ratecontrol ..................................................................................................................... 151
LACP Information Settings .................................................................................................................152
LACP Information ................................................................................................................................. 152
5.2.1.1 lacp system-priority ................................................................................................................ 152
5.2.1.2 lacp bpdu ................................................................................................................................ 153
5
XG Series User’s Guide
Contents
VLAN Information Settings ................................................................................................................154
5.3.1.1 vlan name ............................................................................................................................... 154
5.3.1.2 vlan protocol .......................................................................................................................... 155
5.3.1.3 vlan forward ........................................................................................................................... 158
5.3.1.4 vlan description ...................................................................................................................... 159
IGMP Snooping Information ................................................................................................................. 160
5.3.2.1 vlan igmpsnoop router ........................................................................................................... 160
5.3.2.2 vlan igmpsnoop querier .......................................................................................................... 161
5.3.2.3 vlan igmpsnoop source ........................................................................................................... 162
5.3.2.4 vlan igmpsnoop proxy ............................................................................................................ 163
Filter Information ................................................................................................................................... 164
5.3.3.1 vlan macfilter ......................................................................................................................... 164
5.3.3.2 vlan macfilter move ............................................................................................................... 169
5.3.3.3 vlan ip6filter ........................................................................................................................... 170
5.3.3.4 vlan ip6filter move ................................................................................................................. 172
QoS Information .................................................................................................................................... 173
5.3.4.1 vlan qos aclmap ...................................................................................................................... 173
5.3.4.2 vlan ip6qos aclmap ................................................................................................................. 178
5.3.4.3 vlan ip6qos aclmap move ....................................................................................................... 180
MAC Information ................................................................................................................................181
MAC Information .................................................................................................................................. 181
5.4.1.1 mac learning ........................................................................................................................... 181
5.4.1.2 mac age .................................................................................................................................. 182
LAN Information Settings ...................................................................................................................183
5.5.1.1 lan description ........................................................................................................................ 183
5.5.1.2 lan ip address .......................................................................................................................... 184
5.5.1.3 lan ip route ............................................................................................................................. 185
5.5.1.4 lan ip filter .............................................................................................................................. 186
5.5.1.5 lan ip filter move .................................................................................................................... 191
5.5.1.6 lan ip dscp .............................................................................................................................. 192
5.5.1.7 lan ip dscp move .................................................................................................................... 196
5.5.1.8 lan ip arp static ....................................................................................................................... 197
5.5.2.1 lan ip6 use .............................................................................................................................. 198
5.5.2.2 lan ip6 ifid .............................................................................................................................. 198
5.5.2.3 lan ip6 address ........................................................................................................................ 199
5.5.2.4 lan ip6 ra mode ....................................................................................................................... 199
5.5.2.5 lan ip6 route ........................................................................................................................... 200
5.5.2.6 lan ip6 filter ............................................................................................................................ 201
5.5.2.7 lan ip6 filter move .................................................................................................................. 203
5.5.2.8 lan ip6 dscp ............................................................................................................................ 204
5.5.2.9 lan ip6 dscp move .................................................................................................................. 206
VLAN Related Information ................................................................................................................... 207
5.5.3.1 lan vlan ................................................................................................................................... 207
LLMNR Related Information ................................................................................................................ 208
5.5.4.1 lan llmnr use ........................................................................................................................... 208
Management LAN port IPv4 Related Information ................................................................................ 209
5.5.5.1 oob ip address ......................................................................................................................... 209
5.5.5.2 oob ip route ............................................................................................................................ 210
6
XG Series User’s Guide
Contents
Management LAN port IPv6 Related Information ................................................................................ 211
5.5.6.1 oob ip6 use ............................................................................................................................. 211
5.5.6.2 oob ip6 ifid ............................................................................................................................. 211
5.5.6.3 oob ip6 address ....................................................................................................................... 212
5.5.6.4 oob ip6 ra mode ...................................................................................................................... 212
5.5.6.5 oob ip6 route .......................................................................................................................... 213
5.5.7.1 oob llmnr use .......................................................................................................................... 214
5.6.1.1 ip arp age ................................................................................................................................ 215
QoS Information Settings ....................................................................................................................216
QoS Information .................................................................................................................................... 216
5.7.1.1 qos cosmap ............................................................................................................................. 216
STP Information ..................................................................................................................................217
5.8.1.1 stp mode ................................................................................................................................. 217
5.8.1.2 stp age .................................................................................................................................... 218
5.8.1.3 stp delay ................................................................................................................................. 219
5.8.1.4 stp hello .................................................................................................................................. 220
5.8.1.5 stp bpdu .................................................................................................................................. 221
5.8.1.6 stp domain priority ................................................................................................................. 222
5.8.1.7 stp config_id ........................................................................................................................... 223
5.8.1.8 stp domain vlan ...................................................................................................................... 223
5.8.1.9 stp max-hops .......................................................................................................................... 224
LLDP Information Settings .................................................................................................................225
5.9.1.1 lldp send interval .................................................................................................................... 225
5.9.1.2 lldp send hold ......................................................................................................................... 226
5.9.1.3 lldp reinit delay ...................................................................................................................... 226
5.9.1.4 lldp notification interval ......................................................................................................... 227
5.10 IGMP Snooping Information Settings .................................................................................................228
5.10.1 IGMP Snooping Information ................................................................................................................. 228
5.10.1.1 igmpsnoop use ........................................................................................................................ 228
5.10.1.2 igmpsnoop localgroup ............................................................................................................ 228
5.10.1.3 igmpsnoop unknown flooding ............................................................................................... 229
5.11 Loop Detection Information Settings ..................................................................................................230
5.11.1 Loop Detection Information ................................................................................................................... 230
5.11.1.1 loopdetect use ......................................................................................................................... 230
5.11.1.2 loopdetect portdisable ............................................................................................................ 231
5.11.1.3 loopdetect portblock ............................................................................................................... 231
5.11.1.4 loopdetect interval .................................................................................................................. 232
5.11.1.5 loopdetect recovery ................................................................................................................ 232
5.12 ACL Information Settings ...................................................................................................................233
5.12.1 ACL Information .................................................................................................................................... 233
5.12.1.1 acl mac ................................................................................................................................... 233
5.12.1.2 acl vlan ................................................................................................................................... 234
5.12.1.3 acl ip ....................................................................................................................................... 235
5.12.1.4 acl ip6 ..................................................................................................................................... 237
5.12.1.5 acl tcp ..................................................................................................................................... 238
5.12.1.6 acl udp .................................................................................................................................... 239
5.12.1.7 acl icmp .................................................................................................................................. 240
5.12.1.8 acl description ........................................................................................................................ 241
7
XG Series User’s Guide
Contents
5.13 AAA Information Settings ...................................................................................................................242
5.13.1 Group ID Information ............................................................................................................................ 243
5.13.1.1 aaa name ................................................................................................................................. 243
5.13.2 AAA User Information .......................................................................................................................... 244
5.13.2.1 aaa user id ............................................................................................................................... 244
5.13.2.2 aaa user password ................................................................................................................... 245
5.13.2.3 aaa user user-role ................................................................................................................... 246
5.13.3 RADIUS Information Settings ............................................................................................................... 247
5.13.3.1 aaa radius service ................................................................................................................... 247
5.13.3.2 aaa radius auth source ............................................................................................................ 248
5.13.3.3 aaa radius auth message-authenticator ................................................................................... 249
5.13.3.4 aaa radius client server-info auth secret ................................................................................. 250
5.13.3.5 aaa radius client server-info auth address .............................................................................. 251
5.13.3.6 aaa radius client server-info auth port .................................................................................... 252
5.13.3.7 aaa radius client server-info auth deadtime ............................................................................ 253
5.13.3.8 aaa radius client server-info auth priority .............................................................................. 254
5.13.3.9 aaa radius client server-info auth source ................................................................................ 255
5.13.3.10 aaa radius client retry ............................................................................................................. 256
5.14 Password Information ..........................................................................................................................257
5.14.1 password format ..................................................................................................................................... 257
5.14.2 password admin set ................................................................................................................................ 258
5.14.3 password user set ................................................................................................................................... 260
5.14.4 password aaa .......................................................................................................................................... 261
5.14.5 password authtype .................................................................................................................................. 261
5.15 Device Information Settings ................................................................................................................262
5.15.1 SNMP Information ................................................................................................................................. 262
5.15.1.1 snmp service ........................................................................................................................... 262
5.15.1.2 snmp agent contact ................................................................................................................. 262
5.15.1.3 snmp agent sysname ............................................................................................................... 263
5.15.1.4 snmp agent location ............................................................................................................... 263
5.15.1.5 snmp agent address ................................................................................................................ 264
5.15.1.6 snmp agent engineid ............................................................................................................... 264
5.15.1.7 snmp manager ........................................................................................................................ 265
5.15.1.8 snmp trap coldstart ................................................................................................................. 266
5.15.1.9 snmp trap linkdown ................................................................................................................ 266
5.15.1.13 snmp trap topologychange ..................................................................................................... 268
5.15.1.14 snmp trap noserror ................................................................................................................. 269
5.15.1.18 snmp user address .................................................................................................................. 271
5.15.1.20 snmp user auth ....................................................................................................................... 273
5.15.1.22 snmp user write ...................................................................................................................... 275
5.15.1.23 snmp user read ....................................................................................................................... 276
8
XG Series User’s Guide
Contents
5.15.2 System Log Information ........................................................................................................................ 280
5.15.2.1 syslog server address .............................................................................................................. 280
5.15.2.2 syslog server pri ..................................................................................................................... 281
5.15.2.3 syslog pri ................................................................................................................................ 282
5.15.2.4 syslog facility ......................................................................................................................... 282
5.15.2.5 syslog security ........................................................................................................................ 283
5.15.2.6 syslog dupcut .......................................................................................................................... 283
5.15.2.7 syslog command-logging ....................................................................................................... 284
5.15.2.8 syslog header .......................................................................................................................... 284
5.15.2.9 syslog source address ............................................................................................................. 285
5.15.3.1 time auto server ...................................................................................................................... 286
5.15.3.2 time auto interval ................................................................................................................... 287
5.15.3.3 time zone ................................................................................................................................ 287
5.15.3.4 time summer-time .................................................................................................................. 288
5.15.4 ProxyDNS Information .......................................................................................................................... 290
5.15.4.1 proxydns domain .................................................................................................................... 290
5.15.4.2 proxydns domain move .......................................................................................................... 292
5.15.4.3 proxydns address .................................................................................................................... 293
5.15.4.4 proxydns address move .......................................................................................................... 294
5.15.4.5 proxydns unicode ................................................................................................................... 294
5.15.5 Host Database Information .................................................................................................................... 295
5.15.5.1 host name ............................................................................................................................... 295
5.15.5.2 host ip address ........................................................................................................................ 295
5.15.5.3 host ip6 address ...................................................................................................................... 296
5.15.6 Schedule Information ............................................................................................................................. 297
5.15.6.1 schedule at .............................................................................................................................. 297
5.15.6.2 schedule syslog ...................................................................................................................... 298
5.15.7 Filter/QoS Resource Information ........................................................................................................... 299
5.15.7.1 resource filter distribution ...................................................................................................... 299
5.15.8 Other ....................................................................................................................................................... 300
5.15.8.1 addact ..................................................................................................................................... 300
5.15.8.2 watchdog service .................................................................................................................... 301
5.15.8.3 consoleinfo ............................................................................................................................. 301
5.15.8.4 telnetinfo ................................................................................................................................ 302
5.15.8.5 mflag ...................................................................................................................................... 302
5.15.8.6 dumpswitch ............................................................................................................................ 303
5.15.8.7 sysname .................................................................................................................................. 303
5.15.8.8 serverinfo ftp .......................................................................................................................... 304
5.15.8.9 serverinfo ftp ip6 .................................................................................................................... 304
5.15.8.10 serverinfo ftp filter ................................................................................................................. 305
5.15.8.11 serverinfo ftp filter move ....................................................................................................... 306
5.15.8.12 serverinfo ftp filter default ..................................................................................................... 306
5.15.8.13 serverinfo sftp ........................................................................................................................ 307
5.15.8.14 serverinfo sftp ip6 .................................................................................................................. 308
5.15.8.16 serverinfo telnet ip6 ............................................................................................................... 309
5.15.8.20 serverinfo ssh ......................................................................................................................... 311
5.15.8.21 serverinfo ssh ip6 ................................................................................................................... 312
9
XG Series User’s Guide
Contents
5.15.8.24 serverinfo ssh filter default .................................................................................................... 314
5.15.8.25 serverinfo http ........................................................................................................................ 315
5.15.8.26 serverinfo http ip6 .................................................................................................................. 315
5.15.8.27 serverinfo http filter ............................................................................................................... 316
5.15.8.29 serverinfo http filter default ................................................................................................... 317
5.15.8.32 serverinfo dns filter ................................................................................................................ 319
5.15.8.33 serverinfo dns filter move ...................................................................................................... 320
5.15.8.38 serverinfo sntp filter move ..................................................................................................... 323
5.15.8.40 serverinfo time ip tcp ............................................................................................................. 324
5.15.8.41 serverinfo time ip6 tcp ........................................................................................................... 324
5.15.8.42 serverinfo time ip udp ............................................................................................................ 325
5.15.8.43 serverinfo time ip6 udp .......................................................................................................... 325
5.15.8.46 serverinfo time filter default .................................................................................................. 327
5.16 Login banner Settings ..........................................................................................................................328
5.16.1 Login banner Information ...................................................................................................................... 328
5.16.1.1 login banner telnet .................................................................................................................. 328
5.16.1.2 login banner ftp ...................................................................................................................... 328
5.16.1.3 login banner ssh ..................................................................................................................... 329
5.16.1.4 login banner description ......................................................................................................... 329
5.17 Mode and Terminal Operation Commands .........................................................................................330
5.17.1 Mode Operation Commands .................................................................................................................. 330
5.17.1.1 admin ...................................................................................................................................... 330
5.17.1.2 su ............................................................................................................................................ 331
5.17.1.3 exit .......................................................................................................................................... 332
5.17.1.4 configure ................................................................................................................................ 333
5.17.1.5 end .......................................................................................................................................... 334
5.17.1.6 quit ......................................................................................................................................... 334
5.17.1.7 top ........................................................................................................................................... 335
5.17.1.8 up ............................................................................................................................................ 335
5.17.1.9 ! .............................................................................................................................................. 336
5.17.2 Terminal Operation Commands ............................................................................................................. 337
5.17.2.1 terminal pager ........................................................................................................................ 337
5.17.2.2 terminal window .................................................................................................................... 340
5.17.2.3 terminal charset ...................................................................................................................... 340
5.17.2.4 terminal prompt ...................................................................................................................... 341
5.17.2.5 terminal timestamp ................................................................................................................. 342
5.17.2.6 terminal bell ........................................................................................................................... 343
5.17.2.7 terminal logging ..................................................................................................................... 344
5.17.2.8 show terminal ......................................................................................................................... 345
5.17.3 Command Execution History ................................................................................................................. 346
5.17.3.1 show logging command ......................................................................................................... 346
5.17.3.2 clear logging command .......................................................................................................... 348
10
XG Series User’s Guide
Contents
5.17.4 Command Alias ...................................................................................................................................... 349
5.17.4.1 alias ........................................................................................................................................ 349
5.17.4.2 show alias ............................................................................................................................... 350
5.17.4.3 clear alias ................................................................................................................................ 350
5.17.5 Command Output ................................................................................................................................... 351
5.17.5.1 more ....................................................................................................................................... 351
5.17.5.2 tail ........................................................................................................................................... 352
5.18 System Operations and Display Commands ........................................................................................353
5.18.1 System Operations and Display Commands .......................................................................................... 353
5.18.1.1 show system information ....................................................................................................... 353
5.18.1.2 show system status ................................................................................................................. 354
5.18.1.3 show tech-support .................................................................................................................. 361
5.18.1.4 show logging error ................................................................................................................. 361
5.18.1.5 clear logging error .................................................................................................................. 365
5.18.1.6 show logging syslog ............................................................................................................... 365
5.18.1.7 clear logging syslog ............................................................................................................... 366
5.18.1.8 clear statistics ......................................................................................................................... 366
5.18.1.9 show date ................................................................................................................................ 367
5.18.1.10 date ......................................................................................................................................... 367
5.18.1.12 reset ........................................................................................................................................ 368
5.19 Configuration Display, Delete and Operation Commands ..................................................................369
5.19.1 Configuration Display Commands ......................................................................................................... 369
5.19.1.1 show candidate-config ........................................................................................................... 369
5.19.1.2 show running-config .............................................................................................................. 370
5.19.1.3 show startup-config ................................................................................................................ 370
5.19.1.4 diff .......................................................................................................................................... 371
5.19.2 Configuration Delete Commands ........................................................................................................... 372
5.19.2.1 delete ...................................................................................................................................... 372
5.19.3 Configuration Operation Commands ..................................................................................................... 373
5.19.3.1 load ......................................................................................................................................... 373
5.19.3.2 save ......................................................................................................................................... 374
5.19.3.3 commit ................................................................................................................................... 375
5.19.3.4 commit try time ...................................................................................................................... 376
5.19.3.5 commit try cancel ................................................................................................................... 377
5.19.3.6 discard .................................................................................................................................... 378
5.19.4 File Operation Commands ..................................................................................................................... 379
5.19.4.1 dir ........................................................................................................................................... 379
5.19.4.2 copy ........................................................................................................................................ 380
5.19.4.3 remove .................................................................................................................................... 381
5.19.4.4 rename .................................................................................................................................... 381
5.19.4.5 format ..................................................................................................................................... 382
5.20 Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation Commands ....................383
5.20.1 Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display Commands ........................................................ 383
5.20.1.1 show ether .............................................................................................................................. 383
5.20.1.2 show ether brief ...................................................................................................................... 387
5.20.1.3 show ether statistics ............................................................................................................... 389
5.20.1.4 show ether media-info ............................................................................................................ 408
5.20.1.5 show ether utilization ............................................................................................................. 410
5.20.1.6 show ether queue .................................................................................................................... 412
5.20.2 Ethernet Counter, Log, and Statistics Clear Commands ........................................................................ 414
5.20.2.1 clear ether statistics ................................................................................................................ 414
11
XG Series User’s Guide
Contents
5.21 USB connection Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation Commands ........415
5.21.1 USB connection Counter, Log, and Statistics Clear Commands ........................................................... 415
5.21.1.1 show usb hcd status ................................................................................................................ 415
5.21.1.2 show usb storage status .......................................................................................................... 416
5.22 LACP Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation Commands ........................419
5.22.1 LACP Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display Commands ........................................................... 419
5.22.1.1 show lacp ................................................................................................................................ 419
5.22.1.2 show lacp statistics ................................................................................................................. 421
5.22.2 LACP Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Clear Commands ............................................................... 422
5.22.2.1 clear lacp statistics ................................................................................................................. 422
5.23 M1 port Status Display command .......................................................................................................423
5.23.1 M1 port Status Display command .......................................................................................................... 423
5.23.1.1 show oob ................................................................................................................................ 423
5.24 Interface Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display Commands .....................................................424
5.24.1 Interface Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display Commands ....................................................... 424
5.24.1.1 show interface ........................................................................................................................ 424
5.24.1.2 show interface brief ................................................................................................................ 426
5.24.1.3 show interface summary ........................................................................................................ 427
5.25 ARP Entry Display and Clear Operation Commands ..........................................................................428
5.25.1 ARP Entry Display Commands ............................................................................................................. 428
5.25.1.1 show arp ................................................................................................................................. 428
5.25.2 ARP Entry Clear Commands ................................................................................................................. 430
5.25.2.1 clear arp .................................................................................................................................. 430
5.26 Routing Table Entry Display Commands ............................................................................................431
5.26.1 IPv4 Routing Table Entry Display Commands ...................................................................................... 431
5.26.1.1 show ip route .......................................................................................................................... 431
5.26.1.2 show ip route summary .......................................................................................................... 433
5.26.1.3 show ip route kernel ............................................................................................................... 434
5.26.2 IPv6 Routing Table Entry Display Commands ...................................................................................... 436
5.26.2.1 show ipv6 route ...................................................................................................................... 436
5.26.2.2 show ipv6 route summary ...................................................................................................... 438
5.26.2.3 show ipv6 route kernel ........................................................................................................... 439
5.26.2.4 show ipv6 ra default-router-list .............................................................................................. 441
5.26.2.5 show ipv6 ra prefix-list .......................................................................................................... 442
5.27 Packet Statistics Display and Clear Operation Commands .................................................................443
5.27.1 IPv4 Packet Statistics Display Commands ............................................................................................ 443
5.27.1.1 show ip traffic ........................................................................................................................ 443
5.27.2 IPv4 Packet Statistics Clear Commands ................................................................................................ 446
5.27.2.1 clear ip traffic ......................................................................................................................... 446
5.27.3 IPv6 Packet Statistics Display Commands ............................................................................................ 447
5.27.3.1 show ipv6 traffic .................................................................................................................... 447
5.27.4 IPv6 Packet Statistics Clear Commands ................................................................................................ 450
5.27.4.1 clear ipv6 traffic ..................................................................................................................... 450
5.28 Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation Commands .......................451
5.28.1 Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display Commands ........................................................... 451
5.28.1.1 show bridge ............................................................................................................................ 451
5.28.2 Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Clear Commands ............................................................... 453
5.28.2.1 clear bridge ............................................................................................................................. 453
5.28.3 Spanning Tree Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display Commands .............................................. 454
5.28.3.1 show spanning-tree ................................................................................................................ 454
5.28.3.2 show spanning-tree instance .................................................................................................. 467
5.28.4 Spanning Tree Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Clear Commands .................................................. 479
5.28.4.1 clear spanning-tree statistics .................................................................................................. 479
12
XG Series User’s Guide
Contents
5.29 LLDP Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation Commands ........................480
5.29.1 LLDP Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display Commands ............................................................ 480
5.29.1.1 show lldp ................................................................................................................................ 480
5.29.1.2 show lldp summary ................................................................................................................ 486
5.29.1.3 show lldp neighbors ............................................................................................................... 486
5.29.1.4 show lldp statistics ................................................................................................................. 489
5.29.2 LLDP Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Clear Commands ............................................................... 491
5.29.2.1 clear lldp neighbors ................................................................................................................ 491
5.29.2.2 clear lldp statistics .................................................................................................................. 491
5.30 VLAN Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display Commands ........................................................492
5.30.1 VLAN Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display Commands ........................................................... 492
5.30.1.1 show vlan ............................................................................................................................... 492
5.30.1.2 show vlan brief ....................................................................................................................... 494
5.31 QoS Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display Commands ............................................................495
5.31.1 COS Queue Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display Commands .................................................. 495
5.31.1.1 show qos cosmap ................................................................................................................... 495
5.31.1.2 show qos prioritymap ............................................................................................................. 496
5.32 SSH Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display Commands ............................................................497
5.32.1 SSH Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display Commands .............................................................. 497
5.32.1.1 show ssh server key ................................................................................................................ 497
5.33 IGMP Snooping Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation Commands ........499
5.33.1 IGMP Snooping Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display Commands ........................................... 499
5.33.1.1 show igmpsnoop brief ............................................................................................................ 499
5.33.1.2 show igmpsnoop mrouter ....................................................................................................... 500
5.33.1.3 show igmpsnoop reporter ....................................................................................................... 501
5.33.1.4 show igmpsnoop statistics ...................................................................................................... 502
5.33.2 IGMP Snooping Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Clear Commands ............................................... 504
5.33.2.1 clear igmpsnoop statistics ...................................................................................................... 504
5.33.2.2 clear igmpsnoop group ........................................................................................................... 505
5.34 Loopdetection Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation Commands ...........506
5.34.1 Loopdetection Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display Commands ............................................... 506
5.34.1.1 show loopdetect ...................................................................................................................... 506
5.35 AAA Status Display and Clear Operation Commands ........................................................................508
5.35.1 AAA Status Display Commands ............................................................................................................ 508
5.35.1.1 show aaa radius client server-info .......................................................................................... 508
5.36 NETTIME (time/sntp) Server and Client Statistics Display and Clear Operation Commands ...........509
5.36.1 NETTIME (time/sntp) Statistics Display Commands ........................................................................... 509
5.36.1.1 show nettime status ................................................................................................................ 509
5.36.1.2 show nettime statistics ........................................................................................................... 510
5.36.2 NETTIME (time/sntp) Statistics Clear Commands ............................................................................... 513
5.36.2.1 clear nettime statistics ............................................................................................................ 513
5.37 ProxyDNS Statistics Display and Clear Operation Commands ..........................................................514
5.37.1 ProxyDNS Statistics Display Commands .............................................................................................. 514
5.37.1.1 show proxydns statistics ......................................................................................................... 514
5.37.2 ProxyDNS Statistics Clear Commands .................................................................................................. 516
5.37.2.1 clear proxydns statistics ......................................................................................................... 516
5.38 SNMP Statistics Display and Clear Operation Commands .................................................................517
5.38.1 SNMP Statistics Display Commands ..................................................................................................... 517
5.38.1.1 show snmp statistics ............................................................................................................... 517
5.38.2 SNMP Statistics Clear Commands ........................................................................................................ 519
5.38.2.1 clear snmp statistics ............................................................................................................... 519
13
XG Series User’s Guide
Contents
5.39 Ethernet L3 Monitor Function Counter, Log, Statistics,
5.39.1 Ethernet L3 Monitor Function Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display Commands ..................... 520
5.39.1.1 show icmpwatch ..................................................................................................................... 520
5.39.1.2 show icmpwatch statistics ...................................................................................................... 521
5.39.2 Ethernet L3 Monitor Function Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Clear Commands ......................... 522
5.39.2.1 clear icmpwatch statistics ....................................................................................................... 522
5.40 Login Information Operations and Display Commands ......................................................................523
5.40.1 Login Information Display Commands ................................................................................................. 523
5.40.1.1 show users .............................................................................................................................. 523
5.40.2 Login Information Operation Commands .............................................................................................. 525
5.40.2.1 clear line ................................................................................................................................. 525
5.41 Socket Status Display Commands .......................................................................................................526
5.41.1 Socket Status Display Commands ......................................................................................................... 526
5.41.1.1 show socket ............................................................................................................................ 526
5.42 Trace Show and Clear Operation Commands ......................................................................................529
5.42.1 Trace Show Commands ......................................................................................................................... 529
5.42.1.1 show trace ssh ........................................................................................................................ 529
5.42.2 Trace Clear Commands .......................................................................................................................... 531
5.42.2.1 clear trace ssh ......................................................................................................................... 531
5.43 Ethernet Port Control Commands ........................................................................................................532
5.43.1 Ethernet Port Control Commands .......................................................................................................... 532
5.43.1.1 offline ..................................................................................................................................... 532
5.43.1.2 online ...................................................................................................................................... 533
5.44 RADIUS Control Commands ..............................................................................................................534
5.44.1 RADIUS Control Commands ................................................................................................................ 534
5.44.1.1 radius recovery ....................................................................................................................... 534
5.45 USB Port Control Commands ..............................................................................................................535
5.45.1 USB Port Control Commands ................................................................................................................ 535
5.45.1.1 usbctl ...................................................................................................................................... 535
5.46 I’m here Commands .............................................................................................................................536
5.46.1 I’m here Commands ............................................................................................................................... 536
5.46.1.1 iamhere ................................................................................................................................... 536
5.47 Other Commands .................................................................................................................................537
5.47.1 Other Commands ................................................................................................................................... 537
5.47.1.1 ping ......................................................................................................................................... 537
5.47.1.2 traceroute ................................................................................................................................ 539
5.47.1.3 telnet ....................................................................................................................................... 541
5.48 Effect by "commit" Command Execution ...........................................................................................543
Chapter 6 Managing the Device............................................................................ 547
Verifying the Device Operations .........................................................................................................548
Reviewing Log Messages ...................................................................................................................... 557
6.1.3.1 Format of System Log Message ............................................................................................. 557
6.1.3.2 Reviewing Error Logs ............................................................................................................ 558
Saving/Restoring Configuration Information ......................................................................................561
Saving/restoring configuration information using FTP ......................................................................... 561
Saving/restoring configuration information using a Compact Flash Card ............................................ 564
14
XG Series User’s Guide
Contents
Updating the Firmware .......................................................................................................................... 576
Procedure for Extracting Maintenance Information when a System/Subsystem Failure Occurred ...... 577
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting................................................................................... 578
Appendix A SNMP Traps...................................................................................... 581
Appendix B List of MIBs....................................................................................... 582
IEEE802.1MIB ...................................................................................................................................................... 601
15
XG Series User's Guide
Organization and Usage of This Manual
This section describes target readers, contents, notations, etc. of this guide.
Target Readers and Required Knowledge
This guide was written for administrators, who are in charge of network construction, maintenance, and management.
To use this guide, the following knowledge is required.
•
•
Basic knowledge of networks, the Internet, and intranets
Basic knowledge of system security
This guide omits explanations of network protocol terms.
Areas Covered
This guide to the XGseries is composed of the following chapters.
Chapter Titles
Contents
Describes the features and functions.
Describes operating environment of CLI and how to operate CLI.
Describes the necessary installation procedures.
Describes how to use the commands.
Describes the management of the device.
Describes how to solve problems in the device.
Describes message format of SNMP traps.
Describes the list of MIBs supported by the SNMP agent
About the Symbols
The symbols used in this guide have the following meanings.
Indicates useful information for using this device.
Hint
Indicates precautions that must be taken when using this device.
Precautions
Indicates additional information to complement operating instructions.
Indicates related matters such as operation procedures, etc.
Note
Reference
Indicates the available model name when using functions of this device.
Available Model
Indicates warning matters related to the Product Liability (P.L.) Law. Please follow them
when using this device.
Warning
Caution
Indicates cautionary notes related to the Product Liability (P.L.) Law. Please follow them
when using this device.
16
XG Series User's Guide
Trademark Notification in This Manual
Microsoft, MS-DOS, Windows, Windows NT, Windows Server and Windows Vista are registered trademarks of the
Microsoft Corporation in the USA and other countries.
Adobe and Reader are trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the USA and other coun-
tries.
Netscape is a trademark of Netscape Communications Corporation in the USA.
UNIX is a registered trademark of Open Group in the USA and other countries.
Other company names and product names in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective com-
panies.
Abbreviated Product Names
The product names used in this manual are abbreviated as follows.
Product name
Description in this manual
Windows® XP
Microsoft® Windows® XP Professional operating system
Microsoft® Windows® XP Home Edition operating system
Microsoft® Windows® Millennium Edition operating system
Microsoft® Windows® 98 operating system
Windows® Me
Windows® 98
Windows® 95
Windows® 2000
Microsoft® Windows® 95 operating system
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Server Network operating system
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Professional operating system
Microsoft® Windows NT® Server network operating system Version 4.0
Microsoft® Windows NT® Workstation operating system Version 4.0
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003, Standard Edition
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 R2, Standard Edition
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003, Enterprise Edition
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 R2, Enterprise Edition
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003, Datacenter Edition
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 R2, Datacenter Edition
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003, Web Edition
Windows NT® 4.0
Windows Server® 2003
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003, Standard x64 Edition
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 R2, Standard x64 Edition
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003, Enterprise x64 Edition
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 R2, Enterprise x64 Edition
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003, Enterprise Edition for Itanium-based systems
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003, Datacenter x64 Edition
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 R2, Datacenter x64 Edition
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Ultimate operating system
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Business operating system
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Home Premium operating system
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Home Basic operating system
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Enterprise operating system
Windows Vista®
17
XG Series User's Guide
How the Manuals for This Device Are Organized
The following are XG series related manuals. Use these manuals as necessary.
Manual Name
Safety and Installation Guide
Hardware Guide
Description
This manual describes the safety and installation.
Describes the hardware of the XG.
User’s Guide (This manual)
This manual describes a variety of operations and procedures, including the
installation and maintenance of the XG Series.
18
XG Series User's Guide
End User's License Agreement
#
@(#)COPYRIGHT 8.2 (Berkeley) 3/21/94
All of the documentation and software included in the 4.4BSD and 4.4BSD-Lite Releases is copyrighted by The Regents of the
University of California.
Copyright 1979, 1980, 1983, 1986, 1988, 1989, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994 The Regents of the University of California. All rights
reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following
conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in
the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement: This product
includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors.
4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from
this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers and the American National Standards Committee X3, on Information
Processing Systems have given us permission to reprint portions of their documentation.
In the following statement, the phrase "this text" refers to portions of the system documentation.
Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form in the second BSD Networking Software Release, from IEEE
Std 1003.1-1988, IEEE Standard Portable Operating System Interface for Computer Environments (POSIX), copyright C 1988 by
the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. In the event of any discrepancy between these versions and the original
IEEE Standard, the original IEEE Standard is the referee document.
In the following statement, the phrase "This material" refers to portions of the system documentation.
This material is reproduced with permission from American National Standards Committee X3, on Information Processing
Systems. Computer and Business Equipment Manufacturers Association (CBEMA), 311 First St., NW, Suite 500, Washington, DC
20001-2178. The developmental work of Programming Language C was completed by the X3J11 Technical Committee.
19
XG Series User's Guide
The views and conclusions contained in the software and documentation are those of the authors and should not be interpreted as
representing official policies, either expressed or implied, of the Regents of the University of California.
Copyright © 1989 Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms are permitted provided that the above copyright notice and this paragraph are
duplicated in all such forms and that any documentation, advertising materials, and other materials related to such distribution and
use acknowledge that the software was developed by the University of California, Berkeley. The name of the University may not
be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,
WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE.
Copyright (C) 1991-2, RSA Data Security, Inc. Created 1991. All rights reserved.
License to copy and use this software is granted provided that it is identified as the "RSA Data Security, Inc. MD5 Message-Digest
Algorithm" in all material mentioning or referencing this software or this function.
License is also granted to make and use derivative works provided that such works are identified as "derived from the RSA Data
Security, Inc. MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm" in all material mentioning or referencing the derived work.
RSA Data Security, Inc. makes no representations concerning either the merchantability of this software or the suitability of this
software for any particular purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty of any kind.
These notices must be retained in any copies of any part of this documentation and/or software.
The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL.
This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to. The following
conditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL
documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson
Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed.If this package is used in a
product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used.This can be in the form of a textual
message at program startup or in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following
conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in
the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
20
XG Series User's Guide
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement:"This
product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young ([email protected])" The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if
the rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic related:-).
4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application code) you must include
an acknowledgement:"This product includes software written by Tim Hudson ([email protected])"
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN
ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Copyright (c) 1999 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following
conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in
the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment: "This product
includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project
4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this
software without prior written permission. For written permission, please contact [email protected].
5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL" nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior
written permission of the OpenSSL Project.
6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: "This product includes software developed
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
21
Chapter 1
Features and
Functions
This chapter describes the features and functions of the device.
1.1 Hardware Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
1.1.1 Switch Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
1.1.2 Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
1.1.3 10/100/1000BASE-T Port Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
1.1.4 USB Port Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
1.1.5 Console Port Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
1.2 Software Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
1.2.1 Software Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
1.2.2 Initial Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
1.2.3 System Maximum Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 1 Features and Functions
1.1 Hardware Specifications
This section explains the Hardware specifications for the device.
1.1.1 Switch Specifications
: supported, –: Not supported
item
specification
XG0448
model name
XG0224
XG2600
Interface
Console Port
specifications
RS232C
number of ports
Baud rate (bps)
connector
1
9600
RJ45 8-pin Modular
ETHER port
specifications
IEEE802.3
–
10BASE-T interface
100BASE-T interface
1000BASE-T interface
number of ports
10/100BASE-TX
10/100/1000BASE-T
–
1 (Management Port)
–
48
24
Port 45 to 48 are 10/100/
1000Base-T and SFP combo
ports. (*1)
Port 21 to 24 are 10/100/
1000Base-T and SFP combo
ports.
Baud rate (bps)
10M
–
100M
RJ45 8-pin Modular
100
1000M
connector
cable length (maximum) (
m)
SFP port
specifications
IEEE802.3
–
–
4
4
number of ports
Port 21 to 24 are 10/100/
Port 45 to 48 are 10/100/
1000Base-T and SFP combo
ports. (*1, *2)
1000Base-T and SFP combo
ports. (*2)
connector
20-pin SFP
–
SFP+ Slot (*3)
specifications
number of ports
connector
–
–
IEEE802.3
26
20-pin SFP+
–
CompactFlash Slot
USB port
–
specifications
number of ports
connector
–
–
–
1
USB2.0 Compliance
1
4-pin USB
Expansion Slot
2 (*1)
–
Hardware Specifications
23
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 1 Features and Functions
item
specification
XG0448
model name
Power Voltage/Frequencys
Power code
XG0224
XG2600
AC100V-240V (50/60Hz)
for 3-pin socket (grounded) (125V13A)
AC:for 3-pin socket
(grounded) (125V13A)
Power cable length (m)
3.0
Maximum power consumption (W)
Dimensions (mm) (W×D×H)
Maximum weight (kg)
67
441×388×44
5.5
133.1
441×430×44
7.0
111
430×600×43.5
13
Ambient noise (dB)
45 or less
55 or less
Temperature/Humidity (°C/%RH)
Temperature condition: operating:0 to 40, storage:0 to 50
Humidity condition:operating:15 to 85, storage:8 to 90
*1)
*2)
*3)
When the network traffic between port1 to 24, 51, 52 and port25 to 50 exceeds 24Gbps, transfer speeds underrun
Wire speed.
100BASE-FX, 1000BASE-SX, 1000BASE-LX, 1000BASE-ZX, 1000BASE-BX-D, 1000BASE-BX-U SFP SFP
modules are available.
10GBASE-SR, 10GBASE-LR SFP+ modules are available.
Hardware Specifications
24
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 1 Features and Functions
1.1.2 Option
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
SFP Module
XG0224 / XG0448
Available Model
100BASE-FX
1000BASE-SX
1000BASE-LX
1000BASE-ZX
1000BASE-BX-D
1000BASE-BX-U
item
Vendor PN
specification
FTLF8519P2BNL
HFBR-5710L
AGILENT
HFCT-5710L
SCP6P44-F7-BMH
Vendor Name
AGILENT
FINISAR
SUMITOMO ELECTRIC
TECHNOLOGIES
TECHNOLOGIES
Interface
specifications
IEEE802.3z
(1000BASE-SX Interface)
IEEE802.3z
(1000BASE-LX Interface)
Baud rate (bps)
connector
1000M
LC connector
stressed receiver
sensitivity
-17dBm or more
-20dBm or more
-19.5dBm or more
cable length
(maximum)
500m (MMF:50µm),
300m (MMF:62.5µm)
550m (MMF:50µm,
62.5µm),
550m (MMF:50µm,
62.5µm),
5km (SMF:10µm)
10km (SMF:10µm)
(*3)
CLASS 1 LASER
PRODUCT
EN60825-1:1994+A11,
EN60825-2:1994+A1
EN60825-
1:1994+A11+A2,
EN60825-2:2004
EN60825-
1:1994+A1+A2
IEC60825-1:2001
specifications
item
Vendor PN
specification
SCP6P94-F7-BMH
SBP6F54-F1-BN-49
SBP6F54-F1-BT-31
HFBR-57E0P
Vendor Name
ABAGO
TECHNOLOGIES
SUMITOMO ELECTRIC
SUMITOMO ELECTRIC
SUMITOMO ELECTRI
Interface
specifications
–
IEEE802.3ah
(1000BASE-BX-D
Interface)
IEEE802.3ah
(1000BASE-BX-U
Interface)
IEEE802.3u
(100BASE-FX
Interface)
(1000BASE-ZX
Interface)
Baud rate (bps)
connector
1000M
100M
LC connector
stressed receiver
sensitivity
-24dBm or more
-21dBm or more
-31dBm or more
cable length
(maximum)
(*3)
70km (SMF:10µm)
20km (SMF:10µm)
2km (MMF:50µm)
CLASS 1 LASER
PRODUCT
IEC60825-1:2001
EN60825-
1:1994+A1+A2
specifications
*1)
Please make sure to use 1000BASE-BX-D SFP module and 1000BASE-BX-U SFP module in pairs.
Hardware Specifications
25
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 1 Features and Functions
*2)
*3)
Applicable to XG0224 only.
Cable length (maximum) is under the condition that the stressed receiver sensitivity satisfy the permissible level.
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
SFP+ Module
XG0448 / XG2600
Available Model
10GBASE-SR / LR
item
Vendor PN
specification
FTLX8571D3BCL
FTLX1471D3BCL
FINISAR
Vendor Name
Interface
FINISAR
specifications
Baud rate (bps)
connector
IEEE802.3ae (10GBASE-SR)
IEEE802.3ae (10GBASE-LR)
10G
LC connector
stressed receiver
sensitivity
-7.5dBm or more
-10.3dBm or more
cable length (maximum)
(*)
300m (MMF:50µm)
10km (SMF:10µm)
CLASS 1 LASER
EN60825-1:1994+A1+A2, EN60825-2:2004
PRODUCT specifications
*) Cable length (maximum) is under the condition that the stressed receiver sensitivity satisfy the permissible level.
Precautions
Cable length is as follows depending on the specifications of optical fiber cables.
Type
Core / Clad diameter
Minimum transmission band
160MHz/km
cable length (maximum) (m)
MMF
62.5/125µm
26
200MHz/km
33
50/125µm
400MHz/km
66
500MHz/km
82
2000MHz/km
300
Please use the most appropriate cable according to the environment of the installed place.
Hardware Specifications
26
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 1 Features and Functions
SFP+ Expansion Card
XG0224 / XG0448
Available Model
item
Type name
specification
SJ10GSFPZ
Interface (ETHER)
specifications
number of ports
Baud rate (bps)
connector
IEEE802.3ae (10GBASE-R Interface)
2
10G
SFP connector
CX4 Expansion Card
XG0224 / XG0448
Available Model
item
Type name
specification
SJ10GCX4Z
Interface (ETHER)
specifications
number of ports
Baud rate (bps)
connector
IEEE802.3ak (10GBASE-CX4 Interface)
2
10G
16pin, CX4connector
cable length (maximum) 15
(m)
Compact Flash Card
XG0224
Available Model
item
specification
Capacity (MBytes)
256
Power Cable (100V)
All models
Available Model
item
specification
cable length (m)
3
Hardware Specifications
27
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 1 Features and Functions
1.1.3 10/100/1000BASE-T Port Specifications
All models
Available Model
1
8
connector is RJ45 8 pin
•
XG0224 / XG0448
–: Not supported
Signal name
(XG0224: 1 to 24 port)
(XG0448: 1 to 48 port)
Pin numbering
10/100BASE-TX
1000BASE-T
MDI
MDI
TD+
TD-
RD+
–
MDI-X
RD+
RD-
TD+
–
MDI-X
TP1+
TP1-
TP0+
TP3+
TP3-
TP0-
TP2+
TP2-
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TP0+
TP0-
TP1+
TP2+
TP2-
TP1-
TP3+
TP3-
–
–
RD-
–
TD-
–
–
–
•
XG2600
–: Not supported
Signal name
Pin numbering
10/100BASE-TX
MDI
TD+
TD-
RD+
–
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
–
RD-
–
–
Hardware Specifications
28
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 1 Features and Functions
1.1.4 USB Port Specifications
XG0448 / XG2600
Available Model
1
2
3
4
Pin numbering
Signal name
1
2
3
4
VBUS
D-
D+
GND
1.1.5 Console Port Specifications
All models
Available Model
1
8
connector is RJ45 8 pin
A straight cable is used.
–: Not supported
Pin numbering
Signal name
in / out
Content
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
–
ER
TD
GND
GND
RD
–
–
out
out
–
–
data terminal ready
send data
ground
–
ground
in
–
receive data
–
–
–
–
Hardware Specifications
29
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 1 Features and Functions
1.2 Software Specifications
This section explains the software specifications for the device.
1.2.1 Software Specifications
❍: Supported, –: Not supported
Features
Item
XG0224
XG0448
XG2600
Store and
Forward
Store and
Forward
Forwarding Mode
Selectable
VLAN
Port VLAN
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
Tag VLAN
Protocol VLAN
Link Down Relay
Link aggregation
Static
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
LACP
Back up port
STP
STP
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
MSTP
RSTP
LLDP
LLMNR
QoS
QoS sending algorithm
strict
❍
–
❍
–
❍
❍
–
DRR
WRR
❍
❍
Assign the priority to the queue
CoS
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
IPv4 TOS (ip precedence)
IPv6 TC
(with the use of
ACL)
(with the use of
ACL)
(with the use of
ACL (*1))
❍
❍
(with the use of
ACL)
(with the use of
ACL)
–
❍
❍
❍
IPv4 DSCP
(with the use of
ACL)
(with the use of
ACL)
(with the use of
ACL (*1))
❍
❍
IPv6 DSCP
(with the use of
ACL)
(with the use of
ACL)
–
Software Specifications
30
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 1 Features and Functions
Features
Item
XG0224
XG0448
XG2600
Rewrite the priority
❍
❍
COS (user priority)
(with the use of
ACL)
(with the use of
ACL)
–
❍
❍
❍
IPv4 TOS (ip precedence)
IPv4 DSCP
(with the use of
ACL)
(with the use of
ACL)
(with the use of
ACL (*1))
❍
❍
❍
(with the use of
ACL)
(with the use of
ACL)
(with the use of
ACL (*1))
❍
❍
IPv6 DSCP
(with the use of
ACL)
(with the use of
ACL)
–
Security
IP/MAC filtering
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍ (*1)
❍
Log in password
Application filtering (per application server)
❍
❍
❍
❍
IPv4 filter
(with the use of
ACL)
(with the use of
ACL)
(with the use of
ACL)
❍
❍
IPv6 filter
(with the use of
ACL)
(with the use of
ACL)
–
RADIUS client
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
–
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
–
❍
❍
❍
–
Loop detection
Broadcast/multicast storm control
MAC table flash
Port mirroring
ether L3 watch
Output rate control
Routing
❍
❍
❍
IPv4
Static
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
Multicast
IGMP snoop (v1, v2)
ProxyDNS
DNS server
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
DNS relaying
URL filtering
SNMP Agent (v1, v2c, v3)
Means of configuration
telnet
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
ssh
Serial (CLI)
WWW browser (Web UI)
Software Specifications
31
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 1 Features and Functions
Features
Item
XG0224
XG0448
XG2600
Logging
System logging
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
–
❍
❍
❍
❍
–
❍
❍
❍
❍
–
Error logging
Automated time adjustment
Scheduling
Compact flash
USB memory
❍
❍
*1) For the packets which applied MAC/IP filter, QoS function with the use of ACL become void.
1.2.2 Initial Values
–: Not supported
Features
Item
XG0224
XG0448
XG2600
Port information
ETHER port
Manage
1-20
–
21-24
25-26
–
1-44
–
45-48
49-52
–
1-26
ment port
Copper/Fiber
10/
Auto-
detect
Auto-
detect
10Gbps 100Mbps
(Fixed)
(Auto-
detect)
Full/half duplex
Full-
duplex
(Fixed)
Auto-
Auto-detect
–
–
Auto-detect
–
–
detect
MDI/MDI-X
Flow control
MDI
Auto-detect
Auto-detect
–
(Fixed)
tx: OFF
(Fixed)
rx: ON
(Fixed)
tx: OFF, rx: ON
VLAN
VID 1 (no tag)
–
Protocol VLAN
Predefined protocol
Link aggregation
Load balancing algorithm
Back up port
IPv4, IPv6, FNA
tx MAC address XOR rx MAC address
Master ports preferred
Port selection scheme
STP information
STP operating mode
LLDP
STP used
Disabled
Disabled
Used
LLMNR
Enabled (lan 0,vlan1)
Disabled
Disabled Enabled
Loop detection
Broadcast/Multicast storm control
Egress Rate Control
IGMP snoop
Disabled
–
Disabled
Disabled
Software Specifications
32
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 1 Features and Functions
Features
XG0448
Item
XG0224
XG2600
IP interface
oob Interface
(Management
port):enable IPv6,
enable LLMNR
lan0 Interface:enable IPv6, enable LLMNR
Disabled
RADIUS client
Password information
User name
admin
None
Password
ACL information
None
ProxyDNS information
SNMP
None
Disabled
5 min.
telnet/SSH auto logoff
Console auto logoff
Web browser auto logoff
System log information
Sending to the Server
Facility
8 hour
10min (Fixed)
Disabled
23 (local7)
Priority
error, warn, info
Security
proxydns
Automatically current time Set
Schedule information
Host database information
Compact flash dump
USB memory dump
Disabled
None
None
Disabled
–
–
Disabled
–
Software Specifications
33
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 1 Features and Functions
1.2.3 System Maximum Values
–: Not supported
Features
Item
XG0224
XG0448
XG2600
Bridge information
# of blocks registered (*1)
# of static blocks registered
VLAN definition
16000
32000
400
16000
# of VLANs (*2)
4094
8
# of Protocol VLAN
User defined Protocol VLAN
Link aggregation
unlimited
16 VLAN
# of member ports
# of groups
8
10
10
13
13
26
26
Back up ports
# of groups
13
STP information
# of MSTP instances
# of neighbor LLDP device information (*3)
MAC filters
16
26+364
52+728
26+364
128 (per device)
(*4)
64 (per device)
(*8)
IPv4
IPv6
128 (per device)
(*5)
–
Rewrite the priority
IPv4
COS (user priority)
128 (per device)
(*6)
–
IPv4 TOS (ip precedence)
IPv4 DSCP
128 (per device)
(*6)
64 (per device)
(*8)
128 (per device)
(*6)
64 (per device)
(*8)
Assign the priority to the queue
128 (per device)
(*6)
64 (per device)
(*8)
IPv6
IPv6 DSCP
128 (per device)
(*7)
–
–
Assign the priority to the queue
128 (per device)
(*7)
MAC table Flushing
# of address group
4
–
–
# of VLAN for every address group
IGMP snoop
50
# of multicast group addresses registered
Port mirroring
200
1
2000
Target port
tx: 1, rx: 1 (*9)
Software Specifications
34
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 1 Features and Functions
Features
Item
XG0224
XG0448
XG2600
# of ARPs registered
8000
static
200
100
100
–
# of IPv4 interfaces
# of IPv6 interfaces
RA information (IPv6)
# of interface receiving RA
100 (*10)
100 (*10)
2
4
# of Default Router for every interface
# of IPv6 prefix for every interface
# of Neighbor Cache entry
Routing table (IPv4)
4
8000
# of routes registered
200
200
# of static routes registered
Routing table (IPv6)
# of routes registered
200
1
# of RA routes registered
# of static routes registered
IP filtering information
200
IPv4
128 (per device)
(*4)
64 (per device)
(*8)
IPv6
128 (per device)
(*5)
–
DSCP rewrite information
IPv4
128 (per device)
(*6)
64 (per device)
(*8)
IPv6
128 (per device)
(*7)
–
# of ACL definitions
800
300
# of host database definitions
AAA information
100
# of groups
10
1000
4
# of defined authenticated users
# of defined RADIUS servers
ProxyDNS
50
SNMP information
# of max. SNMP managers registered
# of simultaneously connected telnet/ssh/WWW browser clients (*11)
System logging
8
8
# of displayed system log records
Max. # of system log servers registered
Automated time adjustment
Max. # of SNTP servers registered
# of schedules defined
1024 or more
3
4
20
30
Application filtering information (per application server)
*1) Includes own entries of the device and static entries.
*2) Includes system use of VLANs (number of ether ports + 1).
Software Specifications
35
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 1 Features and Functions
*3) First, the maximum number of neighbor LLDP device information is 15 times of the number of total ports including
1G and 10G. (XG0224: 390, XG0448: 780, XG2600: 390)
Second, each port including 1G and 10G must have at least one LLDP information. (XG0224: 26, XG0448: 52,
XG2600: 26)
The remaining number of neighbor LLDP device information can be distributed to any ports. (XG0224: 364,
XG0448: 728, XG2600: 364)
*4) Total number of MAC filter (IPv4) and IPv4 filter definitions.
*5) Total number of MAC filter (IPv6) and IPv6 filter definitions.
*6) Total number of Rewrite the priority (IPv4) and IPv4 DSCP rewrite definitions.
*7) Total number of Rewrite the priority (IPv6) and IPv6 DSCP rewrite definitions.
*8) The total number of MAC filter, IPv4 filter, MAC QoS and IPv4 DSCP rewrite definitions may be reduced as the
number of ACL rules increase.
*9) Same port can't be used as a target port for tx and for rx.
*10) Includes Management Port Interface (oob).
*11) 4 sessions for Telnet, 1session fot WWW (http), 1session for console, 1session for ftp, 1session for ssh (sftp).
Software Specifications
36
Chapter 2
Using the CLI
This chapter describes how to use the command line interface (CLI) to operate the device.
2.1 Overview of the CLI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
2.1.1 Operating Environment for the CLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
2.1.2 Command Modes and Mode Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
2.2 Using the CLI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
2.2.1 Using the Shell Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
2.2.2 Error Messages Common to All Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
2.2.3 Characters that can be entered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 2 Using the CLI
2.1 Overview of the CLI
This section describes how to use the command line interface (CLI) for the XG Series.
2.1.1 Operating Environment for the CLI
There are two ways to access the device to run commands.
•
Serial connection
Connect to the serial port of the device using RS232C cable via RJ45conversion cable.
The available terminal emulation type is VT100.
When initially connecting a terminal to the device, configure the serial port on the client side as shown below.
Item
Setting value
Baud rate
9600 bps
8 bit
Character size
Parity
None
1 bit
Stop bits
Flow control
Emulation
None
VT100
ASCII
Character set
Line feed code
Transmission: CR (carriage return) only
Reception: LF is added
•
Remote connection via LAN port
Connect a terminal or host computer using a telnet client to the management LAN port of the device TCP port of 23
Is used for the default telnet connection
The following tables list the factory defaults.
Management-LAN [XG2600] and LAN Interface initial settings
Item
Setting value
IP address
None (must be set before using the LAN interface)
None (must be set before using the LAN interface)
Subnet address
Telnet server initial settings
Item
Use telnet
Setting value
Enable
Port number
Emulation
23 (TCP)
VT100/VT200/xterm
Delete
BackSpace key
Character set
ASCII
To use the remote connection via the management-LAN port, use the "oob ip" command to configure the management-
LAN port for the device as below. [XG2600]
XG2600(config)# oob ip 192.168.1.1/24 3
XG2600(config)# commit
XG2600(config)# save
To use the remote connection via the LAN port 1, use the "lan ip" command to configure the management-LAN port
Overview of the CLI
38
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 2 Using the CLI
for the device as below.
XG2600(config)# ether 1 vlan untag 1
XG2600(config)# lan 0 vlan 1
XG2600(config)# lan 0 ip 192.168.1.1/24 3
XG2600(config)# commit
XG2600(config)# save
A VT100, VT200, or xterm can be used as a terminal.
2.1.2 Command Modes and Mode Switching
The following table shows a hierarchy of command modes and mode switching.
2.1.2.1 Command Operation Procedure
The flow of system operation via command execution is as follows:
1) Login to the device.
2) Run an operation command to manage system operations.
3) Run a configure command to move to configuration mode.
4) Run a configuration command to set candidate configuration (candidate-config).
5) Run a commit command to apply the candidate configuration as a running configuration (running-config).
6) Run a save command to save the candidate configuration as a startup configuration (startup-config).
7) Run an exit or similar command to return to operation mode.
8) Repeat steps 2) through 7)
9) Run an exit command to log out.
Reference
Login
user name
Operation mode
Configuration mode
configure
user
admin / su
exit / !
User
class
Admin
class
Admin
class
exit
exit
exit / ! / end / quit
admin
Operation command
Operation command
Configuration command
commit
load
Running configuration
(running-config)
Candidate configuration
(candidate-config)
save
load
Startup configuration
(startup-config)
reset / Reconnect power
Overview of the CLI
39
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 2 Using the CLI
Login to the device
When you connect to the device via a console port, telnet, or ssh connection (*1), a login prompt like the following one
appears:
Login:
Password:
Enter user name (*1)
Enter password.
<WARNING> weak admin’s password:set the password (*2)
Commands can be run. (*3)
#
By entering the user name and password, you can run commands.
Only the administrator can log into the system for the first time. For the first time, enter "admin" for the user name, and
press ENTER for the password.
*1) For ssh connections, "Login:" does not appear. Specify the user name at the ssh client.
*2) This message warns you that system security is weak because the password is not set. This message will not appear
after you set a password with 8 or more alphanumeric characters and symbols.
*3) The model name is also shown in the prompt by default. When a prompt character string is configured, the configured
prompt is displayed.
User name and password
The user name and password are different for the administrator and general users.
•
User name
The username for the administrator is "admin" and the user name for the general user is "user" (fixed user names).
By using a password aaa command and specifying use of AAA user information (aaa user id command) or RADIUS
server user information as the login user information, you can add user names as an administrator or general user.
•
Password
No password is configured by default. Be sure to configure the password when you log into the system for the first
time. Use the password admin set command to configure the administrator password and the password user set
command to configure the general user password. When configuring password aaa command settings, set the
administrator and user passwords in the AAA user information stored in the system (aaa user password command) or in
the user information for the RADIUS server.
Reference
Overview of the CLI
40
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 2 Using the CLI
Privilege classes (admin class and user class)
Two privilege classes are available; admin class (login as admin) and user class (login as user).
•
admin class
All commands can be run.
However, admin commands and su commands cannot be run because it is not necessary to run them in admin class.
•
user class
Only a portion of operation commands can be run. Configuration commands cannot be run. You can run an admin
command to transfer to admin class.
If a password aaa command has been used to specify use of the AAA user information (aaa user id command) or RADIUS
server user information as the login user information, the user name privilege class is determined as follows:
•
When using RADIUS server
Determined according to the Filter-ID attribute information configured in the RADIUS server.
RADIUS attribute (number)
Filter-ID (11)
Setting
: ”administrator”
: ”user”
For admin class
For user class
•
When using user information on the device
Determined according to aaa user user-role command settings.
Use modes (operation mode and configuration mode)
Two use modes are available; operation mode and configuration mode.
•
Operation mode
Only operation commands can be run.
•
Configuration mode
Both configuration commands and operation commands can be run.
The use mode immediately after logging into the system is operation mode.
The table below displays user names and corresponding passwords, as well as privilege class and use mode after login.
Login user
name
Default password
information
Password configuration
command
Login privilege
class
Login use mode
admin
None
password admin set
admin class
Operation mode
(blank) (Hit ENTER)
user
Not set
password user set
user class
Operation mode
(login not possible [*])
*) To log into the system as user, configure password information for the user.
Overview of the CLI
41
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 2 Using the CLI
2.1.2.2 Executable commands
Command execution is restricted according to the following conditions:
•
•
•
Command type
Privilege class
Use mode
Reference
Command type (operation commands and configuration commands)
Two command types are available; operation commands and configuration commands.
Since the use mode after logging into the system is operation mode, you can only run operation commands.
By running a configure command, the use mode changes to configuration mode and you will be able to run configuration
commands as well as operation commands.
However, since you cannot run a configure command in user class, run an admin command to change to admin class before
running the configure command.
The following table lists command types and functions.
Command type
Command function
Operation command
Display and manipulate device status, operation status, and
network status, display or delete stored information, etc.
Configuration command
Operating information settings and network configuration,
etc.
The following table lists commands and operations.
Command
Operation
Configuration command
commit command
Sets to candidate configuration (candidate-config).
These are basically not reflected in running operations; however, as in password
information configuration, there are commands to reflect settings immediately.
The candidate configuration is reflected in the running configuration (running-
config) and active operations change.
Reference
Reference
save command
Saves candidate configuration to startup configuration (startup-config).
Applies candidate configuration to the running configuration.
Run reset command or reconnect
power
show candidate-config command
show running-config command
show startup-config command
delete command
Displays candidate configuration settings.
Displays active configuration settings.
Displays startup configuration settings.
Deletes configuration settings.
Precautions
If you run a reset command or reconnect power without first running a save command, the running configuration and
candidate configuration will return to the state they were in before running a configuration command.
Overview of the CLI
42
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 2 Using the CLI
2.2 Using the CLI
2.2.1 Using the Shell Function
The shell function supports the following features in order to assist command entry:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The following describes each function.
2.2.1.1 Command execution function
The command execution function allows you to enter a command string and hit ENTER or RETURN to run the command.
You can enter ASCII characters, EUC kanji, or Shift JIS kanji characters for the command string.
To enter a kanji character, specify its code using a terminal charset command.
The maximum length of a command string is 1,022 characters (including the prompt string) for ASCII characters. A single
kanji character is equivalent to two ASCII characters.
2.2.1.2 Entry editing function
The entry editing function allows you to move the cursor, insert or delete characters, and delete, cut, and paste words
within an entered command string.
Refer to "2.2.1.10 List of shell key bindings" (pg.52) for keys used with the entry editing function.
The entry editing function uses the VT100 terminal escape sequence to move the cursor and perform other functions.
When cursor movement or other functions do not work correctly, check that the terminal software being used supports
VT100 terminal emulation. In addition, if the screen display is not set to 24 lines and 80 columns, use the terminal window
command to configure the screen correctly.
Reference
Using the CLI
43
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 2 Using the CLI
2.2.1.3 Command name autocomplete function
The command name autocomplete function allows you to display a list of command names without entering anything by
pressing the TAB key or CTRL + I. In addition, if you press the TAB key or CTRL + I after entering part of a command,
the command string will be automatically completed. Automatically completed character strings differ depending on
conditions.
The following table details autocomplete operations for entered characters.
Command name beginning with entered characters
When nothing is entered
Operation
A list of all command names is displayed.
When a single command applies
The applicable command name is automatically completed
along with a single blank character.
When multiple commands apply, with the same string
following the entered characters
The identical character string portion is completed.
A list of possible commands is displayed.
Nothing is displayed.
When multiple commands apply, with different strings
following the entered characters
When no command applies
When you use autocomplete without entering anything, a list of commands with the command-type lines shown below is
displayed.
•
•
•
•
--Exec commands-
Operation commands and alias commands
-- Exec commands (config mode)--
Operation commands and aliases for configuration mode
--Config commands--
Configuration commands
--Config commands (current directory)--
Configuration command arguments (when the configuration hierarchy function is enabled and you are not in the top
hierarchy)
The command name autocomplete function works differently according to the number of times you hit the TAB key or
CTRL + I.
The table below lists the autocomplete operation for each number of times the TAB key or CTRL + I are hit.
Note that descriptions are displayed in Japanese (kanji characters). If they are not displayed correctly, use a terminal
charset command to specify a kanji character code which is displayed correctly.
Number of times the TAB
Operation
key or CTRL + I are hit
One time
A list of command names is displayed or the entered command string is automatically
completed.
Two times
Command and argument names corresponding to the use mode and their descriptions are
displayed.
In operation mode, the operation command names and descriptions, and the names of
commands registered using an alias command as well as their registration content are
displayed.
In configuration mode when the configuration hierarchy function is disabled, the
configuration command names and their descriptions are displayed.
In configuration mode, when the configuration hierarchy function is enabled and you are at
the top hierarchy level, the configuration command names and descriptions are displayed.
In configuration mode, when the configuration hierarchy function is enabled and you are not
at the top hierarchy level, the command argument names available for the current hierarchy
level and their descriptions are displayed.
Using the CLI
44
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 2 Using the CLI
Number of times the TAB
key or CTRL + I are hit
Operation
Three times
Command forms are displayed.
In operation mode, simplified command forms are displayed.
In configuration mode, when the configuration hierarchy function is disabled, simplified
command forms are displayed.
In configuration mode, when the configuration hierarchy function is enabled and you are at
the top hierarchy level, simplified command forms are displayed.
In configuration mode, when the configuration hierarchy function is enabled and you are not
at the top hierarchy, command forms for the current hierarchy level and simplified command
forms are displayed.
Four times
Returns to the operation for hitting the TAB key or CTRL + I one time.
Using the CLI
45
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 2 Using the CLI
2.2.1.4 Command argument autocomplete function
While entering configuration command arguments, the command argument autocomplete function allows you to display a
list of arguments and candidate arguments without entering anything by pressing the TAB key or CTRL + I. In addition, if
you press the TAB key or CTRL + I after entering part of an argument, the remaining character string will be automatically
completed.
The argument autocomplete function works differently according to the number of times you hit the TAB key or CTRL + I.
The table below lists the autocomplete operation for each number of times the TAB key or CTRL + I are hit.
Note that descriptions are displayed in Japanese (kanji characters). If they are not displayed correctly, use a terminal
charset command to specify a kanji character code which is displayed correctly.
Number of times the TAB
Operation
key or CTRL + I are hit
One time
A list of arguments and argument candidates is displayed or the entered argument
string is autocompleted.
This works in the same way as command name autocomplete.
Descriptions of arguments and argument candidates are displayed.
The command syntax following the current argument is displayed.
Returns to the operation for hitting the TAB key or CTRL + I one time.
Two times
Three times
Four times
For some command arguments, you can specify multiple arguments separated by a comma (,), or specify a range of values
delimited by a hyphen (-). The argument autocomplete function assumes that all arguments allow specifying multiple arguments
and value range, and if you autocomplete an argument after entering "," or "-", all the argument candidates will be given.
Note
2.2.1.5 Abbreviated command entry function
The abbreviated command entry function allows you to run a command with its name and argument entered only partway.
For each command name and command argument entered, the command name autocomplete and command argument
autocomplete are performed and the command is executed. When there are multiple candidates, enter characters until
candidates are narrowed to one, and then execute the command. If you execute the command while there are still multiple
candidates, the command is not autocompleted and an error occurs.
2.2.1.6 Command alias function
The command alias function allows you to register a command name and its argument(s) as a single command.
Use the alias command to register, delete, and display command aliases.
Note that commands registered with a command alias cannot be autocompleted by the abbreviated command entry
function, and you must enter the complete command name and arguments when registering them.When a command alias is
registered correctly, it will be included for command name and argument autocomplete.
Using the CLI
46
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 2 Using the CLI
2.2.1.7 Configuration hierarchy function
The configuration hierarchy function interprets common portions of executed configuration command names and
arguments as a hierarchy level, and allows you to move between hierarchy levels.
When you execute a configuration command and the command completes successfully, in general the portion from the
command name to the argument two arguments before an argument specifying a variable value becomes a hierarchy level.
This may differ depending on the command.
Ex.)
(argument with variable value)
(configure)# lan 0 ip address 192.168.0.1/24 3
(Move hierarchy level to the argument two before the variable value argument)
(configure-lan-0-ip)#
Even in cases where an error occurs because the number of arguments is less than required, the configuration hierarchy
function assumes the entered command name and arguments to be a hierarchy level. Depending on the command, even if
arguments are incorrect the configuration hierarchy function may judge that there are not enough arguments and interpret
the entry as a hierarchy level. The portion assumed to be a hierarchy level is displayed at the command prompt. However,
if you have used a terminal prompt command to change the entry prompt string to exclude the configuration hierarchy, it is
not displayed.
After moving to a hierarchy level, you can only enter command arguments following the current level to execute the
command. When the number of arguments is still not enough, a further hierarchy level is displayed. When you have
omitted an optional argument, without moving to another hierarchy level the command is executed correctly, following
which you will move to a higher hierarchy level. Be sure to enter optional arguments as a group. To execute a command
other than at the hierarchy level you have moved to, enter it beginning with the command name.
However, in a hierarchy level for an argument which allows for arbitrary character strings, any strings other than the
commands below will be entered as configuration command arguments. To enter one of the following commands as an
argument for a configuration command, move to a higher level, and then enter so that strings matching these commands
are the second argument or following.
exit, !, end, quit, up, top, delete, show, clear, commit, discard, save, load, reset,
Comment line beginning with #
Ex.)
(configure)# acl 0 ip
(configure-acl-0-ip)# any
(Moves to another level because there are not enough arguments.)
(Moves to another level because there are not enough arguments.)
(configure-acl-0-ip-any)# any (Moves to higher level because command can complete successfully
without specifying an optional argument.)
(configure-acl-0)#
If you run the show command with no arguments after moving hierarchy levels, a list of configuration commands for that
level and following is displayed.
You can move to a higher hierarchy level or to the top level using an up command or top command respectively.
The configuration hierarchy function is disabled by default. Even when it has been enabled, this function is disabled after
you log out of the system. In this case, no message is displayed to indicate that the function has been disabled.
The following explains how to enable and disable the configuration hierarchy function.
•
To enable the configuration hierarchy function: Press CTRL + O in configuration mode.
The following message is displayed and the configuration hierarchy function is enabled. Information which has been
partially entered will not be discarded.
<NOTICE> The configuration directory mode is enabled. To disable, type Ctrl+G.
Using the CLI
47
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 2 Using the CLI
•
To disable the configuration hierarchy function: Press CTRL + G.
The following message is displayed and the configuration hierarchy function is disabled. Information which has been
partially entered will be discarded.
<NOTICE> The configuration directory mode is disabled.
A command execution example is shown below.
z Command
# configure
(config)# lan 0 ip address 192.168.1.1/24 3
(config-lan-0-ip)#
(config-lan-0-ip)# show
address 192.168.1.1/24 3
service server
(Change to configuration mode.)
(Run configuration command.)
(Hierarchy level is displayed at the command prompt.)
(Display configuration following the current level.)
info address 192.168.1.100/24 32
(config-lan-0-ip)# save
(config-lan-0-ip)# top
(config)#
(Enter the command name and run the command.)
(Move to the top level.)
2.2.1.8 Time of command execution display function
The time of command execution display function allows you to display the time when the execution of a command starts.
This function is useful when a command execution log is being recorded during operations.
To enable the time of command execution display function, use the terminal timestamp command.
Although you can check command execution time with the show logging command, execution time is only displayed for
commands recorded in the command execution history. You can also use the terminal prompt command to display the date
and time in the prompt string However, this is not the time when a command was executed but the time when the prompt
was displayed.
2.2.1.9 Command history function
The command history function allows you to record command execution history and re-execute commands using this
history. You can also redisplay commands and replace commands in the history.
You can set the number of lines in the command history using a terminal logging command.
You can also press CTRL + P and CTRL + N to sequentially display the command history items, and re-execute or re-edit and
execute a displayed command.
Note
Reference
The following explains how to re-execute and redisplay commands.
You can use the history specifier and display specifier together with command character string replacement.
Using the CLI
48
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 2 Using the CLI
Re-executing commands
You can enter a history specifier at the beginning of the command string to re-execute the command. The command will be
executed after the command string for re-execution is displayed. In addition, command history and history numbers can be
viewed with the history command. Note that you can enter the history specifier only once at the beginning of the command
line. Any history specifiers entered thereafter will be treated as normal characters.
History specifier
!!
! history number
Operation
Re-execute the last command run.
Re-execute the command with the specified history number.
!-number in history Re-execute the command run the specified number of commands before in the history.
Ex.) !-3 (The third command from the newest in the history is re-executed.)
! string
The last run command beginning with the specified string is re-executed.
Ex.) !net (The last run command beginning with "net" is re-executed.)
When you enter a string following the history specifier, it will be added to end of the command string invoked from the
history.
The following shows an example.
z Command
# show ip route
(The execution results of show ip route are displayed.)
# !! all
show ip route all
(Add "all" to the last command and execute it.)
(Display the command string to re-execute.)
(The execution results of show ip route all are displayed.)
Redisplaying commands
You can redisplay a previously run command by entering a display specifier (:p) following a history specifier. Note that the
displayed command is not re-executed yet.
Since the displayed command string is recorded as a new command history item, you can re-execute it by entering !! after
checking the command string.
Display specifier
:p
Operation
Redisplays a command.
Ex.) !net:p (The last run command beginning with "net" is redisplayed.)
When you enter a string following the display specifier, it will be added to end of the command string invoked from the
history.
A command execution example is shown below.
z Command
# show ip route
(The execution results of show ip route are displayed.)
# !!:p all
show ip route al
(Add "all" to the last command executed and display it.)
(Display the command string.)
# !!
(Re-execute the previous command.)
show ip route all
(Display the command string to re-execute.)
(The execution results of show ip route all are displayed.)
Using the CLI
49
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 2 Using the CLI
Replacing the last command string
By entering a replacement specifier (^), replacement target string, and replacement string at the beginning of a command
string, you can re-execute the last command with the specified string replaced with a new string.
If no replacement string is specified, the target string will be deleted.
The table below lists specifiers and operations. (A: replacement target string, B: replacement string, C: additional string)
Command
^A^B^
Operation
Replace A with B and execute the command string.
^A^B^:p
^A^B^C
^A^B^:pC
^A^^
Replace A with B and display the command string.
Replace A with B, add C to the command string, and execute it.
Replace A with B, add C to the command string, and display it.
Delete A and execute the command string.
^A^^:p
Delete A and display the command string.
^A^^C
Delete A, add C to the command string, and execute it.
Delete A, add C to the command string, and display it.
^A^^:pC
A command execution example is shown below.
z Command
# show running-config lan 0 ip address
(Display the IP address for lan 0.)
# ^addr^rout^:p
(Replace addr with rout and display the command string.)
show running-config lan 0 ip routess
# ^ess^e^
show running-config lan 0 ip route
(replace ess with e and execute the command string.)
(Display the command and execute it.)
(Display the static route information for lan 0.)
Using the CLI
50
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 2 Using the CLI
Replacing command strings
By entering a single-replacement specifier (:s) or all-replacement specifier (:gs) following a history specifier and
replacement specifier, you can replace the target string and re-execute the command string.
A single-replacement specifier replaces the first matching string only, while an all-replacement specifier replaces all
matching strings.
The replacement target string and replacement string are specified as with string replacement for the preceding command;
however, arbitrary characters (@, #, %, &, ~, =, _, etc.) may be used as delimiters. You can successively enter a single-
replacement specifier, all-replacement specifier, and display specifier.
The table below lists specifiers and operations. This example uses "/" as a delimiter.
(A: replacement target string, B: replacement string, C: additional string)
Command
:s/A/B/
Operation
Replace only the first instance of A with B and execute the command string.
Replace only the first instance of A with B and display the command string.
Replace only the first instance of A with B, add C to the command string, and execute it.
Replace only the first instance of A with B, add C to the command string, and display it.
Replace all instances of A with B and execute the command string.
Replace all instances of A with B and display the command string.
Replace all instances of A with B, add C to the command string, and execute it.
Replace all instances of A with B, add C to the command string, and display it.
Delete only the first instance of A and execute the command string.
Delete only the first instance of A and display the command string.
Delete only the first instance of A, add C to the command string, and execute it.
Delete only the first instance of A, add C to the command string, and display it.
Delete all instances of A and execute the command string.
:ps/A/B/
:s/A/B/C
:ps/A/B/C
:gs/A/B/
:pgs/A/B/
:gs/A/B/C
:pgs/A/B/C
:s/A//
:ps/A//
:s/A//C
:ps/A//C
:gs/A//
:pgs/A//
Delete all instances of A and display the command string.
:gs/A//C
Delete all instances of A, add C to the command string, and execute it.
Delete all instances of A, add C to the command string, and display it.
:pgs/A//C
:s/A1/B1/:gs/A2/B2/:p
Replace only the first instance of A1 with B1, replace all instances of A2 with B2, and display the
command string.
A command execution example is shown below.
z Command
# lan 0 ip address 192.168.0.1/24 3
# !!:gs/0/1/:p
(Replace all instances of 0 with 1 and display the command string.)
lan 1 ip address 192.168.1.1/24 3
# !!
(Re-execute the last command to run.)
lan 1 ip address 192.168.1.1/24 3
When entering a command with the command history function, you can omit the last delimiter (/, ^, etc.) at the end of the
command line. However, when the last delimiter is omitted, you cannot specify a display specifier (:p), additional history
specifier, or additional string.
Note
Using the CLI
51
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 2 Using the CLI
2.2.1.10 List of shell key bindings
The following table shows the key bindings for using the shell.
Key combination
(note)
Single
key
Operation
Ctrl+A
Moves the cursor to the top.
Ctrl+B
Ctrl+C
Ctrl+D
← (Note)
Moves the cursor to the left by one character.
Interrupts input.
Deletes one character if any are input.
Logs off if there are no characters entered.
Ctrl+E
Ctrl+F
Ctrl+G
Ctrl+H
Moves the cursor to the end.
→ (Note)
Moves the cursor to the right by one character.
Disables the configuration hierarchy function.
BS
BACKSPACE
Moves the cursor one character to the left deleting one character.
Ctrl+I
Tab
Autocomplete/displays autocomplete candidate list/displays argument descriptions/
displays argument syntax
Ctrl+J
Return
Input complete
Ctrl+K
Cuts from the cursor position to the end.
Updates the screen.
Ctrl+L
Ctrl+M
Ctrl+N
Ctrl+O
Ctrl+P
Input complete
↓ (Note)
Shows the next history item.
Enables the configuration hierarchy function.
Shows the previous history item.
Redisplays input.
↑ (Note)
Ctrl+R
Ctrl+T
Converts one character.
Ctrl+U
Ctrl+W
Ctrl+X
Cuts from the cursor position to the top.
Cuts from the cursor position one word to the left.
Cuts from the cursor position to the top.
Paste
Ctrl+Y
ESC Ctrl+H
ESC Ctrl+I
ESC Ctrl+K
ESC b
ESC f
ESC BS
Cuts from the cursor position one word to the left.
ESC TAB Displays argument description.
Cuts from the cursor position one word to the right.
Moves the cursor to the left by one word.
Moves the cursor to the right by one word.
ESC n
ESC p
ESC <
ESC >
Shows the next history item beginning with the string prior to the cursor position.
Shows the previous history item beginning with the string prior to the cursor position.
Shows the oldest history item.
Shows the newest history item.
Notes)
•
•
•
•
"Ctrl+α" indicates pressing CTRL and α at the same time.
"ESC α" indicates pressing ESC followed by α.
The arrow keys (↑,↓,← ,→ ) do not work properly on the hyper terminal. Use key combinations instead.
When using with terminal software or telnet commands, some key combinations with CTRL may not work. Refer to
the terminal software or telnet command manual to configure the device so that so that key combinations with CTRL
work properly.
Using the CLI
52
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 2 Using the CLI
2.2.2 Error Messages Common to All Commands
The table below lists error messages common to all commands and displayed when autocompleting or executing
commands.
Note that the argument position shown in these error messages indicates the place of the erroneous argument, counted from
the command name as "1."
Common error message
Meaning
<ERROR> Command name: Unknown command
An unknown command.
Cannot be executed in the current use mode.
Cannot be executed with the current privilege class.
<ERROR> Command name: Operation not permitted Execution of this command is not permitted.
<ERROR>: 0: missing argument
The argument specification is insufficient.
The argument specification is excessive.
<ERROR>: 0: too many argument(s)
<ERROR>: Argument position: format error
The argument syntax is not correct.
Unknown command for configuration hierarchy.
<ERROR>: Argument position: value out of range
The argument value is out of the valid range (too small, too large,
too long, etc.).
<ERROR>: Argument position: lack of table
<ERROR>: Argument position: no such table
<ERROR>: Argument position: duplicate value
<ERROR>: Argument position: fail to request
<ERROR>: Argument position: unique password
The number of arguments has reached the defined upper limit.
Specified definition cannot be found.
Already defined.
Could not execute the command.
Not a unique password.
Cannot be changed from the unique format.
<ERROR>: detected HARD ERROR, cannot execute Cannot execute the command due to a hardware error.
Using the CLI
53
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 2 Using the CLI
2.2.3 Characters that can be entered
•
•
•
Any letter (A-Z, a-z) and digit (0-9)
Space (ASCII code: 0x20)
Symbols: !, #, $, %, `, ', (, ), _, -, ~, ^, \, {, }, :, +, ,, ., @, =, [, ], &, *, ;, /, ?, |, >
Command and option separators are recognized as one or more space characters (ASCII code: 0x20).
Don't enclose a parameter in quotes (") but for instructions to use quotes (") to contain a blank space.
The commands are case-sensitive.
Using the CLI
54
Chapter 3
Installation
This chapter describes the installation procedures for the device.
Reference
3.1 Workflow for Initial Setup of the Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
3.1.1 Configure LAN Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
3.1.2 Telnet Connection via the LAN Interface (Optional). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
3.1.3 SNMP Configuration (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 3 Installation
3.1 Workflow for Initial Setup of the Device
This section describes the procedures to setup the device.
1) Prepare a terminal
Prepare a terminal for the initial configuration.
2) "Besic Setting Up"
Connect the device and terminal with an RS232C cable. The band rate setting is 9,600 bps.
To configure the Device basically, carry out the following procedure.
Command
Task
Login:admin
Password:
Login to the device from the serial terminal. The user name is
"admin". The default password is not set.
XG2600# configure
Switch to Configuration mode.
Set the device name (HOST-NAME).
Set time zone.
XG2600(config)# sysname HOST-NAME
XG2600(config)# time zone -0500
XG2600(config)# date YYYY/MM/DD.hh:mm:ss
Set date and time.
XG2600(config)# password admin set
Password:
Set the password for user "admin".
Type password.
Retype password:
Retype password.
XG2600(config)# save
XG2600(config)# reset
Save the configuration.
Reset the device.
3) Turn on the device to start the system.
Turn on the terminal and the device to start the system.
The initial setting of the LAN interface is for only IPv6 link-local address.
To use the following functions, set up the LAN interface:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Telnet connection
SNMP manager connection
System log transmission
Time synchronization using an NTP/SNTP server
Configuration file upload/download
Firmware update
Collection of maintenance information
The initial setting of the Telnet connection via the management LAN interface is disabled.
Enable telnet connection if necessary.
Initially, the SNMP agent configuration is not set.
Set the SNMP configuration as needed.
7) This is the end of the preparation procedure
Proceed with configuring the switch.
Workflow for Initial Setup of the Device
56
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 3 Installation
3.1.1 Configure LAN Interface
The initial setting of the LAN interface is for only IPv6 link-local address.
To use the following functions, configure the LAN interface.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Telnet connection
SNMP manager connection
System log transmission
Time synchronization using an NTP/SNTP server
Configuration file upload/download
Firmware update
Collection of maintenance information
To configure the LAN interface, carry out the following procedure.
Command
Task
Login:admin
Password:
Login to the device from the serial terminal. The user name is
"admin". Type the password for uset "admin".
XG2600# configure
Switch to Configuration mode.
XG2600(config)# oob ip address A.B.C.D/M 3
Set the IP address, subnet, and default gateway of the LAN interface
for management port. (XG2600 only)
XG2600(config)# lan 0 ip address A.B.C.D/M 3
XG2600(config)# lan 0 vlan 1
Set the IP address, subnet, and default gateway of the LAN interface
for VLAN ID 1.
XG2600(config)# proxydns domain 0 any * any
static A.B.C.D
(Optional)
Set up DNS servers.
XG2600(config)# commit
XG2600(config)# save
XG2600(config)# exit
Apply the configuration.
Save the configuration.
Switch to Operation mode.
3.1.2 Telnet Connection via the LAN Interface (Optional)
The "Telnet server function" is initially enabled.
The telnet session timeout period is initially 5 minutes.
To change the telnet session timeout period, carry out the following procedure in "admin" Operation mode.
Command
Task
XG2600# configure
Switch to Configuration mode.
XG2600(config)# telnetinfo autologout 30m
Set the Telnet session timeout period (30 minutes).
If the Telnet session timeout period expires the telne connection is
terminated.
XG2600(config)# commit
XG2600(config)# save
XG2600(config)# exit
Apply the configuration.
Save the configuration.
Switch to Operation mode.
Workflow for Initial Setup of the Device
57
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 3 Installation
3.1.3 SNMP Configuration (Optional)
To operate in conjunction with an SNMP manager, the SNMP agent must be configured.
To configure the SNMP agent, carry out the following procedures in "admin" Operation mode.
Command
Task
XG2600# configure
Switch to Configuration mode.
Enable SNMP function.
XG2600(config)# snmp service on
XG2600(config)# snmp agent contact SYSTEM-
CONTAC
Set the swith's contact (SYSTEM-CONTACT).
XG2600(config)# snmp agent location SYSTEM-
LOCATION
Set the swith's location (SYSTEM-LOCATION).
XG2600(config)# snmp agent address A.B.C.D
Set the SNMP agent address. This setting is also used for the local
address at trap transmission.
Make sure to set it when using the SNMP agent function
XG2600(config)# snmp manager 0 A.B.C.D
COMMUNIT-YNAME v2c disable
Set the IP address (host name) of the SNMP manager, the commu-
nity name, sending SNMPv2 traps, and disabling writing. if the SNMP
trap notification is enabled.
XG2600(config)# commit
XG2600(config)# save
XG2600(config)# exit
Apply the configuration.
Save the configuration.
Switch to Operation mode.
Switch to Configuration mode.
Enable SNMP function.
XG2600# configure
XG2600(config)# snmp service on
Workflow for Initial Setup of the Device
58
Chapter 4
Switch
Functions and
their Configuration
This chapter describes the functions of the device and how to configure them.
Reference
4.1 Basic Switch Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
4.1.1 Switching Mode (XG2600). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
4.1.2 MAC Address Table Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
4.1.3 Jumbo Frame Support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
4.1.4 Flow Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
4.1.5 Storm Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
4.1.6 Egress Rate Control (XG2600 Only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
4.2 Port Mirroring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
4.3 Link Down Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
4.4 Link Aggregation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
4.4.1 Configuring Link Aggregation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
4.4.2 Frame Distribution Methods in Link Aggregation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
4.4.3 The Number of Ports That Require Linkup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
4.4.4 Notes on Link Aggregation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
4.5 Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
4.5.1 Port Roles Based on Spanning Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
4.5.2 Spanning Tree Protocol Port States. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
4.5.3 Configuring Spanning Tree. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
4.6 VLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
4.6.1 Port-Based VLAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
4.6.2 Tag-Based (IEEE802.1Q) VLAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
4.7 Quality of Service (QoS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
4.8 IGMP Snooping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
4.8.1 Registering Group Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
4.8.2 Removing Group Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
4.8.3 Managing Group Members. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
4.8.4 IGMP Querier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
4.8.5 Configuring IGMP Snooping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
4.9 Network Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
4.9.1 Traffic Statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 4 Switch Functions and their Configuration
4.1 Basic Switch Functions
This section describes the basic switch functions.
4.1.1 Switching Mode (XG2600)
XG2600 provides the following two switching modes.
XG0224 and XG0448 provide store-and-forward switching modes only.
•
•
Store-and-forward switching mode
After the device finishes receiving a frame, it checks the FCS (Frame Check Sequence) and performs a validity check
(on packet size, etc.) before forwarding the frame. If the switch receives a frame with an error frame, it discards it.
Cut-through switching mode
The device transmits the frame to the destination as soon as the first 64 bytes of the frame are received with no errors.
Since the device starts transmitting the frame before it receives the entire frame, this mode allows forwarding at low
latency.
To change the switching modes, carry out the following procedures in "admin" Operation mode.
Command
Task
Switch to Configuration mode.
XG2600# configure
XG2600(config)# forwardingmode cut-through
XG2600(config)# forwardingmode store-and-forward
XG2600(config)# commit
Select the (cut-through) for the switching mode.
Select the (store-and-forward) for the switching mode.
Apply the configuration.
XG2600(config)# save
Save the configuration.
XG2600(config)# exit
Switch to Operation mode.
Basic Switch Functions
61
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 4 Switch Functions and their Configuration
4.1.2 MAC Address Table Management
The MAC address table is a database used for managing the association between address information and destination ports.
XG0224 and XG2600 can learn up to 16000 entries of MAC addresses.
XG0448 can learn up to 32000 entries of MAC addresses.
•
Dynamic MAC address learning
The device dynamically learns MAC addresses from received frames. If MAC addresses are not refreshed before the
aging time expires, they will be removed frame MAC address table.
To disable the dynamic learning, carry out the following procedures in "admin" Operation mode.
Command
Task
Switch to Configuration mode.
XG2600# configure
XG2600(config)# mac learning off
XG2600(config)# commit
XG2600(config)# save
Disable the dynamic MAC address learning.
Apply the configuration.
Save the configuration.
XG2600(config)# exit
Switch to Operation mode.
To change aging time period of MAC address learning table, carry out the following procedures in "admin" Operation
mode..
Command
Task
Switch to Configuration mode.
XG2600# configure
XG2600(config)# mac age 1000
XG2600(config)# commit
XG2600(config)# save
Change aging time period of MAC address learning table.
Apply the configuration.
Save the configuration.
XG2600(config)# exit
Switch to Operation mode.
•
Static unicast address
By registering a unicast MAC address with the MAC address table, unicast frames are forwarded to a specified port.
Static unicast addresses are not subject to MAC address removal controlled by the aging function.
To register, change or delete a static unicast address, carry out the following procedures in "admin" Operation mode.
Command
Task
Switch to Configuration mode.
XG2600# configure
XG2600(config)# vlan <vid> forward <count>
<dst_addr> <port>
Register a static unicast address, destination port and vlan with
the MAC address table (or remove them from it).
XG2600(config)# delete vlan <vid> forward
XG2600(config)# commit
Apply the configuration.
Save the configuration.
Switch to Operation mode.
XG2600(config)# save
XG2600(config)# exit
Basic Switch Functions
62
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 4 Switch Functions and their Configuration
4.1.3 Jumbo Frame Support
The device can transmit jumbo frames of up to 9KB (9216 bytes). (XG0224,XG0448)
The device can transmit jumbo frames of up to 16KB (16128 bytes). (XG2600)
4.1.4 Flow Control
Flow control is a function that prevents frame loss when the receive buffer in the switch overflows due to temporary traffic
overload by using a PAUSE frame.
When the device receives a PAUSE frame, it temporarily stops sending frames at the receive port. If the receive buffer
overflows, it is possible to restrict frame transmission from the connected device by sending a PAUSE frame.
For each port, it is possible to select whether or not to send a PAUSE frame. Select the mode depending on whether the
destination responds to a PAUSE frame or not.
To change the flow control mode, carry out the following procedures in "admin" Operation mode.
Command
Task
Switch to Configuration mode.
XG2600# configure
XG2600(config)# ether 1-3 flowctl off on
Set the flow control mode disable send flow control packets and
enable receive flow control packets.
XG2600(config)# commit
XG2600(config)# save
XG2600(config)# exit
Apply the configuration.
Save the configuration.
Switch to Operation mode.
4.1.5 Storm Control
The device discards broadcast/multicast frames when the number of received broadcast frames are over a given threshold
to prevent unnecessary waste of bandwidth due to retained broadcast frames on the network. This function is called "Storm
Control".
For each port, it is possible to configure storm control.
When broadcast/multicast frames are discarded by storm control, system logs are output.
To configure storm control, carry out the following procedures in "admin" Operation mode.
•
XG2600
Command
Task
Switch to Configuration mode.
XG2600# configure
XG2600(config)# ether 1-5 mac storm 7000000k
8000000k discard
Enable storm control, set broadcast threshold 7000000k bps,
multicast threshold 8000000k bps, and set "discard" when
broadcast and multicast traffic exceeds the threshold.
XG2600(config)# commit
XG2600(config)# save
XG2600(config)# exit
Apply the configuration.
Save the configuration.
Switch to Operation mode.
Basic Switch Functions
63
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 4 Switch Functions and their Configuration
•
XG0224/XG0448
Command
Task
XG0224# configure
Switch to Configuration mode.
XG0224(config)# ether 1-5 mac storm 20000000
discard close
Enable storm control, set threshold 20000000 pps, set "discard"
when broadcast traffic exceeds the threshold, set "close" when
multicast traffic exceeds the threshold.
XG0224(config)# commit
XG0224(config)# save
XG0224(config)# exit
Apply the configuration.
Save the configuration.
Switch to Operation mode.
4.1.6 Egress Rate Control (XG2600 Only)
It is possible to set an egress rate-limiting value for each port in approximately 40Mbps increments.
To set an egress rate-limiting value, carry out the following procedures in "admin" Operation mode.
Command
Task
Switch to Configuration mode.
XG2600# configure
XG2600(config)# ether 1-5 ratecontrol 8000m
Specify an egress rate limiting value by 8000M bps for port 1-5.
Basic Switch Functions
64
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 4 Switch Functions and their Configuration
4.2 Port Mirroring
It is possible to monitor the traffic by mirroring the frames sent or received by a port to another port.
Multiple ports may not be mirrored to one port. However, multiple ports may be mirrored.
To configure port mirroring, carry out the following procedure in "admin" Operation mode.
•
XG2600
Command
Task
Switch to Configuration mode.
XG2600# configure
XG2600(config)# ether 10 type mirror 0 1 rx
Configure the port 10 to be destination port and the receive
frames of the source port (port 1) are mirrored.
XG2600(config)# ether 11 type mirror 0 2 tx
Configure the port 11 to be destination port and the send frames
of the source port (port 2) are mirrored.
XG2600(config)# commit
XG2600(config)# save
XG2600(config)# exit
Apply the configuration.
Save the configuration.
Switch to Operation mode.
•
XG0224/XG0448
Command
XG0224# configure
Task
Switch to Configuration mode.
XG0224(config)# ether 10 type mirror 0 1 both
Configure the port 10 to be destination port and the receive/send
frames of the source port (port 1) are mirrored.
XG0224(config)# ether 10 type mirror 10 2 tx
Configure the port 10 to be destination port and the send frames
of the source port (port 2) are mirrored.
XG0224(config)# commit
XG0224(config)# save
XG0224(config)# exit
Apply the configuration.
Save the configuration.
Switch to Operation mode.
Port Mirroring
65
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 4 Switch Functions and their Configuration
4.3 Link Down Relay
Link Down Relay is a function that monitors the status of a specified port link, if a link down detected the device notifies
the device force to link down the relay port.
(1)When Link Down Relay is not used
(1)
(3)
XG
(2)
(4)
XG
Link Up
Link Up
Link Down
(2)When Link Down Relay is used
(1)
(3)
XG
(2)
(4)
XG
The other end becomes
link down when a link fault
Link Down Relay
Link Down
is detected.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
XG
XG
The other end becomes
link down when a link
Link Down Relay
Link Down Relay
fault is detected.
Link Down Relay
To configure Link Down Relay, carry out the following procedure in "admin" Operation mode.
Command
Task
Switch to Configuration mode.
XG2600# configure
XG2600(config)# ether 10 downrelay port 11,12
Set port 11,12 go linkdown when the port 10 linkdown.
Set port 11,12 go linkup when the port 10 linkup.
XG2600(config)# ether 10 downrelay recovery mode
auto
XG2600(config)# commit
XG2600(config)# save
XG2600(config)# exit
Apply the configuration.
Save the configuration.
Switch to Operation mode.
Link Down Relay
66
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 4 Switch Functions and their Configuration
4.4 Link Aggregation
Link aggregation is a function that combines multiple ports into a single logical link. A set of ports that comprise a logical
link are called an aggregation group.
Link aggregation provides:
•
•
Increased bandwidth
By grouping multiple physical ports into a single logical link (an aggregation group), network traffic (data sent and
received) will be balanced across the physical ports, thereby providing increased bandwidth.
Redundancy
Multiplexing ports allows uninterrupted network operations should one of the multiple links fail. Since the link status
of the logical aggregation groups remains unchanged, there are no fluctuations in network traffic, the effect of a fault
having been minimized.
Up to 10 ports can be used to create a single link aggregation group using link aggregation. Up to 10 aggregation groups
can be created.
XG
XG
Aggregation Group
Aggregation Group
Physical Port
Physical Port
Physical Port
Physical Port
The communication
can be continued
even though one
physical port is
down.
Bandwidth is
expanded by
bundling the
physical port.
Physical
Physical Port
Port
is down.
XG
XG
Link Aggregation
Link Aggregation
67
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 4 Switch Functions and their Configuration
4.4.1 Configuring Link Aggregation
Either static or dynamic (also known as LACP) configuration can be selected for Link Aggregation.
•
•
Static configuration
Configures aggregation groups statically.
LACP
Configures link aggregation using Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP). The LACP is a switch-to-switch
control protocol that enables dynamic configuration of aggregation groups and is standardized by the IEEE802.3ad.
The LACP facilitates load balancing across the individual links aggregated between the devices connected.
Either "active" or "passive" LACP mode can be selected.
-
active
The device starts LACP negotiation. Since the active mode allows the reception of LACP control frames, it is
possible to direct the device in "active" mode.
-
passive
The device responds to LACP control frames but does not start LACP negotiation.
To configure static link aggregation, carry out the following procedure in "admin" Operation mode.
Command
Task
Switch to Configuration mode.
XG2600# configure
XG2600(config)# ether 1-8 type linkaggregation 1
XG2600(config)# linkaggregation 1 mode static
XG2600(config)# commit
Set port 1-8 to be linkaggregation group 1.
Set linkaggregation group 1 to be static.
Apply the configuration.
XG2600(config)# save
Save the configuration.
XG2600(config)# exit
Switch to Operation mode.
To configure LACP link aggregation, carry out the following procedure in "admin" Operation mode.
Command
Task
Switch to Configuration mode.
XG2600# configure
XG2600(config)# ether 1-8 type linkaggregation 1
XG2600(config)# ether 11-18 type linkaggregation 2
XG2600(config)# linkaggregation 1 mode active
XG2600(config)# linkaggregation 2 mode passive
XG2600(config)# commit
Set port 1-8 to be linkaggregation group 1.
Set port 11-18 to be linkaggregation group 2.
Set linkaggregation group 1 to be active.
Set linkaggregation group 2 to be passive.
Apply the configuration.
XG2600(config)# save
Save the configuration.
XG2600(config)# exit
Switch to Operation mode.
Link Aggregation
68
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 4 Switch Functions and their Configuration
4.4.2 Frame Distribution Methods in Link Aggregation
How frames are distributed across physical ports that make up an aggregation group are determined by the contents of a
frame (source and destination MAC addresses).
There are 6 ways to specify how frames are distributed:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Frame distribution based on destination MAC address (da-mac)
The destination port is determined based on the destination MAC address of the frames.
Frame distribution based on source MAC address (sa-mac)
The destination port is determined based on the source MAC address of the frames.
Frame distribution based on destination and source MAC addresses (both-mac)
The destination port is determined based on the destination and source MAC addresses of the frames.
Frame distribution based on destination IP address (da-ip)
The destination port is determined based on the destination IP address of the frames.
Frame distribution based on source IP address (sa-ip)
The destination port is determined based on the source IP address of the frames.
Frame distribution based on destination and source IP addresses (both-ip)
The destination port is determined based on the destination and source IP addresses of the frames.
To set a distribution method, carry out the following procedure in "admin" Operation mode.
Command
Task
Switch to Configuration mode.
Set port 1-8 to be linkaggregation group 1.
XG2600# configure
XG2600(config)# ether 1-8 type linkaggregation 1
XG2600(config)# linkaggregation 1 algorithm both-mac Set linkaggregation group 1 uses frame distribution based on
destination and source IP address.
XG2600(config)# commit
XG2600(config)# save
XG2600(config)# exit
Apply the configuration.
Save the configuration.
Switch to Operation mode.
Link Aggregation
69
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 4 Switch Functions and their Configuration
4.4.3 The Number of Ports That Require Linkup
It is possible to specify the number of ports that enable a linkup state for an aggregation group. If the number of active
ports that make up an aggregation group in a linkup state is less than the specified number of ports, the aggregation group
changes to a linkdown state.
•
For static link aggregation
If the number of ports that make up an aggregation group in a linkup state no longer satisfies the specified number of
ports, the aggregation group changes to a linkdown state.
•
For LACP link aggregation
If the number of ports that make up an established LACP aggregation group changes, the aggregation group reverts to
a linkdown state.
To set the number of ports in the aggregation group, carry out the following procedure in "admin" Operation mode.
Command
Task
Switch to Configuration mode.
Set port 1-8 to be linkaggregation group 1.
XG2600# configure
XG2600(config)# ether 1-8 type linkaggregation 1
XG2600(config)# linkaggregation 1 collecting minimum 3 Set the minimum number of member ports for aggregation group
1 to 3.
XG2600(config)# commit
XG2600(config)# save
XG2600(config)# exit
Apply the configuration.
Save the configuration.
Switch to Operation mode.
4.4.4 Notes on Link Aggregation
•
•
•
•
No link aggregation can be used if the half-duplex link mode has been set by the "ether duplex" command.
All ports in the link aggregation group must be set with the same link speed.
All ports in the link aggregation group must be set to belong to the same VLAN.
Specify the link aggregation group in sequential ports.
No link aggregation can be used for the non-sequentially numbered port configuration.
The member ports of a link aggregation group must be specified to have the sequentially numbered ports.
•
If the Ethernet port type has been set as a link aggregation port and if the definition conflict as described above has
occurred, the relevant port is not linked up and it cannot be used. Change the settings by referring to the log messages.
Link Aggregation
70
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 4 Switch Functions and their Configuration
4.5 Spanning Tree Protocol (STP)
The Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) is a function that prevents loops from occurring on a network. It is also possible to
provide network redundancy by intentionally creating a loop.
STP exclusively uses only one active path between network devices, and shuts out other paths, to avoid network loops. An
active path is selected by comparing path costs defined on each path. After the comparison, the lowest cost path will be
selected. If the selected path becomes disabled, STP will activate the lowest cost path amongst the paths remaining.
The device supports IEEE802.1w RSTP (Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol). The RSTP is upward compatible with
IEEE802.1D STP (Spanning Tree Protocol) and serves as a STP if the destination device only supports STP.
Route Switch
Switch A
Switch B
Switch Priority = 20
Switch Priority = 10
Path Cost = 10
Designated port
Route port
t = 15
Blocking port
Forwarding pass
Blocking pass
Pass Cos
15
20
Path Cost = 10
Switch Priority = 40
Switch Priority = 30
Switch D
Switch C
Physical Topology
Switch A
Route Switch
= 10
Path Cost
Switch C
Switch B
Route
Route
Path Cost = 10
Path Cost = 20
15
Switch D
Route
Path Cost = 25
Logical Topology by STP
Spanning Tree Protocol (STP)
71
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 4 Switch Functions and their Configuration
4.5.1 Port Roles Based on Spanning Tree
RSTP assigns one of these port roles to individual ports:
•
•
Root port
Provides the best path (lowest cost) when the switch forwards packets to the root switch.
Designated port
Connects to the designated switch toward the leaves of the spanning tree. The port specified connecting to the
designated port serves as a root port.
•
•
•
Alternate Port
The alternative port with the second lowest path cost. In the event that the root port goes to a linkdown state, the
alternate port serves as the root port. It does not always send or receive frames while in the blocking state.
Backup Port
Provides an alternative path to that specified. In the event that the specified port goes into a linkdown state, the backup
port serves as the new designated port. It does not always send or receive frames while it is in the blocking state.
Disabled Port
Disabled port, it does not send or receive any frames.
4.5.2 Spanning Tree Protocol Port States
The port states defined by the STP are:
•
•
Discard
The port is in a "discarding state. BPDUs are only received.
Learn
The port is in a "learning" state. A port in the learning state learns the destination MAC address of the received frames
but does not participate in frame forwarding.
•
Forward
The port is ready to transmit data traffic.
The STP states "blocking" and "listening" have been merged into a unique RSTP "discarding" state. The correspondence
between STP port states and RSTP port states are shown below.
Display Format
Discard
STP (IEEE802.1D)
Blocking
RSTP (IEEE802.1w)
Discarding
Discard
Learn
Listening
Learning
Discarding
Learning
Forward
Forwarding
Forwarding
Spanning Tree Protocol (STP)
72
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 4 Switch Functions and their Configuration
4.5.3 Configuring Spanning Tree
To configure the spanning tree protocol, carry out the following procedure in "admin" Operation mode.
Command
Task
Switch to Configuration mode.
XG2600# configure
XG2600(config)# stp mode stp
Enable Spanning Tree Protocol.
XG2600(config)# stp domain 0 priority (0-61440)
XG2600(config)# stp hello (1s-10s)
XG2600(config)# stp age (6s-40s)
Configure Spanning Tree Protocol parameters on the device.
•
•
•
•
Switch priority
Hello time
XG2600(config)# stp delay (4s-30s)
Maximum aging time (max-age)
Forward delay time (forward-time)
XG2600(config)# ether 1-8 stp use on
XG2600(config)# ether 9-20 stp use off
Enable Spanning Tree Protocol on port 1-8.
Disable Spanning Tree Protocol on port 9-20.
XG2600(config)# ether 1-8 stp domain 0 priority (0-240) Configure the following parameters related to the spanning tree
topology:
XG2600(config)# ether 1-8 stp domain 0 cost
(1-200000000)
•
•
Port priority
Path cost
XG2600(config)# commit
XG2600(config)# save
XG2600(config)# exit
Apply the configuration.
Save the configuration.
Switch to Operation mode.
Spanning Tree Protocol (STP)
73
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 4 Switch Functions and their Configuration
4.6 VLAN
VLAN (Virtual LAN) is a technology that divides a single network into virtually separated networks.
VLANs are separate logical networks within one physical network. A VLAN capable switch can change and define new
LAN network configurations without changing physical cable connections. This creates a flexible and extensible network
system.
The device provides for port-based or Tag-based (IEEE802.1Q) VLANs.
4.6.1 Port-Based VLAN
Port-based VLAN is a method for configuring VLAN membership on a port basis. Forwarding is based on the destination
MAC addresses and related port.
Segment 3 (VLAN30)
Segment 1 (VLAN10)
VLAN10 consists
of Port 1, 2, 3
1
5
2
3
4
6
7
8
VLAN20 consists
of Port 5, 6, 7
VLAN30 consists
of port 4, 8
Segment 2 (VLAN20)
Port Base VLAN
To configure a port-based VLAN, carry out the following procedures in "admin" Operation mode.
Command
Task
Switch to Configuration mode.
XG2600# configure
XG2600(config)# ether 1-3 vlan untag 10
XG2600(config)# ether 5-7 vlan untag 20
XG2600(config)# ether 4,8 vlan untag 30
XG2600(config)# commit
Set the default port VLAN ID 10 for port 1-3.
Set the default port VLAN ID 20 for port 5-7.
Set the default port VLAN ID 30 for port 4,8.
Apply the configuration.
XG2600(config)# save
Save the configuration.
XG2600(config)# exit
Switch to Operation mode.
VLAN
74
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 4 Switch Functions and their Configuration
4.6.2 Tag-Based (IEEE802.1Q) VLAN
Tag-based VLAN is a method of configuring VLANs so that the frame forwarding decision is based on a tag in the MAC
header identifying the VLAN membership. 4 bytes of additional data in the header, called a VLAN tag, identifies the
VLAN frame ownership. Using a VLAN tag enables configuring a single physical link that shares multiple VLANs.
The device’s tag-based VLAN function is based on the IEEE 802.1Q standard.
The following figure shows an Ethernet frame format including a VLAN tag as specified by the IEEE 802.1Q standard.
TYPE
LENGTH
DA
(6)
SA
(6)
Protocol data (IP Packet, etc.)/
LLC,SNAP
VLAN tag
(4)
(2)
2 bytes
TPID
0x8100
2 bytes
TCI
User
CFI
VLAN ID
12 bit
Priority
3 bit
1 bit
TPID (Tag Protocol Identifier) (0x8100)
TCI (Tag Control Information)
User Priority(3bit): Priority of Frames (Higher priority to larger number from 0 to 7)
CFI (Canonical Format Indicator)(1bit): ”1” when RIF field exists. Normally “0”.
VLAN ID(12bit):VLAN identifier (0 to 4095. 0 and 4095 are reserved ID)
Tag VLAN Frame Format
To configure a tag-based VLAN, carry out the following procedures in "admin" Operation mode.
Command
Task
Switch to Configuration mode.
XG2600# configure
XG2600(config)# ether 1-8 vlan tag 100-300
XG2600(config)# commit
Set the tag-based VLAN ID 100-300 for port 1-8.
Apply the configuration.
XG2600(config)# save
Save the configuration.
XG2600(config)# exit
Switch to Operation mode.
VLAN
75
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 4 Switch Functions and their Configuration
4.7 Quality of Service (QoS)
The device provides Quality of Service (QoS) that is based on the IEEE802.1p standard.
The device QoS determines the priority of frames at the ingress side using VLAN tag (including priority tag) or a port's
default priority. Their priorities are mapped to 8 output queues.
The queues are processed in the order of the QoS priority precedence.
The device priorities available are:
•
Default priority
Set a default priority of 0 to 7 for each port.
For frames whose priority was not set (VLAN-untagged frames), the default priority is assigned according to the value
of the frame.
•
Mapping to output queues
The device is equipped with 8 output queues with different levels (0 to 7). Frames are transmitted in order of output
queue priority.
Each priority is mapped to a specified output queue.
To set the default priority and output queue mapping, carry out the following procedure in "admin" Operation mode.
•
XG2600
Command
Task
Switch to Configuration mode.
XG2600# configure
XG2600(config)# ether 1-8 qos priority (0-7)
Set a default priority for frames whose priority was not set
(VLANuntagged frame) when received.
XG2600(config)# ether 1-8 qos prioritymap (0-7) (0-7)
Set the level of output queue to map to each frame that has a
priority value.
XG2600(config)# save
XG2600(config)# reset
Save the configuration.
Reset the device.
•
XG0224/XG0448
Command
XG0224# configure
Task
Switch to Configuration mode.
XG0224(config)# ether 1-8 qos priority (0-7)
Set a default priority for frames whose priority was not set
(VLANuntagged frame) when received.
XG0224(config)# qos cosmap (0-7) (0-7)
Set the level of output queue to map to each frame that has a
priority value.
XG0224(config)# save
XG2600(config)# reset
Save the configuration.
Reset the device.
Quality of Service (QoS)
76
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 4 Switch Functions and their Configuration
4.8 IGMP Snooping
IP multicast is often used to distribute multimedia data, including video and voice, over a network.
A layer 2 switch floods multicast frames, absorbing unnecessary network bandwidth. A layer 3 switch that supports
Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) manages multicast groups using IGMP packets. The device controls how IP
multicast packets are forwarded to required ports by monitoring IGMP packets generated by layer 3 switches, thereby
preventing unnecessary flooding. This function is called "IGMP Snooping".
The device supports IGMP snooping for IGMP v1/v2.
Multicast Server
Multicast Router
Multicast Server
Multicast Router
Transfer only to
Flooding to all
the required
ports
ports
Layer 2
Switch
Layer 2
Switch
XG
Terminal
Terminal
IGMP Snooping
IGMP No Snooping
IGMP Snooping
IGMP Snooping
77
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 4 Switch Functions and their Configuration
4.8.1 Registering Group Members
On receiving an IGMP Report message, the device registers a multicast MAC address to the IGMP snooping control table
for the port that received the IGMP Report message and the connecting multicast router port.
Multicast Router
VLAN 10
Port 8
XG
IGMPsnoopingControl Table
VLAN
IGMP Report
MAC
Destination IP : 239.1.2.3
: 0100.5E01.0203
VLAN(RouterPort)
Group IP
(MAC address)
Port
1
Reporter
(01:00:05:01:02:03)
239.1.2.3
10 (8)
192.168.10.20
Source IP
Group IP
: 192.168.10.20
: 239.1.2.3
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
Terminal 1
Terminal 3
Terminal 2
Registering Group Members
• The device can register multicast groups up to a maximum value (Reference "1.2.3 System Maximum Values" (pg.34)).
Multicast packets that cannot be registered are those flooding all ports belonging to the same VLAN.
Note
• If "igmpsnoop unknown flooding off" command is set, Multicast packets that cannot be registered are those not flooding all
ports belonging to the same VLAN (XG0224, XG0448).
The following figure shows the relationship between the registered IP multicast address and the multicast MAC address.
MAC addresses that are registered with IGMP snooping are between 0100.5E00.0000 and 0100.5E7F.FFFF. An IP
multicast address is 32 bits. The first 4 bits are always 1110 followed by 28 bits that represent the IP multicast address
information. Of these 28 bits, the lower order 23 bits are mapped to a MAC address and the data in the higher order 5 bits
is not used.
Therefore 32 IP multicast addresses are mapped to the same single MAC address.
IP Multicast Address
239.
1. 2.
3
1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1
Class D
0
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1
5 Bit Loss
Lower 23 Bit Mapping
Reserved for IPv4 Multicast
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0
0
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1
0 1 0 0 . 5 E 0 1 . 0 2 0 3
Multicast MAC Address
Multicast Address
IGMP Snooping
78
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 4 Switch Functions and their Configuration
4.8.2 Removing Group Members
The group members registered by IGMP snooping are removed under the following status.
•
If after receiving an IGMP Report message for group registration, the group member interval expires before the device
receives another IGMP Report message, the switch removes the host from the group member. The setting for the group
member interval is 260 seconds.
•
•
If an IGMP Leave message is sent from a host, the multicast router sends out an IGMP Specific Query (GSQ) message
to determine whether that the host has left the group.
If after receiving the IGMP Leave message, the last member interval expires before the device receives another IGMP
Report message, the switch removes the host from the group member. The setting for the last member interval is 2
seconds.
Multicast Router
VLAN 10
Port 8
IGMP Leave
IGMPsnoopingControl Table
MAC
: 0100.5E00.0002
VLAN
Destination IP : 224.0.0.2
VLAN(RouterPort)
Group IP
(MAC address)
Port
1
Reporter
Source IP
: 192.168.10.20
: 239.1.2.3
(01:00:05:01:02:03)
Group IP
239.1.2.3
10 (8)
192.168.10.20
Port 1
Port 3
Port 2
Terminal 1
Terminal 2
Terminal 3
Removing Group Members (1)
IGMP Specific Query
Multicast Router
MAC
: 0100.5E01.0203
VLAN 10
Port 8
Destination IP : 239.1.2.3
Group IP
: 239.1.2.3
XG
IGMPsnoopingControl Table
VLAN
VLAN(RouterPort)
Group IP
(MAC address)
Port
1
Reporter
(01:00:05:01:02:03)
239.1.2.3
10 (8)
192.168.10.20
Port 1
Port 3
Port 2
Terminal 3
Terminal 1
Terminal 2
Removing Group Members (2)
The registered Multicast Group IP is not detete form the IGMP snooping Control Table automatically.
Note
IGMP Snooping
79
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 4 Switch Functions and their Configuration
4.8.3 Managing Group Members
When network congestion causes Leave message loss or there is a host that uses IGMPv1, the multicast router does not
receive Leave messages. The multicast router sends out an IGMP General Query message to all hosts (IP address:
224.0.0.1) at intervals (query interval) to determine membership information.
Upon reception of an IGMP General Query message, the host, a member of the group, returns an IGMP Report message to
maintain membership in the group.
IGMP General Query
Multicast Router
MAC
: 0100.5E01.0001
Destination IP : 224.0.0.1
VLAN 10
Port 8
Group IP : 0.0.0.0
IGMPsnoopingControl Table
VLAN
VLAN(RouterPort)
Group IP
(MAC address)
Port
1
Reporter
XG
(01:00:05:01:02:03)
239.1.2.3
10 (8)
192.168.10.20
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
Terminal 3
Terminal 1
Terminal 2
Managing Group Members
In consideration of General Query or Report message loss caused by network congestion, since RFC 2236 defines the
default query interval for multicast routers as 125 seconds, this device uses 126 seconds for the group member interval
when it works as a Querier.
IGMP Snooping
80
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 4 Switch Functions and their Configuration
4.8.4 IGMP Querier
In a typical network configuration, the multicast router periodically sends out an IGMP General Query message to
determine if any of the hosts on the network are members of any multicast groups. Receiving a response from a host
ascertains its membership in a multicast group.
IGMP Querier is a function that acts as a proxy for a multicast router when one is not available in a network segment to
send an IGMP General Query message to all hosts.
The Query interval is 126 seconds.
Multicast Server
XG
IGMP Querier
IGMP General Query
MAC
: 0100.5E01.0001
Destination IP : 224.0.0.1
Group IP : 0.0.0.0
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
Terminal 1
Terminal 2
Terminal 3
IGMP Querier
Upon reception of an IGMP Leave message, the device sends an IGMP Specific Query (GSQ) message to determine that
the host is interested in leaving the group.
If an IGMP Specific Query message is sent 2 times and the host does not respond with an IGMP Report message, that host
is removed.
•
•
Generally, IGMP Querier uses "0.0.0.0" for the source IP address when sending a Query message.
Since some client software does not return a response for a Query message with the source IP address being set
to "0.0.0.0", it is recommended that an address other than "0.0.0.0" be used.
Note
If a multicast router exists on the network segment, the device does not send Query message even if IGMP
Querier is valid.
IGMP Snooping
81
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 4 Switch Functions and their Configuration
4.8.5 Configuring IGMP Snooping
To configure IGMP snooping, carry out the following procedure in "admin" Operation mode.
Command
Task
Switch to Configuration mode.
XG2600# configure
XG2600(config)# igmpsnoop use on
XG2600(config)# vlan 10 igmpsnoop router yes 15,16
XG2600(config)# commit
Enable global IGMP snooping on the device.
Specify the multicast router port statically with VLAN.
Apply the configuration.
XG2600(config)# save
Save the configuration.
XG2600(config)# exit
Switch to Operation mode.
To enable IGMP query, carry out the following procedure in "admin" Operation mode.
Command
Task
Switch to Configuration mode.
XG2600# configure
XG2600(config)# igmpsnoop use on
XG2600(config)# vlan 20 igmpsnoop querier on
XG2600(config)# commit
Enable global IGMP snooping on the device.
Specify the Querier operation mode if no multicast router exists.
Apply the configuration.
XG2600(config)# save
Save the configuration.
XG2600(config)# exit
Switch to Operation mode.
IGMP Snooping
82
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 4 Switch Functions and their Configuration
4.9 Network Management
4.9.1 Traffic Statistics
The device can display traffic statistics to analyze network operations such as traffic bytes, errors, etc.
The following are the Traffic Statistics the device provides.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Displays traffic information on outgoing and incoming frames for each port.
Displays traffic information on incoming frames by frame size range for each port.
Displays traffic information on incoming frames for each VLAN.
Displays incoming traffic information by QoS priority for each port.
Displays information related to data flow for each port.
Displays information about errors that occur during transmission/reception for each port.
To display traffic statistics, monitor and show commands are provided.
•
"show ether utilization" command
Display the usage ratio (or utilization) information of Ethernet physical ports.
•
"show ether statistics" (show ether statistics detail) command
Display the statistics of Ethernet physical ports.
4.9.2 SNMP Agent
SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) is a protocol that monitors and manages devices on a network.
The device supports the SNMP (v1/v2c/v3) function to collect management information blocks (MIBs) from a remote
network manager (SNMP manager).
For the MIBs supported, refer to Appendix B. The device can be configured for up to 16 SNMP managers and up to 16
SNMP trap destinations (8 for v1/v2c, 8 for v3).
To configure the SNMP agent, carry out the following procedures in "admin" Operation mode.
Command
Task
XG2600# configure
Switch to Configuration mode.
Enable SNMP function.
XG2600(config)#snmp service on
XG2600(config)#snmp agent contact
SYSTEM-CONTAC
Set the swith's contact (SYSTEM-CONTACT).
XG2600(config)#snmp agent location
SYSTEM-LOCATION
Set the swith's location (SYSTEM-LOCATION).
XG2600(config)#snmp agent address A.B.C.D
Set the SNMP agent address. This setting is also used for the
local address at trap transmission.
Make sure to set it when using the SNMP agent function.
XG2600(config)# snmp manager 0 A.B.C.D
COMMUNIT-YNAME v2c disable
Set the IP address (host name) of the SNMP manager, the
community name, sending SNMPv2 traps, and disabling writing.
if the SNMP trap notification is enabled.
XG2600(config)# snmp user 0 name USERNAME
XG2600(config)# snmp user 0 address 0 A.B.C.D
Set a SNMP v3 user name.
Set a SNMP v3 host address.
XG2600(config)# snmp user 0 notification 0 A.B.C.D
Set a SNMP v3 trap notification host address.
XG2600(config)# snmp user 0 auth md5
auth_password
Set the authentication protocol and password for SNMP v3.
XG2600(config)# snmp user 0 priv des priv_password
Set the encryption protocol and password for SNMP v3.
Network Management
83
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 4 Switch Functions and their Configuration
Command
Task
XG2600(config)# snmp user 0 read view 0
XG2600(config)# snmp user 0 notify view 0
XG2600(config)# commit
Set MIB read permission view for SNMP v3.
Set trap notification permission view for SNMP v3.
Apply the configuration.
XG2600(config)# save
Save the configuration.
XG2600(config)# exit
Switch to Operation mode.
4.9.3 RMON
Remote Monitoring (RMON) is a function provided to monitor communications over a network, such as traffic and errors.
RMON, used in conjunction with the SNMP agent, allows the remote monitoring of traffic on a LAN segment.
The device supports 2 RMON groups (Statistics, History).
•
Statistics group
Collects traffic statistics for each port.
•
History group
Records traffic statistics for each port at specified time intervals.
To configure RMON, carry out the following procedure in "admin" Operation mode.
Command
Task
Switch to Configuration mode.
XG2600# configure
XG2600(config)#snmp rmon <on|off>
XG2600(config)# commit
XG2600(config)# save
Specify whether to enable or disable the RMON function.
Apply the configuration.
Save the configuration.
XG2600(config)# exit
Switch to Operation mode.
Network Management
84
Chapter 5
Command
Reference
This chapter explains about Command Reference.
5.1 Port Information Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
5.1.1 Ethernet Common Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
5.1.2 MAC Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
5.1.3 STP Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
5.1.4 LLDP Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
5.1.5 Filter Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
5.1.6 QoS Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
5.1.7 LACP Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
5.1.8 ether L3 Monitor Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
5.1.9 ether SNMP Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
5.1.10 ether output rate control information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
5.2 LACP Information Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
5.2.1 LACP Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
5.3 VLAN Information Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
5.3.1 VLAN Common Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
5.3.2 IGMP Snooping Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
5.3.3 Filter Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
5.3.4 QoS Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
5.4 MAC Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
5.4.1 MAC Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
5.5 LAN Information Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
5.5.1 IPv4 Related Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
5.5.2 IPv6 Related Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
5.5.3 VLAN Related Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
5.5.4 LLMNR Related Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
5.5.5 Management LAN port IPv4 Related Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
5.5.6 Management LAN port IPv6 Related Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
5.5.7 Management LAN port LLMNR Related Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
5.6 IPv4 Related Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
5.6.1 IPv4 Related Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
5.7 QoS Information Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
5.7.1 QoS Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
5.8 STP Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
5.8.1 STP Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
5.9 LLDP Information Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
5.9.1 LLDP Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
5.10 IGMP Snooping Information Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
5.10.1 IGMP Snooping Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
5.11 Loop Detection Information Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
5.11.1 Loop Detection Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
5.12 ACL Information Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
5.12.1 ACL Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
5.13 AAA Information Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
5.13.1 Group ID Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
5.13.2 AAA User Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
5.13.3 RADIUS Information Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
5.14 Password Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
5.14.1 password format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
5.14.2 password admin set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
5.14.3 password user set. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
5.14.4 password aaa. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
5.14.5 password authtype . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
5.15 Device Information Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
5.15.1 SNMP Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
5.15.2 System Log Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
5.15.3 Automatic Time Setting Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
5.15.4 ProxyDNS Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
5.15.5 Host Database Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
5.15.6 Schedule Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
5.15.7 Filter/QoS Resource Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
5.15.8 Other. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
5.16 Login banner Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
5.16.1 Login banner Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
5.17 Mode and Terminal Operation Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
5.17.1 Mode Operation Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
5.17.2 Terminal Operation Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
5.17.3 Command Execution History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
5.17.4 Command Alias . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
5.17.5 Command Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
5.18 System Operations and Display Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
5.18.1 System Operations and Display Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
5.19 Configuration Display, Delete and Operation Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
5.19.1 Configuration Display Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
5.19.2 Configuration Delete Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
5.19.3 Configuration Operation Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
5.19.4 File Operation Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
5.20.2 Ethernet Counter, Log, and Statistics Clear Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
5.21.1 USB connection Counter, Log, and Statistics Clear Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
5.22 LACP Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation Commands. . . . . . . . . . 419
5.22.1 LACP Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
5.22.2 LACP Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Clear Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
5.23 M1 port Status Display command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
5.23.1 M1 port Status Display command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
5.24 Interface Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
5.24.1 Interface Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
5.25 ARP Entry Display and Clear Operation Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
5.25.1 ARP Entry Display Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
5.25.2 ARP Entry Clear Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
5.26 Routing Table Entry Display Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
5.26.1 IPv4 Routing Table Entry Display Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
5.26.2 IPv6 Routing Table Entry Display Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
5.27 Packet Statistics Display and Clear Operation Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
5.27.1 IPv4 Packet Statistics Display Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
5.27.2 IPv4 Packet Statistics Clear Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
5.27.3 IPv6 Packet Statistics Display Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
5.27.4 IPv6 Packet Statistics Clear Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
5.28 Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation Commands . . . . . . . . . 451
5.28.1 Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
5.28.2 Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Clear Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
5.28.3 Spanning Tree Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
5.28.4 Spanning Tree Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Clear Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
5.29 LLDP Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation Commands . . . . . . . . . . 480
5.29.1 LLDP Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
5.29.2 LLDP Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Clear Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
5.30 VLAN Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
5.30.1 VLAN Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
5.31 QoS Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
5.31.1 COS Queue Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
5.32 SSH Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
5.32.1 SSH Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
5.33.1 IGMP Snooping Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
5.33.2 IGMP Snooping Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Clear Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
5.34 Loopdetection Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation Commands . . 506
5.34.1 Loopdetection Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
5.35 AAA Status Display and Clear Operation Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
5.35.1 AAA Status Display Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
5.36 NETTIME (time/sntp) Server and Client Statistics Display and Clear Operation Commands . . . . 509
5.36.1 NETTIME (time/sntp) Statistics Display Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
5.36.2 NETTIME (time/sntp) Statistics Clear Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
5.37 ProxyDNS Statistics Display and Clear Operation Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
5.37.1 ProxyDNS Statistics Display Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
5.37.2 ProxyDNS Statistics Clear Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
5.38.2 SNMP Statistics Clear Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
5.40 Login Information Operations and Display Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
5.40.1 Login Information Display Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
5.40.2 Login Information Operation Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
5.41 Socket Status Display Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
5.41.1 Socket Status Display Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
5.42 Trace Show and Clear Operation Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
5.42.1 Trace Show Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
5.42.2 Trace Clear Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
5.43 Ethernet Port Control Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
5.43.1 Ethernet Port Control Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
5.44 RADIUS Control Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
5.44.1 RADIUS Control Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
5.45 USB Port Control Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
5.45.1 USB Port Control Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
5.46 I’m here Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
5.46.1 I’m here Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
5.47 Other Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.1 Port Information Settings
This section explains about port information settings.
Allowed range of port definition numbers
The Ethernet definition serial number (decimal value), which is to be specified in <number> ("ether" port definition
number) of the [Option] described in each command of this section, shall be within the range of each model as shown
below.
Range
Model
XG0224
1 to 26
1 to 52
1 to 26
XG0448
XG02600
Configuration of port types for each model
The following provides the configuration of port types according to the "ether" port definition number.
1000BASE-X/SerDes 10/100/1000BASE-T 1000BASE-X/SerDes
Model
(downlink)
ether 1 to 20
ether 1 to 44
(uplink)
ether 21 to 24
ether 45 to 48
(interlink)
ether 25 to 26
ether 49 to 52
ether 1 to 26
XG0224
XG0448
XG2600
Specifying the range of port numbers
A range of multiple ports can be specified in <number> ("ether" port definition number) shown in the [Options] of each
command in this section.
•
Examples of multiple ports range specification for XG2600/XG0224/XG0448.
1
= port1
1-20
21-24
-4
= port1 to port20
= port21 to port24
= port1 to port4
Port Information Settings
89
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.1.1
Ethernet Common Information
This section explains about the commands related to ethernet common information.
5.1.1.1 forwardingmode
Function
forwardingmode <mode>
Available Model XG2600
Syntax
forwardingmode <mode>
Options
<mode>
• store-and-forward
store and forward mode is used
• cut-through
cut through mode (default) is used
Use Mode
Explanation
Caution
Configuration mode (admin class)
Set the switching mode of 10GbE ports.
• In cut-through mode, 65 byte and over error frames and 16129 byte and over frames
are forwarded. 64 byte and below frames are not forwarded.
It is forwarded as FCS error frame at the frame relay of 16129 or more.
• In store and forward mode, Error frames and 16129 byte and over frames are not
forwarded.
• Statistics for 10GbE ports is cleared when you change the switching mode.
Default
It is assumed that cut through mode is used.
forwardingmode cut-through
Port Information Settings
90
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.1.1.2 ether use
Function
Set the port use.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
ether <number> use <mode>
Options
<number>
• ether port number
Set a port number to use with a decimal value.
When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).
When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")
<mode>
Specify a port operation mode.
• on
Use the Ethernet port.
• off
Do not use the Ethernet port.
Use Mode
Explanation
Default
Configuration mode (admin class)
Set to use the Ethernet port.
It is assumed that the Ethernet port is used.
ether <number> use on
Port Information Settings
91
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.1.1.3 ether media
Function
Sets media type for Ethernet ports.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448
Syntax
ether <number> media <type>
Options
<number>
• Ethernet port number(s)
Configure Ethernet port number(s) to be used as base 10 value(s).
If configuring multiple port numbers, separate them with a comma.
Use hyphens to specify a range of port numbers. (ex: "1-8")
Refer to the beginning of this chapter for details on how to specify port numbers.
Range
Model
21 to 24
45 to 48
XG0224
XG0448
<type>
Media type.
• metal
Use 10/100/1000BASE-T ports (RJ45)
• fiber
Use SFP Ports.
*The 100BASE-FX module can be used by XG0224 / XG0448.
• auto
Automatically selects media type.
*However, if both Ethernet and SFP ports are connected the SFP ports are used.
Use Mode
Explanation
Caution
Configuration mode (admin class)
Sets the type of media to be used by the Ethernet port.
• If auto is selected and cables are connected to 10/100/1000BASE-T ports as well as to
SFP ports, the SFP ports will be selected.
• Similarly, with the auto setting, if 10/100/1000BASE-T port(s) are in a link up state and
SFP slot(s) are put into a link up state by connecting a cable to them, operation
changes to the SFP slot(s) and the 10/100/1000BASE-T port(s) change to a link down
state.
• Use the fiber setting if using the 100BASE-FX module.
(The 100BASE-FX module cannot be used with the auto setting.)
Default
If unset, automatic selection of media type will be the default.
ether <number> media auto
Port Information Settings
92
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.1.1.4 ether mode
Function
Set the link speed.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448
Syntax
ether <number> mode <speed>
Options
<number>
• ether port number
Set a port number to use with a decimal value. When setting multiple port numbers,
separate them with commas (,). When setting sequential numbers, separate them with
hyphens (-). (Example: "11-16")
Range
Model
1 to 24
1 to 48
XG0224
XG0448
<speed>
Link speed
• auto
Determine the link speed through auto negotiation.
• 1000
Set the 1Gbps fixed link speed.
• 100
Set the 100Mbps fixed link speed.
• 10
Set the 10Mbps fixed link speed.
Configuration mode (admin class)
Set the link speed at the Ethernet port.
Use Mode
Explanation
Caution
Use the 100Mbps fixed link speed setting if using the 100BASE-FX module.
It is assumed that Auto Negotiation mode has been specified.
Default
ether <number> mode auto
Port Information Settings
93
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.1.1.5 ether duplex
Function
Set the full-duplex or half-duplex link mode.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448
Syntax
ether <number> duplex <duplex>
Options
<number>
• ether port number
Set a port number to use with a decimal value. When setting multiple port numbers,
separate them with commas (,). When setting sequential numbers, separate them with
hyphens (-). (Example: "11-16")
Range
Model
1 to 24
1 to 48
XG0224
XG0448
<duplex>
Full-duplex or half-duplex link mode.
• full
Operates in full-duplex fixed link mode.
• half
Operates in half-duplex fixed link mode.
This option can be specified only when a fixed link speed has been specified by the
"ether mode" command. (This option setting is made invalid if the link speed has been
set to "auto".)
Use Mode
Explanation
Caution
Configuration mode (admin class)
Set the full-duplex or half-duplex link mode on the Ethernet port.
and the system operates in full-duplex link mode.
and the system operates depending on the result autonegotiated with the connected
device.
Default
It is assumed that full-duplex link mode has been specified.
ether <number> duplex full
Port Information Settings
94
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.1.1.6 ether mdi
Function
Set the MDI.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448
Syntax
ether <number> mdi <mode>
Options
<number>
• ether port number
Set a port number to use with a decimal value. When setting multiple port numbers,
separate them with commas (,). When setting sequential numbers, separate them with
hyphens (-). (Example: "11-16")
Range
Model
1 to 24
1 to 48
XG0224
XG0448
<mode>
Specify the MDI mode.
• auto
Set the MDI or MDI-X auto detection mode.
• mdi
Set the fixed MDI mode.
• mdix
Set the fixed MDI-X mode.
Use Mode
Explanation
Caution
Configuration mode (admin class)
Set the MDI mode for the Ethernet port.
mode" command.
as MDI-X port.
Detect mode setting is disabled. The port operates as MDI port.
X fixed mode setting is disabled. The port always operates as MDI port.
Default
It is assumed that MDI/MDI-X Auto Detect mode has been specified.
ether <number> mdi auto
Port Information Settings
95
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.1.1.7 ether flowctl
Function
Set the flow control function.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
ether <number> flowctl <send> <receive>
Options
<number>
• ether port number
Set a port number to use with a decimal value.
When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).
When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")
<send>
• on
Send flow control packets.
• off
Do not send flow control packets.
<receive>
• on
Controls the flow when flow control packets are received.
• off
Do not control the flow even when flow control packets are received.
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Set the operation of flow control function on the Ethernet port using the transmission and
reception functions. The backpressure function is enabled in half-duplex link mode.
The flow control function is enabled independently of the link speed being set by the
"ether mode" command.
Default
It is assumed to have been specified to take the flow control only when a flow control
packet is received.
ether <number> flowctl off on
Port Information Settings
96
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.1.1.8 ether type
Function
Set a port type.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
ether <number> type normal
ether <number> type mirror <count> <source> <mode>
ether <number> type linkaggregation <group>
ether <number> type backup <group> <priority>
Options
<number>
• ether port number
Set a port number to use with a decimal value. When setting multiple port numbers,
separate them with commas (,). When setting sequential numbers, separate them with
hyphens (-). (Example: "11-16")
normal
mirror
: Normal port
: Target mirroring port
linkaggregation : Link aggregation port
backup
: Backup port
<count>
• Definition number
Specify the source port number with a decimal number.
Range
Model
0 to 25
0 to 51
0 to 25
XG0224
XG0448
XG2600
<source>
• Source port number
Set the source port number with a decimal number if mirroring has been specified.
Range
Model
1 to 26
0 to 52
0 to 26
XG0224
XG0448
XG2600
<mode>
• Mirroring mode
Set one of the following operation modes if mirroring has been specified.
rx : The receive frames of the source port are mirrored.
tx : The send frames of the source port are mirrored.
both : Both the send and receive frames of the source port are mirrored. [XG0224/XG0448]
Port Information Settings
97
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
<group>
• Group number
Set a link aggregation group number with a decimal number.
Range
Model
1 to 13
1 to 26
1 to 10
XG0224
XG0448
XG2600
Set a backup group number with a decimal number.
Range
Model
1 to 13
1 to 26
1 to 13
XG0224
XG0448
XG2600
<priority>
• Priority of port
Set the master port or backup port if "type backup" has been specified.
master: Master port
backup: Backup port
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Set an Ethernet port type.
Select the normal port, the mirror port, the link aggregation port, or the backup port.
Caution
Cautions on linkaggregation settings
• All ports in the link aggregation group must be set to belong to the same VLAN.
• No link aggregation can be used for the non-sequentially numbered port configuration.
The member ports of a link aggregation group must be specified to have the
sequentially numbered ports.
duplex" command.
Cautions on mirror setting
[XG2600]
• Only one target port can be configured for tx and rx respectively.
• Target ports for tx and rx can not be configured to a same port.
• Target port is the dedicated port for the mirror of source port.
• When target ports are used for tx and rx, the specified source ports are applied to both
target ports.
e.c.
#ether 1 type mirror 0 10 tx
#ether 2 type mirror 0 11 rx
In above configuration, Tx frames of source port ether10 and ether11 are mirrored to
target port ether1.
Rx frames of source port ether10 and ether11 are mirrored to the target port ether2.
• The port which has been configured to target port can not be configured to source port.
• The packet to exceed the band of the target port when there are two or more source
ports of the mirror for the target port is abandoned.
• The storm control to the port set as a mirror target port becomes invalid.
Port Information Settings
98
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
• The mirror traffic is as follows according to the state of STP/RSTP/MSTP of the source
port.
When the mirror of two or more sources is possible, traffic corresponding to each state
is mirror.
STP, RSTP, state of MSTP, and mirror frame
Source port
Frame kind
Excluding
Target port forwarding
(in object VLAN in case of MSTP)
disable
It is not forwarded
BPDU
BPDU
It is not forwarded
It is not forwarded
Blocking and listening
Excluding
BPDU
(Discarding in RSTP/MSTP )
BPDU
It is forwarded
It is not forwarded
It is forwarded
It is forwarded
It is forwarded
Learning
Excluding
BPDU
Forwarding
Excluding
BPDU
• The presence of the VLAN tag of the packet output to the target port: about the
mirroring of the transmission frame.
It agrees to the tagging setting of the address source port of the packet. The VLAN tag
attaches to the packet output to the target port only when there is the one of the setting
with the VLAN tag in the address source port when there are two or more addresses of
the packet like the multicast, the broadcast, and the flooding, etc., and the packet is
output from two or more source ports. The content of tag becomes tag that should be
applied to the destination.
• As for the mirroring of the reception frame, presence and the content of the VLAN tag
of the packet output to the target port are corresponding to the packet when inputting it.
• When the reception frame mirroring is done rewriting DSCP and ip precedence, the
frame not the reception frame but after it changes is mirror.
• When STP and LLDP are defined in the target port of the mirror, the port cannot be
used.
• The storm control to the same port where the mirror target port was set becomes
invalid.
[XG0224/XG0448]
• Only a single port can be set as the mirrored target port on the device.
• The port which is set to be target port, can be used for forwarding.
• The destination MAC address, the source MAC address, and the presence or absence
of VLAN tag together with its contents sent to the target port may differ from those of
the packet actually sent from or received at the source port.
Cautions on backup setting
• If multiple ports defined as master or backup exist in the same backup group, the port with a
smaller number is enabled, and the port with a larger number is not linked up and it cannot be
used.
• If the master or backup port is undefined in the same backup group, the relevant port is not
linked up and it cannot be used.
Default
It is assumed that the normal port has been specified.
ether <number> type normal
Port Information Settings
99
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.1.1.9 ether vlan tag
Function
Set the tagged VLAN.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
ether <number> vlan tag <tagged_vidlist>
Options
<number>
• ether port number
Set a port number to use with a decimal value.
When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).
When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")
<tagged_vidlist>
• Tagged VLAN ID list
Set a tagged VLAN ID.
When setting multiple IDs, separate them with commas (,).
Use Mode
Explanation
Caution
Configuration mode (admin class)
Set a tagged VLAN ID.
To add a VLAN, specify the VLAN ID list including already registered VLANs.
The M1 port internally uses maximum VLAN ID in unused.
Therefore, the communication of the M1 port is temporarily interrupted when VLAN ID
allocated in the M1 port is specified by the vlan tag command, and the TCP session is
cut. (Only XG2600)
Default
N/A
Port Information Settings
100
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.1.1.10 ether vlan untag
Function
Set the untagged VLAN.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
ether <number> vlan untag <untagged_vidlist>
Options
<number>
• ether port number
Set a port number to use with a decimal value.
When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).
When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")
<untagged_vidlist>
• Untagged VLAN ID list
Set an untagged VLAN ID.
When setting multiple IDs, separate them with commas (,).
Use Mode
Explanation
Caution
Configuration mode (admin class)
Set an untagged VLAN ID.
• To add a VLAN, specify the VLAN ID list including already registered VLANs.
• Although multiple vid numbers can be specified in the "untagged_vidlist", the following
conditions must be satisfied.
- Only a single port can be defined as a port VLAN.
If multiple VLANs with no protocol VLAN settings have been specified, only the VLAN
with the smallest number will be enabled.
- The protocol VLANs of up to 11 protocols (system definition protocol (ipv4/ipv6/fna)
or user definition (up to 8 definitions)) can be defined.
The M1 port internally uses maximum VLAN ID in unused.
Therefore, the communication of the M1 port is temporarily interrupted when VLAN ID
allocated in the M1 port is specified by the vlan untag command, and the TCP session is
cut. (Only XG2600)
Default
On occasions when "ether vlan tag" command is not defined:
It is assumed that 1 has been specified as the default VLAN ID.
ether <number> vlan untag 1
It is assumed that "ether vlan untag" command has not been specified.
Port Information Settings
101
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.1.1.11 ether egress permission
Function
Set the forwarding permission port list information.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
ether <number> egress permission <portlist>
Options
<number>
• ether port number
Set a port number to use with a decimal value.
When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).
When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")
<portlist>
• Forwarding permitted port list
Specify a list of the Ethernet ports that are permitted to forward data.
When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).
When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Set a port list to allow forwarding via the ports.
If a link aggregation port or a backup port is specified on the port list, forwarding is
allowed via all ports of the link aggregation or backup group.
Default
It is assumed that forwarding has been permitted for all ports.
5.1.1.12 ether loopdetect use
Function
Set to use the Loop Detection function.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
ether <number> loopdetect use <mode>
Options
<number>
• ether port number
Set a port number to use with a decimal value.
When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).
When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")
<mode>
• on
Enable the Loop Detection function.
• off
Disable the Loop Detection function.
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Set whether or not to enable the loop detection function.
Disable if the system is stopped by the "loopdetect use" definition even if this mode is set
to be effective.
Default
It is assumed that the loop detection function is enabled.
ether <number> loopdetect use on
Port Information Settings
102
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.1.1.13 ether loopdetect frame
Function
Enable the Loop Detection Frame sender.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
ether <number> loopdetect frame <target>
Options
<number>
• ether port number
Set a port number to use with a decimal value.
When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).
When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")
<target>
Set the sender of loopdetect-frame.
• own
A Loop is detected when receiving a Loop Detection frame from this device.
• any
A Loop is detected when receiving a Loop Detection frame from any device.
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Specify the sender of Loop Detection frames used to detect a loop.
The following is the port which is blocked/offlined when a loop is detected.
<target>
Sender of Loop Detection frame
This device
The port which is blocked/offlined
own
The port reporting the Loop Detection
frame
any
This device
The port reportinging the Loop Detection
frame
Other device
The port receiving the Loop Detection
frame
Default
It is assumed that set the sender as own.
ether <number> loopdetect frame own
Port Information Settings
103
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.1.1.14 ether startup
Function
Set the offline status when it is started up.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
ether <number> startup <mode>
Options
<number>
• ether port number
Set a port number to use with a decimal value.
When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).
When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")
<mode>
• online
The port starts operation in the online state during device startup or during dynamic
definition reflection.
• offline
The port starts operation in the offline state during device startup or during dynamic
definition reflection. Also, wait for an offline release instruction from operator.
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Set the port in offline state during device startup or during reflection of dynamic
definitions.
During device startup or during change of dynamic definitions, the relationship between
the Ethernet port state and the port offline state is as follows.
Ether port state during device startup or dynamic definitions change
<mode>
Linkup possible
Linkup impossible
Port offline
online
Linkup or Communication Linkdown or
Communication
possible
Communication
impossible
impossible
staying in offline state
offline
Communication
impossible
Communication
impossible
Communication
impossible
entering offline state
entering offline state
staying in offline state
Caution
Default
It is assumed that forcible offline processing to the port is not performed during device
startup or during reflection of dynamic definitions.
ether startup online
Port Information Settings
104
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.1.1.15 ether recovery limit
Function
Set the upper limit number of linkdown times.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
ether <number> recovery limit <limit>
Options
<number>
• ether port number
Set a port number to use with a decimal value.
When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).
When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")
<limit>
• Number of linkdown times
Set the upper limit number of linkdown times, for the ports to go offline, with a decimal
value from 1 to 10.
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Set the number of times for linkdown as the upper limit for the relevant ports to go offline.
When the upper limit has been exceeded, the log is output to the SYSLOG and the ports
are offline.
Caution
Default
linkdown is reset to zero again.
The ports are not offline during linkdown, assuming that there is no upper limit.
Port Information Settings
105
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.1.1.16 ether downrelay port
Function
Set the linked port list information about the Linkdown Relay function.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
ether <number> downrelay port <portlist>
Options
<number>
• ether port number
Set a port number to use with a decimal value.
When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).
When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")
<portlist>
• Relay port list
Set a list of the Ethernet ports that go offline (linkdown) together with the linked
Ethernet port that has been set by this definition when the linkdown of the linked
Ethernet port occurs.
When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).
When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Set a list of the Ethernet ports that go offline (linkdown) together with the linked Ethernet
port that has been set by this definition when the linkdown of the Ethernet port occurs.
If the linkdown relay operation occurs, the linked port goes offline, and the log is output to
the SYSLOG.
Caution
• The definition is applied normally even if the set port is included on the relay operation
port list. However, if the set only port is included on the list, no relay operation occurs
but only the set port goes offline.
• When the Ethernet port type is a linkaggregation port, and linked port list information
for the Linkdown Relay function of the linkaggregation is set, the Linkdown Relay
function of the linkaggregation becomes enable and this definition is ignored.
• The linked port does not go offline at the Linkdown operation during the dynamic
definition change on the Ethernet port where this command is set.
Default
The linkdown relay function is not executed, assuming that port list information has not
been set.
Port Information Settings
106
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.1.1.17 ether downrelay recovery mode
Function
Set offline state release operation on the Linkdown Relay function of the Ethernet port.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
ether <number> downrelay recovery mode <mode>
Options
<number>
• The Ethernet port number
Set a port number to use with a decimal value.
When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).
When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")
<mode>
Set offline state release operation on the linked port list.
• manual
Specify offline state release with command.
• auto
Specify offline state release with linkup.
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Set offline state release operation from the offline port set on the linked port list
information of the Linkdown Relay function.
Setting "manual" for the releasing operation enables the releasing operation of the linked
If the release setting is "auto", the linked ports offline release is possible with the linkdown
definition change.
When the releasing offline operation by linkup is executed when "auto" is set, the system
log is output.
Caution
• When the Ethernet port where the Linkdown Relay function is set is in an offline state,
state to be linked up.
• Even if the linked port is in an offline state due to something other than the Linkdown
when releasing the offline state.
• When the Ethernet port type is a linkaggregation port, and the linked port list
information for the Linkdown Relay function of the linkaggregation is set, the Linkdown
Relay function of the linkaggregation becomes enable and this definition is ignored.
• Even if "auto" is set for release operation, offline state release operation will not be
executed to the ether ports still in a linkup state since some ports are already shifting to
online or offline state.
• Linkdown Relay function operates by ether port or by linkaggregation, but not by
backup port.
For this reason, when the same link operation port is set on an ether or linkaggregation
port in the same backup group, and "auto" is set for offline state release operation, the
release operation may not be executed because the operation is performed by one port
at a time.
Default
It is assumed that "manual" was specified for the linked port list offline state release
operation.
ether <number> downrelay recovery mode manual
Port Information Settings
107
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.1.1.18 ether downrelay recovery cause
Function
Set the target parameters for releasing the offline state on the Linkdown Relay function of
the Ethernet port.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
ether <number> downrelay recovery cause <cause>
Options
<number>
• The Ethernet port number
Set a port number to use with a decimal value.
When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).
When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")
<cause>
Specify the offline parameters targeted for releasing the offline state of linked port from
the following.
• downrelay
Specify when offline parameters with the Linkdown Relay function are targeted for
release.
• all
Release all the parameters offline states.
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Set the offline parameters targeted to releasing offline state lead by linkup when "auto"
was specified on "ether downrelay recovery" command.
Set the parameters assigned for releasing of offline state during the releasing operation.
Caution
Default
mode" command. The definition is ignored when "manual" is specified.
• The offline state is released without depending on this command definition when the
"online" command in the linked port is executed, or during dynamic definition change
accompanied by releasing of the offline state.
It is assumed that "downrelay" was specified for the target parameters of offline state
release of the linked port list.
ether <number> downrelay recovery cause downrelay
Port Information Settings
108
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.1.1.19 ether description
Function
Define the text description for a ether port
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
ether <number> description <description>
Options
<number>
• The Ethernet port number
Set a port number to use with a decimal value.
When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).
When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")
<description>
• Description
Define the description for a ether port with up to 50 characters from 0x21, 0x23 to 0x7e
of ASCII code.
Use Mode
Explanation
Caution
Configuration mode (admin class)
Defines the description text for each ether port.
This description is used also for the SNMP agent function.
The SNMP agent function sets this description to ifAlias MIB (OID:1.3.6.1.2.1.31.1.1.1.18).
Default
No ether port descriptions are defined.
Port Information Settings
109
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.1.1.20 linkaggregation algorithm
Function
Set the load distribution algorithm of link aggregation.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
linkaggregation <group> algorithm <type>
Options
<group>
• Link aggregation group number
Set a link aggregation group number with a decimal number.
Range
Model
1 to 13
1 to 26
1 to 10
XG0224
XG0448
XG2600
<type>
Specify the load distribution algorithm.
• sa-mac
Distribute frames based on the source MAC address.
• da-mac
Distribute frames based on the destination MAC address.
• both-mac
Distribute frames based on the exclusively ORed (XORed) source and destination
MAC addresses.
• sa-ip
Distribute frames based on the source IP address.
• da-ip
Distribute frames based on the destination IP address.
• both-ip
Distribute frames based on the exclusively ORed (XORed) source and destination IP
addresses.
Use Mode
Explanation
Default
Configuration mode (admin class)
Set an algorithm for each link aggregation group.
It is assumed that "both-mac" has been set for the load distribution algorithm of the link
aggregation.
linkaggregation <group> algorithm both-mac
Port Information Settings
110
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.1.1.21 linkaggregation mode
Function
Set the link aggregation operation mode.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
linkaggregation <group> mode <la_mode>
Options
<group>
• Link aggregation group number
Set a link aggregation group number with a decimal number.
Range
Model
1 to 13
1 to 26
1 to 10
XG0224
XG0448
XG2600
<la_mode>
• Link aggregation operation mode
Set the following operation mode.
static
: Static operation
: Dynamic operation with LACP enabled by "active".
active
passive : Dynamic operation with LACP enabled by "passive".
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Set an operation mode of the link aggregation.
If static is specified, the static link aggregation without LACP is configured.
If active or passive is specified, the dynamic link aggregation that uses the LACP is set.
If the active mode is specified, the LACPDU's cyclic transmission is automatically sent to
the remote LACP device.
If the passive mode is specified, the LACPDU's cyclic transmission starts only when an
LACPDU is received from the remote LACP. In other words, no link aggregation is
configured if both devices are in the passive mode.
Default
It is assumed that the static operation mode has been set for the link aggregation.
linkaggregation <group> mode static
Port Information Settings
111
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.1.1.22 linkaggregation type
Function
Set a link aggregation type.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
linkaggregation <group> type normal
linkaggregation <group> type backup <backup_group> <priority>
Options
<group>
• Link aggregation group number
Set a link aggregation group number with a decimal number.
Range
Model
1 to 13
1 to 26
1 to 10
XG0224
XG0448
XG2600
normal : Normal link aggregation
Multiplexed multiple ports are used as a normal ports.
backup : Backup link aggregation.
Multiplexed multiple ports are used as a backup ports.
<backup_group>
• Backup group number
Set a backup group number with a decimal number.
Range
Model
1 to 13
1 to 26
1 to 13
XG0224
XG0448
XG2600
<priority>
• Priority of backup port
It is a priority of the link aggregation used as a backup port.
Set the master port or backup port if "type backup" has been specified.
master: Master port
backup: Backup port
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Set a link aggregation type.
Select the normal link aggregation or the backup link aggregation.
The backup link aggregation can also be used for backup of broadband ports.
Caution
Cautions on "type backup" setting
• If a link aggregation, that has the same priority as the port defined as "master" or
"backup", exists in the same backup group, the port will be enabled as a backup port
but the link aggregation will be disabled.
• If more than one master or backup link aggregation exists in the same backup group,
the link aggregation with a smaller link aggregation group number will be enabled. The
backup link aggregation with a larger link aggregation group number will be disabled.
• If the master or backup link aggregation is undefined in the same backup group, its
settings are disabled.
Port Information Settings
112
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
• If definition conditions such as described above are contradictory, the relevant ports
are not linked up for use.
Change the settings referring to the system log message.
Default
It is assumed that the normal link aggregation has been specified.
linkaggregation <group> type normal
5.1.1.23 linkaggregation collecting minimum
Function
Set the minimum number of member ports for link aggregation.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
linkaggregation <group> collecting minimum <count>
Options
<group>
• Link aggregation group number
Set a link aggregation group number with a decimal number.
Range
Model
1 to 13
1 to 26
1 to 10
XG0224
XG0448
XG2600
<count>
• Minimum number of member ports
Set the minimum number of member ports with a decimal number from 1 to 8, where
communication with link aggregation is allowed. However, the communication of link
aggregation is disabled if the number of ports connected to the link aggregation is less
than the minimum number of member ports.
Also, the communication of link aggregation is disabled if the number of connected
ports decreases below the minimum number of member ports due to failure or other
reasons.
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Set the minimum number of member ports to allow communication of the link
aggregation.
This command is used to stop communication until the link aggregation is assigned the
specific bandwidth in redundant configuration or other. If it is under the specific
bandwidth, the link aggregation communication is disabled.
Caution
Default
If a number larger than the number of member ports effective for the setting is specified
as the minimum number of member ports, the communication of this link aggregation is
disabled.
It is assumed that 1 has been specified as the minimum number of member ports for the
link aggregation.
linkaggregation <group> collecting minimum 1
Port Information Settings
113
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.1.1.24 linkaggregation icmpwatch address
Function
Set the destination address for "ether" L3 monitoring of link aggregation.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
linkaggregation <group> icmpwatch address <dst_addr>
Options
<group>
• Link aggregation group number
Set a link aggregation group number with a decimal number.
Range
Model
1 to 13
1 to 26
1 to 10
XG0224
XG0448
XG2600
<dst_addr>
• Destination IP address to be monitored
Specify the destination IP address to be monitored.
The allowable range is as follows:
1.0.0.1 to 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 to 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 to 223.255.255.254
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Set the operation information for destination monitoring.
This command sends an ICMP ECHO packet from the specified link aggregation group to
the destination IP address, specified by <dst_addr>, and checks the presence of the
destination by receiving a response.
Caution
Default
Do not set the IP address of the local device in <dst_addr>. Also, make sure that the
specified IP address is included in the same subnet.
If any of the above three addresses is specified, the Ethernet L3 monitoring function will
not operate normally.
It is assumed that the Ethernet L3 monitoring function is not used for the link aggregation.
Port Information Settings
114
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.1.1.25 linkaggregation icmpwatch interval
Function
Set various types of "ether" L3 monitoring intervals for link aggregation.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
linkaggregation <group> icmpwatch interval <interval> <timeout> [<retry>]
Options
<group>
• Link aggregation group number
Set a link aggregation group number with a decimal number.
Range
Model
1 to 13
1 to 26
1 to 10
XG0224
XG0448
XG2600
<interval>
• Transmission interval of normal ICMP ECHO packets
Specify the transmission interval of normal ICMP ECHO packets to be within the range
of 1 to 60 seconds (or 1 minute).
The unit shall be m (minute) or s (second).
<timeout>
• Monitoring timeout
Specify the monitoring timeout period as between 5 to 180 seconds (or 3 minutes). If
the time exceeds, this monitoring is considered as failed.
The unit should be in m (minute) or s (second).
<retry>
• Retransmission interval of ICMP ECHO packets
Specify the retransmission interval of ICMP ECHO packets between 1 to <timeout>-1
seconds if the normal ICMP ECHO packet transmission is not acknowledged.
The unit should be in m (minute) or s (second).
The default is 1s.
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Set the operation information for destination monitoring.
The destination is monitored in the interval specified by <interval> while the response to
ICMP ECHO packet is being received normally. If the response to ICMP ECHO packet is
not received, the packet transmission is repeated at the intervals specified in <retry>. If
no response is returned within the time period specified by <timeout>, a communication
failure is assumed and an abnormal detection is reported. Accordingly, all the member
ports specified in <group> are offline.
Caution
Default
It is assumed that the 10-second transmission interval during normal communication, the
5-second timeout for monitoring, and the 1-second retransmission interval have been
specified.
linkaggregation <group> icmpwatch interval 10s 5s 1s
Port Information Settings
115
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.1.1.26 linkaggregation downrelay port
Function
Set the linked port list information about the linkaggregation Linkdown Relay function.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
linkaggregation <group> downrelay port <portlist>
Options
<group>
• Link aggregation group number
Set a link aggregation group number with a decimal number.
Range
Model
1 to 13
1 to 26
1 to 10
XG0224
XG0448
XG2600
<portlist>
• Relay port list
Set a list of the Ethernet ports that places the linked port offline (linkdown) by linkdown
where this definition has been set.
When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).
When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
If a linkdown occurs in the linkaggregation set with this definition, set a list of the Ethernet
ports that will also linkdown (port linkdown).
If a linkdown relay operation occurs, its linked port goes to an offline state, and a system
log is output.
Caution
• The definition is applied normally even if a port set with linkaggregation is included on
the relay operation port list.
• When the Ethernet port type is a linkaggregation port, and this definition is set in the
linkaggregation settings, this definition becomes enabled and the Linkdown Relay
function is ignored.
• The linked port does not change to offline status during the dynamic definition change
Linkdown operation on the Ethernet port where this command is set.
Default
The Linkdown Relay function is not executed, assuming that port list information has not
been set.
Port Information Settings
116
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.1.1.27 linkaggregation downrelay recovery mode
Function
Set offline state release operation on the Linkdown Relay function of linkaggregation.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
linkaggregation <group> downrelay recovery mode <mode>
Options
<group>
• Link aggregation group number
Set a link aggregation group number with a decimal number.
Range
Model
1 to 13
1 to 26
1 to 10
XG0224
XG0448
XG2600
<mode>
Set the releasing offline state operation on the linked port list.
• manual
Specify offline state release with command.
• auto
Specify offline state release with linkup.
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Set offline state release operation from the offline port set in the linked port list
information of the Linkdown Relay function.
Setting "manual" for the release operation enables the release operation of the linked
If the release setting is "auto", the linked ports offline release is possible with the linkdown
definition change.
If the offline release operation with linkup is executed when "auto" is set, the system log
is output.
Caution
• When the linkaggregation port where the Linkdown Relay function is set is in its offline
not change the linked state.
• Even if the linked port is in its offline state due to something other than the Linkdown
Relay, set the parameters with the "linkaggregation downrelay recovery cause"
command when releasing the offline state.
• Even if "auto" is set for release operation, offline state release operation will not be
executed to the ether ports still in a linkup state since some ports are already shifting to
online or offline state.
• Linkdown Relay function operates by ether port or by linkaggregation, but not by
backup port.
For this reason, when the same link operation port is set on an ether or linkaggregation
port in the same backup group, and "auto" is set for offline state release operation, the
release operation may not be executed because the operation is performed by one port
at a time.
Port Information Settings
117
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
Default
It is assumed that "manual" was specified for releasing the offline state operation of the
linked port list.
linkaggregation <group> downrelay recovery mode manual
5.1.1.28 linkaggregation downrelay recovery cause
Function
Set the target parameters for offline state release in the Linkdown Relay function of the
linkaggregation.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
linkaggregation <group> downrelay recovery cause <cause>
Options
<group>
• Link aggregation group number
Set a link aggregation group number with a decimal number.
Range
Model
1 to 13
1 to 26
1 to 10
XG0224
XG0448
XG2600
<cause>
Specify the offline parameters targeted to offline state release of the linked port from the
following.
• downrelay
Specify when offline parameters by the Linkdown Relay function are targeted for
release.
• all
Release offline state of all parameters.
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Set the offline parameters lead by linkup assigned for releasing the offline state when
"auto" is specified in the "ether downrelay recovery" command.
Caution
• This command is enabled only when "auto" is set for offline state release operation
The definition is ignored when "manual" is specified.
command in the linked port is executed, or during dynamic definition change
accompanied by releasing the offline state.
Default
It is assumed that "downrelay" was specified as the target parameters for offline state
release of the linked port list.
linkaggregation <group> downrelay recovery cause downrelay
Port Information Settings
118
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.1.1.29 linkaggregation description
Function
Define the text description for a link aggregation group.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
linkaggregation <group> description <description>
Options
<group>
• Link aggregation group number
Set a link aggregation group number with a decimal number.
Range
Model
1 to 13
1 to 26
1 to 10
XG0224
XG0448
XG2600
<description>
• Description
Define the description for a link aggregation group with up to 50 characters from 0x21,
0x23 to 0x7e of ASCII code.
Use Mode
Explanation
Caution
Configuration mode (admin class)
Defines the description text for each link aggregation group.
This description is used also for the SNMP agent function.
The SNMP agent function sets this description to ifAlias MIB (OID:1.3.6.1.2.1.31.1.1.1.18).
Default
No link aggregation group descriptions are defined.
Port Information Settings
119
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.1.1.30 backup mode
Function
Set the backup port selection method.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
backup <group> mode <mode>
Options
<group>
• Backup group number
Set a backup group number with a decimal number.
Range
Model
1 to 13
1 to 26
1 to 13
XG0224
XG0448
XG2600
<mode>
Set a port selection mode if both master and backup ports can be used.
• master
Use the master port first.
• earlier
Use the port that has been linked up first and enabled for use.
Use Mode
Explanation
Default
Configuration mode (admin class)
Set how to select a method of port selection for each backup group.
It is assumed that the master port is set to be used first as backup switching mode.
backup <group> mode master
Port Information Settings
120
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.1.1.31 backup standby
Function
Set the standby status of backup ports.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
backup <group> standby <mode>
Options
<group>
• Backup group number
Set a backup group number with a decimal number.
Range
Model
1 to 13
1 to 26
1 to 13
XG0224
XG0448
XG2600
<mode>
Set the standby status of backup ports.
• online
The backup port in standby status does not go offline.
• offline
The backup port in standby status goes offline.
Configuration mode (admin class)
Use Mode
Explanation
Set the standby status of backup ports.
If the standby state is specified to offline, the backup port in standby status goes offline.
control is executed.
If the currently operating backup port goes down, the offline port is released.
The released port is switched unless it is still offline due to another function or has an
error.
Caution
• When the backup port selection method is set as a "master", backup priority port is not
offline even it is set to be offline in standby status.
If the backup priority port must be offline, set the backup port selection method as
"earlier".
• When backup port is set to be offline in standby status, offline port cannot be released
automatically by any function other than backup port function. The same is true for the
Default
It is assumed that "online" has been specified as the standby status of backup ports.
backup <group> standby online
Port Information Settings
121
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.1.2
MAC Information
This section explains about the commands related to MAC information.
5.1.2.1 ether mac storm
Function
Set the broadcast and multicast storm control information.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
XG2600
ether <number> mac storm <threshold_broadcast> <threshold_multicast> <action>
XG0224/XG0448
ether <number> mac storm <threshold> <broadcast> <multicast>
Options
<number>
• ether port number
Set a port number to use with a decimal value.
When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).
When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")
<threshold_broadcast>
• Threshold of broadcast traffic
Set the threshold value for broadcast storm traffic with Kbit/s, Mbit/s or Gbit/s
8k - 8000000k
1m - 8000m
1g - 8g
(Storm monitoring does not start if the threshold is set to 0.)
<threshold_multicast>
• Threshold of multicast traffic
Set the threshold value for multicast storm traffic with Kbit/s, Mbit/s or Gbit/s
8k - 8000000k
1m - 8000m
1g - 8g
(Storm monitoring does not start if the threshold is set to 0.)
<action>
Set the action which occurs if the traffic exceeds the threshold.
• discard
Discard the packets which exceed the threshold
• close
Close the port (offline)
<threshold>
• Threshold
Set the traffic threshold value for the broadcast or multicast storm.
Set the number of packets per second in the following range.
(Storm monitoring does not start if the threshold is set to 0.)
Range
Model
0 to 30,000,000
XG0224 / XG0448
Port Information Settings
122
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
<broadcast>
<multicast>
Set the operation that occurs if the traffic exceeds the threshold.
• off
The guard function is disabled.
• discard
Discard the packets that exceed the threshold.
• close
Close the port (offline).
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
XG0224 / XG0448
Set the broadcast or multicast storm control information.
If "discard" or "close" is specified, the systemlog is output when the threshold value is
exceeded or the device is restored.
XG2600
Set the broadcast or multicast storm control information.
If "discard" or "close" is specified, the systemlog is output when the threshold value is
exceeded or the device is restored.
Storm monitoring doesn’t start If the threshold of both broadcast and multicast is set to 0.
Caution
Default
XG0224 / XG0448
It might be considered that broadcast/multicast roughhouse control information is set,
and the statistical information of correspondence port is cleared with the reception rate
exceeds the threshold.
N/A
Port Information Settings
123
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.1.3
STP Information
This section explains about the commands related to STP information.
5.1.3.1 ether stp use
Function
Set the STP availability.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
ether <number> stp use <mode>
Options
<number>
• ether port number
Set a port number to use with a decimal value.
When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).
When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")
<mode>
• on
Specify it when STP is used.
• off
Specify it when STP is not used.
Use Mode
Explanation
Caution
Configuration mode (admin class)
Set whether or not to enable the STP.
If the STP operation mode of the device is OFF (stp mode disabled), the "stp use on"
setting is ignored and disabled.
If the STP operation mode of the bridge is case except OFF (stp mode disabled), the
communication on the port may temporarily fail by the change of topology.
Set "stp use off" for the port where the STP is not used.
Default
It is assumed that the STP is used in the ether port.
ether <number> stp use on
Port Information Settings
124
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.1.3.2 ether stp domain cost
Function
Set the path cost.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
ether <number> stp domain <instance-id> cost {auto|<path_cost>}
Options
<number>
• ether port number
Set a port number to use with a decimal value.
When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).
When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")
<instance-id>
• STP instance ID number
Specify a decimal value from 0 to 15.
For non-MSTP operation mode, entering a value from 1 to 15 makes it invalid, although
the allowable range is set with a value from 0 to 15.
auto
Determine the cost automatically.
<path_cost>
• Path cost
Set the path cost with a decimal value from 1 to 200000000.
Use Mode
Explanation
Caution
Configuration mode (admin class)
Set a path cost of the STP port.
The cost specified by the instance ID 1 to 15 is valid only when the device is in the MSTP
operation mode (stp mode mstp), but the set value is ignored when the device is in the
non-MSTP operation mode.
Default
It is assumed that automatic setting is used for the ether port path cost.
ether <number> stp domain 0 cost auto
Port Information Settings
125
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.1.3.3 ether stp domain priority
Function
Set the priority.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
ether <number> stp domain <instance-id> priority <priority>
Options
<number>
• ether port number
Set a port number to use with a decimal value.
When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).
When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")
<instance-id>
• Instance ID number
Specify a decimal value from 0 to 15.
For non-MSTP operation mode, entering a value from 1 to 15 makes it invalid, although
the allowable range is set with a value from 0 to 15.
<priority>
• Priority
Set the port priority with a decimal value from 0 to 240.
A smaller value has a higher priority.
Use Mode
Explanation
Caution
Configuration mode (admin class)
Set the port priority.
Specify an integer (valid value) that can be divided by 16 in <priority>.
Valid values: 0, 16, 32, 48, 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 144, 160, 176, 192, 208, 224, 240
If an integer other than the valid values is specified, this setting is disabled.
The priority specified by the instance ID 1 to 15 is valid only when the device is in the
MSTP operation mode (stp mode mstp), but the set value is ignored when the device is in
the non-MSTP operation mode.
Default
It is assumed that 128 is used for the STP port priority.
ether <number> stp domain 0 priority 128
Port Information Settings
126
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.1.3.4 ether stp force-version
Function
Set the STP Force Protocol Version.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
ether <number> stp force-version <version>
Options
<number>
• ether port number
Set a port number to use with a decimal value.
When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).
When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")
<version>
• STP Force protocol version
Set it with a decimal value from 0 to 3.
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Set the STP Force protocol version.
STP Force protocol version (0: STP, 1: Unsupported, 2: RSTP, 3: MSTP)
Caution
If the device is in the MSTP operation mode (stp mode mstp), the STP Force protocol
version can be set within the range of 0 to 3 and the STP, RSTP or MSTP is operable.
If the device is in the RSTP operation mode (stp mode rstp), the STP Force protocol
version can be set within the range of 0 to 2 and the STP or RSTP is operable.
If the device is in the STP operation mode (stp mode stp), the STP Force protocol version
can be set to 0 only.
If a version outside of the valid range is set, this setting will be disabled.
Default
The Ethernet port operates based on the device's operation mode (stp mode).
Port Information Settings
127
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.1.4
LLDP Information
This section explains about the commands related to LLDP Information.
5.1.4.1 ether lldp mode
Function
Set LLDP function
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
ether <number> lldp mode <mode>
Options
<number>
• ether port number
Set a port number to use with a decimal value.
When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).
When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")
<mode>
• LLDP function mode
disable : Not work LLDP function.
enable : Send and receive LLDP information
send
: Send LLDP information
receive : receive LLDP information
Use Mode
Explanation
Default
Configuration mode (admin class)
Set LLDP mode of the specified ether port.
It is assumed that the LLDP function is disabled.
ether lldp mode disable
Port Information Settings
128
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.1.4.2 ether lldp info
Function
Set LLDP information which is sent
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
ether <number> lldp info port-description <mode>
ether <number> lldp info system-name <mode>
ether <number> lldp info system-description <mode>
ether <number> lldp info system-capabilities <mode>
ether <number> lldp info management-address <mode>
ether <number> lldp info port-vlan-id <mode>
ether <number> lldp info port-and-protocol-vlan-id <mode>
ether <number> lldp info vlan-name <mode>
ether <number> lldp info protocol-identity <mode>
ether <number> lldp info mac-phy-configuration-status <mode>
ether <number> lldp info power-via-mdi <mode>
ether <number> lldp info link-aggregation <mode>
ether <number> lldp info maximum-frame-size <mode>
Options
<number>
• ether port number
Set a port number to use with a decimal value.
When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).
When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")
port-description
system-name
system-description
system-capabilities
management-address
port-vlan-id
port-and-protocol-vlan-id
vlan-name
protocol-identity
mac-phy-configuration-status
power-via-mdi
link-aggregation
maximum-frame-size
Port Information Settings
129
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
• LLDP Information Name
Specify LLDP Information Name (TLV of 802.1AB)
port-description
: Port Description Information (Port Description TLV)
: System Name Information (System Name TLV)
system-name
system-description
system-capabilities
management-address
: Sysrem description Information (System Description TLV)
: System Capabilities Information (System Capabilities TLV)
: Management Address Information
(Management Address TLV)
port-vlan-id
: Port VLAN ID Information (IEEE802.1 Port VLAN ID TLV)
port-and-protocol-vlan-id : Prootocol VLAN ID Information
(IEEE802.1 Port And Protocol VLAN ID TLV)
vlan-name
: VLAN Name Information (IEEE802.1 VLAN Name TLV)
: Protocol VLAN Identitiy Information
protocol-identity
(IEEE802.1 Protocol Identity TLV)
mac-phy-configuration-status
: MAC/PHY Configuration /Status Infomation
(IEEE802.3 MAC/PHY Configuration/Status TLV)
: MDI Power Information (IEEE802.3 Power Via MDI TLV)
: Link Aggregation Information
power-via-mdi
link-aggregation
(IEEE802.3 Link Aggregation TLV)
maximum-frame-size
: Maximum Frame Size Information
(IEEE802.3 Maximum Frame Size TLV)
<mode>
• Send mode
Set whether LLDP information is sent or not
enable: send LLDP information
disable: not send LLDP information
Use Mode
Explanation
Default
Configuration mode (admin class)
Set whether LLDP information is sent or not
It is assumed that Send mode of all LLDP Information is "enable".
ether <number> lldp info port-description enable
ether <number> lldp info system-name enable
ether <number> lldp info system-description enable
ether <number> lldp info system-capabilities enable
ether <number> lldp info management-address enable
ether <number> lldp info port-vlan-id enable
ether <number> lldp info port-and-protocol-vlan-id enable
ether <number> lldp info vlan-name enable
ether <number> lldp info protocol-identity enable
ether <number> lldp info mac-phy-configuration-status enable
ether <number> lldp info power-via-mdi enable
ether <number> lldp info link-aggregation enable
ether <number> lldp info maximum-frame-size enable
Port Information Settings
130
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.1.4.3 ether lldp vlan
Function
Set VLAN for sending LLDP information
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
ether <number> ldp vlan <vlanidlist>
Options
<number>
• ether port number
Set a port number to use with a decimal value.
When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).
When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")
vlan <vlanidlist>
Set VLAN ID for port-and-protocol-vlan-id, vlan-name,protocol-identity transmission.
Use Mode
Explanation
Default
Configuration mode (admin class)
Set VLAN ID for ort-and-protocol-vlan-id, vlan-name, protocol-identitytransmission.
All VLAN information is sent.
5.1.4.4 ether lldp notification
Function
Set SNMP Notification Trap transmission information
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
ether <number> lldp notification <mode>
Options
<number>
• ether port number
Set a port number to use with a decimal value.
When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).
When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")
<mode>
• SNMP Notification Trap Transmission Mode
Set whether SNMP Notification Trap is sent or not when LLDP information of the
specified physical port is changed.
enable: Send SNMP Notification Trap
disable: Not send SNMP Notification Trap
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Set whether SNMP Notification Trap is sent or not when LLDP information of the
specified physical port is changed.
Caution
Default
When snmp service command is disabled or snmp traplldpremtableschange coomad is
disabled, SNMP Notification Trap (lldpRemTablesChange Trap) is not sent.
lldp notification disable.
ether <number> lldp notification disable
Port Information Settings
131
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.1.5
Filter Information
This section explains about the commands related to filter information.
5.1.5.1 ether macfilter
Function
Set the MAC filter.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
ether <number> macfilter <count> <action> <acl>
Options
<number>
• ether port number
Set a port number to use with a decimal value.
When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).
When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")
<count>
• Priority
Set the filtering priority to be set with a decimal value.
A smaller value has a higher priority.
The specified value is sorted and renumbered in sequence. If a filtering definition with
the same value already exists, the existing one will be changed.
Range
Model
0 to 511
0 to 63
XG0224 / XG0448
XG2600
<action>
• pass
Transmit the packets that match the "acl mac", "acl vlan", "acl ip", "acl icmp", "acl tcp"
or "acl udp" definition of access control list.
• reject
Discard the packets that match the "acl mac", "acl vlan", "acl ip", "acl icmp", "acl tcp", or
"acl udp" definition of access control list.
<acl>
• ACL definition number
Specify the ACL definition number of the access control list where the packet pattern to
be filtered has been defined.
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Set the MAC filtering for each Ethernet port.
For the ingress packets that match the "acl mac", "acl vlan", "acl ip", "acl icmp", "acl tcp",
or "acl udp" definitions of the access control list which has been specified by <acl>, the
filter processing is executed in the way as specified by <action>.
Caution
Note 1.
If none of "acl mac", "acl vlan" and "acl ip" definitions exist on the access control list
which has been specified by <acl> or if the access control list specified by <acl> does not
exist, the packets are not filtered.
Note 2.
The packet filtering default value is "pass".
No packets are filtered if only "pass" is set in <action>.
Port Information Settings
132
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
[XG2600]
Note 3.
"acl mac llc" definitions can not filter llc frames with the VLAN tag.
Note 4.
This command is unavailable if the allowable upper limit for the device is exceeded.
The allowable upper limits are as follows.
• Upper limit based on "commands"
64 commands for the entire device.
commands.
The priority for each command is as follows.
A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.
A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.
A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.
A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.
A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.
A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.
• Upper limit based on "masks"
64 masks for the entire device.
protocol" commands.
The priority for each command is as follows.
A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.
A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.
A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.
A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.
A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.
A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.
Port Information Settings
133
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
The number of masks that each command use depends on applied ACL.
When Multiple ACL are applied, the number of masks amount to sum total, and
depends on ACLs the number of masks amount to less than sum total.
The following is the number of masks for ACL.
ACL
number of masks
"acl mac"
define LSAP of llc
not define LSAP of llc
"acl vlan"
3
1
1
not define src IP address
not define tos/dscp value
not define tos/dscp value
define src IP address
1
3
not define dst IP address
define dst IP address
1
use same netmask for src and dst IP address
not define tos/dscp value
1
3
3
not define tos/dscp value
use different netmask for src and dst IP address
"vlan protocol" definition
define vlan protocol ipv4
number of masks
3
1
1
1
define vlan protocol ipv6
define vlan protocol <count> ether
define vlan protocol <count> llc
• Upper limit based on "actions"
16 actions for the entire device.
The following commands spend 1 action regardless of multiple use.
A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.
A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.
A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.
The following commands spend 1 action regardless of multiple use.
- vlan <vid> protocol ipv4
- vlan <vid> protocol ipv6
Port Information Settings
134
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
The following commands spend 1 action for each.
If same <tos_value> is used, the commands use 1 action for them.
If same <dscp_value> is used, the commands use 1 action for them.
If same <queue_value> is used, the commands use 1 action for them.
- ether <number> qos aclmap <count> tos <tos_value> <acl>
- ether <number >qos aclmap <count> dscp <dscp_value> <acl>
- ether <number> qos aclmap <count> queue <queue_value> <acl>
- vlan <vid> qos aclmap <count> tos <tos_value> <acl>
- vlan <vid> qos aclmap <count> dscp <dscp_value> <acl>
- vlan <vid> qos aclmap <count> queue <queue_value> <acl>
- lan <number> ip dscp <count> acl <acl_count> <dscp_value>
The following commands spend 1 action for each.
If same <vid> is used, the commands use 1 action for them.
- vlan <vid> protocol <count> ether
- vlan <vid> protocol <count> llc
Note 5.
When the port type of the Ethernet port is a link aggregation, the same setting is needed
in all the member ports where the link aggregation is composed.
[XG0224/XG0448]
Note 3.
This command is unavailable if the allowable upper limit for the device is exceeded.
The allowable upper limits are as follows.
• Upper limit based on "commands"
128 commands for the entire device.
The priority for each command is as follows.
A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.
A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.
A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.
• Upper limit based on rule
128 rules for the entire device.
rules to be used varies depending on the contents of the specified acl as shown below.
The number of rules for each ACL is as follows.
- For ACL to set TCP or UDP
Result of multiplication between the number of source ports and the number of
destination ports for TCP or UDP
- For ACL to set ICMP
Result of multiplication between the number of ICMP TYPEs and the number of
ICMP CODEs for ICMP
- For ACL not to set TCP, UDP, or ICMP
1
Port Information Settings
135
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
change resource distribution.
Note 4.
Up to 700 commands can be set for the entire device, including the definitions which
commands.
Note 5.
When the port type of the Ethernet port is a link aggregation, set it only to the anchor port
where the link aggregation is composed.
Default
It is assumed that this option has not been set.
5.1.5.2 ether macfilter move
Function
Change the priority of MAC filter.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
ether <number> macfilter move <count> <new_count>
Options
<number>
• ether port number
Set a port number to use with a decimal value.
When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).
When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")
<count>
• Source priority
Set the source priority with a decimal value.
<new_count>
• Destination priority
Set the destination priority with a decimal value.
Range
Model
0 to 511
0 to 63
XG0224 / XG0448
XG2600
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Change the priority of MAC filtering for each Ethernet port.
If the current priority is set as <count>, change the priority of this definition to
<new_count>.
When the definition is changed, the priority is renumbered.
Default
N/A due to an edit command.
Port Information Settings
136
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.1.6
QoS Information
This section explains about the commands related to QoS information.
5.1.6.1 ether qos aclmap
Function
Set the Quality of Service (QoS) conversion.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
ether <number> qos aclmap <count> <action> <value> <acl>
Options
<number>
• ether port number
Set a port number to use with a decimal value.
When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).
When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")
<count>
• Priority
Set the QoS conversion priority with a decimal value.
A smaller value has a higher priority.
If multiple <action> are executed for the same packet and if they conflict with each
other, the <action> with a higher priority is executed.
The specified value is sorted and renumbered in sequence. If a filtering definition with
the same value already exists, the existing one will be changed.
Range
Model
0 to 511
0 to 63
XG0224 / XG0448
XG2600
<action>
• cos [XG0224/XG0448]
Rewrite the "cos" value (the "user priority" value in the Tag Control Information (TCI)
field of the Tagged VLAN) of packets that match the "acl mac", "acl vlan", "acl ip", "acl
icmp", "acl tcp", or "acl udp" definition of access control list.
• dscp
Rewrite the "dscp" value (the high-order 6 bits in the TOS field of IP header), if packets
that match the "acl mac", "acl vlan", "acl ip", "acl icmp", "acl tcp", or "acl udp" definition
of access control list are IP packets.
• tos
Rewrite the "ip precedence" value (the high-order 3 bits in the TOS field of IP header),
if packets that match the "acl mac", "acl vlan", "acl ip", "acl icmp", "acl tcp", or "acl udp"
definition of access control list are IP packets.
• queue
Change the queue at the output port that is used to output the input packets that match
the "acl mac", "acl vlan", "acl ip", "acl icmp", "acl tcp", or "acl udp" definition of access
control list.
Port Information Settings
137
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
<value>
• Replacing value
If "cos" is selected in <action>:
- <cos_value>
Set the replaced "cos" value with a decimal value from 0 to 7.
- tos
Replace the "cos" value with the "ip precedence" value in the packet.
If "dscp" is selected in <action>:
- <dscp_value>
Set the replaced "dscp" value with a decimal value from 0 to 63.
If "tos" is selected in <action>:
- <tos_value>
Set the replaced "ip precedence" value with a decimal value from 0 to 7.
- cos
Replace the "ip precedence" value with the "cos" value.
If "queue" is selected in <action>:
- <queue_value>
Specify a queue number of the output port to be used.
A larger value indicates a queue with a higher output priority.
Range
Model
0 to 7
XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
<acl>
• ACL definition number
Specify the ACL definition number of the access control list where the packet pattern to
configure QoS conversion has been defined.
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Set the QoS (quality of service) of each Ethernet port.
For the ingress packets that match the "acl mac", "acl vlan", "acl ip", "acl icmp", "acl tcp",
or "acl udp" definitions of the access control list which has been specified by <acl>, the
QoS processing is executed in the way as specified by <action>.
Caution
Note 1.
If none of "acl mac", "acl vlan" and "acl ip" definitions exist on the access control list
which has been specified by <acl> or if the access control list specified by <acl> does not
exist, the packets are not filtered.
[XG2600]
Note 2.
If a queue is selected by <action> and if this queue has not been associated with the cos
Note 3.
"acl mac llc" definitions can not filter llc frames with the VLAN tag.
Port Information Settings
138
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
Note 4.
This command is unavailable if the allowable upper limit for the device is exceeded.
The allowable upper limits are as follows.
• Upper limit based on "commands"
64 commands for the entire device.
commands.
The priority for each command is as follows.
A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.
A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.
A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.
A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.
A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.
A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.
• Upper limit based on "masks"
64 masks for the entire device.
protocol" commands.
The priority for each command is as follows.
A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.A
smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.
A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.
A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.
A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.
A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.
A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.
The number of masks that each command use depends on applied ACL.
When Multiple ACL are applied, the number of masks amount to sum total, and
depends on ACLs the number of masks amount to less than sum total.
Port Information Settings
139
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
The following is the number of masks for ACL..
ACL
number of masks
"acl mac"
define LSAP of llc
3
1
1
not define LSAP of llc
"acl vlan"
not define src IP address
not define tos/dscp value
not define tos/dscp value
define src IP address
1
3
not define dst IP address
define dst IP address
1
use same netmask for src and dst IP address
not define tos/dscp value
not define tos/dscp value
use different netmask for src and dst IP address
1
3
3
"vlan protocol" definition
define vlan protocol ipv4
number of masks
3
define vlan protocol ipv6
1
1
1
define vlan protocol <count> ether
define vlan protocol <count> llc
• Upper limit based on "actions"
16 actions for the entire device.
The priority for each command is as follows.
A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.
A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.
A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.
The following commands spend 1 action regardless of multiple use.
- vlan <vid> protocol ipv4
- vlan <vid> protocol ipv6
Port Information Settings
140
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
The following commands spend 1 action for each.
If same <tos_value> is used, the commands use 1 action for them.
If same <dscp_value> is used, the commands use 1 action for them.
If same <queue_value> is used, the commands use 1 action for them.
- ether <number> qos aclmap <count> tos <tos_value> <acl>
- ether <number >qos aclmap <count> dscp <dscp_value> <acl>
- ether <number> qos aclmap <count> queue <queue_value> <acl>
- vlan <vid> qos aclmap <count> tos <tos_value> <acl>
- vlan <vid> qos aclmap <count> dscp <dscp_value> <acl>
- vlan <vid> qos aclmap <count> queue <queue_value> <acl>
- lan <number> ip dscp <count> acl <acl_count> <dscp_value>
The following commands spend 1 action for each.
If same <vid> is used, the commands use 1 action for them.
- vlan <vid> protocol <count> ether
- vlan <vid> protocol <count> llc
Note 5.
When the port type of the Ethernet port is a link aggregation, the same setting is needed
in all the member ports where the link aggregation is composed.
[XG0224/XG0448]
Note 2.
If a queue is selected by <action> and if this queue has not been associated with the cos
Note 3.
This command is unavailable if the allowable upper limit for the device is exceeded.
The allowable upper limits are as follows.
• Upper limit based on "commands"
128 commands for the entire device.
A smaller Ethernet port value has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.
A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.
A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.
• Upper limit based on rule
128 rules for the entire device.
number of rules to be used varies depending on the contents of the specified acl as
shown below.
The number of rules for each ACL is as follows.
- For ACL to set TCP or UDP
Result of multiplication between the number of source ports and the number of
destination ports for TCP or UDP
- For ACL to set ICMP
Result of multiplication between the number of ICMP TYPEs and the number of
ICMP CODEs for ICMP
Port Information Settings
141
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
- For ACL not to set TCP, UDP, or ICMP
1
resource distribution.
Note 4.
Up to 700 commands can be set for the entire device, including the definitions which refer
ip6 dscp" and "serverinfo filter" commands.
Note 5.
When the port type of the Ethernet port is a link aggregation, set it only to the anchor port
where the link aggregation is composed.
Default
It is assumed that this option has not been set.
5.1.6.2 ether qos aclmap move
Function
Change the QoS conversion priority of the Ethernet port.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
ether <number> qos aclmap move <count> <new_count>
Options
<number>
• ether port number
Set a port number to use with a decimal value.
When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).
When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")
<count>
• Source priority
Set the source priority with a decimal value.
<new_count>
• Destination priority
Set the destination priority with a decimal value.
Range
Model
0 to 511
0 to 63
XG0224 / XG0448
XG2600
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Change the priority of QoS definition for each Ethernet port.
If the current priority is set as <count>, change the priority of this definition to
<new_count>.
When the definition is changed, the priority is renumbered.
Default
N/A due to an edit command.
Port Information Settings
142
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.1.6.3 ether qos priority
Function
Set the priority.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
ether <number> qos priority <queue_priority>
Options
<number>
• ether port number
Set a port number to use with a decimal value.
When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).
When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")
<queue_priority>
• Queue priority
Set the default queue priority with a decimal value from 0 to 7.
Use Mode
Explanation
Default
Configuration mode (admin class)
Set a tag priority value to be assigned to the untagged receive packet.
It is assumed that 0 has been specified as the queue priority.
ether <number> qos priority 0
Port Information Settings
143
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.1.6.4 ether qos mode
Function
Set the QoS sending algorithm.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
ether <number> qos mode <mode> [ <q0> <q1> <q2> <q3> <q4> <q5> <q6> <q7>]
Options
<number>
• ether port number
Set a port number to use with a decimal value.
When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).
When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")
<mode>
• mode
strict
: Use the strict priority scheduling.
drr [XG2600]
: Use the deficit round robin scheduling.
wrr [XG0224/XG0448] : Use the weighted round robin scheduling.
<q0> <q1> <q2> <q3> <q4> <q5> <q6> <q7>
• Bandwidth of queues [XG2600]
Set bandwidth of 8 queues as the guaranteed minimum bandwidth if "drr" is specified in
<mode>.
Set each of them from 800m to 4000m or 1g to 4g (bps).
• Weight of queues [XG0224/XG0448]
Set the weight of 8 queues as the number of packets to send if "wrr" is specified in
<mode>.
Set each of them with a decimal number from 0 to 15.
If 0 is specified, this COS queue will be Strict Priority operation.
Use Mode
Explanation
Caution
Configuration mode (admin class)
Set the QoS sending algorithm.
[XG2600]
• Sum total of bandwidth in drr mode should be maximum band of port (10Gbps).
same time and same port.
[XG0224/XG0448]
If a queue is specified to be weighted to 0 in the wrr mode, it operates in the same way as
the strict mode, and the operation precedes the wrr operation.
Default
It is assumed that the strict mode has been specified in the QoS sending algorithm.
ether <number> qos mode strict
Port Information Settings
144
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.1.6.5 ether qos prioritymap
Function
Assign the priority to the queue
Available Model XG2600
Syntax
ether <number> qos prioritymap <priority> <queue>
Options
<number>
• ether port number
Set a port number to use with a decimal value.
When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).
When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")
<priority>
Specify the priority of packets with a decimal value from 0 to 7.
<queue>
Specify the queue for the priority specified in <priority> with a decimal value from 0 to 7.
Use Mode
Explanation
Default
Configuration mode (admin class)
assign packets of priority specified with <priority> to queue specified with <queue>
ether <number> qos prioritymap 0 2
ether <number> qos prioritymap 1 0
ether <number> qos prioritymap 2 1
ether <number> qos prioritymap 3 3
ether <number> qos prioritymap 4 4
ether <number> qos prioritymap 5 5
ether <number> qos prioritymap 6 6
ether <number> qos prioritymap 7 7
Port Information Settings
145
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.1.7
LACP Information
This section explains about the commands related to LACP information.
5.1.7.1 ether lacp port-priority
Function
Set the LACP port priority.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
ether <number> lacp port-priority <priority>
Options
<number>
• ether port number
Set a port number to use with a decimal value.
When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).
When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")
<priority>
• Priority of LACP port
Set the port priority with a decimal value from 1 to 65535.
A smaller value has a higher priority.
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Set the priority of LACP port. The LACP port priority is used as the priority for the
connection port to be selected by the link aggregation group. A smaller value has a
higher priority. If the priority is the same, the port with a smaller number has the higher
priority in port selection.
It indicates the priority of port selection in the local device. The final port selection for the
final connection depends on the LACP system priority.
However, this definition is no use if the active or passive is not specified for the
linkaggregation operation mode of "the linkaggregation mode".
Default
It is assumed that 32768 has been specified as the LACP port priority.
ether <number> lacp port-priority 32768
Port Information Settings
146
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.1.8
ether L3 Monitor Information
This section explains about the commands related to ether L3 monitor information.
5.1.8.1 ether icmpwatch address
Function
Set the destination address for Ethernet L3 monitoring.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
ether <number> icmpwatch address <dst_addr>
Options
<number>
• ether port number
Set a port number to use with a decimal value.
When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).
When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")
<dst_addr>
• Destination IP address of ICMP ECHO packets
Specify the destination IP address to be monitored.
The allowable range is as follows:
1.0.0.1to 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 to 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 to 223.255.255.254
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Set the operation information for destination monitoring.
The ICMP ECHO packet is sent from the specified Ethernet port to the destination IP
address specified by <dst_addr>, and its presence is checked by receiving a response.
Caution
Do not set the IP address of the local device in <dst_addr>. Also, make sure that the
specified IP address is included in the same subnet.
If any of the above three addresses are specified, the Ethernet L3 monitoring function will
not operate normally.
If the ether type is linkaggregation
The Ethernet L3 monitoring definition that has been set for the Ethernet port is disabled.
Set the Ethernet L3 monitoring definition for the "linkaggregation icmpwatch".
When using both the backup port function and the Ethernet L3 monitoring
function
The active port is monitored.
When a port is first linked up, it is used as the operation port in the earlier mode.
Therefore, set the port monitoring for both the master and backup ports.
Default
It is assumed that the Ethernet L3 monitoring function is not used.
Port Information Settings
147
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.1.8.2 ether icmpwatch interval
Function
Set various types of "ether" L3 monitoring intervals.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
ether <number> icmpwatch interval <interval> <timeout> [<retry>]
Options
<number>
• ether port number
Set a port number to use with a decimal value.
When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).
When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")
<interval>
• Transmission interval of normal ICMP ECHO packets
Specify the transmission interval of normal ICMP ECHO packets to be within the range
of 1 to 60 seconds (or 1 minute).
The unit shall be m (minute) or s (second).
<timeout>
• Monitoring timeout
Specify the monitoring timeout period as between 5 to 180 seconds (or 3 minutes). If
the time exceeds, the monitoring is considered as failed.
The unit should be in m (minute) or s (second).
<retry>
• Retransmission interval of ICMP ECHO packets
Specify the retransmission interval of ICMP ECHO packets between 1 to <timeout>-1
seconds if the normal ICMP ECHO packet transmission is not acknowledged.
The unit should be in m (minute) or s (second).
The default is 1s.
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Set the operation information for destination monitoring.
The destination is monitored in <interval> when the response of ICMP ECHO packet is
normally received.
If the response to ICMP ECHO packet is not received, the packet is resent by the <retry>.
If no response is returned within the time period specified in the <timeout>, an error is
detected assuming that any fault occurs and the Ethernet port specified in the <number>
goes offline.
Caution
Default
It is assumed that the 10-second transmission interval during normal communication, the
5-second timeout for monitoring, and the 1-second retransmission interval have been
specified.
ether <number> icmpwatch interval 10s 5s 1s
Port Information Settings
148
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.1.9
ether SNMP Information
This section explains about the commands related to ether SNMP Information.
5.1.9.1 ether snmp trap linkdown
Function
Enable/disable a linkdown trap for a specified ether port.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
ether <number> snmp trap linkdown <mode>
Options
<number>
• ether port number
Set a port number to use with a decimal value.
When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).
When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")
<mode>
Enable or disable linkdown trapping for the specified port(s).
• enable
Enable trapping.
• disable
Disable trapping.
Use Mode
Explanation
Caution
Configuration mode (admin class)
Enable or disable the linkdown trap for the specified ether port(s).
It is assumed that the linkdown trap is enabled for all ports.
Default
ether <number> snmp trap linkdown enable
Port Information Settings
149
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.1.9.2 ether snmp trap linkup
Function
Enable/disable a linkup trap for a specified ether port.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
ether <number> snmp trap linkup <mode>
Options
<number>
• ether port number
Set a port number to use with a decimal value.
When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).
When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")
<mode>
Enable or disable linkup trapping for the specified port(s).
• enable
Enable trapping.
• disable
Disable trapping.
Use Mode
Explanation
Caution
Configuration mode (admin class)
Enable or disable the linkup trap for the specified ether port(s).
It is assumed that the linkup trap is enabled.
Default
ether <number> snmp trap linkup enable
Port Information Settings
150
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.1.10 ether output rate control information
This section explains about the commands related to ether output rate control information.
5.1.10.1 ether ratecontrol
Function
Set output rate limit of ether port
Available Model XG2600
Syntax
ether <number> ratecontrol <rate>
Options
<number>
• ether port number
Set a port number to use with a decimal value.
When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).
When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")
<rate>
• Output rate
Specify output rate which is limited in the ether port with Mbps or Gbps
40m to 10000m
1g to 10g
If "10000m" or "10g" is set, packets are not limited.
Use Mode
Explanation
Caution
Configuration mode (admin class)
Set output rate control.
same time and same port.
Default
It is assumed that the output rate limit function is not used.
Port Information Settings
151
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.2 LACP Information Settings
This section explains about LACP information settings.
5.2.1
LACP Information
This section explains about the commands related to LACP information.
5.2.1.1 lacp system-priority
Function
Set the LACP system priority.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
lacp system-priority <priority>
Options
<priority>
• Priority of LACP system
Set the device priority with a decimal value from 1 to 65535.
A smaller value has a higher priority.
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Set the priority of LACP system. The LACP system priority is used to determine which
has a higher priority for the information exchange between a link aggregation group and
another remote link aggregation group. If the priority is same, the system ID (the
designated MAC address +1) with a smaller number has the higher priority.
However, this definition is meaningless if the active or passive is not set for the
linkaggregation operation mode of the "linkaggregation mode".
Default
It is assumed that 32768 has been specified as the LACP system priority.
lacp system-priority 32768
LACP Information Settings
152
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.2.1.2 lacp bpdu
Function
Set the BPDU forwarding mode of the LACP.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
lacp bpdu <mode>
Options
<mode>
• on
Specify the BPDU forwarding mode.
• off
Specify the BPDU discarding mode.
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Set the BPDU forwarding mode of the LACP.
Set whether or not to forward a BPDU frame when the LACP function has been disabled.
However, the BPDU frame forwarding is disabled if the link aggregation is not set for the
device.
Caution
Default
The BPDU frame, which is not provided with the VLAN tag, is forwarded based on the
receive port setting without the VLAN tag if the BPDU forwarding mode is specified.
It is assumed that discarding mode is specified as BPDU forwarding mode of LACP.
lacp bpdu off
LACP Information Settings
153
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.3 VLAN Information Settings
This section explains about VLAN information settings.
VLAN ID allowed range
The VLAN ID, which is to be specified in <vid> of [Options] described in each command of this section, shall be within
the range specified as shown below.
Range
1 to 4094
Model
XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
5.3.1
VLAN Common Information
This section explains about the commands related to VLAN common information.
5.3.1.1 vlan name
Function
Set the VLAN name.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
vlan <vid> name <name>
Options
<vid>
• VLAN ID
Specify a VLAN ID with a decimal value.
VLAN1 has been defined as the default port VLAN during device startup, and it has
been registered as the "default" VLAN name.
<name>
• VLAN name
Specify the VLAN name using up to 32 characters from the 0x21, 0x23 to 0x7e ASCII
set.
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Set a VLAN name.
If this command is omitted, VLAN1 is set to the "default".
If a VLAN other than VLAN1 is created, it is set in the 'v'+<vid> format.
(Example: If vid=5, "v5" is set.)
Caution
Default
If "delete vlan <vid> name" is specified, the VLAN name is initialized but the VLAN itself
is not deleted. (The VLAN can be deleted by the "ether vlan" command.)
When VLAN ID is 1
vlan 1 name default
When VLAN ID is other than 1
vlan <vid> name 'v'+<vid>
VLAN Information Settings
154
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.3.1.2 vlan protocol
Function
Set the protocol VLAN.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
vlan <vid> protocol <protocol-type>
vlan <vid> protocol <count> <frame-type> <ether-type>
Options
<vid>
• VLAN ID
Specify a decimal VLAN ID from 2 to 4094.
<protocol-type>
Select a system-defined protocol type.
• ipv4 : EthernetII Ethertype=0800,0806,8035
• ipv6 : EthernetII Ethertype=86dd
• fna
: 802.3LLC LSAP=8080,0000,0001
[XG2600] The fna protocol can be assigned only untagged frames.
<count>
• Protocol definition number
Specify a decimal protocol definition value from 0 to 7 if the protocol is defined by the
user.
[XG2600]
<frame-type>
Specify it if the protocol is defined by the user.
• ethertype
Ethernet II or IEEE 802.3s with SNAP format frames
• llc
IEEE 802.3 with LLC format frames
<ether-type>
Specify the Ethertype or LLC value if the protocol is defined by the user.
• Specify the Ethertype value for Ethernet II format or IEEE 802.3 SNAP format frames,
or specify an LLC value (DSAP or SSAP) for IEEE 802.3 LLC format frames, using a 4-
digit hexadecimal value (from 0000 to ffff).
Setting example)
ipx
: ethertype=8137,8138
appletalk : ethertype=809b,80f3
• This device can't appreciate Ethernet II format from IEEE 802.3 SNAP format.
If you use appletalk (SNAP format) protocol, please check on there is no Ethernet II
format frame using same ether-type of appletalk.
[XG0224/XG0448]
<frame-type>
Specify it if the protocol is defined by the user.
• ethertype
Ethernet II format frames
• snap
IEEE 802.3s with SNAP format frames
• llc
IEEE 802.3 with LLC format frames
VLAN Information Settings
155
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
<ether-type>
Specify the Ethertype or LLC value if the protocol is defined by the user.
• Specify the Ethertype value for Ethernet II format or IEEE 802.3 SNAP format frames,
or specify an LLC value (DSAP or SSAP) for IEEE 802.3 LLC format frames, using a 4-
digit hexadecimal value (from 0000 to ffff).
Setting example)
ipx
: ethertype=8137,8138
appletalk : ethertype=809b,80f3
• If EthernetII format was specified, the EtherType value = 0000 to 05ff setting is
disabled.
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Set the protocol VLAN conditions using this command.
The protocol can be set by one of the following two methods.
• Selecting a system-defined protocol (ipv4/ipv6/fna).
• Directly specifying a protocol type in the user definition.
Caution
• No protocol VLANs can be set for the default VLAN (VLAN ID=1).
• Up to 8 definitions can be given to set the user-defined protocol conditions for the
entire device.
• Both the system-defined <protocol-type> definition and the user definition cannot be
specified in the same VLAN all together.
• The same protocol definition as the system-defined <protocol-type> definition can be
used as the user definition.
However, if these definitions compete against each other on the same port, only the
VLAN with a smaller identification number will be enabled. For example, the following
can be set:
ether 1 vlan untag 10
ether 2 vlan untag 20
vlan 10 protocol ipv4
vlan 20 protocol 0 ethertype 0800
However, if "ether 1 vlan untag 10,20" is set for the Ethernet port, the ether1 port is
included in VLAN10 but not included in VLAN20.
• The same protocol definition can be used for multiple different VLANs.
However, if those VLANs compete against each other on the same port, only the VLAN
with a smaller identification number will be enabled. For example, the following can be
set:
ether 1 vlan untag 10
ether 2 vlan untag 20
vlan 10 protocol ipv4
vlan 20 protocol ipv4
However, if "ether 1 vlan untag 10,20" is set for the Ethernet port, the ether1 port is
included in VLAN10 but not included in VLAN20.
• If the protocol type differs, multiple protocol VLANs can be set on the same port. For
example, the following can be set:
ether 1 vlan untag 10,20
vlan 10 protocol ipv4
vlan 20 protocol ipv6
• If "delete vlan <vid> protocol" is set, all VLAN protocol conditions are deleted, but the
VLAN itself is not deleted. (The VLAN can be deleted by the "ether vlan" command.)
VLAN Information Settings
156
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
[XG2600]
• The Max definition number of "vlan protocol" definitions is 16.
• If there are "vlan protocol" definitions over 16, the definition, the VLAN and the ports
belong to the VLAN are invalid.
• The "vlan protocol" definition uses the ACL resources,please refer "ether macfilter",
"ether qos aclmap", "vlan macfilter", "vlan qos aclmap", "lan ip filter", "lan ip dscp".
• The fna protocol can be assigned only untagged frames.
Default
N/A
VLAN Information Settings
157
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.3.1.3 vlan forward
Function
Set static forwarding rules setting.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
vlan <vid> forward <count> <dst_addr> <port>
Options
<vid>
• VLAN ID
Specify a VLAN ID with a decimal value.
<count>
• Definition number
Specify it with a decimal value from 0 to 399.
<dst_addr>
• Destination MAC address
Specify the MAC address to be added statically to the learning table.
(It must be in the xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx format, where "xx" is a 2-digit hexadecimal value.)
<port>
• ether port number
Specify the Ethernet port number using a decimal value.
Use Mode
Explanation
Caution
Configuration mode (admin class)
Set static forwarding rules.
• Address 00:00:00:00:00:00, the broadcast address, or multicast address, option
cannot be specified in <dst_addr>.
• This setting is disabled if VLAN specified in <vid> is not registered.
• This setting is disabled if the port specified by <port> is not set in the VLAN specified
by <vid>.
• If the port specified by <port> is a member of link aggregation ports, set it to forward
packets to the link aggregation ports.
• If the port specified by <port> is a backup port, set it to forward packets to the port used
for the backup port.
Default
N/A
VLAN Information Settings
158
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.3.1.4 vlan description
Function
Set description for VLAN
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
vlan <vid> description <description>
Options
<vid>
• VLAN ID
Specify VLAN ID with a decimal value from 0 to 4094
<description>
• Description
Specify the VLAN description using up to 32 characters from the 0x21, 0x23 to 0x7e
ASCII set.
Use Mode
Explanation
Default
Configuration mode (admin class)
Set description for VLAN
N/A
VLAN Information Settings
159
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.3.2
IGMP Snooping Information
This section explains about the commands related to IGMP snooping information.
5.3.2.1 vlan igmpsnoop router
Function
Set the multicast router port.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
vlan <vid> igmpsnoop router <mode> [<portlist>]
Options
<vid>
• VLAN ID
Specify a VLAN ID with a decimal value.
<mode>
Specify how to determine the multicast router port.
• auto
Determine the multicast router port dynamically.
• yes
Specify the multicast router port statically.
Only the ports specified by <portlist> are set as the router ports.
The <portlist> option must be specified if this mode is selected.
<portlist>
Specify a list of multicast router ports. This option can be specified only if the static mode
has been selected.
When specifying multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,). Also, when
specifying a range of values, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example:"1-3")
The available description format is as follows:
• To specify 1, 2, 3, 5 and 7 as the portlist:
Example: 1-3,5,7
• To specify 1, 3 and 5 as the portlist:
Example: 1,3,5
Use Mode
Explanation
Caution
Configuration mode (admin class)
Specify the multicast router connection port.
• This setting is enabled only when IGMP snooping is set to use.
This setting is ignored if IGMP snooping is not used.
• If multicast routers are connected to two or more ports of the same VLAN, set it
statically without fail. If "auto" is defined, the communication may fail.
• When connecting multiple devices to each other when IGMP snooping is enabled for
the devices, set the port as the multicast router port.
Default
It is assumed that the multicast router port is determined dynamically.
vlan <vid> igmpsnoop router auto
VLAN Information Settings
160
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.3.2.2 vlan igmpsnoop querier
Function
Set the Querier operations.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
vlan <vid> igmpsnoop querier <mode>
Options
<vid>
• VLAN ID
Specify a VLAN ID with a decimal value.
<mode>
• on
Specify the Querier operation mode if no multicast router exists.
• off
Do not operate as the Querier regardless of whether the multicast router exists or not.
Use Mode
Explanation
Caution
Configuration mode (admin class)
Specify the querier operation mode.
• If the querier operation is disabled and the multicast router does not exist, multicast
forwarding is stopped.
• This setting is enabled only when IGMP snooping is used.
This setting is ignored if IGMP snooping is not used.
Default
It is operated as Querier if no multicast router exists.
vlan <vid> igmpsnoop querier on
VLAN Information Settings
161
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.3.2.3 vlan igmpsnoop source
Function
Set the IP address to be used for IGMP snooping.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
vlan <vid> igmpsnoop source <address>
Options
<vid>
• VLAN ID
Specify a VLAN ID with a decimal value.
<address>
Specify the source IP address to be used for IGMP snooping.
This IP address is used as the source address for all IGMP packets.
Use Mode
Explanation
Caution
Configuration mode (admin class)
Specify the source address of IGMP packets sent by IGMP snooping.
• This setting is enabled only when IGMP snooping is set to use.
This setting is ignored if IGMP snooping is not used.
• When IGMP snooping is used, set the Querier IP address.
• To make the querier operation enabled, set an address whose value is greater than the
multicast router address.
• When connecting multiple IGMP snooping devices, do not set the addresses of two or
more devices within the same VLAN.
Default
IGMP packets are sent with the source address 0.0.0.0.
vlan <vid> igmpsnoop source 0.0.0.0
VLAN Information Settings
162
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.3.2.4 vlan igmpsnoop proxy
Function
Set the IGMP proxy mode.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
vlan <vid> igmpsnoop proxy <mode>
Options
<vid>
• VLAN ID
Specify a VLAN ID with a decimal value.
<mode>
Specify the proxy response mode.
• off
Do not respond any IGMP packet.
• on
Proxy responds to a querier.
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Specify the IGMP proxy's response transmission mode. If a device that uses IGMP v1
exists, specify "off".
Caution
Default
This setting is enabled only when IGMP snooping is set to use.
This setting is ignored if IGMP snooping is not used.
The proxy response "off" mode is applied.
vlan <vid> igmpsnoop proxy off
VLAN Information Settings
163
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.3.3
Filter Information
This section explains about the commands related to filter information.
5.3.3.1 vlan macfilter
Function
Set the MAC filter for VLAN.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
vlan <vid> macfilter <count> <action> <acl>
Options
<vid>
• VLAN ID
Specify a VLAN ID with a decimal value.
<count>
• Priority
Set the filtering priority to be specified with a decimal value.
A smaller value has a higher priority.
The specified value is sorted and renumbered in sequence. If a filtering definition with
the same value already exists, the existing one will be changed.
Range
Model
0 to 511
0 to 63
XG0224 / XG0448
XG2600
<action>
• pass
Transmit the packets that match the "acl mac", "acl vlan", "acl ip", "acl icmp", "acl tcp"
or "acl udp" definition of access control list.
• reject
Discard the packets that match the "acl mac", "acl vlan", "acl ip", "acl icmp", "acl tcp", or
"acl udp" definition of access control list.
<acl>
• ACL definition number
Specify the ACL definition number of the access control list where the packet pattern to
be filtered has been defined.
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Set MAC filtering for each VLAN.
For the input packets that match the "acl mac", "acl vlan", "acl ip", "acl icmp", "acl tcp", or
"acl udp" definitions of the access control list which has been specified by <acl>, the filter
processing is executed in the way as specified by <action>.
VLAN Information Settings
164
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
Caution
Note 1.
If none of "acl mac", "acl vlan" and "acl ip" definitions exist on the access control list
which has been specified by <acl> or if the access control list specified by <acl> does not
exist, the packets are not filtered.
Note 2.
The packet filtering default value is "pass".
No packets are filtered if only "pass" is set in <action>.
[XG2600]
Note 3.
"acl mac llc" definitions can not filter llc frames with the VLAN tag.
Note 4.
This command is unavailable if the allowable upper limit for the device is exceeded.
The allowable upper limits are as follows.
• Upper limit based on "commands"
64 commands for the entire device.
commands.
The priority for each command is as follows.
A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.
A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.
A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.
A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.
A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.
A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.
• Upper limit based on "masks"
64 masks for the entire device.
protocol" commands.
The priority for each command is as follows.
A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.
A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.
A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.
VLAN Information Settings
165
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.
A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.
A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.
The number of masks that each command use depends on applied ACL.
When Multiple ACL are applied, the number of masks amount to sum total, and
depends on ACLs the number of masks amount to less than sum total.
The following is the number of masks for ACL.
ACL
number of masks
"acl mac"
define LSAP of llc
not define LSAP of llc
"acl vlan"
3
1
1
not define src IP address
not define tos/dscp value
not define tos/dscp value
define src IP address
1
3
not define dst IP address
define dst IP address
1
use same netmask for src and dst IP address
not define tos/dscp value
1
3
3
not define tos/dscp value
use different netmask for src and dst IP address
"vlan protocol" definition
define vlan protocol ipv4
number of masks
3
1
1
1
define vlan protocol ipv6
define vlan protocol <count> ether
define vlan protocol <count> llc
• Upper limit based on "actions"
16 actions for the entire device.
The following commands spend 1 action regardless of multiple use.
A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.
A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.
VLAN Information Settings
166
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.
The following commands spend 1 action regardless of multiple use.
- vlan <vid> protocol ipv4
- vlan <vid> protocol ipv6
The following commands spend 1 action for each.
If same <tos_value> is used, the commands use 1 action for them.
If same <dscp_value> is used, the commands use 1 action for them.
If same <queue_value> is used, the commands use 1 action for them.
- ether <number> qos aclmap <count> tos <tos_value> <acl>
- ether <number >qos aclmap <count> dscp <dscp_value> <acl>
- ether <number> qos aclmap <count> queue <queue_value> <acl>
- vlan <vid> qos aclmap <count> tos <tos_value> <acl>
- vlan <vid> qos aclmap <count> dscp <dscp_value> <acl>
- vlan <vid> qos aclmap <count> queue <queue_value> <acl>
- lan <number> ip dscp <count> acl <acl_count> <dscp_value>
The following commands spend 1 action for each.
If same <vid> is used, the commands use 1 action for them.
- vlan <vid> protocol <count> ether
- vlan <vid> protocol <count> llc
[XG0224/XG0448]
Note 3.
This command is unavailable if the allowable upper limit for the device is exceeded.
The allowable upper limits are as follows.
• Upper limit based on "commands"
128 commands for the entire device.
The priority for each command is as follows.
A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.
A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.
A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.
• Upper limit based on rule
128 rules for the entire device.
rules to be used varies depending on the contents of the specified acl as shown below.
The number of rules for each ACL is as follows.
- For ACL to set TCP or UDP
Result of multiplication between the number of source ports and the number of
destination ports for TCP or UDP
VLAN Information Settings
167
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
- For ACL to set ICMP
Result of multiplication between the number of ICMP TYPEs and the number of
ICMP CODEs for ICMP
- For ACL not to set TCP, UDP, or ICMP
1
change resource distribution.
Note 4.
Up to 700 commands can be set for the entire device, including the definitions which
It is assumed that this option has not been set.refer to ACL such as "ether macfilter",
commands.
Default
It is assumed that this option has not been set.
VLAN Information Settings
168
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.3.3.2 vlan macfilter move
Function
Change the priority of VLAN MAC filter.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
vlan <vid> macfilter move <count> <new_count>
Options
<vid>
• VLAN ID
Specify a VLAN ID with a decimal value.
<count>
• Source priority
Set the source priority with a decimal value.
<new_count>
• Destination priority
Set the destination priority with a decimal value.
Range
Model
0 to 511
XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Change the priority of MAC filtering for each VLAN.
If the current priority is set as <count>, change the priority of this definition to
<new_count>.
When the definition is changed, the priority is renumbered.
Default
N/A due to an edit command.
VLAN Information Settings
169
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.3.3.3 vlan ip6filter
Function
Set VLAN IPv6 filter
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448
Syntax
vlan <vid> ip6filter <count> <action> <acl>
Options
<vid>
• VLAN ID
Specify the VLAN ID with a decimal value from 1 to 4094.
<count>
• Priority
Set the filtering priority with a decimal value
A smaller value has a higher priority.
Range
0 to 511
Model
XG0224 / XG0448
<action>
• pass
Pass the packets which match "acl ip6", "acl icmp", "acl tcp" and "acl udp"
• reject
Discard the packets which match "acl ip6", "acl icmp", "acl tcp" and "acl udp"
<acl>
• ACL definition number
Specify the ACL definition number which is used for the filter
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Set IPv6 filtering per VLAN
Action specified in <action> works packets which match access control list which is
defined in "acl ip6", "acl icmp", "acl tcp" and "acl udp"
Caution
Note 1.
If none of "acl ip6" definition exist on the access control list which has been specified by
<acl> or if the access control list specified by <acl> does not exist, the packets are not
filtered.
Note 2.
The packet filtering default value is "pass".
No packets are filtered if only "pass" is set in <action>.
Note 3.
This command is unavailable if the allowable upper limit for the device is exceeded.
The allowable upper limits are as follows.
• Upper limit based on "commands"
128 commands for the entire device.
"lan ip6 filter" commands.
The priority for each command is as follows.
VLAN Information Settings
170
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.
A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.
filter" command will be no longer applied.
• Upper limit based on rule
128 rules for the entire device.
varies depending on the contents of the specified acl as shown below.
The number of rules for each ACL is as follows.
- For ACL to set TCP or UDP
Result of multiplication between the number of source ports and the number of
destination ports for TCP or UDP
- For ACL to set ICMP
Result of multiplication between the number of ICMP TYPEs and the number of
ICMP CODEs for ICMP
- For ACL not to set TCP, UDP, or ICMP
1
resource distribution.
Note 4.
Up to 700 commands can be set for the entire device, including the definitions which refer
ip6 dscp" and "serverinfo filter" commands.
Default
N/A
VLAN Information Settings
171
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.3.3.4 vlan ip6filter move
Function
Change the priority of VLAN IPv6 filter
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448
Syntax
vlan <vid> ip6filter move <count> <new_count>
Options
<vid>
• VLAN ID
Specify VLAN ID with a decimal value from 1 to 4094
<count>
• Priority
Specify the priority with a decimal value
<new_count>
• New Priority
Specify the new priority with a decimal value
Range
0 to 511
Model
XG0224 / XG0448
Use Mode
Explanation
Default
Configuration mode (admin class)
Change the priority of IPv6 filter per VLAN
N/A
VLAN Information Settings
172
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.3.4
QoS Information
This section explains about the commands related to QoS information.
5.3.4.1 vlan qos aclmap
Function
Set the QoS conversion of the VLAN.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
vlan <vid> qos aclmap <count> <action> <value> <acl>
Options
<vid>
• VLAN ID
Specify a VLAN ID with a decimal value.
<count>
• Priority
Set the QoS conversion priority with a decimal value.
A smaller value has a higher priority.
If multiple <action> are executed for the same packet and if they conflict with each
other, the <action> with a higher priority is executed.
The specified value is sorted and renumbered in sequence. If a filtering definition with
the same value already exists, the existing one will be changed.
Range
Model
0 to 511
0 to 63
XG0224 / XG0448
XG2600
<action>
• cos [XG0224/XG0448]
Rewrite the "cos" value (the "user priority" value in the Tag Control Information (TCI)
field of the Tagged VLAN) of packets that match the "acl mac", "acl vlan", "acl ip", "acl
icmp", "acl tcp", or "acl udp" definition of access control list.
• dscp
Rewrite the "dscp" value (the high-order 6 bits in the TOS field of IP header), if packets
that match the "acl mac", "acl vlan", "acl ip", "acl icmp", "acl tcp", or "acl udp" definition
of access control list are IP packets.
• tos
Rewrite the "ip precedence" value (the high-order 3 bits in the TOS field of IP header),
if packets that match the "acl mac", "acl vlan", "acl ip", "acl icmp", "acl tcp", or "acl udp"
definition of access control list are IP packets.
• queue
Change the queue at the output port that is used to output the input packets that match
the "acl mac", "acl vlan", "acl ip", "acl icmp", "acl tcp", or "acl udp" definition of access
control list.
<value>
• Replacing value
If "cos" is selected in <action>:
- <cos_value>
Set the replaced "cos" value with a decimal value from 0 to 7.
- tos
Replace the "cos" value with the "ip precedence" value in the packet.
VLAN Information Settings
173
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
If "dscp" is selected in <action>:
- <dscp_value>
Set the replaced "dscp" value with a decimal value from 0 to 63.
If "tos" is selected in <action>:
- <tos_value>
Set the replaced "ip precedence" value with a decimal value from 0 to 7.
- cos
Replace the "ip precedence" value with the "cos" value.
If "queue" is selected in <action>:
- <queue_value>
Specify a queue number of the output port to be used.
A larger value indicates a queue with a higher output priority.
Range
Model
0 to 7
XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
<acl>
• ACL definition number
Specify the ACL definition number of the access control list where the packet pattern to
configure QoS conversion has been defined.
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Set the QoS (quality of service) of each Ethernet port.
For the ingress packets that match the "acl mac", "acl vlan", "acl ip", "acl icmp", "acl tcp",
or "acl udp" definitions of the access control list which has been specified by <acl>, the
QoS processing is executed in the way as specified by <action>.
Caution
Note 1.
If none of "acl mac", "acl vlan" and "acl ip" definitions exist on the access control list
which has been specified by <acl> or if the access control list specified by <acl> does not
exist, the packets are not filtered.
[XG2600]
Note 2.
If a queue is selected by <action> and if this queue has not been associated with the cos
Note 3.
"acl mac llc" definitions can not filter llc frames with the VLAN tag.
Note 4.
This command is unavailable if the allowable upper limit for the device is exceeded.
The allowable upper limits are as follows.
• Upper limit based on "commands"
64 commands for the entire device.
commands.
The priority for each command is as follows.
VLAN Information Settings
174
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.
A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.
A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.
A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.
A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.
A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.
• Upper limit based on "masks"
64 masks for the entire device.
protocol" commands.
The priority for each command is as follows.
A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.A
smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.
A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.
A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.
A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.
A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.
A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.
VLAN Information Settings
175
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
The number of masks that each command use depends on applied ACL.
When Multiple ACL are applied, the number of masks amount to sum total, and
depends on ACLs the number of masks amount to less than sum total.
The following is the number of masks for ACL..
ACL
number of masks
"acl mac"
define LSAP of llc
not define LSAP of llc
"acl vlan"
3
1
1
not define src IP address
not define tos/dscp value
not define tos/dscp value
define src IP address
1
3
not define dst IP address
define dst IP address
1
use same netmask for src and dst IP address
not define tos/dscp value
1
3
3
not define tos/dscp value
use different netmask for src and dst IP address
"vlan protocol" definition
define vlan protocol ipv4
number of masks
3
1
1
1
define vlan protocol ipv6
define vlan protocol <count> ether
define vlan protocol <count> llc
• Upper limit based on "actions"
16 actions for the entire device.
The priority for each command is as follows.
A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.
A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.
A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.
The following commands spend 1 action regardless of multiple use.
- vlan <vid> protocol ipv4
- vlan <vid> protocol ipv6
VLAN Information Settings
176
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
The following commands spend 1 action for each.
If same <tos_value> is used, the commands use 1 action for them.
If same <dscp_value> is used, the commands use 1 action for them.
If same <queue_value> is used, the commands use 1 action for them.
- ether <number> qos aclmap <count> tos <tos_value> <acl>
- ether <number >qos aclmap <count> dscp <dscp_value> <acl>
- ether <number> qos aclmap <count> queue <queue_value> <acl>
- vlan <vid> qos aclmap <count> tos <tos_value> <acl>
- vlan <vid> qos aclmap <count> dscp <dscp_value> <acl>
- vlan <vid> qos aclmap <count> queue <queue_value> <acl>
- lan <number> ip dscp <count> acl <acl_count> <dscp_value>
The following commands spend 1 action for each.
If same <vid> is used, the commands use 1 action for them.
- vlan <vid> protocol <count> ether
- vlan <vid> protocol <count> llc
[XG0224/XG0448]
Note 2.
If a queue is selected by <action> and if this queue has not been associated with the cos
Note 3.
This command is unavailable if the allowable upper limit for the device is exceeded.
The allowable upper limits are as follows.
• Upper limit based on "commands"
128 commands for the entire device.
A smaller Ethernet port value has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.
A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.
A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.
• Upper limit based on rule
128 rules for the entire device.
number of rules to be used varies depending on the contents of the specified acl as
shown below.
The number of rules for each ACL is as follows.
- For ACL to set TCP or UDP
Result of multiplication between the number of source ports and the number of
destination ports for TCP or UDP
- For ACL to set ICMP
Result of multiplication between the number of ICMP TYPEs and the number of
ICMP CODEs for ICMP
- For ACL not to set TCP, UDP, or ICMP
1
VLAN Information Settings
177
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
resource distribution.
Note 4.
Up to 700 commands can be set for the entire device, including the definitions which refer
ip6 dscp" and "serverinfo filter" commands.
Default
It is assumed that this option has not been set.
5.3.4.2 vlan ip6qos aclmap
Function
Set IPv6 QoS of VLAN
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448
Syntax
vlan <vid> ip6qos aclmap <count> <action> <value> <acl>
Options
<vid>
• VLAN ID
Specify the VLAN ID with a decimal value from 1 to 4094
<count>
• Prioruty
Specify the priority of the QoS definition with a decimal value
A smaller value is a higher priority
If multiple <action> are executed for the same packet and if they conflict with each
other, the <action> with a higher priority is executed.
The specified value is sorted and renumbered in sequence. If a filtering definition with
the same value already exists, the existing one will be changed.
Range
0 to 511
Model
XG0224 / XG0448
<action>
• dscp
Rewrite the "dscp" value (the high-order 6 bits in the Traffic class field of IPv6 header),
if packets thatmatch the "acl ip6", "acl icmp", "acl tcp", or "acl udp" definition of access
control list are IP packets.
• queue
Change the queue at the output port that is used to output the input packets that match
the"acl ip6", "acl icmp", "acl tcp", or "acl udp" definition of access control list.
<value>
• Rewrite Value
If dscp is selected in <action>:
• <dscp_value>
Set the rewrite "dscp" value with a decimal value from 0 to 63
If queue is selected in <action>:
• <queue_value>
Specify a queue number of the output port to be used. A larger value indicates a queue
with a higher output priority.
Range
Model
0 to 7
XG0224 / XG0448
VLAN Information Settings
178
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
<acl>
• ACL definition number
Specify the ACL definition number of the access control list where the packet pattern to
configure QoS conversion has been defined.
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Set IPv6 QoS per VLAN
For the input packets that match the "acl ipv6", "acl icmp", "acl tcp", or "acl udp"
definitions of the access control list which has been specified by <acl>, the QoS
processing is executed in the way as specified by <action>.
Caution
Note1.
If none of "acl ip6" definition exist on the access control list which has been specified by
<acl> or if the access control list specified by <acl> does not exist, the QoS processing is
not applied to those packets.
Note2.
If a queue is selected in <action> and if this queue has not been associated with the
Note 3.
This command is unavailable if the allowable upper limit for the device is exceeded.
The allowable upper limits are as follows.
• Upper limit based on "commands"
128 commands for the entire device.
Up to 128 commands can be set for the entire device, including the "vlan ip6qos
A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.
A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.
ip6 dscp"command will be no longer applied.
• Upper limit based on rule
128 rules for the entire device.
used varies depending on the contents of the specified acl as shown below.
The number of rules for each ACL is as follows.
- For ACL to set TCP or UDP
Result of multiplication between the number of source ports and the number of
destination ports for TCP or UDP
- For ACL to set ICMP
Result of multiplication between the number of ICMP TYPEs and the number of
ICMP CODEs for ICMP
- For ACL not to set TCP, UDP, or ICMP
1
resource distribution.
VLAN Information Settings
179
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
Note 4.
Up to 700 commands can be set for the entire device, including the definitions which refer
ip6 dscp" and "serverinfo filter" commands.
Default
N/A
5.3.4.3 vlan ip6qos aclmap move
Function
Change the priority of IPv6 QoS for VLAN
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448
Options
<vid>
• VLAN ID
Specify the VLAN ID with a decimal value from 1 to 4094
<count>
• Priority
Specify the priority with a decimal value
<new_count>
• New Priority
Specify the new priority with a decimal value
Range
Model
0 to 511
XG0224 / XG0448
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Change the priority of IPv6 QoS definition per VLAN
If the current priority is set as <count>, change the priority of this definition to
<new_count>. When the definition is changed, the priority is renumbered.
Default
N/A
VLAN Information Settings
180
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.4 MAC Information
This section explains about MAC information.
5.4.1
MAC Information
This section explains about the commands related to MAC information.
5.4.1.1 mac learning
Function
Set the MAC address learning.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
mac learning <mode>
Options
<mode>
• on
Enable automatic learning of the MAC address.
• off
Disable automatic learning of the MAC address.
Use Mode
Explanation
Default
Configuration mode (admin class)
Set to enable or disable the automatic MAC address learning.
It is assumed that MAC address learning is specified as enable.
mac learning on
MAC Information
181
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.4.1.2 mac age
Function
Set the aging-out time of MAC address learning table.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
mac age <time>
Options
<time>
• Aging-out time
Set the aging-out time of MAC address learning table in seconds.
Range
10 to 1,000,000
10 to 3,500
Model
XG0224 / XG0448
XG2600
• Values can be set within the range of 10 to 1,000,000 seconds. (Default value is set to
300 seconds.)
Use Mode
Explanation
Default
Configuration mode (admin class)
Set the aging-out time of MAC address learning table.
It is assumed that the aging-out time of MAC address learning table is set to 300sec.
mac age 300
MAC Information
182
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.5 LAN Information Settings
This section explains about LAN information settings.
Allowed range of lan definition numbers
The lan definition serial number (decimal value), which is to be specified in <number> ("lan" definition number) of
[Options] described in each command of this section, shall be within the range for each model as shown below.
Range
Model
0 to 99
XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
5.5.1
IPv4 Related Information
This section explains about the commands related to IPv4 related information.
5.5.1.1 lan description
Function
Define the text description for a lan interface.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
lan <number> description <description>
Options
<number>
• lan definition number
Specify a lan definition serial number with a decimal value.
The default is 0.
<description>
• Description
Define the description text for a lan with up to 50 characters from 0x21, 0x23 to 0x7e of
ASCII code.
Use Mode
Explanation
Caution
Configuration mode (admin class)
Defines the description for a lan interface.
This description is used also for the SNMP agent function.
The SNMP agent function sets this description to ifAlias MIB (OID:1.3.6.1.2.1.31.1.1.1.18).
Default
No lan interface description is defined.
LAN Information Settings
183
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.5.1.2 lan ip address
Function
Set the IP address.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
lan [<number>] ip address <address>/<mask> <broadcast>
Options
<number>
• lan definition number
Specify a lan definition serial number with a decimal value.
The default is 0.
<address>/<mask>
• IP address/number of mask bits (or mask value)
Specify a combination of the IP address and the number of mask bits to be assigned to
the LAN interface. For the mask value, specify successive 1s following the most
significant bit (MSB).
The allowable range of IP addresses is as follows:
0.0.0.0
1.0.0.1 to 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 to 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 to 223.255.255.254
For the number of mask bits, specify a decimal value from 2 to 30.
For the mask value, specify a number 192.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.252.
The available description format is as follows:
• IP address/number of mask bits (Example: 192.168.1.1/24)
• IP address/mask value (Example: 192.168.1.1/255.255.255.0)
<broadcast>
Specify a broadcast address.
• 0
Specify it for 0.0.0.0.
• 1
Specify it for 255.255.255.255.
• 2
Specify it when "network address + all 1s" is obtained from "<address>/<mask>".
• 3
Specify it when "network address + all 1s" is obtained from "<address>/<mask>".
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Set the IP address, number of mask bits (or mask value), and broadcast address for the
LAN interface on this device.
Default
It is assumed that the IP address is not specified.
lan <number> ip address 0.0.0.0/0 0
LAN Information Settings
184
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.5.1.3 lan ip route
Function
Set the IPv4 static route information.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
lan [<number>] ip route <count> <address>/<mask> <next_hop> [<distance>]
Options
<number>
• lan definition number
Specify a lan definition serial number with a decimal value.
The default is 0.
<count>
• Static route information definition number
Specify a static route information definition number with a decimal value.
Range
0 to 199
Model
XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
<address>/<mask>
• IPv4 address/number of mask bits (or mask value)
Specify a destination network with a combination of the IPv4 address and the number
of mask bits.
For the mask value, specify successive 1s following the most significant bit (MSB).
The available description format is as follows:
- IPv4 address/number of mask bits (Example: 192.168.1.0/24)
- IPv4 address/mask value (Example: 192.168.1.0/255.255.255.0)
• default
Specify it when the default route is set as a destination network.
Specifying 0.0.0.0/0(0.0.0.0/0.0.0.0) has the same meaning.
<next_hop>
• IPv4 address of next_hop router
Specify the IPv4 address of the next_hop router to send packets to the destination
network.
<distance>
• Priority
Specify the static route information priority with a decimal value from 1 to 254.
A smaller value has a higher priority.
The default is 1.
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Set the IPv4 static route information.
Up to 4 IPv4 static route information can be defined for the product as a whole.
Max definition number
Model
200
XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Caution
Default
Default routes can not be set with same priority.
It is assumed that the IPv4 static route information is not used.
LAN Information Settings
185
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.5.1.4 lan ip filter
Function
Set the IP filter.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
lan [<number>] ip filter <count> <action> acl <acl_count>
Options
<number>
• lan definition number
Specify a lan definition serial number with a decimal value.
The default is 0.
<count>
• Filtering definition number
Specify a definition number, which indicates a filtering priority, with a decimal value.
The specified value is sorted and renumbered in sequence. If a filtering definition with
the same value already exists, the existing one will be changed.
Range
Model
0 to 511
0 to 63
XG0224 / XG0448
XG2600
<action>
Set whether or not to transmit the packet to be filtered.
• pass
Transmit the relevant packet.
• reject
Block the relevant packet.
<acl_count>
• ACL definition number
Specify the required ACL definition number with a decimal value.
If the ACL specified in <acl_count> is not defined, the filtering definition will be disabled
and ignored.
Use the following ACL definition for IP filter.
- ip
If the ip value is not set, the filtering definition will be disabled and ignored.
- tcp
Available only when "6" is set in <protocol> of ip.
Otherwise, the set value is ignored.
If the tcp value is not set while "6" is set in <protocol> of ip, each value of tcp will be
assumed to be "any".
- udp
Available only when "17" is set in <protocol> of ip.
Otherwise, the set value is ignored.
If the udp value is not set while "17" is set in <protocol> of ip, each value of udp is
assumed to be "any".
- icmp
Available only when "1" is set in <protocol> of ip.
Otherwise, the set value is ignored.
If the icmp value is not set while "1" is set in <protocol> of ip, each value of icmp will
be assumed to be "any".
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
LAN Information Settings
186
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
Explanation
Set the IP filter for the LAN interface.
The IP filter is used to transmit or reject packets that have matched the address, protocol,
TOS or DSCP value, port number, ICMP TYPE, and ICMP CODE specified in ACL.
Checking whether the conditions are satisfied or not according to the set priority, if a
packet that has satisfied those conditions is found, it is filtered, and the subsequent
setting will be ignored.
A packet that has not satisfied any conditions will be transmitted.
Caution
Note 1.
If none of "acl ip" definition exist on the access control list which has been specified by
<acl> or if the access control list specified by <acl> does not exist, the packets are not
filtered.
Note 2.
The packet filtering default value is "pass".
No packets are filtered if only "pass" is set in <action>.
[XG2600]
Note 3.
This command is unavailable if the allowable upper limit for the device is exceeded.
The allowable upper limits are as follows.
• Upper limit based on "commands"
64 commands for the entire device.
commands.
The priority for each command is as follows.
A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.
A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.
A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.
A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.
A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.
A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.
• Upper limit based on "masks"
64 masks for the entire device.
protocol" commands.
The priority for each command is as follows.
LAN Information Settings
187
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.
A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.
A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.
A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.
A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.
A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.
The number of masks that each command use depends on applied ACL.
When Multiple ACL are applied, the number of masks amount to sum total, and
depends on ACLs the number of masks amount to less than sum total.
The following is the number of masks for ACL.
ACL
number of masks
"acl mac"
define LSAP of llc
not define LSAP of llc
"acl vlan"
3
1
1
not define src IP address
not define tos/dscp value
not define tos/dscp value
define src IP address
1
3
not define dst IP address
define dst IP address
1
use same netmask for src and dst IP address
not define tos/dscp value
1
3
3
not define tos/dscp value
use different netmask for src and dst IP address
"vlan protocol" definition
define vlan protocol ipv4
number of masks
3
1
1
1
define vlan protocol ipv6
define vlan protocol <count> ether
define vlan protocol <count> llc
LAN Information Settings
188
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
• Upper limit based on "actions"
16 actions for the entire device.
The priority for each command is as follows.
A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.
A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.
A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.
The following commands spend 1 action regardless of multiple use.
- vlan <vid> protocol ipv4
- vlan <vid> protocol ipv6
The following commands spend 1 action for each.
If same <tos_value> is used, the commands use 1 action for them.
If same <dscp_value> is used, the commands use 1 action for them.
If same <queue_value> is used, the commands use 1 action for them.
- ether <number> qos aclmap <count> tos <tos_value> <acl>
- ether <number >qos aclmap <count> dscp <dscp_value> <acl>
- ether <number> qos aclmap <count> queue <queue_value> <acl>
- vlan <vid> qos aclmap <count> tos <tos_value> <acl>
- vlan <vid> qos aclmap <count> dscp <dscp_value> <acl>
- vlan <vid> qos aclmap <count> queue <queue_value> <acl>
- lan <number> ip dscp <count> acl <acl_count> <dscp_value>
The following commands spend 1 action for each.
If same <vid> is used, the commands use 1 action for them.
- vlan <vid> protocol <count> ether
- vlan <vid> protocol <count> llc
[XG0224/XG0448]
Note 3.
This command is unavailable if the allowable upper limit for the device is exceeded.
The allowable upper limits are as follows.
• Upper limit based on "commands"
128 commands for the entire device.
The priority for each command is as follows.
A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.
A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.
A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.
LAN Information Settings
189
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
• Upper limit based on rule
128 rules for the entire device.
rules to be used varies depending on the contents of the specified acl as shown below.
The number of rules for each ACL is as follows.
- For ACL to set TCP or UDP
Result of multiplication between the number of source ports and the number of
destination ports for TCP or UDP
- For ACL to set ICMP
Result of multiplication between the number of ICMP TYPEs and the number of
ICMP CODEs for ICMP
- For ACL not to set TCP, UDP, or ICMP
1
resource distribution.
Note 4.
Up to 700 commands can be set for the entire device, including the definitions which refer
ip6 dscp" and "serverinfo filter" commands.
Default
Transmit all packets, assuming that the IP filter is not set.
LAN Information Settings
190
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.5.1.5 lan ip filter move
Function
Change the IP filter priority.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
lan [<number>] ip filter move <count> <new_count>
Options
<number>
• lan definition number
Specify a lan definition serial number with a decimal value.
The default is 0.
<count>
• Target filtering definition number
Specify a filtering definition number to change the priority.
<new_count>
• Destination filtering definition number
Specify a new priority for <count> with a decimal value.
If any definition with the same definition number exists, it will be inserted before the
existing one.
Range
Model
0 to 511
0 to 63
XG0224 / XG0448
XG2600
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Change the IP filter priority.
Explanation
LAN Information Settings
191
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.5.1.6 lan ip dscp
Function
Set the DSCP value rewriting conditions.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
lan [<number>] ip dscp <count> acl <acl_count> <new_dscp>
Options
<number>
• lan definition number
Specify a lan definition serial number with a decimal value.
The default is 0.
<count>
• DSCP value rewriting definition number
Specify a definition number, which indicates the priority of DSCP value rewriting
conditions, with a decimal value.
The specified value is sorted and renumbered forward when setting was completed.
If any DSCP value rewriting definition with the same definition number exists, the value
of the existing definition will be changed.
Range
Model
0 to 511
0 to 63
XG0224 / XG0448
XG2600
<acl_count>
• ACL definition number
Specify the required ACL definition number with a decimal value.
If the ACL specified in <acl_count> is not defined, the DSCP value rewriting definition
will be disabled and ignored.
Use the following ACL definition for DSCP value rewriting.
- ip
If the ip value is not set, the DSCP value rewriting definition will be disabled and
ignored.
- tcp
Available only when "6" is set in <protocol> of ip.
Otherwise, the set value is ignored.
If the tcp value is not set while "6" is set in <protocol> of ip, each value of tcp will be
assumed to be "any".
- udp
Available only when "17" is set in <protocol> of ip.
Otherwise, the set value is ignored.
If the udp value is not set while "17" is set in <protocol> of ip, each value of udp is
assumed to be "any".
- icmp
Available only when "1" is set in <protocol> of ip.
Otherwise, the set value is ignored.
If the icmp value is not set while "1" is set in <protocol> of ip, each value of icmp will
be assumed to be "any".
<new_dscp>
• DSCP value
Specify the DSCP value to be rewritten with a decimal value from 0 to 63.
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
LAN Information Settings
192
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
Explanation
Set DSCP value rewriting conditions.
Rewrite the DSCP value of a packet, which has satisfied conditions, to the specified
DSCP value.
Caution
Note 1.
If none of "acl ip" definition exist on the access control list which has been specified by
<acl> or if the access control list specified by <acl> does not exist, the packets are not
filtered.
[XG2600]
Note 2.
This command is unavailable if the allowable upper limit for the device is exceeded.
The allowable upper limits are as follows.
• Upper limit based on "commands"
64 commands for the entire device.
commands.
The priority for each command is as follows.
A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.
A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.
A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.
A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.
A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.
A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.
• Upper limit based on "masks"
64 masks for the entire device.
protocol" commands.
The priority for each command is as follows.
A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.
A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.
A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.
LAN Information Settings
193
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.
A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.
A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.
The number of masks that each command use depends on applied ACL.
When Multiple ACL are applied, the number of masks amount to sum total, and
depends on ACLs the number of masks amount to less than sum total.
The following is the number of masks for ACL.
ACL
number of masks
"acl mac"
define LSAP of llc
not define LSAP of llc
"acl vlan"
3
1
1
not define src IP address
not define tos/dscp value
not define tos/dscp value
define src IP address
1
3
not define dst IP address
define dst IP address
1
use same netmask for src and dst IP address
not define tos/dscp value
1
3
3
not define tos/dscp value
use different netmask for src and dst IP address
"vlan protocol" definition
define vlan protocol ipv4
number of masks
3
1
1
1
define vlan protocol ipv6
define vlan protocol <count> ether
define vlan protocol <count> llc
• Upper limit based on "actions"
16 actions for the entire device.
The priority for each command is as follows.
A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.
A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.
LAN Information Settings
194
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.
The following commands spend 1 action regardless of multiple use.
- vlan <vid> protocol ipv4
- vlan <vid> protocol ipv6
The following commands spend 1 action for each.
If same <tos_value> is used, the commands use 1 action for them.
If same <dscp_value> is used, the commands use 1 action for them.
If same <queue_value> is used, the commands use 1 action for them.
- ether <number> qos aclmap <count> tos <tos_value> <acl>
- ether <number >qos aclmap <count> dscp <dscp_value> <acl>
- ether <number> qos aclmap <count> queue <queue_value> <acl>
- vlan <vid> qos aclmap <count> tos <tos_value> <acl>
- vlan <vid> qos aclmap <count> dscp <dscp_value> <acl>
- vlan <vid> qos aclmap <count> queue <queue_value> <acl>
- lan <number> ip dscp <count> acl <acl_count> <dscp_value>
The following commands spend 1 action for each.
If same <vid> is used, the commands use 1 action for them.
- vlan <vid> protocol <count> ether
- vlan <vid> protocol <count> llc
[XG0224/XG0448]
Note 2.
This command is unavailable if the allowable upper limit for the device is exceeded.
The allowable upper limits are as follows.
• Upper limit based on "commands"
128 commands for the entire device.
A smaller Ethernet port value has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.
A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.
A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.
subsequent "vlan qos aclmap" and "lan ip dscp"command will be no longer applied.
• Upper limit based on rule
128 rules for the entire device.
number of rules to be used varies depending on the contents of the specified acl as
shown below.
The number of rules for each ACL is as follows.
- For ACL to set TCP or UDP
Result of multiplication between the number of source ports and the number of
destination ports for TCP or UDP
LAN Information Settings
195
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
- For ACL to set ICMP
Result of multiplication between the number of ICMP TYPEs and the number of
ICMP CODEs for ICMP
- For ACL not to set TCP, UDP, or ICMP
1
resource distribution.
Note 4.
Up to 700 commands can be set for the entire device, including the definitions which refer
ip6 dscp" and "serverinfo filter" commands.
Default
It is assumed that DSCP value rewriting is not performed.
5.5.1.7 lan ip dscp move
Function
Change the priority of DSCP value rewriting conditions.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
lan [<number>] ip dscp move <count> <new_count>
Options
<number>
• lan definition number
Specify a lan definition serial number with a decimal value.
The default is 0.
<count>
• Target DSCP value rewriting definition number
Specify a DSCP value rewriting definition number before the priority was changed.
<new_count>
• Destination DSCP value rewriting definition number
Specify a new priority for <count> with a decimal value.
If any definition with the same definition number exists, it will be inserted before the
existing one.
Range
Model
0 to 511
0 to 63
XG0224 / XG0448
XG2600
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Change the priority of DSCP value rewriting conditions.
LAN Information Settings
196
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.5.1.8 lan ip arp static
Function
Sets static ARP.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448
Syntax
lan [<number>] ip arp static <count> <dst> <mac>
Options
<number>
• Defined LAN number
The sequential number of a LAN definition expressed in base 10.
Default is 0.
<count>
• Static ARP table entry number
The static ARP table entry number, expressed as a base 10 number from 0-199.
If an entry already exists in the table at the entry number specified, the command will
modify the existing entry.
<dst>
• Destination IP address
Specifies the destination IP address to be registered in the static ARP table.
Below are the ranges of IP addresses that may be specified.
<mac>
• MAC address
Specifies the MAC address to use when sending packets to the destination IP address.
Specify in the format xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx (where xx is a two-digit, base 16 value).
Use Mode
Explanation
Caution
Configuration mode (admin class)
Sets static ARP entries in the ARP table.
Multiple ARP entries may not be made for the same destination IP address.
The static ARP function will not operate for interfaces in which the IP address is not set.
MAC addresses cannot be set to broadcast or multicast.
Default
If unset, the static ARP function will not be used.
LAN Information Settings
197
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.5.2
IPv6 Related Information
This section explains about the commands related to IPv6 Related Information.
5.5.2.1 lan ip6 use
Function
Set IPv6 function
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
lan [<number>] ip6 use <mode>
Options
<number>
• lan definition number
Specify lan definition number with a decimal value
<mode>
Specify whether to send and receive IPv6 packets
• on
Enable IPv6
• off
Disable Ipv6
Use Mode
Explanation
Default
Configuration mode (admin class)
Set IPv6 function
It is assumed that the IPv6 server function is not used.
lan <number> ip6 use off
5.5.2.2 lan ip6 ifid
Function
Set IPv6 interface ID
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
lan [<number>] ip6 ifid <interfaceID>
Options
<number>
• lan definition number
Specify lan definition number with a decimal value
<interfaceID>
Specify ID for this interface
• auto
ID with EUI-64 format is created from MAC address
• interface ID
Specify ID for this interface with a hexadecimal number
Use Mode
Explanation
Default
Configuration mode (admin class)
Set IPv6 interface ID
It is assumed that "auto" has been set.
lan <number> ip6 ifid auto
LAN Information Settings
198
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.5.2.3 lan ip6 address
Function
Set IPv6 address
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
lan [<number>] ip6 address [<count>] <address>/<prefixlen>
Options
<number>
• lan definition number
Specify lan definition number with a decimal value
<count>
• IPv6 address definition number
Specify IPv6 address definition number with a decimal value from 0 to 3
<address>/<prefixlen>
• IPv6 address/prefix length
Specify IPv6 address and prefix length. Link local address can not be specified.
Specify 64 for prefix length.
• auto
Address is automatically set with prefix of received RA (Router Advertisement)
message.
"lan ip6 ra mode recv" need to be set
Use Mode
Explanation
Default
Configuration mode (admin class)
Set IPv6 address for this interface
It is assumed that IPv6 function use only IPv6 link-local addresses.
5.5.2.4 lan ip6 ra mode
Function
Set RA (Router Advertisement) message mode
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
lan [<number>] ip6 ra mode <mode>
Options
<number>
• lan definition number
Specify lan definition number with a decimal value
<mode>
• off
Disable RA message send/receive function
• recv
Enable RA message receive function
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Set RA message function mode
Explanation
• RA message receive function
When it is enabled, ND (Neighbor Discovery) parameter, default route, global address
are configured automatically based on RA message
Default
It is assumed that RA message send/receive function is disabled.
lan <number> ip6 ra mode off
LAN Information Settings
199
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.5.2.5 lan ip6 route
Function
Set IPv6 static route information
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
lan [<number>] ip6 route <count> <address>/<prefixlen> <next_hop> [<distance>]
Options
<number>
• lan definition number
Specify lan definition number with a decimal value
<count>
• Static route information definition number
Specify static route information definition number with a decimal value
Range
0 to 199
Model
XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
<address>/<prefixlen>
• IPv6 address/prefix length
Specify the destination network with IPv6 address and prefix length.
Link local address can not be specified.
• default
Specify this when default route is set as the destination network
<next_hop>
• Next hop router IPv6 address
Set IPv6 address of next hop router
<distance>
• Priority
Set priority of this static route information with a decimal value from 1 to 254
Use Mode
Explanation
Default
Configuration mode (admin class)
Set IPv6 static route information.
It is assumed that the IPv6 static route information is not used.
LAN Information Settings
200
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.5.2.6 lan ip6 filter
Function
Set IPv6 filter
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448
Syntax
lan [<number>] ip6 filter <count> <action> acl <acl_count>
Options
<number>
• lan definition number
Specify lan definition number with a decimal number
<count>
• filtering definition number
Set the filtering priority with a decimal value
A smaller value has a higher priority.
Range
0 to 511
Model
XG0224 / XG0448
<action>
• pass
Pass the packets which match
• reject
Discard the packets which match
<acl_count>
• ACL definition number
Specify ACL definition number with a decimal value.
- ip
If ip value is not configured, that filter definition is ignored
- tcp
This is enabled when ip6 <protocol> value is 6
- udp
This is enabled when ip6 <protocol> value is 17
- icmp
This is enabled when ip6 <protocol> value is 58
Use Mode
Explanation
Caution
Configuration mode (admin class)
Set IPv6 filter for LAN interface
Note 1.
If none of "acl ip6" definition exist on the access control list which has been specified by
<acl> or if the access control list specified by <acl> does not exist, the packets are not
filtered.
Note 2.
The packet filtering default value is "pass".
No packets are filtered if only "pass" is set in <action>.
LAN Information Settings
201
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
Note 3.
This command is unavailable if the allowable upper limit for the device is exceeded.
The allowable upper limits are as follows.
• Upper limit based on "commands"
128 commands for the entire device.
"lan ip6 filter"commands.
The priority for each command is as follows.
A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.
A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.
filter" command will be no longer applied.
• Upper limit based on rule
128 rules for the entire device.
varies depending on the contents of the specified acl as shown below.
The number of rules for each ACL is as follows.
- For ACL to set TCP or UDP
Result of multiplication between the number of source ports and the number of
destination ports for TCP or UDP
- For ACL to set ICMP
Result of multiplication between the number of ICMP TYPEs and the number of
ICMP CODEs for ICMP
- For ACL not to set TCP, UDP, or ICMP
1
resource distribution.
Note 4.
Up to 700 commands can be set for the entire device, including the definitions which refer
ip6 dscp" and "serverinfo filter" commands.
Default
It is assumed that the IPv6 filter is not set.
LAN Information Settings
202
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.5.2.7 lan ip6 filter move
Function
Change priority of IPv6 filter
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448
Syntax
lan [<number>] ip6 filter move <count> <new_count>
Options
<number>
• lan definition number
Specify lan definition number with a decimal value
<count>
• Filterling definition number
Specify filtering definition number
<new_count>
• New filtering definition number
Specify with a decimal value
Range
Model
0 to 511
XG0224 / XG0448
Use Mode
Explanation
Default
Configuration mode (admin class)
Change priority of IPv6 filter
N/A
LAN Information Settings
203
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.5.2.8 lan ip6 dscp
Function
Set DSCP value rewrite condition
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448
Syntax
lan [<number>] ip6 dscp <count> acl <acl_count> <new_dscp>
Options
<number>
• lan definition number
Specify lan definition number with a decimal value
<count>
• DSCP rewrite definition number
Specify priority of DSCP rewrite condition with a decimal value.
Range
0 to 511
Model
XG0224 / XG0448
<acl_count>
• ACL definition number
Specify ACL definition number with a decimal value
- ip6
If ip6 value is not configured, that filter definition is ignored
- tcp
This is enabled when ip6 <protocol> value is 6
- udp
This is enabled when ip6 <protocol> value is 17
- icmp
This is enabled when ip6 <protocol> value is 58
<new_dscp>
• DSCP value
Specify Rewrite DSCP value with a decimal value from 0 to 63
Use Mode
Explanation
Caution
Configuration mode (admin class)
Set DSCP value rewrite condition
Note1.
If none of "acl ip6" definition exist on the access control list which has been specified by
<acl> or if the access control list specified by <acl> does not exist, the QoS processing is
not applied to those packets.
Note2.
If a queue is selected in <action> and if this queue has not been associated with the
Note 3.
This command is unavailable if the allowable upper limit for the device is exceeded.
The allowable upper limits are as follows.
• Upper limit based on "commands"
128 commands for the entire device.
Up to 128 commands can be set for the entire device, including the "vlan ip6qos
LAN Information Settings
204
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.
A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.
"lan ip6 dscp"command will be no longer applied.
• Upper limit based on rule
128 rules for the entire device.
used varies depending on the contents of the specified acl as shown below.
The number of rules for each ACL is as follows.
- For ACL to set TCP or UDP
Result of multiplication between the number of source ports and the number of
destination ports for TCP or UDP
- For ACL to set ICMP
Result of multiplication between the number of ICMP TYPEs and the number of
ICMP CODEs for ICMP
- For ACL not to set TCP, UDP, or ICMP
1
resource distribution.
Note 4.
Up to 700 commands can be set for the entire device, including the definitions which refer
ip6 dscp" and "serverinfo filter" commands.
Default
It is assumed that DSCP value rewriting is not performed.
LAN Information Settings
205
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.5.2.9 lan ip6 dscp move
Function
Change priority of DSCP value rewrite condition
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448
Syntax
lan [<number>] ip6 dscp move <count> <new_count>
Options
<number>
• lan definition number
Specify lan definition number with a decimal value
<count>
• DSCP value rewrite definition number
Specify DSCP value rewrite definition number
<new_count>
• New DSCP value rewrite definition number
Specify new DSCP value rewrite definition number
Range
Model
0 to 511
XG0224 / XG0448
Use Mode
Explanation
Default
Configuration mode (admin class)
Change priority of DSCP value rewrite condition
N/A
LAN Information Settings
206
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.5.3
VLAN Related Information
This section explains about the commands related to VLAN related information.
5.5.3.1 lan vlan
Function
Set a VLAN ID.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
lan [<number>] vlan <vid>
Options
<number>
• lan definition number
Specify a lan definition serial number with a decimal value.
The default is 0.
<vid>
Set a decimal VLAN ID from 1 to 4094.
Use Mode
Explanation
Caution
Configuration mode (admin class)
Associate a VLAN ID with a lan definition number.
• This setting is disabled if VLAN specified in <vid> is not registered.
• If VLAN specified in <vid> is set at multiple lan interfaces, only the lowest lan definition
will be enabled.
Default
N/A
LAN Information Settings
207
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.5.4
LLMNR Related Information
This section explains about the commands related to LLMNR Related Information.
5.5.4.1 lan llmnr use
Function
Set to use the LLMNR function.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
lan [<number>] llmnr use <mode>
Options
<number>
• lan definition number
Specify a lan definition serial number with a decimal value.
The default is 0.
<mode>
• on
Enable LLMNR function.
• off
Disable LLMNR function.
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Set whether or not to enable the LLMNR function on this interface.
If enabled, this device answers LLMNR Query for hostname of this device.
Sender The LLMNR function to
Model name (e.c. XG0224).
Caution
Default
be set only 2 definitions for the entire device.
• Up to 2 commands can be set for the entire device, including the "lan llmnr use" (lan
• If none of "lan ip address" and "lan ip6 use on" definition exist on the lan interface
LLMNR function dosn't work.
It is assumed that the LLMNR function is not used on the lan interface.
LAN Information Settings
208
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.5.5
Management LAN port IPv4 Related Information
This section explains about the commands related to Management LAN port IPv4 Related Information.
5.5.5.1 oob ip address
Function
Set IP address of oob port
Available Model XG2600
Syntax
oob ip address <address>/<mask> <broadcast>
Options
<address>/<mask>
• IP address/number of mask bits (or mask value)
Sepcify a combination of the IP address and mask to be assigned to Out of Band port
The allowable range of IPaddress is as follows.
0.0.0.0
1.0.0.1 - 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 - 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 - 223.255.255.254
The available description format is as follows.
• IP address/number of mask bits (Example: 192.168.1.1/24)
• IP address/mask value (Example: 192.168.1.1/255.255.255.0)
<broadcast>
Specify a broadcast address
• 0
Specify it for 0.0.0.0
• 1
Specify it for 255.255.255.255
• 2
Specify it when "network address + all 0" is obtained from <address>/<mask>
• 3
Specify it when "network address + all 1" is obtained from <address>/<mask>
Use Mode
Explanation
Default
Configuration mode (admin class)
Set the IP address.
It is assumed that the IP address is not specified.
oob ip address 0.0.0.0/0 0
LAN Information Settings
209
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.5.5.2 oob ip route
Function
Set the IPv4static route information
Available Model XG2600
Syntax
oob ip route <count> <address>/<mask> <next_hop> [<distance>]
Options
<count>
• Static route information definition number
Specify a static route information definition number with a decimal value.
Range
0 to 199
Model
XG2600
<address>/<mask>
• IPv4 address/number of mask bits (or mask value)
Specify a destination network with a combination of the IPv4 address and the number
of mask bits. For the mask value, specify successive 1s following the most significant
bit (MSB). The available description format is as follows:
- IPv4 address/number of mask bits (Example: 192.168.1.0/24)
- IPv4 address/mask value (Example: 192.168.1.0/255.255.255.0)
• default
Specify default when the default route is set as a destination network.
It’s same as specifying 0.0.0.0/0(0.0.0.0/0.0.0.0)
<next_hop>
• IPv4 address of next hop router
Specify the IPv4 address of the next hop router
<distance>
• Priority
Specify the static route information priority with a decimal value from 1 to 254.
A smallr value has a higher priority.
The default is 1.
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Set the IPv4 static route information
Explanation
Max definition number
Model
200
XG2600
Caution
Default
When the same destination as static route is set, be careful about the following.
• Multiple default routes can not be cofigured with the same priority.
N/A
LAN Information Settings
210
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.5.6
Management LAN port IPv6 Related Information
This section explains about the commands related to Management LAN port IPv6 Related Information.
5.5.6.1 oob ip6 use
Function
Set IPv6 function of oob port
Available Model XG2600
Syntax
oob ip6 use <mode>
Options
<mode>
Specify wheter or not to receive and send IPv6 packets
• on
Enable IPc6 function
• off
Disable IPv6 function
Use Mode
Explanation
Default
Configuration mode (admin class)
Specify wheter or not to receive and send IPv6 packets
It is assumed that the IPv6 server function is not used.
oob ip6 use off
5.5.6.2 oob ip6 ifid
Function
Set IPv6 interface ID
Available Model XG2600
Syntax
oob ip6 ifid <interfaceID>
Options
<interfaceID>
Specify ID for this interafce
• auto
Automatically generated ID (EUI-64 format) from MAC address is used
• Interface ID
Specify ID for this interface with a hexadecimal value. Separate 4 degits with " "(colon)
Normally specify "auto".
Use Mode
Explanation
Default
Configuration mode (admin class)
Set IPv6 interface ID
It is assumed that "auto" has been set.
oob ip6 ifid auto
LAN Information Settings
211
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.5.6.3 oob ip6 address
Function
Set IPv6 address
Available Model XG2600
Syntax
oob ip6 address [<count>] <address>/<prefixlen>
Options
<count>
• IPv6 address definition number
Specify IPv6 address definition number with a decimal value from 0 to 3.
<address>/<prefixlen>
• IPv6 address/prefix length
Specify IPv6 address and prefix length. Link local address can not be specified.
Specify 64 for prefix length.
• auto
Address is automatically set with prefix of received RA (Router Advertisement)
message.
"lan ip6 ra mode recv" need to be set
Use Mode
Explanation
Default
Configuration mode (admin class)
Set IPv6 address for this interface
It is assumed that IPv6 function use only IPv6 link-local addresses.
5.5.6.4 oob ip6 ra mode
Function
Set RA (Router Advertisement) message mode
Available Model XG2600
Syntax
oob ip6 ra mode <mode>
Options
<mode>
• off
Disable RA message send/receive function
• recv
Enable RA message receive function
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Set RA message function mode
Explanation
• RA message receive function
When it is enabled, ND (Neighbor Discovery) parameter, default route, global address
are configured automatically based on RA message
Default
It is assumed that RA message send/receive function is disabled.
lan <number> ip6 ra mode off
LAN Information Settings
212
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.5.6.5 oob ip6 route
Function
Set IPv6 static route information
Available Model XG2600
Syntax
oob ip6 route <count> <address>/<prefixlen> <next_hop> [<distance>]
Options
<count>
• Static route information definition number
Specify static route information definition number with a decimal value
Range
0 to 199
Model
XG2600
<address>/<prefixlen>
• IPv6 address/prefix length
Specify the destination network with IPv6 address and prefix length.
Link local address can not be specified.
• default
Specify this when default route is set as the destination network
<next_hop>
• Next hop router IPv6 address
Set IPv6 address of next hop router
<distance>
• Priority
Set priority of this static route information with a decimal value from 1 to 254
Use Mode
Explanation
Default
Configuration mode (admin class)
Set IPv6 static route information.
It is assumed that the IPv6 static route information is not used.
LAN Information Settings
213
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.5.7
Management LAN port LLMNR Related Information
This section explains about the commands related to Management LAN port LLMNR Related Information.
5.5.7.1 oob llmnr use
Function
Set to use the LLMNR function of oob interace.
Available Model XG2600
Syntax
oob llmnr use <mode>
Options
<mode>
• on
Enable LLMNR function.
• off
Disable LLMNR function.
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Set whether or not to enable the LLMNR function on the oob interface.
If enabled, this device answers LLMNR Query for hostname of this device.
Sender The LLMNR function to
Model name (e.c. XG0224).
Caution
Default
be set only 2 definitions for the entire device/
llmnr use on) and "oob llmnr use" (oob llmnr use on) commands.
• If none of "lan ip address" and "lan ip6 use on" definition exist on the lan interface
LLMNR function dosn't work.
It is assumed that the LLMNR function is not used on the oob interface.
LAN Information Settings
214
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.6 IPv4 Related Information
This section explains about IPv4 related information.
5.6.1
IPv4 Related Information
This section explains about the commands related to IP related information.
5.6.1.1 ip arp age
Function
Set a valid time of ARP entry.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
ip arp age <time>
Options
<time>
Set a valid time (minutes) of ARP entry with a decimal value from 1 to 240.
Use Mode
Explanation
Default
Configuration mode (admin class)
Set a valid time of ARP entry.
It is assumed that 20 minutes has been set.
ip arp age 20
IPv4 Related Information
215
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.7 QoS Information Settings
This section explains about QoS information settings.
5.7.1
QoS Information
This section explains about the commands related to QoS information.
5.7.1.1 qos cosmap
Function
Set the correspondence between the COS value and storage queue for a specific packet.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448
Syntax
qos cosmap <cos> <queue>
Options
<cos>
• cos value
Set a cos value (user priority value in the Tag Control Information (TCI) field of Tagged
VLAN) of the packet where the specified queue is to be stored, with a decimal value
from 0 to 7.
<queue>
• Queue number
Set the number of a queue to store the packet, which has the cos value specified in
<cos>, with a decimal value.
A larger value has a higher priority.
Range
Model
0 to 7
XG0224 / XG0448
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
This product has 8 keys.
Explanation
Packets are queued in multiple queues of an output port (including a port for the local
device). Which queues are to be selected is determined by the COS value of an output
packet.
Store the packet, which has the cos value specified in <cos>, in the queue specified in
<queue>.
A larger queue number has a higher output priority.
A queue with no cos value is unavailable.
Default
qos cosmap 0 2
qos cosmap 1 0
qos cosmap 2 1
qos cosmap 3 3
qos cosmap 4 4
qos cosmap 5 5
qos cosmap 6 6
qos cosmap 7 7
QoS Information Settings
216
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.8 STP Information
This section explains about STP information.
5.8.1
STP Information
This section explains about the commands related to STP information.
5.8.1.1 stp mode
Function
Set the STP (Spanning Tree Protocol) operation mode.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
stp mode {disable | stp | rstp | mstp }
Options
disable
• Specify when STP is not used.
stp
• Specify when STP (dot1d) is used.
rstp
• Specify when RSTP (dot1w) is used.
mstp
• Specify when MSTP (dot1s) is used.
Use Mode
Explanation
Default
Configuration mode (admin class)
Set the STP (Spanning Tree Protocol) operation mode.
It is assumed that the STP is set for STP operation mode.
stp mode stp
STP Information
217
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.8.1.2 stp age
Function
Set a maximum valid time of bridge configuration.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
stp age <max_age>
Options
<max_age>
• Maximum valid time
Specify a valid time of the BPDU information sent from the root bridge within the range
of 6 to 40 seconds.
The unit will be s (second).
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Set a valid time for the BPDU that the root bridge sends.
Receiving no BPDU frame from the root bridge within the max age time will lead this
device to begin sending BPDU as a root bridge.
Caution
<max_age> checks the relationship between the definition values of stp delay
<delay_time> and stp hello <time>.
• Check with forward delay time
max age time <= 2 × (forward delay time - 1.0 seconds)
• Check with hello time
max age time >= 2 × (hello time + 1.0 seconds)
If one or both of the above definition value is invalid, the set values of <max_age>,
<delay_time>, and <time> will be disabled.
The following shows definition conditions that are available for checking the relationship
between <max age>, <delay_time>, and <time>.
2 × (forward delay time - 1.0 second) >= max age time >= 2 × (hello time + 1.0 second)
Default
It is assumed that 20 seconds are set for the valid time of the BPDU sent by the root
bridge.
stp age 20s
STP Information
218
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.8.1.3 stp delay
Function
Set a maximum forward delay time.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
stp delay <delay_time>
Options
<delay_time>
• Maximum forward delay time
Specify a maximum forward delay time within the range of 4 to 30 seconds.
The unit will be s (second).
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Set a maximum forwarding delay time.
This setting is disabled when this device does not function as a root bridge even if it uses
an STP.
Specify the time period required to change from the listening state to the learning state or
from the leaning state to the forwarding state via an STP.
Caution
<delay_time> checks the relationship with the definition value of stp age <max_age>.
• Check with max age time
max age time <= 2 × (forward delay time - 1.0 second)
If the definition value is invalid, the set values of <max_age>, <delay_time>, and <time>
will be disabled.
The following shows definition conditions that are available for checking the relationship
between <max age>, <delay_time>, and <time>.
2 × (forward delay time - 1.0 second) >= max age time >= 2 × (hello time + 1.0 second)
Default
It is assumed that 15 seconds are set for a maximum forwarding delay time.
stp delay 15s
STP Information
219
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.8.1.4 stp hello
Function
Set a Hello message transmission interval.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
stp hello <time>
Options
<time>
• Transmission interval
Specify a transmission interval of configuration BPDU to be sent periodically after this
device becomes a root bridge, within the range of 1 to 10 seconds. The unit will be s
(second).
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Specify a transmission interval of configuration BPDU to be sent when this device
functions as a root bridge.
This setting is disabled when this device does not function as a root bridge even if it uses
an STP.
Caution
<time> checks the relationship with the definition value of stp age <max_age>.
• Check with max age time
max age time > = 2 × (hello time + 1.0 second)
If the definition value is invalid, the set values of <max_age>, <delay_time>, and <time>
will be disabled.
The following shows definition conditions that are available for checking the relationship
between <max age>, <delay_time>, and <time>.
2 × (forward delay time - 1.0 second) >= max age time >= 2 × (hello time + 1.0 second)
Default
It is assumed that 2 seconds are set for a transmission interval of configuration BPDU.
stp hello 2s
STP Information
220
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.8.1.5 stp bpdu
Function
Set the BPDU forwarding mode.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
stp bpdu <mode>
Options
<mode>
• on
Specify the BPDU flooding mode.
• off
Specify the BPDU unflooding mode.
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Set the BPDU flooding mode.
Explanation
Set whether or not to forward a BPDU frame when the STP function has been disabled.
Caution
Default
The BPDU frame, which is not provided with the VLAN tag, is forwarded based on the
receive port setting without the VLAN tag if the BPDU flooding mode is specified.
It is assumed that discarding mode is specified as the BPDU forwarding mode.
stp bpdu off
STP Information
221
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.8.1.6 stp domain priority
Function
Set the bridge priority.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
stp domain <instance-id> priority <priority>
Options
<instance-id>
• STP instance ID number
Specify a decimal value from 0 to 15.
For non-MSTP operation mode, entering a value from 1 to 15 makes it invalid, although
the allowable range is set with a value from 0 to 15.
<priority>
• Priority
Specify the priority of this device in the bridge network with a decimal value from 0 to
61440. A smaller value has a higher priority.
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Specify the priority of the bridge used for the algorithm for determining the root bridge.
Specify the minimum value for a bridge to be used as a root bridge.
Caution
<priority> must be an integer (valid value) that is divisible by 4096.
• Valid values
0, 4096, 8192, 12288, 16384, 20480, 24576, 28672, 32768, 36864, 40960, 45056,
49152, 53248, 57344, 61440
If an integer other than the valid values is specified, this setting is disabled.
Default
It is assumed that 32768 is set for the entire instance priority.
stp domain 0 priority 32768
STP Information
222
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.8.1.7 stp config_id
Function
Set the MST configuration.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
stp config_id <region_name> <revision_level>
Options
<region_name>
• Region name (Configuration name)
Specify a configuration name using up to 32 characters from 0x21, 0x23 to 0x7e ASCII
set.
<revision_level>
• Revision level
Specify a decimal value from 0 to 255.
Use Mode
Explanation
Caution
Configuration mode (admin class)
Set MST configuration (MST region name and revision level).
This command is enabled only in the MSTP operation mode.
Default
It is assumed that MST for MST configuration information, "region1" for region name, and
"0" for revision level are set.
stp config_id region1 0
5.8.1.8 stp domain vlan
Function
Set the VLAN assignment to the MSTP instance.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
stp domain <instance-id> vlan <vidlist>
Options
<instance-id>
• Instance ID number
Specify a decimal value from 1 to 15.
<vidlist>
• VLAN ID
Specify a decimal VLAN ID from 1 to 4094.
When setting multiple VLAN IDs, separate them with commas (,).
When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-
10,100,200")
Use Mode
Explanation
Caution
Configuration mode (admin class)
Set VLAN assignment to an MSTP instance.
This command is enabled only in the MSTP operation mode.
The definition is disabled when vlan assigned to an instance is not set to the Ethernet
port.
Default
N/A
STP Information
223
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.8.1.9 stp max-hops
Function
Set a maximum hop count of bridge configuration.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
stp max-hops <hop_count>
Options
<hop_count>
• Maximum hop count
Specify a decimal value from 1 to 40.
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
This command is used instead of the Message Age and Max Age parameters in the MST
region.
It indicates the valid hop count for the BPDU that the root bridge sends.
When the hop count of the received BPDU is 0, this device begins to send BPDU with the
maximum hop count as a root bridge.
Caution
Default
This command is enabled only in the MSTP operation mode.
The hop count is reduced each time BPDU is forwarded via a neighboring device. If this
device functions as a root bridge with the hop count set to 1, a spanning tree will be
created only between this device and a neighboring device.
It is assumed that 20 is set for hop count.
stp max-hops 20
STP Information
224
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.9 LLDP Information Settings
This section explains about Loop Detection information settings.
5.9.1
LLDP Information
This section explains about the commands related to LLDP Information.
5.9.1.1 lldp send interval
Function
Set LLDP send interval
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
lldp send interval <interval> <delay>
Options
<interval>
• LLDP send interval
Specify LLDP send interval with a decimal value with h (hours), m (minutes), s (seconds)
It can be specified from 5 seconds to 32768 seconds.
This setting corresponds to msgTxInterval in 802.1AB
<delay>
• LLDP send miimal interval
Specify LLDP send minimal interval with a decimal value with h (hours), m (minutes), s
(seconds) It can be specified from 1 second to 0.25 x <interval>seconds (Max is 8192 sec).
This setting corresponds to TxDelay in 802.1AB
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Specify LLDP send interval which this device sends LLDP information periodically with
and LLDP send minimal interval which this device sends LLDP information when LLDP
information is changed
Default
It is assumed that 30sec is set for LLDP send interval and 2sec is set for LLDP send
miimal interval.
lldp send interval 30s 2s
LLDP Information Settings
225
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.9.1.2 lldp send hold
Function
Set LLDP hold times
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
lldp send hold <count>
Options
<count>
• LLDP hold times
Specify LLDP hold time which neighbor device holds LLDP information of this device.
Specify LLDP hold times with a decimal value from 2 times to 10 times.
This setting corresponds to msgTxInterval in 802.1AB
This setting corresponds to msgTxHold in 802.1AB
Use Mode
Explanation
Default
Configuration mode (admin class)
Specify LLDP hold time which neighbor device holds LLDP information of this device.
It is assumed that 4 is set for LLDP hold times.
lldp send hold 4
5.9.1.3 lldp reinit delay
Function
Set LLDP reinit delay time
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
lldp reinit delay <delay>
Options
<delay>
• LLDP reinit delay time
When LLDP send function is disabled, this device sends LLDP information with TTL=0
and after <delay> time, this device reinitializes the internal status.
This setting corresponds to reinitDelay in 802.1AB
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
When LLDP send function is disabled, this device sends LLDP information with TTL=0
and after <delay> time, this device reinitializes the internal status.
Default
It is assumed that 2sec is set for LLDP reinit delay time.
lldp reinit delay 2s
LLDP Information Settings
226
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.9.1.4 lldp notification interval
Function
Set minimal interval of SNMP Notification Trap
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
lldp notification interval <interval>
Options
<interval>
• Trap minimal interval
Specify minimal interval of SNMP Notification Trap with a decimal value with h (hours),
m (minutes), s (seconds) from 5 seconds to 3600 seconds.
This setting corresponds to NotificationInterval in 802.1AB
Use Mode
Explanation
Caution
Configuration mode (admin class)
Specify minimal interval between SNMP Notification Traps
When snmp service command is disabled or snmp trap lldpremtableschange is disabled
SNMP Notification Trap (lldpRemTablesChange Trap) is not sent
Default
It is assumed that 5sec is set for Trap minimal interval.
lldp notification interval 5s
LLDP Information Settings
227
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.10 IGMP Snooping Information Settings
This section explains about IGMP snooping information settings.
5.10.1 IGMP Snooping Information
This section explains about the commands related to IGMP snooping information.
5.10.1.1 igmpsnoop use
Function
Set the IGMP snooping function.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
igmpsnoop use <mode>
Options
<mode>
Specify the IGMP snooping mode.
• on
Enable IGMP snooping.
• off
Disable IGMP snooping.
Use Mode
Explanation
Default
Configuration mode (admin class)
Specify the IGMP snooping mode.
It is assumed that the IGMP snooping function is not used.
igmpsnoop use off
5.10.1.2 igmpsnoop localgroup
Function
Set the local group of IGMP snooping function.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
igmpsnoop localgroup <mode>
Options
<mode>
Specify the local group of IGMP snooping function.
• join
The packets are forwarded when membership report is recived for local group.
• auto
The packets are forwarded when multicast packets to local group are received.
Use Mode
Explanation
Default
Configuration mode (admin class)
Specify local group behavior of IGMP snooping.
It is assumed that the packets are forwarded when multicast packets to local group are
received.
igmpsnoop localgroup auto
IGMP Snooping Information Settings
228
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.10.1.3 igmpsnoop unknown flooding
Function
Set the unknown multicast packets handling in IGMP snooping function.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448
Syntax
igmpsnoop unknown flooding <mode>
Options
<mode>
Specify flooding mode for unknown multicast packets.
• off
Discard unknown multicast packets.
• on
Flooding to the same VLAN.
Use Mode
Explanation
Caution
Configuration mode (admin class)
Set the unknown multicast packets handling in IGMP snooping function.
This command is valid when IGMP snooping function is enabled.
If IGMP snooping function is disabled, unknown multicast packets are flooded not
depending on this definition.
Default
It is assumed that "Discard unknown multicast packets".
igmpsnoop unknown flooding off
IGMP Snooping Information Settings
229
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.11 Loop Detection Information Settings
This section explains about Loop Detection information settings.
5.11.1 Loop Detection Information
This section explains about the commands related to Loop Detection information.
5.11.1.1 loopdetect use
Function
Set the Loop Detection function.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
loopdetect use <mode>
Options
<mode>
• on
Enable the Loop Detection function.
• off
Disable the Loop Detection function.
Use Mode
Explanation
Default
Configuration mode (admin class)
Set whether or not to enable the loop detection function.
It is assumed that the loop detection function is disabled.
loopdetect use off
Loop Detection Information Settings
230
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.11.1.2 loopdetect portdisable
Function
Set the port offline mode.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
loopdetect portdisable <mode>
Options
<mode>
• yes
Place the port offline automatically.
• no
Do not place the port offline.
Use Mode
Explanation
Caution
Configuration mode (admin class)
Set whether or not to place the relevant port offline when a loop is detected.
It is assumed that the ports are not placed offline.
Default
loopdetect portdisable no
5.11.1.3 loopdetect portblock
Function
Set the port blocking behavior after the Loop detected.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
loopdetect portblock <mode>
Options
<mode>
• yes
If the Loop detected, the ether port is blocking (without linkdown).
• no
After the Loop detected, the ether port is non-blocking.
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Specify the port blocking behavior after the Loop detected.
The blocking port will be non-blocking, if no Loop is detected while recovery monitoring
works on.
The recovery monitoring counter specified by "loopdetect recovery"command and the
monitoring interval is specified by "loopdetect interval"command.
Caution
Default
port blocking function is not work.
• When the STP function is enabled, this port blocking function is not work.
It is assumed that port blocking function is disabled.
loopdetect portblock no
Loop Detection Information Settings
231
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.11.1.4 loopdetect interval
Function
Set a transmission interval of the Loop Detection frame.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
loopdetect interval <time>
Options
<time>
• Transmission interval
Specify a transmission interval of the loop detection frame with a value from 1 to 32767
seconds.
The unit shall be h (hour), m (minute), or s (second).
Use Mode
Explanation
Default
Configuration mode (admin class)
Specify a transmission interval of the Loop Detection frame.
It is assumed that 10 seconds have been specified.
loopdetect interval 10s
5.11.1.5 loopdetect recovery
Function
Set the upper limit of monitoring counter for blocking port recovery.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
loopdetect recovery <count>
Options
<count>
• Upper limit of monitoring counter for blocking port recovery, with a decimal value from 1
to 65535.
If the counter is expired without detecting the Loop, the blocking port is set non-
blocking again.
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Set the upper limit of monitoring counter for blocking port recovery.
If the counter is expired without detecting the Loop, the blocking port is set non-blocking
again.
If the the Loop is detected, the counter is set 0 agein.
The monitoring interval is specified by "loopdetect interval"command.
Default
It is assumed 60 has been specified as the upper limit of monitoring counter.
loopdetect recovery 60
Loop Detection Information Settings
232
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.12 ACL Information Settings
This section explains about ACL information settings.
5.12.1 ACL Information
This section explains about the commands related to ACL information.
Specifying range for ACL definition number
Model
ACL definition number
XG0224/XG0448
Specify a range between 0 to 799 for ACL definition number (in a decimal number) to specify
"acl_count" written in the [Option] in command in this section.
XG2600
Specify a range between 0 to 299 for ACL definition number (in a decimal number) to specify
"acl_count" written in the [Option] in command in this section.
5.12.1.1 acl mac
Function
Set the definition of the ACL MAC.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
acl <acl_count> mac <src_mac> <dst_mac> llc <value>
acl <acl_count> mac <src_mac> <dst_mac> ether <value>
acl <acl_count> mac <src_mac> <dst_mac> any
Options
<acl_count>
• ACL definition number
Specify an ACL definition serial number with a decimal value.
<src_mac>
Specify the source MAC address for ACL.
• any
Specify it when targeting all MAC addresses.
• bcast
Specify it when targeting a broadcast MAC address.
• mcast
Specify it when targeting a multicast MAC address.
• Other than those above
Specify the target MAC address. Specify the source MAC address for ACL in the
xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx format, where "xx" is a 2-digit hexadecimal value.
<dst_mac>
Specify the destination MAC address for ACL.
• any
Specify it when targeting all MAC addresses.
• bcast
Specify it when targeting a broadcast MAC address.
• mcast
Specify it when targeting a multicast MAC address.
ACL Information Settings
233
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
• Messages other than those above
Specify the target MAC address. Specify the source MAC address for ACL in the
xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx format, where "xx" is a 2-digit hexadecimal value.
<format> <value>
• llc
Specify it when targeting the LLC-format frame in which the value of <value> matches
LSAP. In <value>, specify a hexadecimal value from 0 to ffff.
To target all LLC-format frames, specify "any" in <value>.
• ether
Specify it when targeting the Ethernet-format frame in which the value of <value>
matches the type. In <value>, specify a hexadecimal value from 5dd to ffff.
To target all Ethernet-format frames, specify "any" in <value>.
• any
Specify it when targeting all frames. <value> is not necessary.
Use Mode
Explanation
Default
Configuration mode (admin class)
Specify the etherframe pattern in the ACL definition.
Any etherframe pattern can be specified in the ACL definition.
5.12.1.2 acl vlan
Function
Set the definition of the ACL VLAN.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
acl <acl_count> vlan <vid> <cos>
Options
<acl_count>
• ACL definition number
Specify an ACL definition serial number with a decimal value.
<vid>
Specify the source VID address for ACL.
• any
Specify when targeting all VID addresses.
• Other than those above
Specify the target VID. The allowable range of VID addresses for ACL is 1 to 4094.
<cos>
Specify COS for ACL.
• any
Specify it when targeting all COS.
• Other than those above
Specify the target COS. The allowable range of COS for ACL is 0 to 7.
Use Mode
Explanation
Default
Configuration mode (admin class)
Specify VLAN in the ACL definition.
Any VLAN ID can be specified in the ACL definition.
ACL Information Settings
234
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.12.1.3 acl ip
Function
Set the definition of the ACL IPv4.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
acl <acl_count> ip <src_addr>/<mask> <dst_addr>/<mask> [<protocol> [any]]
acl <acl_count> ip <src_addr>/<mask> <dst_addr>/<mask> [<protocol> [tos <value>]]
acl <acl_count> ip <src_addr>/<mask> <dst_addr>/<mask> [<protocol> [dscp <value>]]
Options
<acl_count>
• ACL definition number
Specify an ACL definition serial number with a decimal value.
<src_addr>/<mask>
Specify the source IP address for ACL and the number of mask bits.
• IP address/number of mask bits (or mask value)
Specify a combination of the source IP address for ACL and the number of mask bits.
For the mask value, specify successive 1s following the most significant bit (MSB).
The available description format is as follows:
- IP address/number of mask bits (Example: 192.168.1.1/24)
• any
Specify it when all source IP addresses are subject to ACL.
The default is 0.0.0.0/0.
<dst_addr>/<mask>
Specify the destination IP address for ACL and the number of mask bits.
• IP address/number of mask bits (or mask value)
Specify a combination of the destination IP address for ACL and the number of mask
bits.
The description format is identical to for <src_addr>/<mask>.
• any
Specify it when all destination IP addresses are subject to ACL.
The default is 0.0.0.0/0.
<protocol>
Specify a protocol number for ACL.
• Protocol number
Specify the protocol number for ACL with a decimal value from 1 to 255. (Example:
ICMP:1, TCP:6, UDP:17, etc.)
• any
Specify it when all protocol numbers are subject to ACL.
The default is "any".
<type>
Specify how to identify QoS for ACL.
• tos
Specify it when identifying the ACL target with the TOS value.
• dscp
Specify it when identifying the ACL target with the DSCP value.
• any
Specify it when identifying the ACL target with all TOS and DSCP values.
<value>
Specify the TOS or DSCP value used to identify the ACL target.
ACL Information Settings
235
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
• TOS value
Specify the TOS value used to identify the ACL target with a hexadecimal value from 0
to ff.
• DSCP value
Specify the DSCP value used to identify the ACL target with a decimal value from 0 to
63.
Use Mode
Explanation
Caution
Configuration mode (admin class)
Specify the IPv4 packet pattern in the ACL definition.
Make sure to define the acl ip when using L3 protocols such as TCP, UDP, or ICMP.
Default
Any IP packet pattern can be specified in the ACL definition.
(The ACL definition is disabled if "all any" is specified or undefined.)
ACL Information Settings
236
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.12.1.4 acl ip6
Function
Set ACL IPv6 definition
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
acl <acl_count> ip6 <src_addr>/<prefixlen> <dst_addr>/<prefixlen> [<protocol> [any]]
acl <acl_count> ip6 <src_addr>/<prefixlen> <dst_addr>/<prefixlen> [<protocol> [tc <value>]]
acl <acl_count> ip6 <src_addr>/<prefixlen> <dst_addr>/<prefixlen>
[<protocol> [dscp <value>]]
Options
<acl_count>
• ACL definition number
Specify ACL definition number with a decimal number
<src_addr>/<prefixlen>
Specify source IPv6 and prefix length
• IPv6 address/prefix length
Specify IPv6 address and prefix length
• any
Any source IPv6 address
<dst_addr>/<prefixlen>
Specify destination IPv6 and prefix length
• IPv6 address/prefix length
Specify destination IPv6 and prefix length
• any
Any destination IPv6 address
<protocol>
Specify protocol number
• protocol number
Specify protocol number
• any
Any protocol number
<type>
• tc
Specify Traffic Class value value
• dscp
Specify DSCP value
• any
Specify TOS value, DSCP value
<value>
• Traffic Class value
Specify traffic class value
• DSCP value
Specify DSCP value with a decimal number from 0 to 63
Use Mode
Explanation
Default
Configuration mode (admin class)
Set ACL IPv6 definition
N/A
ACL Information Settings
237
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.12.1.5 acl tcp
Function
Set the definition of the ACL TCP.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
acl <acl_count> tcp <src_port> <dst_port>
Options
<acl_count>
• ACL definition number
Specify an ACL definition serial number with a decimal value.
<src_port>
Specify a source port number for ACL.
• Port number
Specify the source port number for ACL with a decimal value from 1 to 65535.
When specifying multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).
Using a comma (,) enables you to specify up to 10 port numbers, including <src_port>
and <dst_port>.
The available description format is as follows:
- Decimal number from 1 to 65535 (Example: 65535 = Port 65535)
- Port number, port number, ... (Example: 10,20,30 = Ports 10, 20, and 30)
• any
Specify it when all source port numbers are subject to ACL.
<dst_port>
Specify a destination port number for ACL.
• Port number
Specify the destination port number for ACL with a decimal value from 1 to 65535.
The same is true with the description format in <src_port>.
• any
Specify it when all destination port numbers are subject to ACL.
Use Mode
Explanation
Caution
Configuration mode (admin class)
Specify the TCP packet pattern in the ACL definition.
command.
Default
Any TCP packet pattern can be specified in the ACL definition.
ACL Information Settings
238
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.12.1.6 acl udp
Function
Set the definition of the ACL UDP.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
acl <acl_count> udp <src_port> <dst_port>
Options
<acl_count>
• ACL definition number
Specify an ACL definition serial number with a decimal value.
<src_port>
Specify a source port number for ACL.
• Port number
Specify the source port number for ACL with a decimal value from 1 to 65535.
When specifying multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).
Using a comma (,) enables you to specify up to 10 port numbers, including <src_port>
and <dst_port>.
The available description format is as follows:
- Decimal number from 1 to 65535 (Example: 65535 = Port 65535)
- Port number, port number, ... (Example: 10,20,30 = Ports 10, 20, and 30)
• any
Specify it when all source port numbers are subject to ACL.
<dst_port>
Specify a destination port number for ACL.
• Port number
Specify the destination port number for ACL with a decimal value from 1 to 65535.
The same is true with the description format in <src_port>.
• any
Specify it when all destination port numbers are subject to ACL.
Use Mode
Explanation
Caution
Configuration mode (admin class)
Specify the UDP packet pattern in the ACL definition.
command.
Default
Any UDP packet pattern can be specified in the ACL definition.
ACL Information Settings
239
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.12.1.7 acl icmp
Function
Set the definition of the ACL ICMP.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
acl <acl_count> icmp <icmptype> <icmpcode>
Options
<acl_count>
• ACL definition number
Specify an ACL definition serial number with a decimal value.
<icmptype>
Specify ICMP TYPE for ACL.
• ICMP TYPE
Specify the source ICMP TYPE for ACL with a decimal value from 0 to 255.
When specifying multiple ICMP TYPEs, separate them with commas (,).
Using a comma (,) enables you to specify up to 10 ICMP TYPEs.
The available description format is as follows:
- Decimal number from 0 to 255 (Example: 8 = ICMP TYPE 8)
- ICMP TYPE, ICMP TYPE, ... (Example: 0, 8, 30 = ICMP TYPEs 0, 8, and 30)
• any
Specify it when all ICMP TYPEs are subject to ACL.
<icmpcode>
Specify ICMP CODE for ACL.
• ICMP CODE
Specify the source ICMP CODE for ACL with a decimal value from 0 to 255.
When specifying multiple ICMP CODEs, separate them with commas (,).
Using a comma (,) enables you to specify up to 10 ICMP CODEs.
The available description format is as follows:
- Decimal number from 0 to 255 (Example: 8 = ICMP CODE 8)
- ICMP CODE, ICMP CODE, ... (Example: 0, 8, 30 = ICMP CODEs 0, 8, and 30)
• any
Specify it when all ICMP CODEs are subject to ACL.
Use Mode
Explanation
Caution
Configuration mode (admin class)
Specify the ICMP packet pattern in the ACL definition.
Default
Any ICMP packet pattern can be specified in the ACL definition.
ACL Information Settings
240
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.12.1.8 acl description
Function
Set the definition of the ACL description.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
acl <acl_count> description <description>
Options
<acl_count>
• ACL definition number
Specify an ACL definition serial number with a decimal value.
<description>
• Description of setting
Describe settings with this ACL definition number, using up to 50 characters from 0x21,
0x23 to 0x7e ASCII set.
Use Mode
Explanation
Default
Configuration mode (admin class)
Describe settings with this ACL definition number.
It is assumed that no setting is described.
ACL Information Settings
241
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.13 AAA Information Settings
This section explains about AAA Information Settings.
Allowed range of group IDs
The group serial number (decimal value), which is to be specified in [<group_id>] (group ID) described in [Options] of
each command, shall be within the range as shown below.
Range
Model
0 to 9
XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Allowed range of AAA user information definition number
The group serial number (decimal value), which is to be specified in [<number>] (AAA user information definition
number) described in [Options] of each command, shall be within the range as shown below.
Range
0 to 999
Model
XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Allowed range of RADIUS server definition number
The group serial number (decimal value), which is to be specified in [<number>] (RADIUS server definition number)
described in [Options] of each command, shall be within the range as shown below.
Range
Model
0 to 3
XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
AAA Information Settings
242
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.13.1 Group ID Information
This section explains about the commands related to group ID information.
5.13.1.1 aaa name
Function
Set a group name.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
aaa [<group_id>] name <group_name>
Options
<group_id>
• Group ID
Specify a group ID with a serial decimal value.
The default is 0.
<group_name>
• Group name
Specify a group name using up to 32 characters from 0x21, 0x23 to 0x7e ASCII set.
Use Mode
Explanation
Caution
Configuration mode (admin class)
Set a group name.
This command will fail if the same group name is already registered.
It is assumed that no group name is set.
Default
AAA Information Settings
243
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.13.2 AAA User Information
This section explains about the commands related to AAA user information.
5.13.2.1 aaa user id
Function
Set the authentication information (user ID).
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
aaa [<group_id>] user [<number>] id <id>
Options
<group_id>
• Group ID
Specify a group ID with a serial decimal value.
The default is 0.
<number>
• AAA user information definition number
Specify a group serial number with a decimal value
The default is 0.
<id>
• User ID
Specify a user ID using up to 128 characters from 0x21, 0x23 to 0x7e ASCII set.
Use Mode
Explanation
Default
Configuration mode (admin class)
Set the authentication information (user ID) for authentication protocol.
It is assumed that no authentication information (user ID) is set.
AAA Information Settings
244
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.13.2.2 aaa user password
Function
Set the authentication information (password).
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
aaa [<group_id>] user [<number>] password <password> [encrypted]
Options
<group_id>
• Group ID
Specify a group ID with a serial decimal value.
The default is 0.
<number>
• AAA user information definition number
Specify a group serial number with a decimal value.
The default is 0.
<password>
• Authentication password
Specify the authentication password using up to 128 characters from 0x21, 0x23 to
0x7e ASCII set.
Specify the encrypted authentication password together with "encrypted" to be
displayed with the "show" command.
Correctly specify the character string displayed in the "show" command.
encrypted
• Specify the encrypted authentication password
Specify it when setting the encrypted authentication password in <password>.
Use Mode
Explanation
Caution
Configuration mode (admin class)
Set the authentication information (authentication password) for authentication protocol.
With the "show" command, the encrypted authentication password is displayed together
with "encrypted".
Default
It is assumed that no authentication information (password) is specified.
AAA Information Settings
245
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.13.2.3 aaa user user-role
Function
Sets user privilege class.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
aaa [<group_id>] user [<number>] user-role <class>
Options
<group_id>
• Group ID
Set group IDs using a base 10 sequential serial number.
Default is 0.
<number>
• AAA User ID
Serial number within the group, expressed as a base 10 value.
Default is 0.
<class>
Sets privilege class.
• administrator
Sets privilege class to administrator class.
• user
Sets privilege class to user class.
• none
No privilege class specified.
Use Mode
Explanation
Default
Configuration mode (admin class)
When used for login user information, sets user privilege class.
If unset, privilege class is unspecified.
AAA Information Settings
246
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.13.3 RADIUS Information Settings
This section explains about the commands related to RADIUS information.
5.13.3.1 aaa radius service
Function
Set the RADIUS service.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
aaa [<group_id>] radius service <service> [<type>]
Options
<group_id>
• Group ID
Specify a group ID with a serial decimal value.
The default is 0.
<service>
• client
Use it as the RADIUS client function.
• off
Do not use the RADIUS function.
<type>
This parameter is available when "client" is specified in<service>.
• auth
Enable the RADIUS authentication function.
Use Mode
Explanation
Default
Configuration mode (admin class)
Set the RADIUS function used for the local device.
It is assumed that the RADIUS authentication function is not used.
aaa [<group_id>] radius service off
AAA Information Settings
247
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.13.3.2 aaa radius auth source
Function
Set the local IP address of the RADIUS authentication device.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
aaa [<group_id>] radius auth source <address>
Options
<group_id>
• Group ID
Specify a group ID with a serial decimal value.
<address>
• Local IP address
Specify the IPv4 or IPv6 address of the remote RADIUS authentication device.
The allowable range is as follows:
- IPv4
1.0.0.1 to 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 to 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 to 223.255.255.254
- IPv6
::2 to fe7f:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff
fec0:: to feff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Set the IP address of the local RADIUS authentication device.
When using this device as a RADIUS authentication client, set the local IP address used
for communication with the RADIUS authentication server.
Default
It is assumed that the local IP address used for communication with the remote RADIUS
authentication device is automatically selected.
AAA Information Settings
248
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.13.3.3 aaa radius auth message-authenticator
Function
Set the Message-Authenticator.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
aaa [<group_id>] radius auth message-authenticator <mode>
Options
<group_id>
• Group ID
Specify a group ID with a serial decimal value.
<mode>
• off
Disable Message-Authenticator.
• on
Enable Message-Authenticator.
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Set whether to enable Message-Authenticator for authentication.
For EEE802.1x authentication, enable Message-Authenticator regardless of this setting.
This command is available only for authentication request messages in this device.
Default
Disable Message-Authenticator.
aaa [<group_id>] radius auth message-authenticator off
AAA Information Settings
249
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.13.3.4 aaa radius client server-info auth secret
Function
Set the shared key (RADIUS secret) for the RADIUS authentication server.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
aaa [<group_id>] radius client server-info auth [<number>] secret <secret> [encrypted]
Options
<group_id>
• Group ID
Specify a group ID with a serial decimal value.
The default is 0.
<number>
• Server definition number
Specify the definition number of the remote device with a decimal value.
The default is 0.
<secret>
• Shared key (RADIUS secret)
Specify the shared key (RADIUS secret), which has been determined between this
device and the RADIUS authentication server, using up to 64 characters from 0x21,
0x23 to 0x7e ASCII set.
• Encrypted shared-key (RADIUS secret)
Specify the encrypted shared-key (RARIUS secret) together with "encrypted" to be
displayed with the "show" command.
encrypted
• Specify the encrypted shared-key (RADIUS secret)
Specify it when setting the encrypted shared-key (RADIUS secret) in <secret>.
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Set the shared key (RADIUS secret) used between this device and RADIUS
authentication server.
With the "show" command, the encrypted shared-key (RADIUS secret) is displayed
together with "encrypted".
Default
It is assumed that the shared key (RADIUS secret) is not set.
AAA Information Settings
250
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.13.3.5 aaa radius client server-info auth address
Function
Set the IP address of the remote RADIUS authentication server.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
aaa [<group_id>] radius client server-info auth [<number>] address <address>
Options
<group_id>
• Group ID
Specify a group ID with a serial decimal value.
<number>
• Server definition number
Specify the definition number of the remote device with a decimal value.
The default is 0.
<address>
• Remote IP address
Specify the IPv4 or IPv6 address of the remote RADIUS authentication device.
The allowable range is as follows:
- IPv4
1.0.0.1 to 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 to 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 to 223.255.255.254
- IPv6
::2 to fe7f:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff
fec0:: to feff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Set the IP address of the RADIUS authentication server that communicates with this
device.
Multiple servers cannot be specified.
Default
The IP address of the remote RADIUS authentication device is not set. Be sure to set this
command when using the RADIUS authentication function.
AAA Information Settings
251
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.13.3.6 aaa radius client server-info auth port
Function
Specify UDP port of the authentication server (the old RFC specifications compatible).
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
aaa [<group_id>] radius client server-info auth [<number>] port <port>
Options
<group_id>
• Group ID
Specify a group ID with a serial decimal value.
<number>
• Server definition number
Specify the definition number of the remote device with a decimal value.
The default is 0.
<port>
• 1812
The UDP port number that has been assigned to the RADIUS authentication server in
the latest RFC specifications.
• 1645
The UDP port number that has been assigned to the RADIUS authentication server in
the old RFC specifications.
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Set the UDP port number of the RADIUS authentication server for which a RADIUS
authentication client requests authentication.
If the RADIUS authentication server for which the authentication is requested is installed
with a UDP port based on the old RFC specifications, set the port number to 1645.
Default
It is assumed that the UDP port number of the RADIUS accounting server is set to 1812.
aaa radius client server-info auth port 1812
AAA Information Settings
252
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.13.3.7 aaa radius client server-info auth deadtime
Function
Set a recovery standby time.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
aaa [<group_id>] radius client server-info auth [<number>] deadtime <deadtime>
Options
<group_id>
• Group ID
Specify a group ID with a serial decimal value.
<number>
• Server definition number
Specify the definition number of the remote device with a decimal value.
The default is 0.
<deadtime>
• Recovery standby time
Specify a time period required to automatically restore the RADIUS server to the alive
state after it was placed into the dead state.
The unit shall be d (day), h (hour), m (minute), or s (second).
The allowable range is as follows:
0 to 86400 (seconds):
Specifying "0s" will not automatically restore the RADIUS server to the alive state.
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
If the RADIUS server does not respond after the response wait time set in the "aaa radius
client retry" command lapsed, it will be placed in the dead state and set to the lowest
priority. Once the RADIUS server is placed in the dead state, it will remain disabled as
long as an alive server is active. Set a wait time to automatically recover the server from
the dead state to the alive state according to the priority setting.
To recover from the dead state to the alive state, one of the following conditions must be
satisfied.
• When the set time has elapsed:
• When a response has been returned from the RADIUS server in the dead state, to
which some packets were sent, after all the available servers were placed into the dead
state; or
command.
Default
It is assumed that the server is not recovered automatically.
aaa radius client server-info auth deadtime 0s
AAA Information Settings
253
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.13.3.8 aaa radius client server-info auth priority
Function
Set the priority.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
aaa [<group_id>] radius client server-info auth [<number>] priority <priority>
Options
<group_id>
• Group ID
Specify a group ID with a serial decimal value.
<number>
• Server definition number
Specify the definition number of the remote device with a decimal value.
The default is 0.
<priority>
• Priority
Specify the priority required to enable the RADIUS server in the same group.
A smaller value has a higher priority, where "0" is assumed to be the highest priority
level and "255" to be the lowest priority level.
0 to 255:
Specifying "255" will always place the RADIUS server into the dead state.
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Specify the priority used to determine the RADIUS server for accounting among multiple
RADIUS servers in the same group. A RADIUS server with the highest priority, which is
not in the dead state, is used in the same group. If there are multiple RADIUS servers
which have the highest priority, the target RADIUS server will be determined randomly.
Default
It is assumed that the highest priority has been specified.
aaa radius client server-info auth priority 0
AAA Information Settings
254
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.13.3.9 aaa radius client server-info auth source
Function
Set the local IP address.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
aaa [<group_id>] radius client server-info auth [<number>] source <address>
Options
<group_id>
• Group ID
Specify a group ID with a serial decimal value.
<number>
• Server definition number
Specify the definition number of the remote device with a decimal value.
The default is 0.
<address>
• Local IP address
Specify the IPv4 or IPv6 address of the local RADIUS authentication server.
The allowable range is as follows:
- IPv4
1.0.0.1 to 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 to 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 to 223.255.255.254
- IPv6
::2 to fe7f:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff
fec0:: to feff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Set the IP address of the local RADIUS authentication device. The IP address setting of
this definition supersedes that of the local RADIUS authentication device set by "aaa
radius auth source".
Default
It is assumed that the IP address setting of the local RADIUS authentication device set by
"aaa radius auth source" is applied.
AAA Information Settings
255
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.13.3.10 aaa radius client retry
Function
Set a RADIUS packet retry count and a transmission interval.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
aaa [<group_id>] radius client retry <interval> <retry>
Options
<group_id>
• Group ID
Specify a group ID with a serial decimal value.
<interval>
• Transmission interval
Set a packet transmission interval when the RADIUS server returns no response.
The allowable range is as follows:
1 to 10 (seconds)
<retry>
• Retry count value
Set a packet retry count value when the RADIUS server returns no response.
The allowable range is as follows:
1 to 10 (times)
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Set a number of times for retransmission and a transmission interval for packet when no
response has been returned from the RADIUS server.
The time period to wait for a response from the server is transmission interval x (number
of transmission + 1) seconds.
Default
Operate assuming that the transmission interval is 5 seconds and the number of times for
retransmission is 2.
In this case, the time period to wait for a response from the server is 15 seconds after the
first packet transmission was completed.
aaa 0 client radius retry 5 2
5.13.3.11 aaa radius client security
Function
Set security Level when RADIUS server doesn’t respond
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
aaa [<group_id>] radius client security <level>
Options
<group_id>
• Group ID
Specify group ID with a decimal value.
<level>
• high
Set security level to high
• normal
Set security level to normal
Use Mode
Explanation
Default
Configuration mode (admin class)
Set security Level when RADIUS server doesn’t respond
aaa <group_id> client radius security high
AAA Information Settings
256
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.14 Password Information
This section explains about password information.
5.14.1 password format
Function
Sets format for encrypted password strings.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
password format <format>
Options
<format>
Format for encrypted password strings
• common
Common password format
Encrypted password strings that can be used by other devices.
• unique
Device-specific password format
Encrypted password strings that can only be used by this device.
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
When plain text passwords are set in the configuration they are converted to encrypted
password strings. When the show or save command is executed, encrypted passwords
are displayed or stored with the word "encrypted" appended.
This command configures the format in which encrypted password strings are shown and
stored. This setting applies to all passwords in the configuration.
This command takes effect immediately upon configuration.
If the Common option is set, password strings will be encrypted in the same common
password format for all devices. If a device is replaced due to failure or other
circumstances, a configuration that has been saved using the common password format
can be restored to the new device after replacement. While the common option is in
effect, passwords may be set in plain text or in the common password format. Passwords
may not be set in a device-specific format.
If the unique option is set, encrypted password strings will be in a device-specific
password format, unique to each device. A configuration shown or stored using a device-
specific password format can only be set or restored to that specific device. If the device
is replaced due to failure or other circumstances, the configuration saved in the device-
specific password format cannot be restored, so please be sure to reset the new device
with plain text passwords after replacement. While the unique option is in effect,
passwords may be set in plain text, the common password format, or the device-specific
password format displayed on the device.
If the unique option is set on devices implementing Trusted Platform Module (TPM), the
device-specific password format will use the TPM chip. In addition, when the unique
option is set, a check is run to see if the TPM chip is working properly, and if a hardware
error is detected the message below is output and the option is set to common.
Caution
If set to unique, this setting cannot be re-set to common or canceled. If you wish to reset
this setting to common, run the reset clear command to restore to factory settings, then
re-set the configuration.
When the unique option has been set, all preexisting passwords will be converted to the
device-specific password format, displayed and saved.
Password Information
257
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
Default
If unset, the common setting will be the default.
password format common
5.14.2 password admin set
Function
Set an administrator password.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
password admin set [<password> [encrypted]]
Options
<password>
• Password
Specify a password using up to 64 characters from, 0x21,0x23 to 0x3e,0x40 to 0x7e
ASCII set.
• Encrypted password
Specify the encrypted password together with "encrypted" to be displayed with the
encrypted
• Specify the encrypted password
Specify it when setting the encrypted password in <password>.
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Set a password for the administrator to login this device. When changing to the
command is required.
To make the password secure, it shall be set with eight or more alphanumeric characters
and symbols mixed.
If the <password> option is not set, the password is required interactivery.
This command becomes valid just after it is set.
Entering "admin" for the user name and this password for "password" makes it possible
to login as the admin class and also to use admin-class commands.
Caution
Be sure to set an administrator password. When not setting the administrator password,
you can login without entering any password.
When not setting the administrator password, you can't use AAA user information (see
"aaa user id" command) and user information in RADIUS-server.
When setting a password that consists of seven or fewer characters, only alphabetic
characters, or only numeric characters, and also when deleting a setting, the setting and
the deletion are performed, but a warning message will be displayed notifying that the
password is vulnerable.
commands, the encrypted password is displayed together with "encrypted".
Message
Password:
The <password> option is not set.
Type the password for administrator interactivery.
Password Information
258
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
Retype password:
The <password> option is not set.
Retype the password for administrator interactivery.
<WARNING> weak admin password: set the password
The administrator password is not set.
Set an administrator password.
<WARNING> weak admin password: contain at least 8 characters
The administrator password is seven or fewer characters in length.
Set an administrator password with eight or more characters.
<WARNING> weak admin password: contain a different kind of character
The administrator password consists of only alphabetic characters or only numeric
characters.
Set an administrator password with alphanumeric characters and symbols mixed.
command.
Default
An administrator password is not set.
Password Information
259
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.14.3 password user set
Function
Set a general user password.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
password user set <password> [encrypted]
Options
<password>
• Password
Specify a password using up to 64 characters from 0x21, 0x23 to 0x7e ASCII set.
• Encrypted password
Specify the encrypted password together with "encrypted" to be displayed with the
encrypted
• Specify the encrypted password
Specify it when setting the encrypted password in <password>.
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Set a password for general users to login this device.
To make the password secure, it shall be set with eight or more alphanumeric characters
and symbols mixed.
This command becomes valid just after it is set.
Entering "admin" for the user name and this password for "password" makes it possible
to login as the user class and also to use user-class commands.
Caution
When not setting the user password, you cannot login as the user class. When setting a
password that consists of seven or fewer characters, only alphabetic characters, or only
numeric characters, and also when deleting a setting, the setting and the deletion are
performed, but a warning message will be displayed notifying that the password is
vulnerable.
At ftp connection, a user password cannot be used for login.
If you login with a user password, the contents that were set at logout or execution of the
"admin" command will be discarded without storing the contents that were set with the
With the "show logging" command, history numbers are discontinuous without displaying
the commands that were executed by the administrator.
With the "show candidate-config", "show running-config", and "show startup-config"
commands, the encrypted password is displayed together with "encrypted".
Message
<WARNING> weak user password: contain at least 8 characters
The user password is seven or fewer characters in length.
Set a user password with eight or more characters.
<WARNING> weak user password: contain a different kind of character
The user password consists of only alphabetic characters or only numeric characters.
Set a user password with alphanumeric characters and symbols mixed.
command.
Default
A general user password is not set.
Password Information
260
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.14.4 password aaa
Function
Set AAA information of login user
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
password aaa <group_id>
Options
<group_id>
• AAA Group ID
Specify AAA group ID with a decimal value
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Specify AAA group ID refered when logging in
• When using RADIUS server
Specify Filter-ID attribute registered in RADIUS server
"administrator" is admin class, "user" is user class
• When using local user information
It is diced by class (aaa user user-role) registered in AAA information
Default
N/A
5.14.5 password authtype
Function
Set authentication protocol for login user authentication
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
password authtype <authtype>
Options
<authtype>
• chap_md5
Use MD5-CHAP as authentication protocol
• pap
Use PAP as authentication protocol
Use Mode
Explanation
Default
Configuration mode (admin class)
Set authentication protocol for login user authentication
It is assumed to use MD5-CHAP as authentication protocol.
password authtype chap_md5
Password Information
261
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.15 Device Information Settings
This section explains about device information settings.
5.15.1 SNMP Information
This section explains about the commands related to SNMP information.
5.15.1.1 snmp service
Function
Set the SNMP agent and SNMP trap functions.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
snmp service <mode>
Options
<mode>
• on
Enable SNMP agent and SNMP trap functions.
• off
Disable SNMP agent and SNMP trap functions.
Use Mode
Explanation
Default
Configuration mode (admin class)
Set whether to enable SNMP agent and SNMP trap functions.
It is assumed that the SNMP agent function is stopped.
snmp service off
5.15.1.2 snmp agent contact
Function
Set the administrator name for the SNMP agent function.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
snmp agent contact <syscontact>
Options
<syscontact>
• Administrator name (sysContact value)
Specify the MIB variable, sysContact, which indicates an administrator name of this
device, with up to 40 characters.
Use Mode
Explanation
Default
Configuration mode (admin class)
Set the administrator name for the SNMP agent function.
It is assumed that the administrator name is not set.
Device Information Settings
262
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.15.1.3 snmp agent sysname
Function
Set the equipment name for the SNMP agent function.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
snmp agent sysname <sysname>
Options
<sysname>
• Equipment name (sysName value)
Specify the MIB variable, sysName, which indicates an equipment name of this device,
with up to 32 characters.
Use Mode
Explanation
Default
Configuration mode (admin class)
Set the equipment name for the SNMP agent function.
It is assumed that the equipment name is not set.
5.15.1.4 snmp agent location
Function
Set where to install the equipment for the SNMP agent function.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
snmp agent location <syslocation>
Options
<syslocation>
• Location to install the equipment in (sysLocation value)
Specify the MIB variable, sysLocation, which indicates where to install this device, with
up to 72 characters.
Use Mode
Explanation
Default
Configuration mode (admin class)
Set where to install the equipment for the SNMP agent function.
It is assumed that the location to install the equipment is not set.
Device Information Settings
263
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.15.1.5 snmp agent address
Function
Set the SNMP agent address.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
snmp agent address <address>
Options
<address>
• Agent address
Set the agent address of this device.
Specifying 0.0.0.0 will delete the SNMP agent address.
The allowable range is as follows:
1.0.0.1 to 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 to 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 to 223.255.255.254
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Set the SNMP agent address. This setting is also used for the local address at trap
transmission.
Make sure to set it when using the SNMP agent function.
Default
It is assumed that the agent address is not set. The local IP address of trap packet is
undefined.
5.15.1.6 snmp agent engineid
Function
Set a SNMP engine ID name.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
snmp agent engineid <engineID>
Options
<engineID>
• SNMP engine ID
Specify a SNMP engine ID with up to 27 characters.
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Set a SNMP engine ID under SNMPv3. In this device, the SNMP engine ID is as follows.
• When setting this command;
Octets 1 to 5: 0x800000d304 fixed
Octet 6 and above: Engine ID set in this command
• When not setting this command;
Octets 1 to 5: 0x800000d304 fixed
Octet 6 and above: Random value
Default
A SNMP engine ID is generated automatically.
Device Information Settings
264
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.15.1.7 snmp manager
Function
Set the SNMP host information.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
snmp manager <manager_number> <address> <community> <trap> [<write>]
Options
<manager_number>
• SNMP host definition number
Specify a serial number of SNMP host definition with a decimal value from 0 to 7.
<address>
• Access permission/trap sending address
Specify an IP address to permit access and to send a trap to, in the
XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX format, where "XXX" indicates a 3-digit decimal value.
Specifying 0.0.0.0 will permit access by all hosts without trap sending.
The allowable range is as follows:
1.0.0.1 to 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 to 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 to 223.255.255.254
<community>
Specify the community name.
• Community name
Specify the community name for trap sending with up to 32 characters.
• public
Specify it when communicating with any of the SNMP managers.
<trap>
Specify whether or not to perform trap transmission.
• off
Specify it when not performing trap transmission.
• v1
Specify it when performing SNMPv1 trap transmission.
• v2c
Specify it when performing SNMPv2 trap transmission.
<write>
Specify whether or not to permit writing from the SNMP manager.
• enable
Specify it when enabling writing from the SNMP manager.
• disable
Specify it when disabling writing from the SNMP manager.
The default is "disable".
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Default
Set the SNMP host information.
It is assumed that no SNMP host information is set.
Device Information Settings
265
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.15.1.8 snmp trap coldstart
Function
Set the coldStart trap.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
snmp trap coldstart <mode>
Options
<mode>
Specify whether to enable or disable trapping.
• enable
Enable trapping.
• disable
Disable trapping.
Use Mode
Explanation
Default
Configuration mode (admin class)
Set whether to enable or disable the coldStart trap.
It is assumed that the coldStart trap is enabled.
snmp trap coldstart enable
5.15.1.9 snmp trap linkdown
Function
Set the linkDown trap.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
snmp trap linkdown <mode>
Options
<mode>
Specify whether to enable or disable trapping.
• enable
Enable trapping.
• disable
Disable trapping.
Use Mode
Explanation
Default
Configuration mode (admin class)
Set whether to enable or disable the linkDown trap.
It is assumed that the linkDown trap is enabled.
snmp trap linkdown enable
Device Information Settings
266
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.15.1.10 snmp trap linkup
Function
Set the linkUp trap.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
snmp trap linkup <mode>
Options
<mode>
Specify whether to enable or disable trapping.
• enable
Enable trapping.
• disable
Disable trapping.
Use Mode
Explanation
Default
Configuration mode (admin class)
Set whether to enable or disable the linkUp trap.
It is assumed that the linkUp trap is enabled.
snmp trap linkup enable
5.15.1.11 snmp trap authfail
Function
Set the authenticationFailure trap.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
snmp trap authfail <mode>
Options
<mode>
Specify whether to enable or disable trapping.
• enable
Enable trapping.
• disable
Disable trapping.
Use Mode
Explanation
Default
Configuration mode (admin class)
Set whether to enable or disable the authenticationFailure trap.
It is assumed that the authenticationFailure trap is enabled.
snmp trap authfail enable
Device Information Settings
267
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.15.1.12 snmp trap newroot
Function
Set the newRoot trap.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
snmp trap newroot <mode>
Options
<mode>
Specify whether to enable or disable trapping.
• enable
Enable trapping.
• disable
Disable trapping.
Use Mode
Explanation
Default
Configuration mode (admin class)
Set whether to enable or disable the newRoot trap.
It is assumed that the newRoot trap is enabled.
snmp trap newroot enable
5.15.1.13 snmp trap topologychange
Function
Set the topologyChange trap.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
snmp trap topologychange <mode>
Options
<mode>
Specify whether to enable or disable trapping.
• enable
Enable trapping.
• disable
Disable trapping.
Use Mode
Explanation
Default
Configuration mode (admin class)
Set whether to enable or disable the topologyChange trap.
It is assumed that the topologyChange trap is enabled.
snmp trap topologychange enable
Device Information Settings
268
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.15.1.14 snmp trap noserror
Function
Set the nosError trap.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
snmp trap noserror <mode>
Options
<mode>
Specify whether to enable or disable trapping.
• enable
Enable trapping.
• disable
Disable trapping.
Use Mode
Explanation
Default
Configuration mode (admin class)
Set whether to enable or disable the nosError trap.
It is assumed that the nosError trap is enabled.
snmp trap noserror enable
5.15.1.15 snmp trap lldpremtableschange
Function
Set lldpRemTablesChange trap
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
snmp trap lldpremtableschange <mode>
Options
<mode>
Set trap mode
• enable
Enable trap
• disable
Disable trap
Use Mode
Explanation
Default
Configuration mode (admin class)
Set whether to enable or not lldpRemTablesChange tra
It is assumed that the lldpRemTablesChange trap is enabled.
snmp trap lldpremtableschange enable
Device Information Settings
269
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.15.1.16 snmp rmon
Function
Set the RMON function.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
snmp rmon <mode>
Options
<mode>
Specify whether to enable or disable the RMON function.
• on
Use the RMON function.
• off
Do not use the RMON function.
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Set whether to use the RMON function. When not using this function, the RMON-MIB
cannot be obtained.
Default
It is assumed that the RMON function is used.
snmp rmon on
5.15.1.17 snmp user name
Function
Set a SNMP user name.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
snmp user [<number>] name <user_name>
Options
<number>
• User definition number
Specify a user definition number with a decimal value from 0 to 7.
The default is 0.
<user_name>
• SNMP user name
Specify a SNMP user name with up to 32 characters.
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Set a SNMP user name under SNMPv3. Be sure to set it when using the SNMPv3
function.
Default
It is assumed that a SNMP user name is not set.
Device Information Settings
270
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.15.1.18 snmp user address
Function
Set a SNMP host address.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
snmp user [<number>] address [<addr_number>] <address>
Options
<number>
• User definition number
Specify a user definition number with a decimal value from 0 to 7.
The default is 0.
<addr_number>
• SNMP host definition number
Specify a SNMP host definition number with a decimal value from 0 to 7.
The default is 0.
<address>
• SNMP host address
Specify an IP address of the host, which permits SNMPv3 access, in the
XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX format, where "XXX" indicates a 3-digit decimal value.
The allowable range is as follows:
1.0.0.1 to 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 to 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 to 223.255.255.254
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Set a SNMP host address under SNMPv3. Up to eight addresses can be defined for this
Default
It is assumed that no SNMP host address is set.
Device Information Settings
271
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.15.1.19 snmp user notification
Function
Set a trap notification host address.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
snmp user [<number>] notification [<addr_number>] <address>
Options
<number>
• User definition number
Specify a user definition number with a decimal value from 0 to 7.
The default is 0.
<addr_number>
• Trap notification host definition number
Specify a trap notification host definition number with a decimal value from 0 to 7.
The default is 0.
<address>
• Trap notification host address
Specify an IP address of the host, which is subject to trap notification, in the
XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX format, where "XXX" indicates a 3-digit decimal value.
The allowable range is as follows:
1.0.0.1 to 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 to 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 to 223.255.255.254
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Set a trap notification host address under SNMPv3. Up to eight addresses can be
Default
It is assumed that no trap notification host address is set.
Device Information Settings
272
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.15.1.20 snmp user auth
Function
Set the authentication protocol
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
snmp user [<number>] auth <protocol> [<password> [encrypted]]
Options
<number>
• User definition number
Specify the user definition number with a decimal value from 0 to 7.
The default is 0
<protocol>
Specify the authentication protocol
• none
Specify it when unusing authentication protocol.
• md5
Specify it when using MD5(HMAC-MD5-96)
• sha
Specify it when using SHA (HMAC-SHA-96)
<password>
Set the authentication password
• In the case of specifying unencryption password
Authentication Protocol
Password length
md5
8-16 characters
8-20 characters
sha1
• In the case of specifying encryption password
Specify the encrypted authentication password shown by show command with
"encrypted"
Specify the characters which is shown by show command
encrypted
• Specify encrypted authentication password
Specify it when specifying encrypted authentication password in <password>
Use Mode
Explanation
Default
Configuration mode (admin class)
Set authentication protocol for SNMPv3
It is assumed that the authentication protocol is not use.
snmp user <number> auth none
Device Information Settings
273
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.15.1.21 snmp user priv
Function
Set encryption protocol
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
snmp user [<number>] priv <protocol> [<password> [encrypted]]
Options
<number>
• User definition number
Specify the user definition number with a decimal value from 0 to 7.
The default is 0
<protocol>
Specify the encryption protocol
• none
Specify it when unusing encryption protocol.
• des
Specify when using DES (CBC-DES) as encryption protocol
<password>
Specify encrypted password
• In the case of specifying unencryption password
Encryption Protocol
Password length
des
8 to 16 characters
• In the case of specifying encryption password
Specify the encrypted encryption password shown by show command with "encrypted"
Specify the characters which is shown by show command
encrypted
• Specify encrypted encryption password
Specify it when specifying encrypted authentication password in <password>
Use Mode
Explanation
Caution
Configuration mode (admin class)
Set the encryption protocol for SNMPv3
Specify authentication protocol when using encryption protocol
It is assumed that encryption protocol is not use.
Default
snmp user <number> priv none
Device Information Settings
274
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.15.1.22 snmp user write
Function
Set the MIB write-enable view.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
snmp user [<number>] write <view_name>
Options
<number>
• User definition number
Specify a user definition number with a decimal value from 0 to 7.
The default is 0.
<view_name>
Specify the view name that indicates whether or not to permit to write in the write enabled
MIB.
• none
Specify it when not permitting all.
• all
Specify it when permitting all.
Use Mode
Explanation
Default
Configuration mode (admin class)
Specify the MIB write enabled view name under SNMPv3.
It is assumed that nothing is permitted.
Device Information Settings
275
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.15.1.23 snmp user read
Function
Sets MIB read permission view.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
snmp user [<number>] read <access> [<view_number>]
Options
<number>
• User ID
User ID expressed as a base 10 value from 0 to 7. Default is 0.
<access>
Sets MIB read permission view.
• all
Read permission is granted on all supported MIBs.
• none
MIB read permission is not granted.
• view
<view_number>
10 value from 0 to 7. The view ID can only be set when view is specified for the <access>
option.
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Sets MIB read permission view in SNMPv3.
exist, MIB read permission is not granted.
Default
If unset, read permission is granted on all supported MIBs.
snmp user <number> read all
Device Information Settings
276
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.15.1.24 snmp user notify
Function
Sets trap notification permission view.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
snmp user [<number>] notify <access> [<view_number>]
Options
<number>
• User ID
User ID expressed as a base 10 value from 0 to 7. Default is 0.
<access>
Indicates trap notification permission view.
• all
Permission is granted for all supported trap notifications.
• none
Trap notification permission is not granted.
• view
<view_number>
10 value from 0 to 7. The view ID can only be set when view is specified for the <access>
option.
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Sets trap notification permission view in SNMPv3.
exist, trap notification permission is not granted.
Default
If unset, trap notification permission is granted on all supported trap notifications.
snmp user <number> notify all
Device Information Settings
277
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.15.1.25 snmp view subtree
Function
SNMP MIB view information
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
snmp view [<view_number>] subtree [<subtree_number>] <view_type> <subtree_name>
Options
<view_number>
• View definition number
Specify the view definition number with a decimal value from 0 to 7
The default is 0.
<subtree_number>
• Subtree definition number
Specify the subtree definition number with a decimal value from 0 to 15
The default is 0
<view_type>
Specify whether including <subtree_name> in MIB view or not
• include
Include <subtree_name> in MIB view
• exclude
Exclude <subtree_name> from MIB view
<subtree_name>
• Subtree name
Specify subtree name
Subtree
MIB Group name
name Object ID
Remark
iso
1
internet
mib2
1.3.6.1
1.3.6.1.2.1
system
interfaces
at
1.3.6.1.2.1.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.2
1.3.6.1.2.1.3
1.3.6.1.2.1.4
1.3.6.1.2.1.5
1.3.6.1.2.1.6
1.3.6.1.2.1.7
1.3.6.1.2.1.10
1.3.6.1.2.1.11
1.3.6.1.2.1.16
1.3.6.1.2.1.17
1.3.6.1.2.1.31
1.3.6.1.2.1.67
1.3.6.1.4.1
ip
icmp
tcp
udp
transmission
snmp
rmon
dot1dBridge
ifMIB
radiusMIB
enterprises
lldpMIB
1.0.8802.1.1.2
Device Information Settings
278
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
Subtree
name Object ID
Remark
Trap name
coldstart
linkdown
linkup
1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.1
1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.3
1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.4
1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.5
1.3.6.1.2.1.17.0.1
authfail
newroot
topologychange
noserror
1.3.6.1.2.1.17.0.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.211.1.127.1.0.1
1.0.8802.1.1.2.0.0.1
lldpremtableschange
Use Mode
Explanation
Default
Configuration mode (admin class)
Set MIB view information in SNMPv3
N/A
Device Information Settings
279
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.15.2 System Log Information
This section explains about the commands related to system log information.
5.15.2.1 syslog server address
Function
Set the server IP address that receives system log information.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
syslog server <number> address <address>
Options
<number>
• Definition number
Specify the definition number of the server that receives system log information
(message) with a decimal value from 0 to 2.
<address>
• IP address
Specify the IP address of the server that receives system log information (message).
The allowable range is as follows:
1.0.0.1 to 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 to 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 to 223.255.255.254
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Set the server IP address that receives system log information (message).
The following describes the procedure for outputting system log information.
1) Send information to a server the host with the IP address set in syslog server <address>.
Caution
Default
If STP is used, it takes a long time for transmission to be enabled after device startup.
During this time, some messages are discarded before reaching the server.
When transferring system logs to a Linux server, be sure to enable remote logging by
using the "-syslogd -r" command or editing the syslog init file to include the "-r" qualifier.
It is assumed that the server that receives system log information is not specified.
Device Information Settings
280
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.15.2.2 syslog server pri
Function
Set the severity level for syslog information sent to the syslog servers.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
syslog server <number> pri <mode>
Options
<number>
• Definition number
Specify the definition number of the server that receives system log information
(message) with a decimal value from 0 to 2.
<mode>
• Priority
Specify the severity level for syslog output. When specifying multiple parameters,
separate them with commas (,).
- error
Specifies a severity level of LOG_ERROR events will be output to the syslog servers.
- warn
Specifies a severity level of LOG_WARNING will be output to the syslog servers.
- notice
Specifies a severity level of LOG_NOTICE will be output to the syslog servers.
- info
Specifies a severity of LOG_INFO will be output to the syslog servers.
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Specify severity levels to output to each syslog server from among those specified by
"syslog server address" command.
Default
It is assumed that "error", "warn" and "info" are specified.
Device Information Settings
281
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.15.2.3 syslog pri
Function
Set the severity level output to the switch syslog.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
syslog pri <mode>
Options
<mode>
• Priority
Specify the priority to output system log information from the following. When
specifying multiple numbers, separate them with commas (,).
- error
Specifies a severity level of LOG_ERROR will be output to the switch syslog.
- warn
Specifies a severity level of LOG_WARNING will be output to the switch syslog.
- notice
Specifies a severity level of LOG_NOTICE will be output to the switch syslog.
- info
Specifies a severity level of LOG_INFO will be output to the switch syslog.
Use Mode
Explanation
Default
Configuration mode (admin class)
Specify the severity level output to the switch syslog.
It is assumed that "error", "warn" and "info" are specified.
5.15.2.4 syslog facility
Function
Set a system log information facility.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
syslog facility <num>
Options
<num>
• Facility
Set a system log information facility with a decimal value from 0 to 23.
Use Mode
Explanation
Default
Configuration mode (admin class)
Specify a system log information facility.
It is assumed that 0 has been specified.
syslog facility 0
Device Information Settings
282
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.15.2.5 syslog security
Function
Set the security to output the system log information.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
syslog security <securetype>
Options
<securetype>
• Security type
Select one of the followings to output the security log information.
When specifying multiples, separate them with commas (,).
proxydns : Specify it when the Proxy DNS module is subject to output.
none
: Specify it when all modules are out of subject to output.
Use Mode
Explanation
Default
Configuration mode (admin class)
Specify the security used to output the system log information.
It is assumed all options have been specified.
syslog security proxydns
5.15.2.6 syslog dupcut
Function
Set the duplicated message output of system log information.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
syslog dupcut <cut>
Options
<cut>
• yes
Do not output the previous output message if duplicated.
• no
Output all messages without checking for duplication.
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Specify whether to output a message, which was duplicated with the previously output
message, to the system log.
Default
It is assumed that duplication check is not performed.
syslog dupcut no
Device Information Settings
283
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.15.2.7 syslog command-logging
Function
Set command execution history output of system log information
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
syslog command-logging <mode>
Options
<mode>
• enable
Output command execution history to system log
• disable
Do not Output command execution history to system log
Use Mode
Explanation
Default
Configuration mode (admin class)
Specify whether to output command history to system log
It is assumed that the command execution history is not output to the system log.
syslog command-logging disable
5.15.2.8 syslog header
Function
Set the RFC3164 Header information of the system log information.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
syslog header <mode>
Options
<mode>
• enable
ADD the RFC3164 Header to the system log information sent to the syslog servers.
• disable
Do not add the RFC3164 Header to the system log information sent to the syslog
servers.
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Specify whether to add the RFC3164 Header to the system log information sent to the
syslog servers.
Default
It is assumed that the RFC3164 Header is not added.
syslog header disable
Device Information Settings
284
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.15.2.9 syslog source address
Function
Set the source IP address of the system log information.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
syslog source address <address>
Options
<address>
Specify the source IPv4 address that is used for sending the system log information.
The allowable range is as follows:
1.0.0.1 to 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 to 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 to 223.255.255.254
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Specify the source IPv4 address that is used for sending the system log information.
If the IPv4 address is not set, the IPv4 address of the sending interface is used.
Default
It is assumed that use the IPv4 address of the sending interface in used.
Device Information Settings
285
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.15.3
Automatic Time Setting Information
This section explains about the commands related to automatic time setting information.
5.15.3.1 time auto server
Function
Specify the IP address, protocol, and priority of server(s) that supply time information.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
time auto server <count> address <address> <protocol> [<interface>]
Options
<count>
• Priority
Set the server priority with a decimal value from 0 to 3.
A smaller value has a higher priority.
<address>
• IPv4 address
Specify the IPv4 address of the server that supplies time information.
Specifying 0.0.0.0 will delete the set value.
The allowable range is as follows:
1.0.0.1 to 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 to 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 to 223.255.255.254
224.0.0.1 to 239.255.255.254 (Multicast address)
255.255.255.255 (Broadcast address)
• IPv6 address
Specify the IPv6 address of the server that supplies time information.
Specifying 0:0: 0 will delete the set value.
The allowable range is as follows:
::2 to fe7f:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff
fec0:: to feff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff
<protocol>
Specify the desireded protocol.
• time
Specify the TIME protocol (TCP).
• sntp
Specify the simple NTP protocol (UDP).
<interface>
Specify the target interface.
[Note]
This option can be specified only when the <address> has been specified as an IPv4
multicast address or IPv4 broadcast address and the <protocol> has been specified as
sntp.
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Specify the working parameters for the time information server(s).
The switch clock is automatically synchronized to the time information server(s)
specified.
Default
It is assumed that the time is not set automatically.
Device Information Settings
286
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.15.3.2 time auto interval
Function
Set an automatic setting interval of time information.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
time auto interval <time>
Options
<time>
Specify the interval to set time information.
• start
Specify when setting time information only once at device power-on or restart.
• Interval
Specify the interval to set time information within the range of 0 second up to 10 days.
The unit shall be d (day), h (hour), m (minute), or s (second).
Use Mode
Explanation
Default
Configuration mode (admin class)
Set an interval to automatically set the time.
It is assumed that time information is set only once at device power-on or restart when
using the time supply server.
time auto interval start
5.15.3.3 time zone
Function
Set the time zone of time information.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
time zone <offset>
Options
<offset>
• Difference
Specify the time zone of this device.
Specify the time differences from Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).
Use Mode
Explanation
Default
Configuration mode (admin class)
Set the timezone.
It is assumed that Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) is set for the time zone.
time zone 0
Device Information Settings
287
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.15.3.4 time summer-time
Function
Sets summer time/daylight saving time.
Use the no form to return to the default setup.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
time summer-time <start_day> <end_day> [<offset>]
Options
<start_day>
• Specifies the day/time to start Daylight Saving Time in any form of "Mm.w.d/hhmm,"
"Jn/hhmm," or "n/hhmm."
- Mm.w.d
Specifies the day to start Daylight Saving Time in m, w, and d.
Specify month for m (1 to 12), week for w (1 to 5), and the day of the week for d (0 to 6).
w = 1 means the first week where d exists, and w = 5 means the last week.
d = 0 means Sunday, d = 6 means Saturday.
- Jn
Specifies the day to start Daylight Saving Time in day-of-year (Julian day).
In leap years, February 29th is not counted.
Specify a number in the range of 1 to 365 for n.
- n
Specifies the day to start Daylight Saving Time in day-of-year.
In leap years, February 29th is counted.
Specify a number in the range of 1 to 366 for n.
- hh
Specifies the hour to start Daylight Saving Time.
- mm
Specifies the minute to start Daylight Saving Time.
Specifies the following values, for the first day of each month in "Jn" specification and "n"
specification.
specification
Month/Day
January 1st
Jn specification
J1
Common year
Leap year
1
1
February 1st
March 1st
J32
32
32
J60
60
61
April 1st
J91
91
92
May 1st
J121
J152
J182
J213
J244
J274
J305
J335
121
152
182
213
244
274
305
335
122
153
183
213
245
275
306
336
June 1st
July 1st
August 1st
September 1st
October 1st
November 1st
December 1st
<end_day>
• Specifies the day/time to end Daylight Saving Time.
The description format is the same as <start_day>.
Device Information Settings
288
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
<offset>
• pecifies the time set forward during Daylight Saving Time in the form of "hhmm."
- hh
Specifies the hour set forward during Daylight Saving Time with a two-digit number.
It can be set in the range of 00 to 23.
- mm
Specifies the minute set forward during Daylight Saving Time with a two-digit
number.
It can be set in the range of 00 to 59.
"0000" can not set as <offset>.
When this parameter is omitted, "0100" (an hour) is specified.
Use Mode
Explanation
Default
Configuration mode (admin class)
Sets summer time/daylight saving time.
It is assumed that the daylight saving time is not set.
Device Information Settings
289
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.15.4 ProxyDNS Information
This section explains about the commands related to proxyDNS information.
5.15.4.1 proxydns domain
Function
Set the forward lookup conditions for proxy DNS.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
proxydns domain <count> <qtype> <qname> <address>/<mask> reject
(Discard the request to forward)
proxydns domain <count> <qtype> <qname> <address>/<mask> static <ipaddress>
(Specify the fixed DNS server)
Options
<count>
• Destination definition number
Specify a destination definition number with a decimal value from 0 to 49.
The specified values are sorted and renumbered forward when setting was completed.
If any destination definition with a same number exists, it will be inserted before the
existing one.
<qtype>
• Query type number
Specify a decimal value from 1 to 11 or from 13 to 65535.
The following shows some part of the query types.
Name
Number
Description
A
1
2
5
6
Host address
NS
An authoritative name server
Canonical name for an alias
Start of a zone of authority
A domain name pointer
Host information
CNAME
SOA
PTR
HINFO
MX
12
13
15
33
A mail exchanger
SRV
Service
• any
Specify it for all types, excluding PTR (12).
<qname>
• Host name
Specify a host name used as a condition with up to 80 characters.
For the host name, the following wild cards are usable.
- * (Asterisk)
This is considered to be an arbitrary character string of 0 character or more.
- ? (Question mark)
This is considered to be an arbitrary character.
Device Information Settings
290
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
For the host name, the following wild cards are usable.
An execution example is given below.
Execution example
Matching Character String
This is considered to match all of the following character strings.
www.*.com
•
•
www.testa.com
www.test1.test.com
*test*
This is considered to match all of the following character strings.
•
•
•
www.test.com
test.com
test.co.jp
www.test?.com
This is considered to match all of the following character strings.
•
•
•
www.test1.com
www.test2.com
www.testA.com
The host name is checked without case sensitivity.
<address>/<mask>
Specify the target source IPv4 address/number of mask bits.
• Source IPv4 address/number of mask bits (or mask value)
Specify a combination of the target source IPv4 address and the number of mask bits.
For the mask value, specify successive 1s following the most significant bit (MSB).
• any
Specify it when targeting all addresses.
The default is 0.0.0.0/0 (0.0.0.0/0.0.0.0).
<ipaddress>
• DNS server IP address
Specify the IPv4 address of the DNS server that forwards a request.
The allowable range is as follows:
1.0.0.1 to 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 to 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 to 223.255.255.254
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Set forward lookup conditions for proxy DNS. The explanation for each command is as
follows.
• Discard the requirement for forwarding
proxydns domain <count> <qtype> <qname> <address>/<mask> reject
Set the filter that disables forwarding the specified DNS request.
The host name to be specified in <qname> is available when limiting the access to the
specified host (group) even if it is registered in the DNS database. A host name that
has satisfied filtering conditions will be discarded.
• Specify static DNS server
proxydns domain <count> <qtype> <qname> <address>/<mask> static
Set the IP address to which the specified DNS request is to be forwarded.
Default
It is assumed that no forward lookup conditions for proxy DNS are set.
Device Information Settings
291
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.15.4.2 proxydns domain move
Function
Change the forward lookup conditions for proxy DNS.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
proxydns domain move <count> <new_count>
Options
<count>
• Destination definition number before changes
Specify a destination definition number to change its order.
<new_count>
• New destination definition number
Specify a new order for <count>.
If any definition with the same definition number exists, it will be inserted before the
existing one.
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Change the order of forward lookup conditions for proxy DNS.
If a same definition number which has already existed is specified, it will be inserted
before the specified definition.
Device Information Settings
292
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.15.4.3 proxydns address
Function
Set the reverse lookup conditions for proxy DNS.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
proxydns address <count> <address>/<mask> reject
(Discard the request to forward)
proxydns address <count> <address>/<mask> static <ipaddress>
(Specify the fixed DNS server)
Options
<count>
• Destination definition number
Specify the destination definition number with a decimal value from 0 to 49.
The specified value is sorted and renumbered forward when setting was completed.
If any destination definition with a same definition number exists, it will be inserted
before the existing one.
<address>/<mask>
Specify the IPv4 address for reverse lookup and the number of mask bits.
• IPv4 address for reverse lookup/number of mask bits (or mask value)
Specify a combination of the IPv4 address for reverse lookup and the number of mask
bits.
For the mask value, specify successive 1s following the most significant bit (MSB).
• any
Specify it when all addresses are subject to reverse lookup.
<ipaddress>
• DNS server IP address
Specify the IPv4 address of the DNS server that forwards a request.
The allowable range is as follows:
1.0.0.1 to 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 to 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 to 223.255.255.254
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Set the reverse lookup conditions for proxy DNS.
The explanation for each command is as follows.
• Discard the requirement for forwarding
proxydns address <count> <address>/<mask> reject
Set the filter that disables forwarding the specified DNS request.
The host name to be specified in <qname> is available when limiting the access to the
specified host (group) even if it is registered in the DNS database. A host name that
has satisfied filtering conditions will be discarded.
• Specify static DNS server
proxydns address <count> <address>/<mask> static <ipaddress>
Specify the IP address to which the specified DNS request is to be forwarded.
The route leading to the destination is determined based on IP routing.
Default
It is assumed that no reverse lookup conditions for proxy DNS are set.
Device Information Settings
293
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.15.4.4 proxydns address move
Function
Change the reverse lookup conditions for proxy DNS.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
proxydns address move <count> <new_count>
Options
<count>
• Destination definition number before changes
Specify a destination definition number to change its order.
<new_count>
• New destination definition number
Specify a new order for <count>.
If any definition with the same definition number exists, it will be inserted before the
existing one.
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Change the order of reverse lookup conditions for proxy DNS.
If a same destination definition number which has already existed is specified, it will be
inserted before the specified definition.
5.15.4.5 proxydns unicode
Function
Set the query packets for proxy DNS.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
proxydns unicode <action>
Options
<action>
Specify whether or not to transmit packets.
• pass
Specify it when transmitting the relevant packet.
• reject
Specify it when discarding the relevant packet.
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Set whether or not to transmit a query packet that contains hidden characters in the
query name (QNAME) of proxy DNS.
Default
It is assumed that the relevant packet is discarded.
proxydns unicode reject
Device Information Settings
294
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.15.5 Host Database Information
This section explains about the commands related to host database information.
5.15.5.1 host name
Function
Set the host name of the host database information.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
host <number> name <name>
Options
<number>
• Definition number
Specify the definition number of the host database information with a decimal value
from 0 to 99.
<name>
• Host name
Specify the host name using up to 80 ASCII characters, which consist of alphanumeric
characters, hyphens (-), and periods (.).
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Set the name of the host connected under this device in the host database.
This command is available from the simple DNS server function.
Default
It is assumed that the host database is not set.
5.15.5.2 host ip address
Function
Set the IP address of the host database information.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
host <number> ip address <ip_address>
Options
<number>
• Definition number
Specify the definition number of the host database information with a decimal value
from 0 to 99.
<ip_address>
• IP address
Specify the IP address of the host.
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Set the IP address of the host connected under this device in the host database.
This command is available from the simple DNS server function.
Default
It is assumed that the host database is not set.
Device Information Settings
295
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.15.5.3 host ip6 address
Function
Set the IPv6 address of the host database information
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
host <number> ip6 address <ip6_address>
Options
<number>
• definition number
Set the definition number of host database information with a decimal value
<ip6_address>
• IPv6 address
Specify IPv6 address of the host
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Set the IPv6 address of the host connected under this device in the host database.
This command is available from the simple DNS server function.
Default
N/A
Device Information Settings
296
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.15.6 Schedule Information
This section explains about the commands related to schedule information.
5.15.6.1 schedule at
Function
Set the command to specify day and time in the system schedule.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
schedule <number> at <day> <time> <command>
Options
<number>
Specify a schedule definition.
• Schedule definition number
Specify a schedule definition number with a decimal value from 0 to 19.
• any
Define by using unused schedule definition number.
<day>
• Day
Specify a schedule execution day or starting day with a decimal value from 1 to 31.
• Day of the week
Select a schedule execution day or starting day from the following.
sun : Sunday
mon : Monday
tue
: Tuesday
wed : Wednesday
thu
fri
: Thursday
: Friday
sat
: Saturday
When specifying multiple days, separate them with commas (,).
• any
Specify it when setting the schedule execution day or starting day to be every day.
Specify this option at system power-on or restart.
<time>
• Execution time
Specify an execution time with a 4-digit decimal value from 0 to 9.
(Example: 0635 = 06:35 a.m., 2330 = 11:30 p.m.)
• pwon
Specify it when executing the schedule at device power-on.
• rset
Specify it when executing the schedule at device restart or power-on.
<command>
Specify a command character string to be executed.
• reset
Specify when rebooting the device.
• reset config1
Specify it when switching to the configuration 1 at device restart.
• reset config2
Specify it when switching to the configuration 2 at device restart.
Specifying other commands will not assure normal operations.
Device Information Settings
297
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Set the system schedule.
Explanation
Based on the schedule, the command is executed at the specified time.
Default
It is assumed that no schedule information is set.
5.15.6.2 schedule syslog
Function
Set the system log in the system schedule.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
schedule <number> syslog <syslog>
Options
<number>
Specify the schedule definition.
• Schedule definition number
Specify a schedule definition number with a decimal value from 0 to 19.
• any
Define by using unused schedule definition number.
<syslog>
• yes
Specify it when outputting command execution using the system log.
• no
Specify it when outputting command execution without using the system log.
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Specify whether or not to write a message, which was output by the command to be
activated in the schedule, to the system log.
This command is enabled only when the command activated in the schedule is specified.
Default
It is assumed that no data is output to system log at a command execution.
schedule <number> syslog no
Device Information Settings
298
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.15.7 Filter/QoS Resource Information
This section explains about the commands related to Filter/QoS Resource Information.
5.15.7.1 resource filter distribution
Function
Set the distribution of filter and QoS resources.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448
Syntax
resource filter distribution <function> <protocol>
Options
<function>
• all
Filter and QoS resources are distributed over Filter and QoS.
• filter
Filter and QoS resources are distributed to only Filter.
• qos
Filter and QoS resources are distributed to only QoS.
<protocol>
• all
Filter and QoS resources are distributed over IPv4 and IPv6.
• ipv4
Filter and QoS resources are distributed to only IPv4.
• ipv6
Filter and QoS resources are distributed to only IPv6.
Use Mode
Explanation
Default
Configuration mode (admin class)
Set the distribution of filter and QoS resources.
Filter and QoS resources are distributed evenly.
resource filter distribution all all
Device Information Settings
299
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.15.8 Other
This section explains about other commands.
5.15.8.1 addact
Function
Set the command execution reservation.
addact <index> <date> <command>
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
Options
<index>
• Registration number
Specify the registration number of the command execution reservation information.
Make sure to specify "0".
<date>
• Execution date and time
Specify a command execution date and time in the yymmddHHMM format.
yy
: Specify the last two digits of the year, up to 2036.
mm : Specify month with a decimal value from 1 to 12.
dd
: Specify date with a decimal value from 1 to 31.
: Specify hour with a decimal value from 0 to 23.
HH
MM : Specify minutes with a decimal value from 0 to 59.
<command>
Specify a command character string to be executed.
• reset
Specify it when rebooting the device.
• reset config1
Specify it when switching to the configuration 1 at device restart.
• reset config2
Specify it when switching to the configuration 2 at device restart.
Use Mode
Explanation
Caution
Configuration mode (admin class)
Set the command execution reservation.
The following shows the cautions when executing a command using the schedule
function.
• Set the device time correctly.
• Make sure that the device has been turned on before the command is executed.
Execution Example
The following shows a setting example to restart the device at 02:00 a.m. in January 1,
1999 switching to configuration 2.
# addact 0 9901010200 reset config2
# show addact
0 9901010200 reset config2
#
Default
It is assumed that no reservation is set to execute a command.
Device Information Settings
300
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.15.8.2 watchdog service
Function
Sets watchdog reset.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
watchdog service <mode>
Options
<mode>
• on
Initiates watchdog reset function.
• off
Suspends watchdog reset function.
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Initiates or suspends watchdog reset function.
If <mode> is set to on, if the device hangs it will reset within 16 to 48 seconds and restart.
Explanation
Default
If <mode> is set to off, it will not reset even if it hangs.
This setting will be reflected after saving the configuration and resetting or reconnecting
the power of the device.
If unset, the watchdog reset function will be initiated.
watchdog service on
5.15.8.3 consoleinfo
Function
Set the serial console connection service.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
consoleinfo autologout <time>
Options
<time>
• Forced logout time
Specify a time period (from 0 to 86400 seconds (one day)) for the user to be forcibly
logged out if no commands have been executed while logging in on the serial console.
The unit shall be d (day), h (hour), m (minute), or s (second).
Specifying 0 seconds will not perform forced logout.
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Set to log out forcibly if no command was executed within the time specified in <time>
while login via serial console.
Default
It is assumed that forced logout is not set.
consoleinfo autologout 0s
Device Information Settings
301
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.15.8.4 telnetinfo
Function
Set the TELNET connection service.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
telnetinfo autologout <time>
Options
<time>
• Automatic disconnection time
Specify a time period (from 0 to 86400 seconds (one day)) for the user to be
automatically disconnected when no command input/output processing has been
performed by the client while connected through telnet.
The unit shall be d (day), h (hour), m (minute), or s (second).
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Set a time period to disconnect the TELNET connection when no data is input and
output.
Default
It is assumed that TELNET connection input/output is not monitored.
telnetinfo autologout 0s
5.15.8.5 mflag
Function
Set the CE maintenance login.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
mflag <mode>
Options
<mode>
• on
Specify it when enabling login using a CE-dedicated password.
• off
Specify it when disabling login using a CE-dedicated password.
Use Mode
Explanation
Default
Configuration mode (admin class)
Set whether or not to permit CE maintenance login.
It is assumed that login with a CE-dedicated password is rejected.
mflag off
Device Information Settings
302
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.15.8.6 dumpswitch
Function
Allows/disallows dumping of data to external media.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448
Syntax
dumpswitch <mode>
Options
<mode>
• enable
Allows dumping of data to external media via a dump switch.
• disable
Disallows dumping of data to external media via a dump switch.
Use Mode
Explanation
Default
Configuration mode (admin class)
Allows/disallows dumping of data to external media via a dump switch.
If unset, dumping of data to external media via a dump switch will be allowed.
dumpswitch enable
5.15.8.7 sysname
Function
Set a name of this device.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
sysname <name>
Options
<name>
• Name
Specify a name of this device using up to 32 characters from 0x21, 0x23 to 0x7e ASCII
set.
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Set a name of this device.
The name set in this command can be used as the MIB variable, sysName, which is used
command, the host name set in this command can be used as sysName.
regarding the behavior on the network. However, their names should be identical for
network control purposes.
Caution
Default
When you use LLMNR function, please start "sysname" at alphabetic characters, and
use only alphameric characters, "-" and "_". Some LLMNR client can't use some symbols
and string start at numeric characters.
It is assumed that a name of this device is not set.
Device Information Settings
303
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.15.8.8 serverinfo ftp
Function
Set the FTP server function.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
serverinfo ftp ip <mode>
Options
<mode>
• on
Enable the FTP server function.
• off
Disable the FTP server function.
Use Mode
Explanation
Default
Configuration mode (admin class)
Set whether or not to enable the FTP server function.
It is assumed that the FTP server function is enabled.
serverinfo ftp ip on
5.15.8.9 serverinfo ftp ip6
Function
Set the IPv6 FTP server function FTP
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
serverinfo ftp ip6 <mode>
Options
<mode>
• on
Enable IPv6 FTP server function
• off
Disable IPv6 FTP server function
Use Mode
Explanation
Default
Configuration mode (admin class)
Set whether or not to enable IPv6 FTP server function
It is assumed that the IPv6 FTP server function is enabled.
serverinfo ftp ip6 on
Device Information Settings
304
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.15.8.10 serverinfo ftp filter
Function
Set the application filter for the FTP server function.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
serverinfo ftp filter <count> <action> acl <acl_count>
Options
<count>
• Filtering definition number
Specify a definition number, which indicates a filtering priority, with a decimal value
from 0 to 29.
A smaller value has a higher priority.
<action>
Specify an operation when filtering conditions are satisfied.
• accept
Transmit the relevant packet.
• reject
Block the relevant packet.
<acl_count>
• ACL definition number
Set the required ACL definition number with a decimal value.
If the ACL specified in <acl_count> is not set, the filtering definition will be disabled and
ignored.
The following ACL definition is available for application filtering.
• ip
Set only the source IP address and the number of mask bits.
If the ip value is not set, the filtering definition will be disabled and ignored.
Use Mode
Explanation
Default
Configuration mode (admin class)
Set the application filter for the FTP server function.
It is assumed that the application filter is not set for the FTP server function.
Device Information Settings
305
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.15.8.11 serverinfo ftp filter move
Function
Change the priority of the application filter for the FTP server function.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
serverinfo ftp filter move <count> <new_count>
Options
<count>
• Target filtering definition number
Specify a filtering definition number of which the priority is to be changed.
<new_count>
• Destination filtering definition number
Specify a new priority for <count> with a decimal value from 0 to 29.
If any definition with the same definition number exists, it will be inserted before the
existing one.
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Change the priority of the application filter for the FTP server function.
5.15.8.12 serverinfo ftp filter default
Function
Set the default operation of the application filter for the FTP server function.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
serverinfo ftp filter default <action>
Options
<action>
Specify how to handle a packet that did not match any application filter table for the FTP
server function.
• accept
Transmit the relevant packet.
• reject
Block the relevant packet.
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Set how to handle a packet that did not match any application filter table for the FTP
server function.
Default
A packet that did not match any application filter table is transmitted.
serverinfo ftp filter default accept
Device Information Settings
306
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.15.8.13 serverinfo sftp
Function
Set the SSH FTP server function.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
serverinfo sftp ip <mode>
Options
<mode>
• on
Enable the SSH FTP server function.
• off
Disable the SSH FTP server function.
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Set whether or not to enable the SSH FTP server function.
request using the IPv4 address from the sftp client.
request using the IPv4 address from the sftp client after the password was entered.
Caution
Enabling this command generates an SSH host authentication key at device power-on
minutes for the processing time.
sftp connection is enabled after the SSH host authentication key generation was
completed.
If this device has been started to enable this function while all the ssh and sftp functions
were Off, it also takes several tens of seconds to several minutes for the processing time
to generate an SSH host authentication key. Note that other processes may be affected;
session monitoring timeout may occur, for example.
Default
It is assumed that the SSH FTP server function is enabled.
serverinfo sftp ip on
Device Information Settings
307
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.15.8.14 serverinfo sftp ip6
Function
Set the IPv6 SSH FTP server function
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
serverinfo sftp ip6 <mode>
Options
<mode>
• on
Enable IPv6 SSH FTP server function
• off
Disable IPv6 SSH FTP server function
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Set whether or not to enable IPv6 SSH FTP server function
connection request using the IPv6 address from the sftp client.
connection request using the IPv6 address from the sftp client after the password was
entered.
Caution
Default
Enabling this command generates an SSH host authentication key at device power-on or
minutes for the processing time. sftp connection is enabled after the SSH host
authentication key generation was completed.
If this device has been started to enable this function while all the ssh and sftp functions
were Off, it also takes several tens of seconds to several minutes for the processing time
to generate an SSH host authentication key. Note that other processes may be affected;
session monitoring timeout may occur, for example.
It is assumed that the IPv6 SSH FTP server function is enabled.
serverinfo sftp ip6 on
5.15.8.15 serverinfo telnet
Function
Set the TELNET server function.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
serverinfo telnet ip <mode>
Options
<mode>
• on
Enable the TELNET server function.
• off
Disable the TELNET server function.
Use Mode
Explanation
Default
Configuration mode (admin class)
Set whether or not to enable the TELNET server function.
It is assumed that the TELNET server function is enabled.
serverinfo telnet ip on
Device Information Settings
308
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.15.8.16 serverinfo telnet ip6
Function
Set the IPv6 telnet server function
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
serverinfo telnet ip6 <mode>
Options
<mode>
• on
Enable telnet server function
• off
Disable telnet server function
Use Mode
Explanation
Default
Configuration mode (admin class)
Set the IPv6 telnet server function
It is assumed that the IPv6 TELNET server function is enabled.
serverinfo telnet ip6 on
5.15.8.17 serverinfo telnet filter
Function
Set the application filter for the TELNET server function.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
serverinfo telnet filter <count> <action> acl <acl_count>
Options
<count>
• Filtering definition number
Specify a definition number, which indicates a filtering priority, with a decimal value
from 0 to 29.
A smaller value has a higher priority.
<action>
Specify an operation when filtering conditions are satisfied.
• accept
Transmit the relevant packet.
• reject
Block the relevant packet.
<acl_count>
• ACL definition number
Specify the required ACL definition number with a decimal value.
If the ACL specified in <acl_count> is not specified, the filtering definition will be
disabled and ignored.
The following ACL definition is available for application filtering.
• ip
Set only the source IP address and the number of mask bits.
If the ip value is not set, the filtering definition will be disabled and ignored.
Use Mode
Explanation
Default
Configuration mode (admin class)
Set the application filter for the TELNET server function.
It is assumed that the application filter is not set for the TELNET server function.
Device Information Settings
309
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.15.8.18 serverinfo telnet filter move
Function
Change the priority of the application filter for the TELNET server function.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
serverinfo telnet filter move <count> <new_count>
Options
<count>
• Target filtering definition number
Specify a filtering definition number of which the priority is to be changed.
<new_count>
• Destination filtering definition number
Specify a new priority for <count> with a decimal value from 0 to 29.
If any definition with the same definition number exists, it will be inserted before the
existing one.
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Change the priority of the application filter for the TELNET server function.
5.15.8.19 serverinfo telnet filter default
Function
Set the default operation of the application filter for the TELNET server function.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
serverinfo telnet filter default <action>
Options
<action>
Specify how to handle a packet that did not match any application filter table for the
TELNET server function.
• accept
Transmit the relevant packet.
• reject
Block the relevant packet.
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Set how to handle a packet that did not match any application filter table for the TELNET
server function.
Default
A packet that did not match any application filter table is transmitted.
serverinfo telnet filter default accept
Device Information Settings
310
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.15.8.20 serverinfo ssh
Function
Set the SSH login server function.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
serverinfo ssh ip <mode>
Options
<mode>
• on
Enable the SSH login server function.
• off
Disable the SSH login server function.
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Set whether or not to enable the SSH login server function.
request using the IPv4 address from the ssh client.
request using the IPv4 address from the ssh client after the password was entered.
Caution
Enabling this command generates an SSH host authentication key at device power-on
minutes for the processing time.
ssh connection is enabled after the SSH host authentication key generation was
completed.
If this device has been started to enable this function while all the ssh and sftp functions
were Off, it also takes several tens of seconds to several minutes for the processing time
to generate an SSH host authentication key. Note that other processes may be affected;
session monitoring timeout may occur, for example.
Default
It is assumed that the SSH login server function is enabled.
serverinfo ssh ip on
Device Information Settings
311
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.15.8.21 serverinfo ssh ip6
Function
Set the IPv6 SSH login server function
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
serverinfo ssh ip6 <mode>
Options
<mode>
• on
Enable IPv6 SSH login server function
• off
Disable IPv6 SSH login server function
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Set whether or not to enable the IPv6 SSH login server function.Setting this command
IPv6 address from the ssh client. Setting this command Off and the "serverinfo sftp ip6"
command On will reject a connection request using the IPv6 address from the ssh client
after the password was entered.
Caution
Default
Enabling this command generates an SSH host authentication key at device power-on
minutes for the processing time. ssh connection is enabled after the SSH host
authentication key generation was completed.If this device has been started to enable
this function while all the ssh and sftp functions were Off, it also takes several tens of
seconds to several minutes for the processing time to generate an SSH host
authentication key. Note that other processes may be affected; session monitoring
timeout may occur, for example.
It is assumed that the IPv6 SSH login server function is enabled.
serverinfo ssh ip6 on
Device Information Settings
312
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.15.8.22 serverinfo ssh filter
Function
Set the application filter for the SSH server function.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
serverinfo ssh filter <count> <action> acl <acl_count>
Options
<count>
• Filtering definition number
Specify a definition number, which indicates a filtering priority, with a decimal value
from 0 to 29.
A smaller value has a higher priority.
<action>
Specify an operation when filtering conditions are satisfied.
• accept
Transmit the relevant packet.
• reject
Block the relevant packet.
<acl_count>
• ACL definition number
Specify the required ACL definition number with a decimal value.
If the ACL specified in <acl_count> is not specified, the filtering definition will be
disabled and ignored.
The following ACL definition is available for application filtering.
• ip
Set only the source IP address and the number of mask bits.
If the ip value is not set, the filtering definition will be disabled and ignored.
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Set the application filter for the SSH server function.
This definition is enabled for both the SSH login and SSH FTP server functions.
Each different filter cannot be set for the SSH login and SSH FTP server functions
separately.
Default
It is assumed that the application filter is not set for the SSH server function.
Device Information Settings
313
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.15.8.23 serverinfo ssh filter move
Function
Change the priority of the application filter for the SSH server function.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
serverinfo ssh filter move <count> <new_count>
Options
<count>
• Target filtering definition number
Specify a filtering definition number of which the priority is to be changed.
<new_count>
• Destination filtering definition number
Specify a new priority for <count> with a decimal value from 0 to 29.
If any definition with the same definition number exists, it will be inserted before the
existing one.
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Set the priority of the application filter for the SSH server function.
5.15.8.24 serverinfo ssh filter default
Function
Set the default operation of the application filter for the SSH server function.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
serverinfo ssh filter default <action>
Options
<action>
Specify how to handle a packet that did not match any application filter table for the SSH
server function.
• accept
Transmit the relevant packet.
• reject
Block the relevant packet.
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Set how to handle a packet that did not match any application filter table for the SSH
server function.
Default
A packet that did not match any application filter table is transmitted.
serverinfo ssh filter default accept
Device Information Settings
314
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.15.8.25 serverinfo http
Function
Set the HTTP server function
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
serverinfo http ip <mode>
Options
<mode>
• on
Enable HTTP server function
• off
Disable HTTP server function
Use Mode
Explanation
Default
Configuration mode (admin class)
Set whether or not to enable HTTP server function
It is assumed that the HTTP server function is enabled.
serverinfo http ip on
5.15.8.26 serverinfo http ip6
Function
Set the IPv6 HTTP server function
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
serverinfo http ip6 <mode>
Options
<mode>
• on
Enable IPv6 HTTP server function
• off
Disable IPv6 HTTP server function
Use Mode
Explanation
Default
Configuration mode (admin class)
Set whether or not to enable IPv6 HTTP server function
It is assumed that the IPv6 HTTP server function is enabled.
serverinfo http ip6 on
Device Information Settings
315
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.15.8.27 serverinfo http filter
Function
Set the application filter for HTTP server function
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
serverinfo http filter <count> <action> acl <acl_count>
Options
<count>
• Filtering definition number
Specify a definition number, which indicates a filtering priority, with a decimal value
from 0 to 29.
A smaller value has a higher priority
<action>
Specify the action when the packets match the filter.
• accept
Accept the packets
• reject
Reject the packets
<acl_count>
• ACL definition number
Set the required ACL definition number with a decimal value.
If the ACL specified in <acl_count> is not set, the filtering definition will be disabled and
ignored.
The following ACL definition is available for application filtering.
- ip
Source IP address and the number of mask bits are used for the filter.
If IP value has not been set, the filtering definition will be disabled and ignored.
- ip6
Source IPv6 address and the prefix length are used for the filter.
If IPv6 value has not been set, the filtering definition will be disabled and ignored.
Use Mode
Explanation
Default
Configuration mode (admin class)
Set the application filter for HTTP server function
N/A
Device Information Settings
316
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.15.8.28 serverinfo http filter move
Function
Change the priority of the application filter for the HTTP server function
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
serverinfo http filter move <count> <new_count>
Options
<count>
• Filering definition number
Specify a filtering definition number of which the priority is to be changed
<new_count>
• Destination filtering definition number
Specify a new priority for <count> with a decimal value from 0 to 29.
If any definition with the same definition number exists, it will be inserted before the
existing one.
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Change the priority of the application filter for the HTTP server function
5.15.8.29 serverinfo http filter default
Function
Set the default action of the application filter for the HTTP server function
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
serverinfo http filter default <action>
Options
<action>
Specify how to handle a packet that did not match any application filter table for
the HTTP server function.
• accept
Accept the packets
• reject
Reject the packets
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Specify how to handle a packet that did not match any application filter table for the HTTP
server function.
Default
A packet that did not match any application filter table is transmitted.
serverinfo http filter default accept
Device Information Settings
317
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.15.8.30 serverinfo dns
Function
Set the DNS server function.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
serverinfo dns ip <mode>
Options
<mode>
• on
Enable the DNS server function.
• off
Disable the DNS server function.
Use Mode
Explanation
Default
Configuration mode (admin class)
Set whether to enable the DNS server (static) and ProxyDNS functions.
It is assumed that the DNS server function is enabled.
serverinfo dns ip on
5.15.8.31 serverinfo dns ip6
Function
Set the IPv6 DNS server function.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
serverinfo dns ip6 <mode>
Options
<mode>
• on
Enable the DNS server function.
• off
Disable the DNS server function.
Use Mode
Explanation
Default
Configuration mode (admin class)
Set whether to enable the IPv6 DNS server (static) and ProxyDNS functions.
It is assumed that the IPv6 DNS server function is enabled.
serverinfo dns ip6 on
Device Information Settings
318
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.15.8.32 serverinfo dns filter
Function
Set the application filter for the DNS server function.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
serverinfo dns filter <count> <action> acl <acl_count>
Options
<count>
• Filtering definition number
Specify a definition number, which indicates a filtering priority, with a decimal value
from 0 to 29.
A smaller value has a higher priority.
<action>
Specify an operation when filtering conditions are satisfied.
• accept
Transmit the relevant packet.
• reject
Block the relevant packet.
<acl_count>
• ACL definition number
Specify the required ACL definition number with a decimal value.
If the ACL specified in <acl_count> is not specified, the filtering definition will be
disabled and ignored.
The following ACL definition is available for application filtering.
• ip
Set only the source IP address and the number of mask bits.
If the ip value is not set, the filtering definition will be disabled and ignored.
Use Mode
Explanation
Default
Configuration mode (admin class)
Set the application filter for the DNS server function.
It is assumed that the application filter is not set for the DNS server function.
Device Information Settings
319
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.15.8.33 serverinfo dns filter move
Function
Change the priority of the application filter for the DNS server function.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
serverinfo dns filter move <count> <new_count>
Options
<count>
• Target filtering definition number
Specify a filtering definition number of which the priority is to be changed.
<new_count>
• Destination filtering definition number
Specify a new priority for <count> with a decimal value from 0 to 29.
If any definition with the same definition number exists, it will be inserted before the
existing one.
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Change the priority of the application filter for the DNS server function.
5.15.8.34 serverinfo dns filter default
Function
Set the default operation of the application filter for the DNS server function.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
serverinfo dns filter default <action>
Options
<action>
Specify how to handle a packet that did not match any application filter table for the DNS
server function.
• accept
Transmit the relevant packet.
• reject
Block the relevant packet.
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Set how to handle a packet that did not match any application filter table for the DNS
server function.
Default
A packet that did not match any application filter table is transmitted.
serverinfo dns filter default accept
Device Information Settings
320
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.15.8.35 serverinfo sntp
Function
Set the SNTP server.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
serverinfo sntp ip <mode>
Options
<mode>
• on
Enable the SNTP server function.
• off
Disable the SNTP server function.
Use Mode
Explanation
Default
Configuration mode (admin class)
Set whether or not to enable the SNTP server function.
It is assumed that the SNTP server function is enabled.
serverinfo sntp ip on
5.15.8.36 serverinfo sntp ip6
Function
Set the IPv6 SNTP Server function
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
serverinfo sntp ip6 <mode>
Options
<mode>
• on
Enable IPv6 SNTP server function
• off
Disable IPv6 SNTP server function
Use Mode
Explanation
Default
Configuration mode (admin class)
Set whether or not to enable IPv6 SNTP server function
It is assumed that the IPv6 SNTP server function is enabled.
serverinfo sntp ip6 on
Device Information Settings
321
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.15.8.37 serverinfo sntp filter
Function
Set the application filter for the SNTP server function.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
serverinfo sntp filter <count> <action> acl <acl_count>
Options
<count>
• Filtering definition number
Specify a definition number, which indicates a filtering priority, with a decimal value
from 0 to 29.
A smaller value has a higher priority.
<action>
Specify an operation when filtering conditions are satisfied.
• accept
Transmit the relevant packet.
• reject
Block the relevant packet.
<acl_count>
• ACL definition number
Specify the required ACL definition number with a decimal value.
If the ACL specified in <acl_count> is not specified, the filtering definition will be
disabled and ignored.
The following ACL definition is available for application filtering.
• ip
Set only the source IP address and the number of mask bits.
If the ip value is not set, the filtering definition will be disabled and ignored.
Use Mode
Explanation
Default
Configuration mode (admin class)
Set the application filter for the SNTP server function.
It is assumed that the application filter is not set for the SNTP server function.
Device Information Settings
322
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.15.8.38 serverinfo sntp filter move
Function
Change the priority of the application filter for the SNTP server function.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
serverinfo sntp filter move <count> <new_count>
Options
<count>
• Target filtering definition number
Specify a filtering definition number of which the priority is to be changed.
<new_count>
• Destination filtering definition number
Specify a new priority for <count> with a decimal value from 0 to 29.
If any definition with the same definition number exists, it will be inserted before the
existing one.
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Change the priority of the application filter for the SNTP server function.
5.15.8.39 serverinfo sntp filter default
Function
Set the default operation of the application filter for the SNTP server function.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
serverinfo sntp filter default <action>
Options
<action>
Specify how to handle a packet that did not match any application filter table for the SNTP
server function.
• accept
Transmit the relevant packet.
• reject
Block the relevant packet.
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Set how to handle a packet that did not match any application filter table for the SNTP
server function.
Default
A packet that did not match any application filter table is transmitted.
serverinfo sntp filter default accept
Device Information Settings
323
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.15.8.40 serverinfo time ip tcp
Function
Set the TIME server function by TCP.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
serverinfo time ip tcp <mode>
Options
<mode>
• on
Enable the TIME server function by TCP.
• off
Disable the TIME server function by TCP.
Use Mode
Explanation
Default
Configuration mode (admin class)
Set whether or not to enable the TCP-based TIME server function.
It is assumed that the TCP-based TIME server function is enabled.
serverinfo time ip tcp on
5.15.8.41 serverinfo time ip6 tcp
Function
Set the IPv6 TIME Server function by TCP
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
serverinfo time ip6 tcp <mode>
Options
<mode>
• on
Enable IPv6 TIME server function by TCP
• off
Disable IPv6 TIME server function by TCP
Use Mode
Explanation
Default
Configuration mode (admin class)
Set whether or not to enable IPv6 TIME server function by TCP
It is assumed that the TCP-based IPv6 TIME server function is enabled.
serverinfo time ip6 tcp on
Device Information Settings
324
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.15.8.42 serverinfo time ip udp
Function
Set the TIME server function by UDP.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
serverinfo time ip udp <mode>
Options
<mode>
• on
Enable the TIME server function by UDP.
• off
Disable the TIME server function by UDP.
Use Mode
Explanation
Default
Configuration mode (admin class)
Set whether or not to enable the UDP-based TIME server function.
It is assumed that the UDP-based TIME server function is enabled.
serverinfo time ip udp on
5.15.8.43 serverinfo time ip6 udp
Function
Set the IPv6 TIME Server function by UDP
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
serverinfo time ip6 udp <mode>
Options
<mode>
• on
Enable IPv6 TIME server function by UDP
• off
Disable IPv6 TIME server function by UDP
Use Mode
Explanation
Default
Configuration mode (admin class)
Set whether or not to enable IPv6 TIME server function by UDP
It is assumed that the UDP-based IPv6 TIME server function is enabled.
serverinfo time ip6 udp on
Device Information Settings
325
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.15.8.44 serverinfo time filter
Function
Set the application filter for the TIME server function.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
serverinfo time filter <count> <action> acl <acl_count>
Options
<count>
• Filtering definition number
Specify a definition number, which indicates a filtering priority, with a decimal value
from 0 to 29.
A smaller value has a higher priority.
<action>
Specify an operation when filtering conditions are satisfied.
• accept
Transmit the relevant packet.
• reject
Block the relevant packet.
<acl_count>
• ACL definition number
Specify the required ACL definition number with a decimal value.
If the ACL specified in <acl_count> is not specified, the filtering definition will be
disabled and ignored.
The following ACL definition is available for application filtering.
• ip
Set only the source IP address and the number of mask bits.
If the ip value is not set, the filtering definition will be disabled and ignored.
Use Mode
Explanation
Default
Configuration mode (admin class)
Set the application filter for the TIME server function.
It is assumed that the application filter is not set for the TIME server function.
5.15.8.45 serverinfo time filter move
Function
Change the priority of the application filter for the TIME server function.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
serverinfo time filter move <count> <new_count>
Options
<count>
• Target filtering definition number
Specify a filtering definition number of which the priority is to be changed.
<new_count>
• Destination filtering definition number
Specify a new priority for <count> with a decimal value from 0 to 29.
If any definition with the same definition number exists, it will be inserted before the
existing one.
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Change the priority of the application filter for the TIME server function.
Device Information Settings
326
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.15.8.46 serverinfo time filter default
Function
Set the default operation of the application filter for the TIME server function.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
serverinfo time filter default <action>
Options
<action>
Specify how to handle a packet that did not match any application filter table for the TIME
server function.
• accept
Transmit the relevant packet.
• reject
Block the relevant packet.
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Set how to handle a packet that did not match any application filter table for the TIME
server function.
Default
A packet that did not match any application filter table is transmitted.
serverinfo time filter default accept
Device Information Settings
327
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.16 Login banner Settings
This section explains about Login banner settings.
5.16.1 Login banner Information
This section explains about the commands related to Login banner information.
5.16.1.1 login banner telnet
Function
Turn on or off the telnet login banner.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
login banner telnet <mode>
Options
<mode>
Specify the desired mode.
• on
Specify "on" to enable the login banner.
• off
Specify "off" to disable the login banner.
Use Mode
Explanation
Default
Configuration mode (admin class)
Enables use of the telnet login banner.
The telnet login banner is disabled.
5.16.1.2 login banner ftp
Function
Turn on or off the ftp login banner.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
login banner ftp <mode>
Options
<mode>
Specify the desired mode.
• on
Specify "on" to enable the login banner.
• off
Specify "off" to disable the login banner.
Use Mode
Explanation
Default
Configuration mode (admin class)
Enables use of the ftp login banner.
The ftp login banner is disabled.
Login banner Settings
328
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.16.1.3 login banner ssh
Function
Turn on or off the ssh login banner.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
login banner ssh <mode>
Options
<mode>
Specify the desired mode.
• on
Specify "on" to enable the ssh login banner.
• off
Specify "off" to disable the ssh login banner.
Use Mode
Explanation
Default
Configuration mode (admin class)
Enables use of the ssh login banner.
The ssh login banner is disabled.
5.16.1.4 login banner description
Function
Define the login banner text.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
login banner description <count> <description>
Options
<count>
Set the definition number of login banner with a decimal value from 0 to 9.
<description>
Define the login banner text with up to 80 ASCII characters. The allowable characters are
0x20,0x21,0x23 to 0x7e.
When using blank spaces, enclose the text string with quotes(").
(Example: "this is private network system").
Use Mode
Explanation
Default
Configuration mode (admin class)
Define the login banner text.
No login banner text is defined.
Login banner Settings
329
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.17 Mode and Terminal Operation
Commands
This section explains about mode and terminal operation commands.
5.17.1 Mode Operation Commands
This section explains about mode operation commands.
5.17.1.1 admin
Function
Switch to the admin class.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
admin
Options
N/A
Use Mode
Explanation
Operation mode (user class)
Switch from the user class to the admin class.
Before switching, enter the administrator password, when asked.
command.
Caution
administrator mode.
Message
Password:
Enter an administrator password.
<ERROR> Authentication failed
Switching to the admin class was failed due to the incorrect administrator password.
Enter the correct administrator password.
<WARNING> weak admin password: set the password
The administrator password is not set.
Set an administrator password.
<WARNING> weak admin password: contain at least 8 characters
The administrator password is seven or fewer characters in length.
Set an administrator password with eight or more characters.
<WARNING> weak admin password: contain a different kind of character
The administrator password consists of only alphabetic characters or only numeric
characters.
Set an administrator password with alphanumeric characters and symbols mixed.
Mode and Terminal Operation Commands
330
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
Execution Example
> admin
Password:
# exit
>
5.17.1.2 su
Function
Switch to the admin class.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
su
Options
N/A
Use Mode
Explanation
Operation mode (user class)
Switch from the user class to the admin class.
Before switching, enter the administrator password, when asked.
command.
Caution
administrator mode.
Message
Password:
Enter the administrator password.
<ERROR> Authentication failed
Switching to the admin class was failed due to the incorrect administrator password.
Enter the correct administrator password.
<WARNING> weak admin password: set the password
The administrator password is not set.
Set an administrator password.
<WARNING> weak admin password: contain at least 8 characters
The administrator password is seven or fewer characters in length.
Set an administrator password with eight or more characters.
<WARNING> weak admin password: contain a different kind of character
The administrator password consists of only alphabetic characters or only numeric
characters.
Set an administrator password with alphanumeric characters and symbols mixed.
Execution Example
> su
Password:
#
Mode and Terminal Operation Commands
331
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.17.1.3 exit
Function
Return to the class, mode or configuration directory, or logout.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
exit
N/A
Options
Use Mode
Operation mode (user class/admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
In the operation mode, the Use Mode class returns to the user class if it has been
logout occurs.
In the configuration mode, the current directory will be moved up to the next higher one
when the configuration directory function is enabled in a directory other than the top
directory. Otherwise, if the configuration has not been changed, the configuration mode
returns to the operation mode, but if the configuration has been changed, the
configuration mode still remains unreturned with an error message.
Caution
Message
<ERROR> The candidate-config has been changed but not committed.
The configuration is not reflected.
Reflect the configuration. When returning to the operation mode without reflecting the
Execution Example
(config)# exit
<ERROR> The candidate-config has been changed but not committed.
(config)# end
<WARNING> The candidate-config has been changed but not committed.
# exit
Login:
Mode and Terminal Operation Commands
332
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.17.1.4 configure
Function
Switch to the configuration mode.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
configure
Options
N/A
Use Mode
Explanation
Configuration mode (admin class)
Switch from the operation mode to the configuration mode.
Pressing the [Ctrl+O] keys after switching to the configuration mode will enable the
configuration directory function.
When the configuration directory function is enabled, it looks as if moved to another
directory according to the input configuration command, therefore, the configuration
command can be executed simply by entering arguments that follow the configuration
layer. A normal command also can be executed by entering its command name even
while moving between the layers.
The configuration directory is displayed at entry prompt.
To disable the configuration layer function, press the [Ctrl+G] keys.
Caution
If the configuration has been changed, it is not possible to return to the operation mode
to forcibly return to the operation mode.
When the configuration directory function is enabled, if the entry prompt character string
directory, the configuration directory will not be displayed at entry prompt.
Execution Example
# configure
(config)#
(Press the [CTRL+O] keys to enable the configuration directory function.)
<NOTICE> Directory mode is enabled. To disable, type Ctrl+G.
(config)# lan 0 ip
(config-lan-0-ip)# address 192.168.0.1/24 3
(config-lan-0-ip)# show
address 192.168.0.1/24 3
(config-lan-0-ip)# show candidate-config
lan 0 ip address 192.168.0.1/24 3
(config-lan-0-ip)#
(Press the [Ctrl+g] keys to disable the configuration directory function.)
<NOTICE> Directory mode is disabled.
(config)#
Mode and Terminal Operation Commands
333
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.17.1.5 end
Function
Return to the operation mode.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
end
Options
N/A
Use Mode
Explanation
Configuration mode (admin class)
Return from the configuration mode to the operation mode.
If the configuration has been changed, the Use Mode returns to the operation mode with
a message.
Default
<WARNING> The candidate-config has been changed but not committed.
The Use Mode has returned to the operation mode without reflecting the configuration.
The changed or added configuration remains unchanged.
Check whether you need to reflect the configuration.
Execution Example
(config)# end
#
5.17.1.6 quit
Function
Return to the operation mode.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
quit
Options
N/A
Use Mode
Explanation
Configuration mode (admin class)
Return from the configuration mode to the operation mode.
If the configuration has been changed, the Use Mode returns to the operation mode with
a message.
Message
<WARNING> The candidate-config has been changed but not committed.
The Use Mode has returned to the operation mode without reflecting the configuration.
The changed or added configuration remains unchanged.
Check whether you need to reflect the configuration.
Execution Example
(config)# quit
#
Mode and Terminal Operation Commands
334
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.17.1.7 top
Function
Switch to the highest configuration directory.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
top
Options
N/A
Use Mode
Explanation
Configuration mode (admin class)
If the configuration directory function is enabled in the configuration mode, move up to
the top directory.
Staying already in the top directory still remains unmoved.
If the configuration directory function is disabled, nothing occurs.
Execution Example
(config-lan-0-ip)# top
(config)#
(Execute in the "lan 0 ip" directory)
5.17.1.8 up
Function
Switch to the next upper configuration directory.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
up
Options
N/A
Use Mode
Explanation
Configuration mode (admin class)
If the configuration directory function is enabled in the configuration mode, move up to
the next configuration directory. Staying already in the top directory still remains
unmoved.
If the configuration directory function is disabled, nothing occurs.
Execution Example
(config-lan-0-ip)# up
(config-lan-0)#
(Execute in the "lan 0 ip" directory)
Mode and Terminal Operation Commands
335
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.17.1.9 !
Function
Return to the previous class, mode or configuration directory.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
!
Options
Use Mode
N/A
Operation mode (admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
In the operation mode, the Use Mode class returns to the user class if it has been
the operation mode still remains unchanged without logout.
In the configuration mode, the current directory will be moved up to the next higher one
when the configuration directory function is enabled in a directory other than the top
directory. Otherwise, if the configuration has not been changed, the configuration mode
returns to the operation mode, but if the configuration has been changed, the
configuration mode still remains unreturned with an error message.
occur in the operation mode.
Execution Example
# configure
(config)# !
# !
#
(Switch to the configuration mode)
(Return to the operation mode)
(Still remain without logout)
Mode and Terminal Operation Commands
336
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.17.2 Terminal Operation Commands
This section explains about terminal operation commands.
5.17.2.1 terminal pager
Function
Set the pager functions.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
terminal pager {enable|disable}
Options
enable
Use the pager functions.
disable
Do not use the pager functions.
Use Mode
Operation mode (user class/admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Specify whether or not to use the pager function.
When using the pager function, the device is placed in the key-in wait state if one screen
becomes full of output from the executed command. Pressing any keys makes it possible
to display the continued data or redisplay the previous data. If one screen does not
become full of command output, the command will exit without being placed in the key-in
wait state.
Some commands have too much output data and cannot be redisplayed back or will be
displayed up to the end without being placed in the key-in wait state.
The pager function is enabled only for command execution, but not for command
completion output (to display an argument list, argument description, and command
format).
The default screen size of the terminal is 24 lines x 80 columns. For other screen sizes,
screen size will result in a picture distortion. When you log in with the telnet or ssh, the
number of lines and columns will be set automatically. If a picture distortion occurs, use
The following prompt will appear in the key-in wait state.
MORE (xx%): (xx indicates the ratio of the number of displayed bytes to the total number
of bytes.)
or
MORE: (when data cannot be redisplayed backward)
The following lists the keys and operations in the key-in wait state. ^x means pressing the
[x] key while holding down the [CTRL] key; M-x means pressing the [x] key after pressing
the [ESC] key.
Key inputs
Operations
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
Number of lines, Line number, Number of times
(Specify it before entering the following keys)
c
Show up to the end
f ^F ^V
b ^B M-v
z
SPACE
BS
Skip one screen forward or specified number of lines forward (omit all
of the skipped lines)
Skip one screen backward or specified number of lines backward (omit
all of the skipped lines) *1
Skip one screen forward after specifying the number of lines for one
screen
Mode and Terminal Operation Commands
337
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
Key inputs
Operations
w
Skip one screen backward after specifying the number of lines for one
screen *1
j ^J e ^E ^N ↓ RETURN
Skip one screen forward or specified number of lines forward (show all
of the skipped lines)
k ^K y ^Y ^P ↑
Skip one screen backward or specified number of lines backward
(show all of the skipped lines) *1
d ^D
u ^U
g <
Skip half screen forward after specifying the number of lines for half
screen
Skip half screen backward after specifying the number of lines for half
screen *1
Show the first screen or all of the lines that follow the specified line
number *1
G >
Show the last screen or all of the lines that follow the specified line
number
/search pattern
Search forward (specified number of times) *1
Search backward (specified number of times) *1
Search forward again *1
?search pattern
n
N
Search backward again *1
M-x
r ^R ^L
^G
Execute x (any command) without exit after showing to the end
Show screen again *1
Show information (number of lines, number of bytes, ratio)
Show help (list for key bind)
h H
q Q ^C
Exit
*1: Display that cannot be retraced is invalid.
When specifying a line number, specify the line number on the screen. If a one-line
command output exceeds the specified number of columns on the screen, it is handled
as multiple lines on the screen. The line number begins with 1.
The search prompt is expressed by a slash (/) or question mark (?), which makes it
possible to enter a search pattern. The allowable search pattern is 76 or fewer characters
in length. When the allowable number of screen columns is less than 80, a search pattern
input with 80 or over 80 columns results in a picture distortion. In this case, redisplay the
screen.
The following lists the special characters available for search pattern. For other
characters, the characters themselves are subject to searching.
Special characters
Search target
.
An arbitrary character
^
$
Head of line (Use with a combination of other characters)
End of line (Use with a combination of other characters)
Start word (Use with a combination of other characters)
Quit word (Use with a combination of other characters)
x (x shall be any character except < >)
\<
\>
\x
If the target character string is found in the search process, it is highlighted.
If not found, the following prompt will appear. Press the [RETURN] key. Pressing
[CTRL+C] will halt the display of command output.
MORE: pattern not found (press RETURN)
Mode and Terminal Operation Commands
338
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
If information is displayed, the following prompt will appear.
MORE(line 1-22/515 lines, 1428/33473 bytes, 4%):
- -- ---
a b c
---- -----
-
d
e
f
If it cannot be displayed backward, the following prompt will appear.
MORE(line 1-22 lines):
- --
a b
Description:
a: Top line number on screen
b: Bottom line number on screen
c: Total number of lines
d: Number of displayed bytes
e: Total number of bytes
f: Ratio of total number of bytes to number of displayed bytes (d / e x 100)
When a help is displayed, the prompt below will appear following the help. Press the
[RETURN] key. Pressing [CTRL+C] will halt the display of command output.
MORE: help (press RETURN)
Caution
Default
When the allowable number of screen lines is less than 3, pager function will not work. In
addition, when the allowable number of screen columns is less than character string
prompt results in a picture distortion.
This command is an operation command; however, the contents specified in the admin
The contents set in the user class are discarded at logout or execution of the "admin"
command, and they cannot be saved.
It is assumed that the pager function is not used.
terminal pager disable
Mode and Terminal Operation Commands
339
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.17.2.2 terminal window
Function
Set the terminal screen size.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
terminal window [column <column>] [line <line>]
Options
column <column>
Specify the number of digits of the terminal screen with a decimal value.
line <line>
Specify the number of lines of the terminal screen with a decimal value.
Use Mode
Operation mode (user class/admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Specify the screen size of the terminal.
For telnet or ssh connection, the screen size of the terminal reported from a telnet or ssh
client is used at connection or changing the screen size.
If the screen size is changed after reported, this setting value will be used.
Caution
Default
This command is an operation command; however, the contents specified in the admin
The contents set in the user class are discarded at logout or execution of the "admin"
command, and they cannot be saved.
Specifying incorrect screen size may cause a display distortion when a command is input
or executed.
It is assumed that the screen size of the terminal is set to 80 columns x 24 lines.
terminal window column 80 line 24
5.17.2.3 terminal charset
Function
Set the Japanese Kanji character codes.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
terminal charset {EUC|SJIS}
Options
EUC
Use the EUC Japanese Kanji character codes on the terminal.
SJIS
Use the Shift-JIS Japanese Kanji character codes on the terminal.
Use Mode
Operation mode (user class/admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Caution
Specify the Japanese Kanji character codes to be used on the terminal.
This command is an operation command; however, the contents specified in the admin
The contents set in the user class are discarded at logout or execution of the "admin"
command, and they cannot be saved.
Default
It is assumed that the EUC Japanese Kanji character codes are used on the terminal.
terminal charset EUC
Mode and Terminal Operation Commands
340
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.17.2.4 terminal prompt
Function
Set the input prompt.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
terminal prompt login "<prompt>"
terminal prompt user "<prompt>"
terminal prompt admin "<prompt>"
Options
login
Set the input prompt during login.
user
Set the input command prompt to be used during login with the user class.
admin
Set the input command prompt to be used during login with the admin class.
<prompt>
Specify a character string of the input prompt. Up to 80 characters are allowed.
Use Mode
Operation mode (user class/admin class) (user option)
Operation mode (admin class) (login or admin option)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Specify a character string for login prompt or command input prompt.
If a space is included in a character string, enclose it in double quotation marks (").
If the prompt character string contains a special character beginning with a back slash as
shown below, it will be replaced with an expanded character string.
Special character
Expanded character string
"config2" only if the configuration file name is config2
Number of file name for the configuration file (1 or 2)
Date (month/date format)
\c
\C
\d
\h
\H
\m
\p
\t
Host name or Model name (character string before ".")
Host name or Model name (all character string)
Model name
Prompt character string according to the class (including space)
Time (hour:minute:second format, 24 hour time system)
Time (hour:minute:second format, 12 hour time system)
Time (hour:minute NN format, 12 hour time system, NN:am or pm)
Firmware version
\T
\@
\v
\w
\!
Configuration directory
History number
\\
A single backslash character
If this device is running with bank0 configuration, "\c" displays no information, including a
space before or after "\c".
If the device is running with bank1 configuration, "\c" displays "bank1".
Mode and Terminal Operation Commands
341
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
If the host name is not set, the model name will be displayed instead.
The following shows the standard prompts of "\p" and "\$".
State
Before login
Standard prompt
:
When user login
>
#
When administrator
login
Caution
Default
This command is an operation command; however, the contents specified in the admin
The contents set in the user class are discarded at logout or execution of the "admin"
command, and they cannot be saved.
It is assumed that the following is set.
terminal prompt login "Login: "
terminal prompt user "\h \c\w\p"
terminal prompt admin "\h \c\w\p"
Execution Example
# terminal prompt login "Welcome: "
# terminal prompt user "[\!]\h\w\p"
# terminal prompt admin "\h bank/\C\w\p"
#
5.17.2.5 terminal timestamp
Function
Set the command execution date and time display function.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
terminal timestamp {enable|disable}
Options
enable
Display the date and time when command is executed.
disable
Do not display the date and time when command is executed.
Use Mode
Operation mode (user class/admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Caution
Specify whether or not to display the date and time on which execute the command.
This command is an operation command; however, the contents specified in the admin
The contents set in the user class are discarded at logout or execution of the "admin"
command, and they cannot be saved.
Default
It is assumed that the date and time is not displayed when the command is executed.
terminal timestamp disable
Mode and Terminal Operation Commands
342
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.17.2.6 terminal bell
Function
Set the bell function to sound in the case of an operation error.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
terminal bell {enable|disable}
Options
enable
Sound a terminal bell in the case of an operation error.
disable
Do not sound a terminal bell in the case of an operation error.
Use Mode
Operation mode (user class/admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Set whether or not to sound the terminal bell when:
• an attempt has been made to enter characters over the maximum number (1022
characters);
• data has been pasted over the maximum number of characters (1022 characters); or
• no implementation candidate has been found.
Caution
Default
This command is an operation command; however, the contents specified in the admin
The contents set in the user class are discarded at logout or execution of the "admin"
command, and they cannot be saved.
It is assumed that the terminal bell is sounded.
terminal bell enable
Mode and Terminal Operation Commands
343
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.17.2.7 terminal logging
Function
Set the command execution history log.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
terminal logging line <line>
Options
line <line>
Specify a number for the lines of the command execution history to be logged with a
decimal value from 0 to 100.
No command history is logged if zero (0) is specified.
Use Mode
Operation mode (admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Specify the number of command execution history lines.
If the number of lines is changed, the history number and history contents are inherited;
however, if the number of lines has been increased from 0, the history number will begin
with 1.
Caution
Default
This command is an operation command; however, the contents specified in the admin
The contents set in the user class are discarded at logout or execution of the "admin"
command, and they cannot be saved.
It is assumed that the number of command execution history lines is set to 24.
terminal logging line 24
Mode and Terminal Operation Commands
344
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.17.2.8 show terminal
Function
Display the terminal information.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
show terminal
N/A
Options
Use Mode
Operation mode (user class/admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Caution
Display the terminal information.
This command is an operation command; however, it can be displayed as the
configuration, where "candidate-config" and "running-config" are displayed with the same
values.
If this command is displayed as the configuration, only the set values other than the
defaults are displayed without being digit-aligned.
Execution Example
# show terminal
pager
enable
window
charset
prompt
prompt
prompt
column 80 line 24
EUC
login "\p"
user "\u@\h \c\p"
admin "\u@\h \c\w\p"
timestamp disable
bell
logging
#
enable
line 24
Mode and Terminal Operation Commands
345
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.17.3 Command Execution History
This section explains about command execution history.
5.17.3.1 show logging command
Function
Display the command execution history.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
show logging command [brief] [all]
Options
N/A
Display detailed the command execution history on the current login line.
brief
Display a brief command execution history.
all
Display the command execution history on the all login line.
Use Mode
Operation mode (user class/admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Display the command execution history.
The operation mode displays the history of the commands that have been executed in
the operation mode.
The configuration mode displays the history of the commands that have been executed in
the configuration mode.
The user class displays only the history of the commands that have been executed in the
user class, with history numbers in a discontinuous manner.
The admin class displays the history of the commands that have been executed in the
user and admin classes.
On a line where the command is not yet executed because the history was being edited,
an asterisk (*) is displayed following the history number.
If "*" is displayed, it can be deleted by:
• pressing the [Ctrl+P] or [Up] key to display the line and pressing the [RETURN] key to
execute the command;
• pressing the [Ctrl+P] or [Up] key to display the line and pressing the [Ctrl+C] key to
discard the entry contents; or
• pressing the [Ctrl+P] or [Up] key to display the line, pressing the [Ctrl+U] key to blank
the line, and moving to another history.
"show logging command all" command displays asterisk (*) before the current login line.
Caution
If the history number exceeds 32767, it returns to an appropriate lower history number.
Mode and Terminal Operation Commands
346
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
Execution Example
# show logging command
01/24 08:48:54 * console 0 admin
01/24 08:49:02 * console 0 admin
01/24 08:49:11 * console 0 admin
show system information
1 show system information
2 show date
3 show logging commandDec 01 15:58:55 1
# show logging command brief
1 show date
2 show logging command
3 show logging command brief
# show logging command all
01/24 08:42:21 * console 0 admin
01/24 08:42:24 * console 0 admin
01/24 08:42:32 * console 0 admin
01/24 08:42:34 * console 0 admin
01/24 08:42:47 * console 0 admin
1 show logging
1 show logging command
3 exit
4 exit
5 show logging command
82 show logging command
83 show
84 show users
85 exit
01/24 08:42:59
01/24 08:43:02
01/24 08:43:10
01/24 08:43:12
01/24 08:43:22
vty 1
vty 1
vty 1
vty 1
vty 1
admin
admin
admin
admin
admin
86 show logging command
6 show logging command all
01/24 08:51:00 * console 0 admin
# show logging command all
XG2600# show logging command brief all
86 show logging command
87 show logging command
88 !
89 show logging command
90 show system information
91 show date
92 show logging command
93 show logging command brief
94 show logging command all
95 show logging command brief all
Mode and Terminal Operation Commands
347
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.17.3.2 clear logging command
Function
Clear the command execution history.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
clear logging command [all]
Options
N/A
Clear the command execution history on the current login login.
all
Clear the command execution history on the all login login.
Use Mode
Operation mode (admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Erase the command execution history in the operation and configuration modes.
The command execution history number returns to 1.
Execution Example
# clear logging command
#
Mode and Terminal Operation Commands
348
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.17.4 Command Alias
This section explains about commands related to command alias.
5.17.4.1 alias
Function
Set the command alias information.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
alias <alias> "<command>"
Options
<alias>
Specify a command alias name to be assigned, with up to 80 characters.
This name must begin with an alphabetical character, and it can be followed by
alphanumeric characters and hyphens (-).
<command>
Specify a command name and command options, to be replaced during execution of
command alias, using a pair of double quotation marks.
If no name or option is enclosed by a pair of double quotation marks (""), the definition is
deleted.
Use Mode
Operation mode (user class/admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Combine the command name and some command options, and set them as a new
command. Up to 30 commands can be set.
Specifying the set command alias will delete the previously registered command and the
specified one is set.
The set command alias is reflected immediately, and it can be used promptly.
The set command alias, if executed, will be replaced with the set command name and
command options to execute the command.
When executing the command, the options that were input following the command alias
are assumed to be input succeeding the command name and command options that
were replaced with the command alias.
An input line remains in the command execution history without being replaced with a
command alias.
Caution
The following command alias names cannot be registered.
• "exit", "end", "quit", "up", "top", "delete", "show", "clear", "commit", "discard", "save",
"load", "reset", "moff"
Other normal command names can be registered as command aliases; however, note
that the operations of the registered normal commands are changed.
This command is an operation command; however, the contents specified in the admin
The contents set in the user class are discarded at logout or execution of the "admin"
command, and they cannot be saved.
Default
It is assumed that no data is registered.
Execution Example
# alias history "show logging command brief"
# history
1 alias history "show logging command brief"
2 history
#
Mode and Terminal Operation Commands
349
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.17.4.2 show alias
Function
Display the command alias information.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
show alias [<name>]
Options
N/A
Display all command alias information.
<name>
Display the information about the specified command alias name.
Use Mode
Operation mode (user class/admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Caution
Display command alias information.
This command is an operation command; however, it can be displayed as the
configuration, where "candidate-config" and "running-config" are displayed with the same
values.
Default
# show alias
history "show logging command brief"
dsplog "show logging syslog"
# show alias history
"show logging command brief"
#
5.17.4.3 clear alias
Function
Clear the command alias information.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
clear alias [<name>]
Options
N/A
Delete all command alias information.
<name>
Delete the information of the specified command alias name.
Use Mode
Operation mode (user class/admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Caution
Delete command alias information.
This command is an operation command, but it can be deleted with the "delete"
command in the configuration mode.
Execution Example
# clear alias history
# clear alias
#
Mode and Terminal Operation Commands
350
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.17.5 Command Output
This section explains about commands related to command output operations.
5.17.5.1 more
Function
Display the command output one screen at a time on a display screen.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
<command> | more
Options
<command>
Specify a command to execute.
Use Mode
Operation mode (user class/admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Display the command output result on each screen.
This command acts in the same way as when the "terminal pager enable" command has
been specified.
For details on the description, key operations, and cautions, refer to the "5.17.2.1
Execution Example
# show running-config | more
# show running-config | more
(snip)
telnetinfo autologout 5m
MORE(86%):
#
(Enter "q" to quit display)
Mode and Terminal Operation Commands
351
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.17.5.2 tail
Function
Display the last part of command output.
<command> | tail [<lines>]
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
Options
<command>
Specify a command to execute.
<lines>
Specify the number of lines to be displayed with a decimal number from 1 to 1000.
The default is 10 lines.
Use Mode
Operation mode (user class/admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Execute the specified command, and display the last output of the command by the
specified number of lines.
If the output of the specified command does not reach the specified number of lines, all
output will be displayed.
(the last output part of the specified command) of this command.
Caution
Enter a space character before and after a command pipe character ("|"). A command
once.
A sentence up to a new-line character is assumed to be one line. A statement that is too
long is divided into multiple lines on the screen, and the number of lines specified in the
argument may not match that of lines on the screen.
Specifying a command that requires a long time to execute, may result in a long wait time
until the command output.
This command acts for a "display" command such as the "show" command.
Execution Example
# show logging syslog | tail 3
Dec 08 15:19:27 192.168.1.1 XG2600: mstpd: Topology Change detected
Dec 08 15:19:47 192.168.1.1 XG2600: sshd: generated public/private host key pair.
Dec 08 15:19:52 192.168.1.1 XG2600: logon: login admin on console
#
Mode and Terminal Operation Commands
352
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.18 System Operations and Display
Commands
This sectionexplains about system operations and display commands.
5.18.1 System Operations and Display Commands
This section explains about system operations and display commands.
5.18.1.1 show system information
Function
Display the system information.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
show system information
Options
N/A
Display the system information.
Use Mode
Operation mode (user class/admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Display the system status and information of the device.
Execution Example
# show system information
Current time : Fri Jan 14 14:00:45 2011
Startup time : Fri Jan 14 08:40:05 2011
System : XG2600
Serial No. : 00000123
ROM Ver. : 1.3
---(1)
---(2)
---(3)
---(4)
---(5)
---(6)
---(7)
---(8)
---(9)
---(10)
---(11)
ASIC Firm Ver. : 090203PL1
Firm Ver. : V01.00 NY0001 Tue Nov 14 17:52:15 JST 2006
Startup-config : Sat Jan 01 13:08:04 2011 config1
Running-config : Sat Jan 01 13:08:04 2011
MAC : 000b5d89011
Memory : 256MB
1) Current time
Displays the current date and time.
2) Startup time
Displays the date and time when the device started up.
3) System
Displays the device name.
4) Serial No.
Displays the device serial number.
5) ROM Ver.
Displays the ROM version number in the xx.yy format. xx.yy is indicated by a
decimal value.
System Operations and Display Commands
353
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
6) ASIC Firm Ver. (XG2600 Only)
Displays the ASIC firmware version number in the yymmddPLn format.
yymmdd is indicated by date (year-month-day).
PLn shows patch level and n is indicated by digit decimal value.
7) Firm Ver.
Displays the firmware version number in the Vxx.yy format.
"xx.yy is indicated by a two-digit decimal value.
8) Startup-config
Displays the date and time when you have saved the configuration to be read
during device startup, as well as the file name.
9) Running-config
Displays the date and time, when you applied the configuration that is currently
active.
10) MAC
Displays the MAC address with a 12-digit hexadecimal value.
11) Memory
Displays the memory size installed in the device.
5.18.1.2 show system status
Function
Display the system status.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
show system status
Options
N/A
Display the system status.
Use Mode
Operation mode (user class/admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Display the dynamic system information of the device.
Execution Example
XG0224
When no Expansion Card is installed.
# show system status
Current-time
Startup-time
restart_cause
machine_state
power0_state
fan0_state
: Wed Dec 10 06:07:43 2008
: Wed Dec 10 06:05:05 2008
: power on
: RUNNING
: NORMAL
: NORMAL
---(1)
---(2)
---(3)
---(4)
---(5)
---(6)
---(7)
inspiration_state
phy_state
: NORMAL
: NORMAL
slot1_state
inspiration_temp
phy_temp
slot1_temp
Slot Information
slot1
: UNKNOWN
: 26 C
: 40 C
: -- C
---(8)
---(9)
: NO_PRESENT
System Operations and Display Commands
354
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
When a CX4 Card is installed.
# show system status
Current-time
Startup-time
restart_cause
machine_state
power0_state
fan0_state
: Wed Dec 10 05:55:40 2008
---(1)
---(2)
---(3)
---(4)
---(5)
---(6)
---(7)
: Wed Dec 10 05:52:11 2008
: power on
: RUNNING
: NORMAL
: NORMAL
: NORMAL
inspiration_state
phy_state
: NORMAL
slot1_state
inspiration_temp
phy_temp
slot1_temp
Slot Information
slot1
: UNKNOWN
: 25 C
: 40 C
---(8)
---(9)
: -- C
: SJ10GCX4Z
When a SFP+ Card is installed.
# show system status
Current-time
Startup-time
restart_cause
machine_state
power0_state
fan0_state
: Wed Dec 10 06:03:04 2008
: Wed Dec 10 06:02:19 2008
: reset
: RUNNING
: NORMAL
: NORMAL
---(1)
---(2)
---(3)
---(4)
---(5)
---(6)
---(7)
inspiration_state
phy_state
: NORMAL
: NORMAL
slot1_state
inspiration_temp
phy_temp
slot1_temp
Slot Information
slot1
: NORMAL
: 25 C
: 39 C
: 39 C
---(8)
---(9)
: SJ10GSFPZ
1) Current time
Present date and time.
2) Startup time
Date and time when the system started up.
3) restart_cause
Cause for the system startup.
The following system startup causes are displayed:
power on
reset
: The power has been turned on.
: The reset command has been issued.
reset switch
system down
: The [RESET] switch has been pressed.
: System-down has occurred.
4) machine_state
State of the device
RUNNING
: The device is active.
5) power0_state
State of the power unit.
NORMAL
: The power unit works normally.
NO_PRESENT : The power unit is not installed.
FAIL
: The power unit has been turned off.
: The power unit is invalid state.
UNKNOWN
6) fan0_state
State of the fan 0.
NORMAL
: The fan works normally.
: The fan has been abnormal.
: The fan is invalid state.
ABNORMAL
UNKNOWN
System Operations and Display Commands
355
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
7) inspiration_state
State of environment temperature monitor.
phy_state
State of temperature monitor around PHY.
slot1_state
State of Expansion Card temperature monitor (SLOT1).
NORMAL : The temperature is normal.
HIGHWARNING : The device changes to a high temperature state.
HIGHALARM
UNKNOWN
: Thermal alarm occurs in the device.
: There are three following states.
The Expantion Card without Thermal Sensor is installed. (CX4).
The Invalid Expantion Card is installed.
The Expantion Card is not installed.
8) inspiration_temp
Environment temperature.
phy_temp
temperature around PHY.
slot1_temp
temperature around Expansion Card (SLOT1).
At the time of three following states, "--" is displayed.
The Expantion Card without Thermal Sensor is installed. (CX4)
The Invalid Expantion Card is installed.
The Expantion Card is not installed.
9) Slot Information
The type of Expansion Card.
SJ10GCX4Z
SJ10GSFPZ
: Installed Expansion Card is SJ10GCX4Z. (CX4)
: Installed Expansion Card is SJ10GSFPZ. (SFP+)
NO_PRESENT : The Expantion Card is not installed.
UNKNOWN : Installed Expansion Card is Invalid Card.
XG0448
When a CX4 Card is installed in Slot 1 and a SFP+ Card is installed in Slot 2.
# show system status
Current-time
Startup-time
restart_cause
machine_state
power0_state
power_consumption
fan0_state
: Tue Dec 9 20:43:01 2008
: Tue Dec 9 20:42:48 2008
: power on
: RUNNING
: NORMAL
---(1)
---(2)
---(3)
---(4)
---(5)
---(10)
---(6)
: 79 W
: NORMAL
fan1_state
: NORMAL
fan2_state
: NORMAL
inspiration_state
phy_state
slot1_state
slot2_state
inspiration_temp
phy_temp
: NORMAL
: NORMAL
: UNKNOWN
: NORMAL
: 31 C
---(7)
---(8)
: 38 C
slot1_temp
: -- C
slot2_temp
: 29 C
Slot Information
slot1
slot2
: SJ10GCX4Z
: SJ10GSFPZ
---(9)
1) Current time
Present date and time.
2) Startup time
Date and time when the system started up.
System Operations and Display Commands
356
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
3) restart_cause
Cause for the system startup.
The following system startup causes are displayed:
power on
reset
: The power has been turned on.
: The reset command has been issued.
reset switch : The [RESET] switch has been pressed.
system down : System-down has occurred.
4) machine_state
State of the device
RUNNING: The device is active.
5) power0_state
State of the power unit.
NORMAL
: The power unit works normally.
NO_PRESENT : The power unit is not installed.
FAIL
: The power unit has been turned off.
: The power unit is invalid state.
UNKNOWN
6) fan0_state
State of the fan 0.
fan1_state
State of the fan 1.
fan2_state
State of the fan 2.
NORMAL
: The fan works normally.
: The fan has been abnormal.
: The fan is invalid state.
ABNORMAL
UNKNOWN
7) inspiration_state
State of environment temperature monitor.
phy_state
State of temperature monitor around PHY.
slot1_state
State of Expansion Card temperature monitor (SLOT1).
slot2_state
State of Expansion Card temperature monitor (SLOT2).
NORMAL : The temperature is normal.
HIGHWARNING : The device changes to a high temperature state.
HIGHALARM
UNKNOWN
: Thermal alarm occurs in the device.
: There are three following states.
The Expantion Card without Thermal Sensor is installed. (CX4).
The Invalid Expantion Card is installed.
The Expantion Card is not installed.
System Operations and Display Commands
357
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
8) inspiration_temp
Environment temperature.
phy_temp
temperature around PHY.
slot1_temp
temperature around Expansion Card (SLOT1).
At the time of three following states, "--" is displayed.
The Expantion Card without Thermal Sensor is installed. (CX4)
The Invalid Expantion Card is installed.
The Expantion Card is not installed.
slot2_temp
temperature around Expansion Card (SLOT2).
At the time of three following states, "--" is displayed.
The Expantion Card without Thermal Sensor is installed. (CX4)
The Invalid Expantion Card is installed.
The Expantion Card is not installed.
9) Slot Information
The type of Expansion Card.
SJ10GCX4Z
SJ10GSFPZ
: Installed Expansion Card is SJ10GCX4A. (CX4)
: Installed Expansion Card is SJ10GSFPA. (SFP+)
NO_PRESENT : The Expantion Card is not installed.
UNKNOWN
: Installed Expansion Card is Invalid Card.
10) power_consumption
Power consumption of the device.
XG2600
# show system status
Current-time
Startup-time
restart_cause
machine_state
access_direction
power_redundancy
PSU1 state
: Thu Dec 21 16:04:50 2008
: Thu Dec 21 16:04:36 2008
---(1)
---(2)
---(3)
---(4)
---(5)
---(6)
---(7)
: power on
: RUNNING
: front access
: redundant
: NORMAL
PSU2 state
: NORMAL
PSU1 type
: AC
---(8)
PSU2 type
: AC
power_consumption
FAN1 state
: 75 W
: NORMAL
---(9)
---(10)
FAN2 state
: NORMAL
inspiration_state
inspiration_temp
warning time
recover time
internal_state
inspiration_temp
internal_temp
: NORMAL
: NORMA
: Fri Dec 26 14:00:45 2008
: Fri Dec 26 14:12:30 2008
: NORMAL
---(11)
---(12)
: 35 C
: 32 C
---(13)
1) Current time
Present date and time.
2) Startup time
Date and time when the system started up.
System Operations and Display Commands
358
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
3) restart_cause
Cause for the system startup.
The following system startup causes are displayed:
power on
reset
: The power has been turned on.
: The reset command has been issued.
reset switch : The [RESET] switch has been pressed.
system down : System-down has occurred.
4) machine_state
State of the device
RUNNING
FALLBACK
: The device is active.
: The device is into fallback state.
5) access_direction
Direction where a device is installed in.
front access
rear access
: The device should be installed forward.
: The device should be installed backward.
6) power_redundancy
State of the redundant power unit.
single
: The device has no redundant power unit.
: The device has a redundant power unit.
redundant
7) PSU1 state
State of the power unit (PSU1).
PSU2 state
Type of the power unit (PSU2).
NORMAL
: The power unit works normally.
NO PRESENT : The power unit is not installed.
NO POWER
FAIL
: The power unit has been turned off.
: The power unit has been abnormal.
: The power unit is invalid type.
UNKNOWN
WARNING
: The power unit has been incorrectly mounted.
8) PSU1 type
Type of the power unit (PSU1).
PSU2 type
Type of the power unit (PSU2).
AC
--
: The power unit is AC.
: The power unit is not installed or invalid type.
9) power_consumption
Power consumption of the device.
10) FAN1 state
State of the fan module 1.
FAN2 state
State of the fan module 2.
NORMAL
FAIL
: The fan module works normally.
: The fan module has been abnormal.
NO PRESENT : The fan module is not installed.
UNKNOWN
WARNING
: The fan module is invalid direction.
: The fan module has been incorrectly mounted.
System Operations and Display Commands
359
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
11) inspiration_state
State of environment temperature monitor.
internal_state
State of device inside temperature monitor.
NORMAL
WARNING
ALARM
: The temperature is normal.
: The device changes to a high temperature state.
: Thermal alarm occurs in the device.
12) State of changing thermal state
warning time
recover time
: The time when a device changed in a high temperature state.
: The time when a device returned to a normal state.
13) inspiration_temp
Environment temperature.
internal_temp
Device inside temperature.
System Operations and Display Commands
360
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.18.1.3 show tech-support
Function
Display all the analysis information.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
show tech-support [detail] [save]
Options
N/A
Display the result of the analysis.
detail
Display or save detail report.
save
Save the result of the analysis to the external media.
Use Mode
Operation mode (user class/admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
The analysis information such as settings and statuses of this device is collectively
displayed.
Use the output capture function of the terminal software to save the output contents of
this command, or save the result of the analysis to the external media.
Caution
The output of this command is displayed constantly even when the pager function
"5.17.2.1 terminal pager" (pg.337) is enabled.
5.18.1.4 show logging error
Function
Display the error log.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
show logging error
N/A
Options
Use Mode
Operation mode (user class/admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Caution
Display the error log information about system down and hardware diagnosis errors due
to ROM or input/output driver.
"Logging time:" indicates GMT (Greenwich Mean Time) if the timezone (time zone
<offset>) is not specified in the configuration.
System Operations and Display Commands
361
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
Execution Example
# show logging error
Error Logs on FLASH:
[0] Error Log:
flag=80,mode=00,unit=10,regsp=00000000
Firm information:
XG2600 V01.00 PTF:NY0010
Error information:
error code [85020000]
Logging time:
2011/01/01(Sat) 11:51:17
Hardware diagnostic error information:
Detail [00142224 00142228 00000080 0000341f]
[00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000]
[00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000]
[00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000]
[00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000]
[00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000]
Extended Error Logs:
[1] Error Log:
flag=80,mode=00,unit=10,regsp=00000000
Firm information:
XG2600 V01.00 PTF:NY0010
Error information:
error code [85020000]
Logging time:
2011/01/01(Sat) 11:59:37
Hardware diagnostic error information:
Detail [00142224 00142228 00000080 00003520]
[00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000]
[00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000]
[00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000]
[00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000]
[00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000]
Error Logs on DRAM:
[0] Error Log:
flag=80,mode=00,unit=80,regsp=04ae9e60
Firm information:
XG2600 V01.00 PTF:NY0010
System down information:
down code [00000080:00000002]
Logging time:
2011/01/01(Sat) 13:05:23
Register:
srr0
[0086dab4] srr1
[0002d000] csrr0
[00000000] csrr1
[00000000] mcsr
[00000000] tsr
[00000000]
[00000000]
[00000000]
[01124844]
[a2c9bdbc]
[00000000]
[00000000]
[00000000]
[00000000]
[00000000]
[04aea174]
mcsrr0 [00000000] mcsrr1 [00000000] mcar
lr
[00886d74] dear
[00000000] gpr01
[0087a01c] gpr05
[c1bcb0a1] gpr09
[aca5a4a5] gpr13
[00000000] gpr17
[00000000] gpr21
[04aea1e0] gpr25
[00000000] gpr29
[0087a01c] esr
gpr00
gpr04
gpr08
gpr12
gpr16
gpr20
gpr24
gpr28
[04ae9f60] gpr02
[00000005] gpr06
[00000005] gpr10
[00000000] gpr14
[00000000] gpr18
[00000000] gpr22
[04aea1f0] gpr26
[ffffffff] gpr30
[00000005] gpr03
[010cf924] gpr07
[d8c4eab7] gpr11
[00000000] gpr15
[00000000] gpr19
[00000000] gpr23
[0121ff74] gpr27
[0121ff7c] gpr31
Peripheral Register:
err_det [00000000] l2errdet[00000000] eedr
[00000000] ltesr
[00000000]
(To be continued)
System Operations and Display Commands
362
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
(Continued)
User Stack:
+0
+4
+8
+C
+0 +4 +8 +C
04ae9f60 04aea1d0 00886d58 04ae9fb8 04ae9fa0
04ae9f70 00c6fcbb fea4cebb d8c4eab7 c1bcb0a1
04ae9f80 a2c9bdbc a8b7c1bc b0a4f2a5 aca5a4a5
04ae9f90 c9a5e9a5 a4a5f3a4 cba4a2a4 efa4bba4
04ae9fa0 eba1a30a 00000000 00000000 00000000
04ae9fb0 04aea1c0 00000000 00000000 00000000
04ae9fc0 85004100 04aea0b0 0000000a 00000000
04ae9fd0 04ae9ff0 04ae9fb0 04ae9fb0 00000100
04ae9fe0 00000000 85004100 00000100 04aea068
04ae9ff0 04aea020 00000000 00000000 00000000
04aea000 00000000 04aea0f0 00000007 00000000
04aea010 00000001 04ae9ff0 04aea000 2066696c
04aea020 73666572 000002bf 5472616e 01e89be0
04aea030 42000082 00000000 00000000 00000000
04aea040 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
04aea050 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
04aea060 010b0000 04b22114 0000005d 00000000
04aea070 04aea148 0124269c ffffffff ffffffff
04aea080 00405cfc 0002d000 ffffffff ffffffff
04aea090 0087b9dc 00000000 00000000 42002088
04aea0a0 00000001 00000000 00000000 42002088
04aea0b0 00000001 0002d000 00000100 00000001
04aea0c0 0087b6d4 00000000 00000000 42000084
04aea0d0 00000001 00000100 00000002 035fc300
04aea0e0 04aea110 01260af0 00004e43 00000020
04aea0f0 04aea100 01260af0 00004e43 00000020
04aea100 04aea130 0087b810 01261d28 035fcdc0
04aea110 04aea140 01260af0 00004e43 42000082
04aea120 04aea140 00000022 00000000 035fcdc0
04aea130 04aea140 0087b8c0 00000000 035fcdc0
04aea140 04aea170 0087a23c 00000022 01230168
04aea150 04aea1d0 04b11152 00769eec 01230168
04aea160 00000000 00000022 04b22114 0000005d
04aea170 00000000 0087a01c 00000000 00000200
04aea180 04b71ee0 04b22114 01230168 00000022
04aea190 04aea1a0 00869238 00000000 00000000
04aea1a0 04aea1c0 00867cd8 00000000 00000000
04aea1b0 010b0000 04b11152 00769eec 01230168
04aea1c0 04b71ee0 01240000 010ed184 01230168
04aea1d0 04aea210 00768d20 00000000 00000000
04aea1e0 04b71ee0 04aea220 01230168 0121fd30
04aea1f0 04aea210 007697d4 00769eec 01230168
04aea200 04b71ee0 01240000 01230168 01240000
04aea210 04aea330 007685d4 04aea200 fffffffb
04aea220 4649524d 57415245 2d494e46 4f000000
04aea230 53522d53 37313643 32000000 00000000
04aea240 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
04aea250 4e593030 31302056 30322e30 30000000
04aea260 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
04aea270 4d6f6e20 46656220 20372031 343a3239
04aea280 3a353920 4a535420 32303035 00000000
......mX........
................
................
................
................
................
..A.............
................
......A........h
... ............
................
............ fil
sfer....Tran....
B...............
................
................
......!....]....
...H.$&.........
.@\.............
............B. .
............B. .
................
............B...
............._..
.....&....NC...
.....&....NC...
...0.....&.(._..
...@.&....NCB...
...@..."....._..
...@........._..
...p...<...".#.h
.......R.v...#.h
......."..!....]
................
......!..#.h..."
.......8........
......|.........
.......R.v...#.h
.....$.......#.h
.....v. ........
....... .#.h.!.0
.....v...v...#.h
.....$...#.h.$..
...0.v..........
FIRMWARE-INFO...
XG2600............
................
NY0010 V01.00...
................
Thu Jan 1 14:29
:59 JST 2011....
(To be continued)
System Operations and Display Commands
363
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
(Continued)
04aea290 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
................
04aea2a0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
04aea2b0 00000000 00000000 00000000 000001d4
04aea2c0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
04aea2d0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
04aea2e0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
04aea2f0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
04aea300 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
04aea310 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
04aea320 011395e0 00000004 01240000 01240000
04aea330 04aea360 00769fe4 00000000 035fcdc0
04aea340 04aea360 0087a23c 7ffffff0 01230168
04aea350 00000004 04aea370 01240000 04b71ee0
................
................
................
................
................
................
................
................
.........$...$..
...`.v......._..
...`...<.....#.h
.......p.$......
Interrupt Stack:
+0
+4
+8
+C
+0 +4 +8 +C
04ae9e60 00000000 04aea1f0 0121ff74 00000000
04ae9e70 00000000 04ae9f60 00000005 01124844
04ae9e80 0087a01c 00000005 010cf924 a2c9bdbc
04ae9e90 c1bcb0a1 00000005 d8c4eab7 00000000
04ae9ea0 aca5a4a5 00000000 00000000 00000000
04ae9eb0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
04ae9ec0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
04ae9ed0 04aea1e0 04aea1f0 0121ff74 00000000
04ae9ee0 00000000 ffffffff 0121ff7c 04aea174
04ae9ef0 0086dab4 0002d000 00000000 00000000
04ae9f00 00886d74 00000005 00000000 42000082
04ae9f10 00000001 0087a01c 00000000 00000000
04ae9f20 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
04ae9f30 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
04ae9f40 00000000 00000000 00000000 04aea170
04ae9f50 04ae9f60 01260af0 00004e43 00000008
# exit
.........!.t....
.......`......HD
...........$....
................
................
................
................
.........!.t....
.........!.|...t
................
..mt........B...
................
................
................
...............p
...`.&....NC....
System Operations and Display Commands
364
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.18.1.5 clear logging error
Function
Clear the error log.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
clear logging error
N/A
Options
Use Mode
Operation mode (admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Clear all the error logs.
Execution Example
# clear logging error
#
5.18.1.6 show logging syslog
Function
Display the system log information.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
show logging syslog
N/A
Options
Use Mode
Operation mode (user class/admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Caution
Display system log information. This command can display &syslognum; pieces or more
of information in the chronological order, most recent first.
Turning the device power Off or executing the clear logging syslog command will clear
system log information.
[RESET] switch to reset this device; however, by way of exception, if the system is reset
after firmware was updated, system log information will be cleared.
Execution Example
# show logging syslog
Dec 13 15:52:31 192.168.1.1 XG2600: init: system startup now.
Dec 13 15:52:31 192.168.1.1 XG2600: sshd: generating public/private host key pair.
Dec 13 15:52:40 192.168.1.1 XG2600: protocol: ether 1 link up
Dec 13 15:52:40 192.168.1.1 XG2600: protocol: lan 0 link up
System Operations and Display Commands
365
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.18.1.7 clear logging syslog
Function
Clear the system log information.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
clear logging syslog
N/A
Options
Use Mode
Operation mode (admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Clear all the system log information.
Execution Example
# clear logging syslog
#
5.18.1.8 clear statistics
Function
Clear all the statistics.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
clear statistics
N/A
Options
Use Mode
Operation mode (admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Clear all the statistics.
Execution Example
# clear statistics
#
System Operations and Display Commands
366
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.18.1.9 show date
Function
Display the current date and time of the device.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
show date
N/A
Options
Use Mode
Operation mode (user class/admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Display the current device date and time of the device.
Execution Example
# show date
Sat Jan 01 14:26:00 2011 ---(1)
1) Displays the current date and time.
5.18.1.10date
Function
Display and set the current date and time of the device.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
date [YYYY/MM/DD.hh:mm:ss]
Options
N/A
Display the current device date and time of the device.
YYYY/MM/DD.hh:mm:ss
Set the specified date and time. (Effective for admin class only)
Use Mode
Operation mode (user class/admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Display and set the current date and time of the device.
Execution Example
To display the date and time
# date
Sat Jan 01 14:26:00 2011
#
To set the date and time
# date 2011/01/01.14:26:00
#
System Operations and Display Commands
367
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.18.1.11rdate
Function
Set the date and time of the remote host into this device.
rdate
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
Options
N/A
Set the date and time of the remote host in this device.
Use Mode
Operation mode (admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Obtain the date and time of the remote host (time server) specified in the time auto
server, and set them as the date and time of this device.
Execution Example
# rdate
Sat Jan 01 14:26:00 2011
#
5.18.1.12reset
Function
Restart the device.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
reset [<filename>]
reset clear
Options
N/A
Restart the device.
<filename>
Specify the "startup-config" file to be read during startup.
• config1
Read configuration 1.
• config2
Read configuration 2.
clear
Initialize the settings and restart the device.
Use Mode
Operation mode (admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Restart the device in about 6 seconds.
Execution Example
# reset
#
System Operations and Display Commands
368
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.19 Configuration Display, Delete and
Operation Commands
This section explains about commands related to configuration definition information.
5.19.1 Configuration Display Commands
This section explains about commands related to configuration display.
5.19.1.1 show candidate-config
Function
Display the configuration being edited.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
show candidate-config [all] [<config>]
Options
all
Display all configuration including default values.
If omitted, only the modified configuration is displayed.
<config>
Display the configuration beginning with <config>.
The <config> section is NOT included in the configuration to be displayed.
If omitted, all configurations are displayed.
Use Mode
Operation mode (admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Display the currently edited configuration.
Execution Example
# show candidate-config lan 0
ip address 192.168.0.1/24 3
ip rip use v1 v1 0 off
#
Configuration Display, Delete and Operation Commands
369
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.19.1.2 show running-config
Function
Display the configuration during operation.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
show running-config [all] [<config>]
Options
all
Display all configuration including default values.
If omitted, only the modified configuration is displayed.
<config>
Display the configuration beginning with <config>.
The <config> section is NOT included in the configuration to be displayed.
If omitted, all configurations are displayed.
Use Mode
Operation mode (admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Display the currently running configuration.
Execution Example
# show running-config lan 1
ip address 192.168.1.1/24 3
ip rip use v1 v1 0 off
5.19.1.3 show startup-config
Function
Display the configuration to be used for device startup.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
show startup-config [<config>]
Options
<config>
Display the configuration beginning with <config>.
The character string, containing all options, characters and digits, without changing,
specified in the <config> option.
The <config> section is not included in the configuration to be displayed.
If omitted, all configurations are displayed.
Use Mode
Operation mode (admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Display the configuration that was used at startup or the saved startup configuration.
Execution Example
# show startup-config
lan 0 ip address 192.168.0.1/24 3
lan 0 vlan 1
syslog pri error,warn,info
syslog facility 23
telnetinfo autologout 5m
time zone 0900
Configuration Display, Delete and Operation Commands
370
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.19.1.4 diff
Function
Display the configuration difference.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
diff <src_filename> <dst_filename>
Options
<src_filename>
Specify the name of the compare source file.
<dst_filename>
Specify the name of the compare target file.
Use Mode
Operation mode (admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Display only the differences between the specified files. The information only in
<src_filename> begins with "<" and one only in <filename2> begins with ">".
The following file names can be specified.
candidate-config : Currently edited configuration file
running-config
startup-config
config1
: Running configuration file
: Startup configuration file
: Configuration 1 file
config2
: Configuration 2 file
Execution Example
# diff candidate-config running-config
===
> vlan 1 name rmt1
===
< vlan 3 name rmt3
< vlan 4 name rmt4
< vlan 5 name rmt5
< vlan 6 name rmt6
---
> vlan 3 name inter3
===
< vlan 8 name rmt8
< vlan 9 name rmt9
< vlan 10 name rmt10
< syslog server 192.168.33.63
#
Configuration Display, Delete and Operation Commands
371
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.19.2 Configuration Delete Commands
This section explains about commands related to configuration delete.
5.19.2.1 delete
Function
Delete the configuration being edited.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
delete <config>
Options
<config>
• Configuration command
Specify the name and arguments of the configuration command to be deleted.
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Delete the specified configuration to return to the default state.
All the commands that begin with the command name and arguments specified in
<config> are subject to deletion.
Specifying only the command name deletes all the configuration beginning with the
specified command name. The number of arguments that can be specified in the config
command varies depending on commands; in most cases, it is possible to specify up to
the argument that precedes a variable value.
Caution
Login password information cannot be deleted unless up to "set" is specified as shown
below.
delete password set
delete password user set
Execution Example
The following shows an execution example when deleting all IPv4 address information of
lan 0.
(config)# delete lan 0 ip address
Configuration Display, Delete and Operation Commands
372
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.19.3 Configuration Operation Commands
This section explains about commands related to configuration definition information operations.
5.19.3.1 load
Function
Read (or load) the configuration.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
load <filename>
Options
<filename>
Specify the name of the file to be read (or loaded).
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Read the specified configuration.
All the data being set will be invalid.
The following file names can be specified.
running-config : Running configuration file
startup-config : Startup configuration file
config1
config2
: Configuration 1 file
: Configuration 2 file
Message
load failed: config read error
Since the device has a high communication load, it failed in reading the configuration.
Stop the communication load, and execute the command again.
<WARNING> weak admin password: set the password
The administrator password is not set.
Set an administrator password.
<WARNING> weak admin password: contain at least 8 characters
The administrator password is seven or fewer characters in length.
Set an administrator password with eight or more characters.
<WARNING> weak admin password: contain a different kind of character
The administrator password consists of only alphabetic characters or only numeric
characters.
Set an administrator password with alphanumeric characters and symbols mixed.
<WARNING> weak user password: contain at least 8 characters
The user password is seven or fewer characters in length.
Set a user password with eight or more characters.
<WARNING> weak user password: contain a different kind of character
The user password consists of only alphabetic characters or only numeric characters.
Set a user password with alphanumeric characters and symbols mixed.
Configuration Display, Delete and Operation Commands
373
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
Execution Example
# load config1
#
5.19.3.2 save
Function
Save the configuration.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
save [<filename>]
Options
N/A
Overwrite the existing "startup-config" file with the "candidate-config" file contents.
<filename>
Overwrite the file specified with the "candidate-config" file contents.
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Overwrite the file specified with the "candidate-config" file contents.
Omitting options will overwrite the contents on the current startup-config file.
The following file names can be specified.
startup-config : Startup configuration file
config1
config2
: Configuration 1 file
: Configuration 2 file
Execution Example
# save
#
Configuration Display, Delete and Operation Commands
374
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.19.3.3 commit
Function
Commit (or dynamically activate) the configuration.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
commit
Options
N/A
Use Mode
Explanation
Configuration mode (admin class)
Apply the configuration that was set or changed with the configuration command, without
device restart.
Caution
Changing the configuration may cause the communication interface to come down once
in order to apply address information in the device, resulting in a communication
interrupt.
Reference
Message
<ERROR> Need to do reset after execute the save command.
Since unallowable configuration was added or changed, it cannot be applied.
<WARNING> The candidate-config is not changed.
No configuration is added or changed.
It is not necessary to execute the commit command.
Execution Example
# commit
#
Configuration Display, Delete and Operation Commands
375
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.19.3.4 commit try time
Function
Try to commit (dynamically activate) the candidate config, or re-commit the startup-config
if the try time period expires.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
commit try time <time>
Options
<time>
Specify a time period (from 1m to 24h) until retrieving the startup-config.
The unit shall be d (day), h (hour), or m (minute).
Use Mode
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Apply the configuration that was set or changed with the configuration command, without
device restart, and retrieve the startup-config in the specified time.
Caution
During commit try time period the following cannot be executed:
• "commit"
• commit try time
• "save"
If you want to execute these commands, please cancel retrieving the startup-config,
When the configuration is retrieved, complete the cancellation with this command
sequence:
load startup-config
commit
If the startup-config (config0 or config1) is not same the configuration before editing for
try, Old configuration would be lost.
Reference
Message
<ERROR> Need to do reset after execute the save command.
Since "commit try time" command already working, it cannot be applied.
<ERROR> Waiting switch-back to old configuration
An unallowable configuration was created and cannot be applied.
<WARNING> The candidate-config is not changed.
No configuration is added or changed.
It is not necessary to execute the commit command.
Execution Example
# commit try time 10m commit
#
Configuration Display, Delete and Operation Commands
376
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.19.3.5 commit try cancel
Function
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
commit try cancel
Options
N/A
Use Mode
Explanation
Message
Configuration mode (admin class)
<ERROR> Not waiting switch-back
invoked.
Execution Example
# commit try cancel
#
Configuration Display, Delete and Operation Commands
377
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.19.3.6 discard
Function
Discard the changes of configuration.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
discard
Options
N/A
Use Mode
Explanation
Configuration mode (admin class)
Discard changes of candidate-config, and return to the same contents as for running-
config.
Message
<WARNING> weak admin password: set the password
The administrator password is not set.
Set an administrator password.
<WARNING> weak admin password: contain at least 8 characters
The administrator password is seven or fewer characters in length.
Set an administrator password with eight or more characters.
<WARNING> weak admin password: contain a different kind of character
The administrator password consists of only alphabetic characters or only numeric
characters.
Set an administrator password with alphanumeric characters and symbols mixed.
<WARNING> weak user password: contain at least 8 characters
The user password is seven or fewer characters in length.
Set a user password with eight or more characters.
<WARNING> weak user password: contain a different kind of character
The user password consists of only alphabetic characters or only numeric characters.
Set a user password with alphanumeric characters and symbols mixed.
Execution Example
# discard
Configuration Display, Delete and Operation Commands
378
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.19.4 File Operation Commands
This section explains about commands related to File Operation Commands.
5.19.4.1 dir
Function
Displays a list of files.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
dir [<filename>]
Options
<filename>
Specifies the name of the file or directory to be displayed. The dir command will only
display files or directories that match this parameter. If a directory is specified, the files
inside that directory will be displayed. Wildcards may be used with this option. Valid
wildcards are listed below.
• *
matches all character strings, regardless of length.
• ?
matches any single character.
• [<char>]
matches a target including any of the characters in <char>.
Use Mode
Operation mode (admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Displays a list of files on external media.
Execution Example
# dir
Directory of /cf0
---(1)
(4) (5)
(2)
(3)
2011/01/15 11:55
2011/01/15 11:55
2011/01/15 11:55
2011/01/15 11:55
2011/01/15 11:55
2011/01/17 03:16
2011/01/17 01:58
1445 CONFIG2.TXT
1445 CONFIG3.TXT
1445 CONFIG4.TXT
1445 CONFIG11.TXT
1445 CONFIG1.TXT
2337531 FIRM
<DIR>
TEST
total file 6
total directory 1
# dir test/*.*
Directory of /cf0/test
2011/01/16 10:23
2011/01/17 01:58
3142 CONFIG2.TXT
<DIR> BKUP
total file 1
total directory 1
1) If CompactFlash /cf0, if USB memory /um0
2) Displays file last modified date.
3) Displays <DIR> if directory.
4) If a regular file, displays file size in bytes.
5) Displays file or directory name.
Configuration Display, Delete and Operation Commands
379
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.19.4.2 copy
Function
Copies a file.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
copy <src_filename> <dst_filename>
Options
<src_filename>
The source file to be copied.
<dst_filename>
The target file name.
Use Mode
Operation mode (admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Copies a file.
Filenames can be any of the below.
Filenames that can be used for <src_filename>:
candidate-config : candidate configuration file
running-config
startup-config
config1
: Running configuration file
: Startup configuration file
: Configuration 1 file
: Configuration 2 file
: Firmware
config2
firmware
/cf0/anyfilename : A file on CompactFlash media
/um0/anyfilename : A file on USB memory
Filenames that can be used for <dst_filename>:
startup-config
config1
: Startup configuration file
: Configuration 1 file
: Configuration 2 file
: Firmware
config2
firmware
/cf0/anyfilename : A file on CompactFlash media
/um0/anyfilename : A file on USB memory
Execution Example
# copy conifg1 startup-config
#
Configuration Display, Delete and Operation Commands
380
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.19.4.3 remove
Function
Deletes a file.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
remove <filename>
Options
<filename>
Name of file to be deleted.
Use Mode
Operation mode (admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Displays a list of files on external media.
Execution Example
# remove config1_cf
#
5.19.4.4 rename
Function
Renames a file.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
rename <old_filename> <new_filename>
Options
<old_filename>
The name of the file to be renamed.
<new_filename>
The new file name.
Use Mode
Operation mode (admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Renames a file on external media.
Execution Example
# rename config1_cf config1_cf_old
#
Configuration Display, Delete and Operation Commands
381
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.19.4.5 format
Function
Formats.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
format
N/A
Options
Use Mode
Operation mode (admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Formats external media, restoring to factory state.
Execution Example
# format
#
Configuration Display, Delete and Operation Commands
382
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.20 Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and
Status Display and Clear Operation
Commands
This section explains commands related to Ethernet.
5.20.1 Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display
Commands
This section explains the commands related to Ethernet counter, log, statistics, and status display commands.
5.20.1.1 show ether
Function
Display the Ethernet physical port information.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
show ether [line <line>]
Options
N/A
Display all information.
line <line>
• Display the specified port information.
No information is displayed if the specified port number is invalid.
Range
Model
1 to 26
1 to 52
XG0224
XG0448
XG02600
1 to 26,m1
When specifying multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).
When specifying sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Examples: "1-8")
Use Mode
Operation mode (user class/admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Display the specified Ethernet port information.
If the "line" option is specified, the information of the target port is displayed.
Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation
383
Commands
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
Execution Example
B9F# show ether line 1-7
[ETHER PORT-1]
status
: down
---(1)
flow control
type
since
config
linkcontrol
: -
: Normal
---(2)
---(3)
---(4)
---(5)
---(6)
: Jan 1 00:00:02 GMT 1970
: -
: online, recovery(-), downrelay(-)
[ETHER PORT-2]
status
: down
flow control
type
: -
: Normal
since
config
: Jan 1 00:00:02 GMT 1970
: -
linkcontrol
: online, recovery(-), downrelay(-)
[ETHER PORT-3]
status
: down
flow control
type
: -
: Normal
since
config
: Jan 1 00:00:02 GMT 1970
: -
linkcontrol
: online, recovery(-), downrelay(-)
[ETHER PORT-4]
status
: down
flow control
type
: -
: Normal
since
config
: Jan 1 00:00:02 GMT 1970
: -
linkcontrol
: online, recovery(-), downrelay(-)
[ETHER PORT-5]
status
: down
flow control
type
: -
: Normal
since
config
: Jan 1 00:00:02 GMT 1970
: -
linkcontrol
: online, recovery(-), downrelay(-)
[ETHER PORT-6]
status
: down
flow control
type
: -
: Normal
since
config
: Jan 1 00:00:02 GMT 1970
: -
linkcontrol
: online, recovery(-), downrelay(-)
[ETHER PORT-7]
status
: down
flow control
type
: -
: Normal
since
config
: Jan 1 00:00:02 GMT 1970
: -
linkcontrol
: online, recovery(-), downrelay(-)
XG2600#
1) Port state
Displays the speed and state when the connection has been completed.
disable: Indicates that the port is not used based on the definition.
offline : Indicates that the port is in the offline state.
Offline also indicates the following states depending on the cause:
offline (loopdetect): Port offline by loop detection function
offline (storm): Port offline by storm control function
offline (startup): Port offline by startup-time block function
offline (recovery):
Port offline by automatic recovery stop function
offline (downrelay): Port offline by linkdown relay function
Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation
384
Commands
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
offline (backup): Port offline by backup port function
offline (icmpwatch):
Port offline by ether L3 monitoring function
down : Indicates that the port is in the linkdown state.
auto : Indicates that automatic negotiation is enabled.
10M/100M/1000M/10G:
Indicates the baud rate (10Mbps, 100Mbps, 1000Mbps or 10Gbps) of
the currently linked Ethernet port.
Full/Half:
Indicates the full duplex or half duplex mode of the currently linked port.
MDI/MDI-X:
Indicates the type of the currently linked MDI.
2) Flow control state
Displays in the sending or receiving order of the flow control.
on
off
-
: Indicates that the flow control is enabled.
: Indicates that the flow control is disabled.
: Indicates that the port is undefined because it is not in the linkup state.
3) Port type
Indicates the port type.
Normal: Indicates that the port is used as a normal port.
Mirror : Indicates that the port is used as a target port for mirroring.
LinkAggregation:
Indicates that the port is used as a link aggregation port.
This parameter also indicates the number of the link aggregation group
that the port belongs to.
"*LinkAggregation" is displayed when the link aggregation port is not
linked up as a multiplexed link in the linkup state.
Backup:
Indicates that the port is used as a backup port.
This parameter also indicates the number of the backup group that the
port belongs to as well as the master or backup type.
"Standby" is displayed to a standby port.
Backup LA:
Indicates that the port is used as a backup link aggregation port.
This parameter also indicates the number of the link aggregation group
that the port belongs to.
It further indicates the number of the backup group that the port belongs
to as well as the master or backup type.
"Standby" is displayed to a standby port.
"*standby" is displayed when the port is not established (not switched)
as a link aggregation standby port in the linkup state.
"*LA" is displayed when the link aggregation port is not linked up as a
multiplexed link in the linkup state.
–
: Indicate indetermination by unused port or definition contradiction.
4) State transition time
Displays the time when the port has changed to the current state.
Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation
Commands
385
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5) Configuration
mode (setting value):
mdi (setting value):
Indicates the setting value of "ether mdi" as mdi (auto).
-
: For the server port "-" will be displayed because it only supports 1000M
fixed operation.
6) Link control information
Indicates link control information.
online : Indicates that the port runs in the online state during device startup or
during dynamic definition reflection.
offline : Indicates that the port runs in the offline state during device startup or
during dynamic definition reflection.
recovery (Upper limit: Current value):
Indicates the upper limit of the linkdown count specified in "ether
recovery limit" as well as the current linkdown count.
If the upper limit of the linkdown count is not set, the upper limit and
current value are indicated by hyphens (-) respectively.
downrelay (Link port list):
Displays link port list information when using the linkdown relay
function.
The linkdown relay function, if not used, is indicated by a hyphen (-).
Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation
386
Commands
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.20.1.2 show ether brief
Function
Display the information about Ethernet physical ports briefly.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
show ether brief
Options
N/A
Display all information.
Use Mode
Operation mode (user class/admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Display the Ethernet port information briefly.
Execution Example
# show ether brief
port status
type
media mdi
speed duplex flow
----- -------- ------------------ ------ ----- ------ ------- -----
(1)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
(2)
up
up
up
up
up
up
(3)
normal
normal
linkaggregation1
linkaggregation1
linkaggregation1
linkaggregation1
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
TxRx
Rx
TxRx
TxRx
TxRx
TxRx
-
metal MDIX 1000M full
metal MDI
metal -
metal -
metal -
metal -
1000M full
1000M full
1000M full
1000M full
1000M full
offline normal
up backup1
standby backup1
-
-
-
-
metal MDIX 1000M full
metal MDIX 1000M full
-
-
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
down
down
up
normal
normal
linkaggregation4
linkaggregation4
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Tx
Tx
-
metal MDIX 1000M full
metal MDIX 1000M full
-
-
-
metal MDIX 1000M full
metal MDIX 1000M full
metal MDIX 1000M full
metal MDIX 1000M full
metal -
metal -
metal -
metal -
metal -
metal -
up
disable normal
disable normal
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
down
up
up
up
up
up
up
up
up
up
up
mirror
normal
normal
normal
normal
normal
normal
normal
normal
normal
normal
Rx
Rx
Rx
Rx
Rx
Rx
Rx
Rx
Rx
Rx
1000M full
1000M full
1000M full
1000M full
1000M full
1000M full
#
1) Port number
2) Port state
up
: Indicates that the port is in the linkup state.
: Indicates that the port is in the linkdown state.
down
standby : Indicates that the port is in the standby state. (backup port only)
"*standby" is displayed when the port is not established (not
switched) as a standby port in the linkup state.
offline
: Indicates that the port is in the offline state.
disable : Indicates that the port is not used based on the definition.
3) Port type
normal
mirror
: Indicates that the port is used as a normal port.
: Indicates that the port is used as a target port for mirroring.
Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation
387
Commands
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
linkaggregation:
Indicates that the port is used as a link aggregation port.
This parameter also indicates the number of the link aggregation
group that the port belongs to.
"*linkaggregation" is displayed when the link aggregation port is
not linked up as a multiplexed link in the linkup state.
backup
: Indicates that the port is used as a backup port.
It further indicates the number of the backup group that the port
belongs to.
backup LA : Indicates that the port is used as a backup link aggregation port.
This parameter also indicates the number of the link aggregation
group that the port belongs to.
It further indicates the number of the backup group that the port
belongs to.
"*LA" is displayed when the link aggregation port is not linked up
as a multiplexed link in the linkup state.
4) Media type of the Ethernet port
Indicates that the 10/100/1000BASE-T port or 10/100BASE-TX is used.
-: Indicates that the port is undefined because it is not in the linkup state.
5) MDI state of the Ethernet port
MDI/MDIX:
Indicates the type of the currently linked MDI. (When the media type is metal)
-: Indicates that the port is undefined because it is not in the linkup state.
[Note]
For the server port, even it is in the linkup state the state stays in
"-".
6) Link speed of the Ethernet port
10M/100M/1000M/10G:
Indicates the baud rate (10Mbps, 100Mbps, 1000Mbps or 10Gbps) of the
currently linked Ethernet port.
-: Indicates that the port is undefined because it is not in the linkup state.
7) Duplex state of the Ethernet port
full/half:
Indicates the full duplex or half duplex mode of the currently linked port.
-: Indicates that the port is undefined because it is not in the linkup state, or that
the port is a Fiber port.
8) Flow control state of the Ethernet port
Tx: Indicates that the flow control sending function is enabled.
Rx: Indicates that the flow control receiving function is enabled.
-: Indicates that the port is undefined because it is not in the linkup state, and
that the flow control function is disabled.
Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation
388
Commands
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.20.1.3 show ether statistics
Function
Display the statistics of Ethernet physical ports.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
show ether statistics [line <line>] [detail]
Options
N/A
Display all the statistics.
line <line>
• Display the statistics of the specified port.
No statistics are displayed if the specified port number is invalid.
The management port is specified by "m1".
The port for an internal connection that ties each switch device is specified by "C1".
Range
Model
1 to 26
XG0224
XG0448
XG02600
1 to 52, c1 to c4
1 to 26,m1
When specifying multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).
The specification of the port simultaneously other than m1 and m1 are also possible.
The specification of the port simultaneously other than c1 to c4 and c1 to c4 are also
possible.
When specifying sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")
detail
Display the statistics of the Ethernet ports together with related detailed information.
Even if detail is specified, the content of the display is not added for the m1 port.
Use Mode
Operation mode (user class/admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Display the statistics of the Ethernet physical port.
Specifying only the "line" option will display the statistics of the target port.
The relation between the port number and the switch device of XG0448 is shown.
Range
1 to 24,51,52
25 to 50
switch device
switch device 0
switch device 1
Connected port between switch devices is called an "internal connection port".
The relation between the internal connected port number and the switch device is shown.
Range
switch device
c1,c2
c3,c4
switch device 0
switch device 1
C1 is connected with C3. C2 is connected with c4.
The statistics are cleared if this device is restarted.
Caution
Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation
Commands
389
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
Execution Example
Example of executing XG0224
#show ether statistics line 1
[ETHER PORT-1 STATISTICS]
[Input Statistics]
Octets
bits/sec
Frames
frames/sec
Unicast
frames/sec
Multicast
frames/sec
Broadcast
frames/sec
Pause frames
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
---(1)
---(2)
---(3)
---(4)
---(5)
---(6)
---(7)
---(8)
---(9)
---(10)
---(11)
Discards
All DiscardsPkts
Errors
: 0
---(12)
Undersize
FCSErrors
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
---(13)
---(14)
---(15)
---(16)
---(17)
---(18)
---(19)
AlignmentErrors
FragmentErrors
Jabbers
SymbolErrors
UnknownOpcodes
[Output Statistics]
Octets
bits/sec
Frames
frames/sec
Unicast
Multicast
frames/sec
Broadcast
frames/sec
Pause frames
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
---(20)
---(21)
---(22)
---(23)
---(24)
---(25)
---(26)
---(27)
---(28)
---(29)
Discards
DelayExceededDiscards
Queue Full Discards
Errors
: 0
: 0
---(30)
---(31)
FCSErrors
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
---(32)
---(33)
---(34)
---(35)
---(36)
FragmentErrors
CarrierSenseErrors
ExcessiveCollisions
LateCollisions
SingleCollisionFrames
MultipleCollisionFrames
DeferredTransmissions
: 0
: 0
: 0
---(37)
---(38)
---(39)
Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation
Commands
390
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
Execution example when detail of XG0224 (Giga port) is specified
# show ether statistics line 1 detail
[ETHER PORT-1 STATISTICS]
[Input Statistics]
Octets
bits/sec
Frames
frames/sec
Unicast
frames/sec
Multicast
frames/sec
Broadcast
frames/sec
Pause frames
Mac Control frames
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
---(42)
Discards
All DiscardsPkts
Resource Full
Discards by Filter
Port In Discards
Policy Discards
VLAN dropped
Input Discards
Errors
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
---(43)
---(44)
---(45)
---(46)
---(47)
---(48)
Undersize
FCSErrors
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
AlignmentErrors
FragmentErrors
Jabbers
SymbolErrors
UnknownOpcodes
[Output Statistics]
Octets
bits/sec
Frames
frames/sec
Unicast
Multicast
frames/sec
Broadcast
frames/sec
Pause frames
Mac Control frames
Jabbers
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
---(49)
---(50)
Discards
DelayExceededDiscards
Internal Discards
Queue Full Discards
Errors
: 0
: 0
: 0
---(51)
FCSErrors
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
FragmentErrors
CarrierSenseErrors
ExcessiveCollisions
LateCollisions
InternalCellErrors
SingleCollisionFrames
MultipleCollisionFrames
DeferredTransmissions
: 0
: 0
: 0
(To be continued)
Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation
Commands
391
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
(Continued)
[Input Detail Statistics]
Frame size
64
frames
: 0
frames/sec
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
---(52)
---(53)
---(54)
---(55)
---(56)
---(57)
---(58)
---(59)
---(60)
65-127
128-255
256-511
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
512-1023
1024-1518
1519-2047
2048-4095
4096-9216
[Output Detail Statistics]
Frame size
64
frames
frames/sec
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
---(61)
---(62)
---(63)
---(64)
---(65)
---(66)
---(67)
---(68)
---(69)
65-127
128-255
256-511
512-1023
1024-1518
1519-2047
2048-4095
4096-9216
Execution example when detail of XG0224 (10Giga port) is specified
# show ether statistics line 26 detail
[ETHER PORT-26 STATISTICS]
[Input Statistics]
Octets
bits/sec
Frames
frames/sec
Unicast
frames/sec
Multicast
frames/sec
Broadcast
frames/sec
Pause frames
Mac Control frames
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
Discards
All DiscardsPkts
Resource Full
Discards by Filter
Port In Discards
Policy Discards
VLAN dropped
Input Discards
Errors
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
Undersize
FCSErrors
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
AlignmentErrors
FragmentErrors
Jabbers
SymbolErrors
UnknownOpcodes
(To be continued)
Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation
Commands
392
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
(Continued)
[Output Statistics]
Octets
bits/sec
Frames
frames/sec
Unicast
Multicast
frames/sec
Broadcast
frames/sec
Pause frames
Mac Control frames
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
Discards
DelayExceededDiscards
Internal Discards
Queue Full Discards
Errors
: 0
: 0
: 0
FCSErrors
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
FragmentErrors
CarrierSenseErrors
ExcessiveCollisions
LateCollisions
InternalCellErrors
SingleCollisionFrames
: 0
MultipleCollisionFrames : 0
DeferredTransmissions
: 0
[Input Detail Statistics]
Frame size
64
frames
frames/sec
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
65-127
128-255
256-511
512-1023
1024-1518
1519-2047
2048-4095
4096-9216
9217-16383
[Output Detail Statistics]
Frame size
64
---(70)
frames
frames/sec
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
65-127
128-255
256-511
512-1023
1024-1518
1519-2047
2048-4095
4096-9216
9217-16383
---(71)
Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation
Commands
393
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
Execution Example (XG0448)
XG0448(config)# show ether statistics line 1
[ETHER PORT-1 STATISTICS]
[Input Statistics]
Octets
bits/sec
Frames
frames/sec
Unicast
frames/sec
Multicast
frames/sec
Broadcast
frames/sec
Pause frames
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
---(1)
---(2)
---(3)
---(4)
---(5)
---(6)
---(7)
---(8)
---(9)
---(10)
---(11)
Discards
All DiscardsPkts
Errors
: 0
---(12)
Undersize
FCSErrors
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
---(13)
---(14)
---(15)
---(16)
---(17)
---(18)
---(19)
AlignmentErrors
FragmentErrors
Jabbers
SymbolErrors
UnknownOpcodes
[Output Statistics]
Octets
bits/sec
Frames
frames/sec
Unicast
Multicast
frames/sec
Broadcast
frames/sec
Pause frames
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
---(20)
---(21)
---(22)
---(23)
---(24)
---(25)
---(26)
---(27)
---(28)
---(29)
Discards
DelayExceededDiscards
Queue Full Discards
Errors
: 0
: 0
---(30)
---(31)
FCSErrors
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
---(32)
---(33)
---(34)
---(35)
---(36)
FragmentErrors
CarrierSenseErrors
ExcessiveCollisions
LateCollisions
SingleCollisionFrames
MultipleCollisionFrames
DeferredTransmissions
: 0
: 0
: 0
---(37)
---(38)
---(39)
Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation
Commands
394
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
Example of executing internal connection port of XG0448
XG0448(config)# show ether statistics line 1c1
[INTERNAL CONNECTION PORT-1 STATISTICS]
Packets from
Connected to
: line 1 to 24
: line 51 to 52
: C3
---(40)
---(41)
[Input Statistics]
Octets
bits/sec
Frames
frames/sec
Unicast
frames/sec
Multicast
frames/sec
Broadcast
frames/sec
Pause frames
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
Discards
All DiscardsPkts
Errors
: 0
Undersize
FCSErrors
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
AlignmentErrors
FragmentErrors
Jabbers
SymbolErrors
UnknownOpcodes
[Output Statistics]
Octets
bits/sec
Frames
frames/sec
Unicast
Multicast
frames/sec
Broadcast
frames/sec
Pause frames
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
Discards
DelayExceededDiscards
Queue Full Discards
Errors
: 0
: 0
FCSErrors
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
FragmentErrors
CarrierSenseErrors
ExcessiveCollisions
LateCollisions
SingleCollisionFrames
MultipleCollisionFrames
DeferredTransmissions
: 0
: 0
: 0
Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation
Commands
395
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
Execution example when detail of XG0448 (Giga port) is specified
# show ether statistics line 1 detail
[ETHER PORT-1 STATISTICS]
[Input Statistics]
Octets
bits/sec
Frames
frames/sec
Unicast
frames/sec
Multicast
frames/sec
Broadcast
frames/sec
Pause frames
Mac Control frames
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
Discards
All DiscardsPkts
Resource Full
Discards by Filter
Policy Discards
Port In Discards
Input Discards
Errors
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
Undersize
FCSErrors
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
AlignmentErrors
FragmentErrors
Jabbers
SymbolErrors
UnknownOpcodes
[Output Statistics]
Octets
bits/sec
Frames
frames/sec
Unicast
Multicast
frames/sec
Broadcast
frames/sec
Pause frames
Mac Control frames
Jabbers
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
Discards
DelayExceededDiscards
Internal Discards
Queue Full Discards
Errors
: 0
: 0
: 0
FCSErrors
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
FragmentErrors
CarrierSenseErrors
ExcessiveCollisions
LateCollisions
InternalCellErrors
SingleCollisionFrames
MultipleCollisionFrames
DeferredTransmissions
: 0
: 0
: 0
(To be continued)
Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation
Commands
396
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
(Continued)
[Input Detail Statistics]
Frame size
64
frames
: 0
frames/sec
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
65-127
128-255
256-511
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
512-1023
1024-1518
1519-2047
2048-4095
4096-9216
[Output Detail Statistics]
Frame size
64
frames
frames/sec
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
65-127
128-255
256-511
512-1023
1024-1518
1519-2047
2048-4095
4096-9216
Execution example when detail of XG0448 (10Giga port) is specified
# show ether statistics line 50 detail
[ETHER PORT-50 STATISTICS]
[Input Statistics]
Octets
bits/sec
Frames
frames/sec
Unicast
frames/sec
Multicast
frames/sec
Broadcast
frames/sec
Pause frames
Mac Control frames
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
Discards
All DiscardsPkts
Resource Full
Discards by Filter
Policy Discards
Port In Discards
Input Discards
Errors
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
Undersize
FCSErrors
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
AlignmentErrors
FragmentErrors
Jabbers
SymbolErrors
UnknownOpcodes
(To be continued)
Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation
Commands
397
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
(Continued)
[Output Statistics]
Octets
bits/sec
Frames
frames/sec
Unicast
Multicast
frames/sec
Broadcast
frames/sec
Pause frames
Mac Control frames
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
Discards
DelayExceededDiscards
Internal Discards
Queue Full Discards
Errors
: 0
: 0
: 0
FCSErrors
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
FragmentErrors
CarrierSenseErrors
ExcessiveCollisions
LateCollisions
InternalCellErrors
SingleCollisionFrames
MultipleCollisionFrames
DeferredTransmissions
: 0
: 0
: 0
[Input Detail Statistics]
Frame size
64
frames
: 0
frames/sec
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
65-127
128-255
256-511
512-1023
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
1024-1518
1519-2047
2048-4095
4096-9216
9217-16383
[Output Detail Statistics]
Frame size
64
frames
frames/sec
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
65-127
128-255
256-511
512-1023
1024-1518
1519-2047
2048-4095
4096-9216
9217-16383
1) Number of octets of received data
2) Number of bits received per second (Bits/sec.)
3) Total number of received frames
4) Number of frames received per second (Frames/sec.)
5) Number of received unicast frames
6) Number of unicast frames received per second (Frames/sec.)
7) Number of received multicast frames
8) Number of multicast frames received per second (Frames/sec.)
9) Number of received broadcast frames
Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation
Commands
398
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
10) Number of broadcast frames received per second (Frames/sec.)
11) Number of received PAUSE frames (MAC control frames)
12) Number of discarded frames out of all the received frames
13) Number of received shortsized frames (less than 64 bytes)
14) Number of frames in which FCS error is detected in 64 data size bytes or more
15) Number of received frames in which an alignment error was detected
16) Number of shortsized frames (less than 64 bytes) in which an FCS or alignment
error was detected
17) Number of oversized frames (1519 bytes or more without tag, 1523 bytes or more
with tag) in which an FCS or FCS alignment error was detected
18) Number of detected symbol errors
19) Number of unsupported MAC control frames that were received
20) Total number of sent octets
21) Number of bits sent per second (Bits/sec.)
22) Number of sent frames
23) Number of frames sent per second (Frames/sec.)
24) Number of sent unicast frames
25) Number of sent multicast frames
26) Number of multicast frames sent per second (Frames/sec.)
27) Number of sent broadcast frames
28) Number of broadcast frames sent per second (Frames/sec.)
29) Number of sent pause frames (MAC control frames)
30) Number of frames that were discarded due to an excessive delay
31) Number of frames that entered full state of cue and were abandoned
32) Number of FCS error frame transmissions of 64 data size bytes or more
33) Number of sent frames in which an FCS or FCS alignment error was detected in
the shortsized frames
34) Career undetection error generation frequency
35) Number of frames in which transmission fails by frequent occurrence of collision
36) Number of occurrences of late collisions
37) Number of frames that could be sent after a single collision occurred
38) Number of frames that could be sent after multiple collisions occurred
39) Number of frames that got into a transmission deferment because the
transmissionpath was busy
Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation
399
Commands
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
The following information is displayed only for an internal connected port of XG0448
40) External port in which it belongs to internal, connected port
41) Opposed internal, connected port.
The counter of an internal, connected port becomes a frame that has been
forwarded from the Giga/10Giga port with the value to which the header for an
internal control in 12 bytes is added.
42) Number of received MAC control frames
43) Number of reception frames abandoned by resource shortage or Back Pressure
44) Number of reception frames abandoned by filtering
45) Number of reception frames abandoned by be not of STP in state of forwarding.
The number of reception frames abandoned because it doesn't belong to set VLAN
is contained for XG0448.
46) Number of reception frames annulled by reception annulment setting
47) Number of reception frames abandoned because it doesn't belong to set VLAN.
48) Number of reception frames abandoned by other reasons
- When the MAC header or the IP header is the following values
All ..TTL.. ..Destination IP address 0, Source.. 0 etc. abnormal checksum and
abnormal length
- For a not corresponding frame to the entry of the IP multicast table
- For the internal control frame not forwarded to an external port in case of an internal,
connected port
- When it is annulled without being output among frames that the flooding is done
without being recognized an abnormal frame in the input port
49) Number of sent MAC control frames
50) Number of frames in which FCS error or FCS alignment error is detected with over
size (1519 bytes or more) frame
51) Number of frames abandoned in chip
52) Number of frames (with 64 byte data size) received and number of frame (with
64byte data size) received per second (Frames/sec.)
53) Number of frames (with data size of 65 to 127 bytes) sent and number of frame
(with data size of 65 to 127 bytes) sent per second (Frames/sec.)
54) Number of frames (with data size of 128 to 255 bytes) received and number of
frame (with data size of 128 to 255 bytes) received per second (Frames/sec.)
55) Number of frames (with data size of 256 to 511 bytes) received and number of
frame (with data size of 256 to 511 bytes) received per second (Frames/sec.)
56) Number of frames (with data size of 512 to 1023 bytes) received and number of
frame (with data size of 512 to 1023 bytes) received per second (Frames/sec.)
57) Number of frames (with data size of 1024 to 1518 bytes) received and number of
frame (with data size of 1024 to 1518bytes) received per second (Frames/sec.)
58) Number of frames (with data size of 1519 to 2047 bytes) received and number of
frame (with data size of 1519 to 1522bytes) received per second (Frames/sec.)
59) Number of frames (with data size of 2048 to 4095 bytes) received and number of
frame (with data size of 2048 to 4095 bytes) received per second (Frames/sec.)
Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation
400
Commands
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
60) Number of frames (with data size of 4096 to 9216 bytes) received and number of
frame (with data size of 4096 to 9216 bytes) received per second (Frames/sec.)
61) Number of frames (with 64 byte data size) sent and number of frame (with 64 byte
data size) sent per second (Frames/sec.)
62) Number of frames (with data size of 65 to 127 bytes) sent and number of frame
(with data size of 65 to 127 bytes) sent per second (Frames/sec.)
63) Number of frames (with data size of 128 to 255 bytes) sent and number of frame
(with data size of 128 to 255 bytes) sent per second (Frames/sec.)
64) Number of frames (with data size of 256 to 511 bytes) sent and number of frame
(with data size of 256 to 511 bytes) sent per second (Frames/sec.)
65) Number of frames (with data size of 512 to 1023 bytes) sent and number of frame
(with data size of 512 to 1023 bytes) sent per second (Frames/sec.)
66) Number of frames (with data size of 1024 to 1518 bytes) sent and number of frame
(with data size of 1024 to 1518bytes) sent per second (Frames/sec.)
67) Number of frames (with data size of 1519 to 2047 bytes) sent and number of frame
(with data size of 1519 to 1522bytes) sent per second (Frames/sec.)
68) Number of frames (with data size of 2048 to 4095 bytes) sent and number of frame
(with data size of 2048 to 4095 bytes) sent per second (Frames/sec.)
69) Number of frames (with data size of 4096 to 9216 bytes) sent and number of frame
(with data size of 4096 to 9216 bytes) sent per second (Frames/sec.)
70) Number of frame receptions of 9217-16383 data size bytes. And, it is numerical of
the frame reception of 9217-16383 size of data a second bytes (frames/sec).
However, the frame forwarding more than 9217 byte length is a unsupport.
71)
Number of frame transmissions of 9217-16383 data size bytes. And, Number of
frame transmissions of 9217-16383 size of data a second bytes (frames/sec).
However, the frame forwarding more than 9217 byte length is a unsupport.
Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation
401
Commands
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
Example of executing 10Giga port of XG2600
# show ether statistics line 1
[ETHER PORT-1 STATISTICS]
[Input Statistics]
Octets
bits/sec
Frames
frames/sec
Unicast
frames/sec
Multicast
frames/sec
Broadcast
frames/sec
Pause frames
: 1493377360
: 0
: 6706618
: 0
: 6704279
: 0
: 15
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
---(1)
---(2)
---(3)
---(4)
---(5)
---(6)
---(7)
---(8)
---(9)
---(10)
---(11)
Discards
All DiscardsPkts
Errors
: 94732
---(12)
Undersize
FCSErrors
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 2324
: 0
---(13)
---(14)
---(15)
---(16)
---(17)
---(18)
---(19)
AlignmentErrors
FragmentErrors
Jabbers
SymbolErrors
UnknownOpcodes
: 0
: 0
[Output Statistics]
Octets
bits/sec
Frames
frames/sec
Unicast
Multicast
frames/sec
Broadcast
frames/sec
Pause frames
: 804468332
: 0
: 5109155
: 0
: 5109152
: 0
: 0
: 3
: 0
: 0
---(20)
---(21)
---(22)
---(23)
---(24)
---(25)
---(26)
---(27)
---(28)
---(29)
Discards
DelayExceededDiscards
Errors
: 0
---(30)
Undersize
FCSErrors
FragmentErrors
: 0
: 0
: 0
---(31)
---(32)
---(33)
Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation
Commands
402
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
Example of executing m1 port of XG2600 (management port)
# show ether statistics line m1
[ETHER PORT-1 STATISTICS]
[Input Statistics]
Octets
: 148231
bits/sec
Frames
frames/sec
Unicast
frames/sec
Multicast
frames/sec
: 511
: 897
: 0
: 45
: 0
: 852
: 0
---(34)
---(35)
Discards
DiscardsPkts
Errors
: 0
---(36)
Oversize
FCSErrors
AlignmentErrors
: 0
: 0
: 0
[Output Statistics]
Octets
bits/sec
: 4317
: 0
Frames
frames/sec
Unicast
Multicast
frames/sec
: 32
: 0
: 30
: 2
---(37)
---(38)
: 0
Discards
DiscardsPkts
: 0
---(39)
Errors
CarrierSenseErrors
ExcessiveCollisions
LateCollisions
SingleCollisionFrames
MultipleCollisionFrames : 0
DeferredTransmissions : 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
---(40)
---(41)
---(42)
---(43)
---(44)
---(45)
1) Number of octets of received data
2) Number of bits received per second (Bits/sec.)
3) Total number of received frames
4) Number of frames received per second (Frames/sec.)
5) Number of received unicast frames
It doesn't contain the error frame.
6) Number of unicast frames received per second (Frames/sec.)
It doesn't contain the error frame.
7) Number of received multicast frames
It doesn't contain the error frame.
8) Number of multicast frames received per second (Frames/sec.)
It doesn't contain the error frame.
9) Number of received broadcast frames
It doesn't contain the error frame.
10) Number of broadcast frames received per second (Frames/sec.)
It doesn't contain the error frame.
Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation
Commands
403
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
11) Number of received PAUSE frames (MAC control frames)
12) Number of discarded frames out of all the received frames
13) Number of received shortsized frames (less than 64 bytes)
14) Number of frames in which FCS error is detected in 64 data size bytes or more
15) Number of received frames in which an alignment error was detected
16) Number of shortsized frames (less than 64 bytes) in which an FCS or alignment
error was detected
17) Number of oversized frames (1519 bytes or more without tag, 1523 bytes or more
with tag) in which an FCS or FCS alignment error was detected
18) Number of detected symbol errors
19) Number of unsupported MAC control frames that were received
20) Total number of sent octets
21) Number of bits sent per second (Bits/sec.)
The number of transmission bits of error frames is not counted at the "cut-
through mode".
22) Number of sent frames
The number of frames in which the transmission discontinuance is done
because the error detection was done in the reception port after it begins to
transmit is contained at the "cut-through" mode.
It doesn't contain the error frame.
23) Number of frames sent per second (Frames/sec.)
The number of frames in which the transmission discontinuance is done
because the error detection was done in the reception port after it begins to
transmit is contained at the "cut-through" mode.
It doesn't contain the error frame.
24) Number of sent unicast frames
It doesn't contain the error frame.
25) Number of sent multicast frames
It doesn't contain the error frame.
26) Number of multicast frames sent per second (Frames/sec.)
It doesn't contain the error frame.
27) Number of sent broadcast frames
It doesn't contain the error frame.
28) Number of broadcast frames sent per second (Frames/sec.)
It doesn't contain the error frame.
29) Number of sent pause frames (MAC control frames)
30) Number of frames that were discarded due to an excessive delay
31) Number of short size (less than 64 bytes) frame transmissions
Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation
404
Commands
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
32) Number of FCS error frame transmissions of 64 data size bytes or more
The number of frames in which the error detection is done to the "cut-through"
mode in the reception port after it begins to transmit and the transmission
discontinuance is done is contained.
33) Number of sent frames in which an FCS or FCS alignment error was detected in
the shortsized frames (less than 64 bytes)
34) Received multicast and number of broadcast frames
35) Received multicast and number of broadcast frames a second (frames/sec)
36) Number of discarded frames out of all the received frames
37) Number of sent multicast frames or broadcast frames
38) Transmitted multicast and number of broadcast frames a second (frames/sec)
39) Number of frames abandoned when transmitting
40) Career undetection error generation frequency
41) Number of frames in which transmission fails by frequent occurrence of collision
42) Number of occurrences of late collisions
43) Number of frames that could be sent after a single collision occurred
44) Number of frames that could be sent after multiple collisions occurred
45) Number of frames that got into a transmission deferment because the transmission
path was busy
Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation
405
Commands
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
Execution example when detail of XG2600 (10Giga port) is specified
# show ether statistics line 1 detail
[ETHER PORT-1 STATISTICS]
[Input Statistics]
Octets
bits/sec
: 1493377360
: 0
Frames
frames/sec
Unicast
frames/sec
Multicast
frames/sec
Broadcast
frames/sec
Pause frames
Mac Control frames
: 6706618
: 0
: 6704279
: 0
: 15
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
---(46)
Discards
All DiscardsPkts
Errors
: 94732
Undersize
: 0
FCSErrors
: 0
AlignmentErrors
FragmentErrors
Jabbers
: 0
: 2324
: 0
SymbolErrors
UnknownOpcodes
: 0
: 0
[Output Statistics]
Octets
bits/sec
: 804468332
: 0
Frames
frames/sec
Unicast
: 5109155
: 0
: 5109152
: 0
Multicast
frames/sec
Broadcast
: 0
: 3
frames/sec
Pause frames
Mac Control frames
: 0
: 0
: 0
---(47)
---(48)
Discards
DiscardsPkts
DelayExceededDiscards
Errors
: 0
: 0
Undersize
FCSErrors
FragmentErrors
: 0
: 0
: 0
[Detail Statistics]
Frame size
64
frames
: 0
frames/sec
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
---(49)
65-127
128-255
256-511
512-1023
1024-1518
1519-16128
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
---(50)
---(51)
---(52)
---(53)
---(54)
---(55)
The following information is also displayed when "detail" is specified.
46) Number of received MAC control frames
47) Number of sent MAC control frames
48) Number of frames abandoned when transmitting
49) Number of frame sending and receiving of 64 data size bytes.
And, it is numerical of the frame sending and receiving of (with data size of 65 to
127 bytes) size of data a second bytes. (frames/sec)
Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation
406
Commands
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
50) Number of frame sending and receiving of (with data size of 65 to 127 bytes) data
size bytes. And, it is numerical of the frame sending and receiving of (with data
size of 65 to 127 bytes) size of data a second bytes. (frames/sec)
51)
Number of frame sending and receiving of (with data size of 128 to 255 bytes)
data size bytes. And, it is numerical of the frame sending and receiving of (with
data size of 128 to 255 bytes) size of data a second bytes. (frames/sec)
52) Number of frame sending and receiving of (with data size of 256 to 511 bytes) data
size bytes. And, it is numerical of the frame sending and receiving of (with data
size of 256 to 511 bytes) size of data a second bytes. (frames/sec)
53) Number of frame sending and receiving of (with data size of 512 to 1023 bytes)
data size bytes. And, it is numerical of the frame sending and receiving of (with
data size of 512 to 1023 bytes) size of data a second bytes. (frames/sec)
54)
Number of frame sending and receiving of (with data size of 1024 to 1518 bytes)
data size bytes. And, it is numerical of the frame sending and receiving of (with
data size of 1024 to 1518 bytes) size of data a second bytes. (frames/sec)
55)
Number of frame sending and receiving of (with data size of 1519 to 16128 bytes)
data size bytes. And, it is numerical of the frame sending and receiving of (with
data size of 1519 to 16128 bytes) size of data a second bytes. (frames/sec)
Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation
407
Commands
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.20.1.4 show ether media-info
Function
Display Media information of Ethernet physical port
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
show ether media-info [line <line>]
Options
N/A
Display the information of all SFP+,CX4 ports and SFP ports
line <line>
Display the information of the specified port.
Range
Model
21 to 26
45 to 52
1 to 26
XG0224
XG0448
XG2600
When specifying multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).
When specifying sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Examples: "1-8")
Use Mode
Operation mode (user class/admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Display Media information
Execution Example
Execution Example (XG0224)
# show ether media-info
Port media type Vendor PN
---- ---------- ----------------
(1) (2)
(3)
21
22
23
24
25
26
SFP(SX)
HFBR-5710L
SFP(ZX)
SFP(LX)
SFP(FX)
SFP+(LR)
SFP+(SR)
SCP6P94-F7-BMH
SCP6P44-F7-BMH
HFBR-57E0P
FTLX1471D3BCL
TRS2000EN-S002
Execution Example (XG0448)
# show ether media-info
Port media type Vendor PN
---- ---------- ----------------
(1) (2)
(3)
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
NONE
NONE
SFP(LX)
NONE
SFP+(LR)
SFP+(SR)
SFP+(SR)
NONE
SCP6P44-F7-BMH
FTLX1471D3BCL
TRS2000EN-S002
TRS2000EN-S002
Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation
Commands
408
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
Execution Example (XG2600)
# show ether media-info
Port media type Vendor PN
---- ---------- ----------------
(1) (2)
(3)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
SFP+(SR)
FTLX8571D3BCL
FTLX8571D3BCL
FTLX8571D3BCL
FTLX8571D3BCL
FTLX8571D3BCL
FTLX8571D3BCL
FTLX8571D3BCL
FTLX8571D3BCL
FTLX8571D3BCL
FTLX8571D3BCL
FTLX8571D3BCL
FTLX8571D3BCL
FTLX8571D3BCL
FTLX8571D3BCL
FTLX8571D3BCL
FTLX8571D3BCL
FTLX8571D3BCL
FTLX8571D3BCL
FTLX8571D3BCL
FTLX8571D3BCL
FTLX8571D3BCL
FTLX8571D3BCL
FTLX8571D3BCL
FTLX8571D3BCL
SFP+(SR)
SFP+(SR)
SFP+(SR)
SFP+(SR)
SFP+(SR)
SFP+(SR)
SFP+(SR)
SFP+(SR)
SFP+(SR)
SFP+(SR)
SFP+(SR)
SFP+(SR)
SFP+(SR)
SFP+(SR)
SFP+(SR)
SFP+(SR)
SFP+(SR)
SFP+(SR)
SFP+(SR)
SFP+(SR)
SFP+(SR)
SFP+(SR)
SFP+(SR)
NONE
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
NONE
1) Port number
2) Media information
The type of the installed module is displayed
SFP(SX)
SFP(LX)
SFP(FX)
SFP (1000BASE-SX) module is installed
SFP (1000BASE-LX) module is installed
SFP (1000BASE-FX) module is installed
SFP(BX-D) SFP (1000BASE-BX-D) module is installed
SFP(BX-U) SFP (1000BASE-BX-U) module is installed
SFP(ZX)
CX4
SFP (1000BASE-ZX) module is installed
The CX4 expansion card is mounted. (Only for XG0448/XG0224. )
SFP+(10GBASE-SR) module is installed
SFP+(SR)
SFP+(LR)
SFP+(10GBASE-LR) module is installed
UNKNOWN Type of the installed module is unknown
NONE SFP+ module is not installed or the module of the unsupport is
mounted.
3) Vendor Part Number
Vendor part number of the installed module is displayed.
The information is displayed even if the type of the module is unknown.
Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation
409
Commands
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.20.1.5 show ether utilization
Function
Display the usage ratio (or utilization) information of Ethernet physical ports.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
show ether utilization
Options
N/A
Display the utilization information of all Ethernet ports.
Use Mode
Operation mode (user class/admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Caution
Display the usage ratio of the Ethernet physical port.
The usage ratio is cleared if this device is restarted.
Execution Example
Execution Example (XG0224)
# show ether utilization
Port
------ ---------- -------
(1) (2) (3)
TX/sec
Util
RX/sec
---------- -------
(4) (5)
Util
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
#
Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation
Commands
410
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
Execution Example (XG0448)
# show ether utilization
Port
------ ---------- -------
(1) (2) (3)
TX/sec
Util
RX/sec
---------- -------
(4)
Util
(5)
1
2
3
4
5
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
6
7
:
:
48
49
50
51
52
C1
C2
C3
C4
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Execution Example (XG2600)
# show ether utilization
Port
------ ---------- -------
(1) (2) (3)
TX/sec
Util
RX/sec
---------- -------
(4) (5)
Util
1
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
0
0
0
0
4
0
0
0
0
5
6
710227
50
0
0
0
0
0
0
7
0
0
0
0
8
0
0
0
0
9
0
0
0
0
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
M1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
100
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
100
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1420457
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1420454
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
#
1) Port
: Ethernet physical port number
The management port is displayed with M1. (Only XG2600)
An "internal connected port" is displayed with C1-C4. (Only XG0448)
2) TX/sec : Number of frames that were sent in 1 second (pps)
3) Util
4) RX/sec : Number of frames that were received in 1 second (pps)
5) Util : Receiving usage ratio (%) of physical port
: Sending usage ratio (%) of physical port
Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation
Commands
411
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.20.1.6 show ether queue
Function
Display the number of packets placed in the COS queue of Ethernet physical ports.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
show ether queue [line <line>]
Options
N/A
Display the number of packets placed in the COS queue of all ports.
line <line>
Display the number of packets placed in the COS queue of the specified port.
No information is displayed if the specified port number is invalid.
Range
Model
1 to 26
XG0224
XG0448
XG2600
1 to 52, c1 to c4
1 to 26
When specifying multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).
When specifying sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")
Use Mode
Explanation
Caution
Operation mode (user class/admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Display the number of packets remaining in the COS queue of Ethernet physical ports.
If the "line" option is specified, the information of the target port is displayed.
The number of packets remaining in the COS queue is cleared if this device is restarted.
Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation
412
Commands
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
Execution Example
Execution Example (XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600)
# show ether queue
[ETHER PORT-1]
CoS Queue 0
CoS Queue 1
CoS Queue 2
CoS Queue 3
CoS Queue 4
CoS Queue 5
CoS Queue 6
CoS Queue 7
: 0
: 0
: 238
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
---(1)
[ETHER PORT-2]
CoS Queue 0
CoS Queue 1
CoS Queue 2
CoS Queue 3
CoS Queue 4
CoS Queue 5
CoS Queue 6
CoS Queue 7
#
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
: 0
1) CoS Queue 0
Number of packets remaining in the hardware COS queue 0
Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation
Commands
413
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.20.2 Ethernet Counter, Log, and Statistics Clear Commands
This section explains the commands related to Ethernet counter, log, statistics,
and statistics clear commands.
5.20.2.1 clear ether statistics
Function
Clear the statistics of Ethernet physical ports.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
clear ether statistics [line <line>]
Options
N/A
Clear all the statistics.
line <line>
Clear the statistics of the specified port.
No statistics are not cleared if the specified port number is invalid.
The management port is specified by "m1".
Range
Model
1 to 26
XG0224
XG0448
XG02600
1 to 52, c1 to c4
1 to 26, m1
When specifying multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).
The specification of the port simultaneously other than m1 and m1 are also possible.
The specification of the port simultaneously other than c1-4 and c1-4 are also possible.
When specifying sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")
Use Mode
Explanation
Caution
Operation mode (admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Clear the statistics of the Ethernet physical port.
Specifying only the "line" option will clear the statistics of the target port.
XG0224 / XG0448
It might be considered that it restores it from the state of the roughhouse once when
broadcast/multicast roughhouse control information is set, and the statistical information
of "clear ether statistics" pertinent port is cleared with the reception rate exceeds the
threshold.
Execution Example
# clear ether statistics
#
Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation
414
Commands
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.21 USB connection Counter, Log,
Statistics, and Status Display and
Clear Operation Commands
This section explains about USB connection Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation Commands.
5.21.1 USB connection Counter, Log, and Statistics Clear
Commands
This section explains commands related to USB connection Counter, Log, and Statistics Clear Commands.
5.21.1.1 show usb hcd status
Function
Displays USB port blocking status.
Available Model XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
show usb hcd status
N/A
Options
Use Mode
Operation mode (user class/admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Default
Displays blocking status of USB ports.
# show usb hcd status
[USB HCD STATUS]
status
: enable
--- (1)
1) Blocking state
Displays USB port blocking status
disable: blocked
enable: unblocked
USB connection Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear
Operation Commands
415
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.21.1.2 show usb storage status
Function
Displays USB mass storage controller status.
Available Model XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
show usb storage status
N/A
Options
Use Mode
Operation mode (user class /admin class/CE class)
Configuration mode (admin class/CE class)
Explanation
Default
Displays current status for USB mass storage controller.
# show usb storage status
[Thread]
Status
: Active
---(1)
[Device #1]
Status
Speed
Geometry probing
Test unit ready
Inquiry
Mode sense
Read capacity
: Idle
: Full
---(2)
---(3)
---(4)
---(5)
: Success
: Success
: Success
: Success
: Success
Read format capacities : ----
Hold data
: Not exist
---(6)
Error status
Error reason
Error event
Request sense code
[Storage specs]
Vendor
: Get device specs [5/5] (Read format capacities) ---(7)
: Transfer URB failure
: 0x3200000d
: (02, 10, 00)
---(8)
---(9)
---(10)
: FUJITSU
: USB PortableDrive
: 3.96
: 500400
: 695
---(11)
---(12)
---(13)
---(14)
---(15)
---(16)
---(17)
Product
Product Rev.
Total sectors
Cylinders
Heads
: 15
: 48
Sectors per track
[USB specs]
Speed
: Full
: 3
---(18)
---(19)
Max LUN
[USB configuration]
Device address
Interface
Sub class
LUN
: 1
: 0
: 6
: 0
: 0x82
: 0x02
---(20)
---(21)
---(22)
---(23)
---(24)
---(25)
BulkInEP
BulkOutEP
1) USB mass storage controller thread status
Status is displayed via the following messages:
Uninit: not initialized
Waiting for USBD active
Waiting for entry class completed
Active
The information below is displayed only when a connected USB device has
been detected.
USB connection Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear
416
Operation Commands
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
2) USB device controller status
Status is displayed via the following messages:
Uninit: not initialized
Initializing [1/2] (Set configuration)
Initializing [2/2] (Get max lun)
Get device specs [1/5] (Test unit ready)
Get device specs [2/5] (Inquiry)
Get device specs [3/5] (Mode sense)
Get device specs [4/5] (Read capacity)
Get device specs [5/5] (Read format capacities)
Idle: waiting for transfer request
Transferring
Waiting for unplugging: failure detection
Unplugging
3) Speed
Status is displayed via the following messages.
Warning : The speed displayed is the transfer rate of the USB device, and is not
the transfer throughput.
High
Full
: high speed mode (480Mbps)
: full speed mode (12Mbps)
: low speed mode (1.5Mbps)
Low
4) Geometry probing status
Geometry refers to the total number of sectors, cylinders, heads, and the
number of sectors per track on the mass storage device.
Status is displayed via the following messages:
Success : Success (partly guessed)
Failed
: Not yet detection has not yet occurred
5) Detailed display of geometry probing status
Geometry is detected via SCSI commands (TEST_UNIT_READY, INQUIRY,
MODE SENSE(6), READ CAPACITY, READ FORMAT CAPACITIES).
The execution status of each command is displayed via the following messages.
Success
Failed (no data)
Failed (retry out)
Failed
----: not executed
6) Hold data
Displays the presence or absence of transfer requests received from the file
system.
Status is displayed via the following messages:
Exists
Not exists
Items 7), 8), 9), and 10) below are displayed only when an error occurs in which
transfer processing cannot continue.
7) Error status
When an error occurs the USB device controller status, (2) above, is displayed.
8) Error reason
The reason transfer cannot continue is displayed.
9) Error event
Internal information is displayed.
USB connection Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear
417
Operation Commands
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
10) Request sense code
When an error is detected by the USB device the error data established on the
USB device is displayed.
11) Vendor
Vendor information for the USB device is displayed.
12) Product
Product information for the USB device is displayed.
13) Product Rev.
Product revision information for the USB device is displayed.
14) Total sectors
The total number of sectors held on the USB device is displayed.
15) Cylinders
The number of cylinders on the USB device is displayed.
16) Heads
The number of heads on the USB device is displayed.
17) Sectors per track
The number of sectors per track (per head, per cylinder) on the USB device is
displayed.
18) Speed
The USB protocol speed is displayed. Same as (3) above.
19) Max LUN
The maximum LUN value for the USB device. This switch does not support
devices that do not have LUN=0.
20) Device address
The device number allocated by USBD in order to uniquely identify devices on
the USB bus is displayed.
21) Interface
The interface number selected by the USB mass storage controller thread is
displayed.
22) Sub class
The subclass for the USB device is displayed. Class information is 0(=mass
storage class).
23) LUN
The LUN number selected by the USB mass storage controller thread is
displayed.
24) BulkInEP
The bulk-in endpoint number selected by the USB mass storage controller
thread is displayed.
25) BulkOutEP
The bulk-out endpoint number selected by the USB mass storage controller
thread is displayed.
USB connection Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear
418
Operation Commands
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.22 LACP Counter, Log, Statistics, and
Status Display and Clear Operation
Commands
This section explains the commands related to LACP.
5.22.1 LACP Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display
Commands
This section explains the commands related to LACP counter, log, statistics, and status display commands.
5.22.1.1 show lacp
Function
Display LACP information briefly.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
show lacp
Options
N/A
Display all information.
Use Mode
Operation mode (user class/admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Display the LACP information in a simple format.
The information is sorted by port numbers, and separated for each group.
Execution Example
# show lacp
[group 2]
(1) (2)
port
(3)
mode
(4)
state
(5)
LAG-ID
(6)
port-parameter
----
2
------- ------- --------------------------- ----------
Actor : passive ASCD 8000,00-0b-5d-89-02-ba,0002 8000,2
Partner: active
ASCD
8000,00-0b-5d-89-01-22,0001 8000,3
3
Actor : passive ASCD
8000,00-0b-5d-89-02-ba,0002 8000,3
8000,00-0b-5d-89-01-22,0001 8000,2
Partner: active
ASCD
[group 1]
port
mode
state
LAG-ID
port-parameter
----
4
------- ------- --------------------------- ----------
Actor : passive ASCD 8000,00-0b-5d-89-02-ba,0001 8000,4
Partner: active
ASCD
8000,00-0b-5d-89-01-22,0002 8000,4
5
Actor : passive ASCD
Partner: active ASCD
8000,00-0b-5d-89-02-ba,0001 8000,5
8000,00-0b-5d-89-01-22,0002 8000,5
#
LACP Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation
Commands
419
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
1) Port number
2) Indicates that the information display at the right side is for this device (Actor) or
the remote device (Partner).
3) Indicates that the LACP mode is active or passive.
The passive is displayed if the valid LACP remote system information has not
been obtained.
4) Indicates the LACP state as follows.
T (LACP_Timeout):
The LACPDU's receive timeout has been set to Short Timeout (3
seconds).
If not shown, the Long Timeout (90 seconds) has been set.
A (Aggregation):
The links can be aggregated. If not shown, they are separate links.
S (Synchronization):
The link has been synchronized with the aggregator.
C (Collecting):
A frame is ready to receive.
D (Distributing):
A frame is ready to send.
d (defaulted):
The default parameters have been applied to the LACP remote system
(Partner) information being held by this device.
E (Expired):
The receiver of LACP remote system has expired.
5) Indicates the link aggregation ID.
All 0's indicates that the valid LACP remote system information has not been
obtained.
(a) (b)
(c) (d) (e)
8000,00-0b-5d-89-02-ba,0002 8000,2
a) System priority
b) System ID (MAC address)
c) Aggregation key
d) Port priority
e) Port number
6) A value at left shows the port priority, and a value at right shows the port number.
These values are equivalent to port priority (d) and port number (e) of Item (5).
LACP Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation
420
Commands
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.22.1.2 show lacp statistics
Function
Display the LACP statistics.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
show lacp statistics
Options
N/A
Display all statistics.
Use Mode
Operation mode (user class/admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Caution
Display the LACP statistics.
The statistics are cleared if the device is restarted or the valid LACP definition is not
found in the device.
The item is not displayed if its counter is zero (0). If the LACP is not operating on a port,
the item is displayed when its counter is not zero.
Execution Example
# show lacp statistics
LACP statistics information:
[ETHER PORT-1]
45 transmitted lacpdu
--- (1)
--- (2)
--- (3)
--- (4)
--- (5)
--- (6)
--- (7)
--- (8)
--- (9)
--- (10)
--- (11)
46 received lacpdu
12 start collecting/distributing
13 stop collecting/distributing
5 receive timeout lacpdu
1 transmitted marker pdu
1 received marker pdu
21 received lacpdu no link
1 transmission error
1 received error
[ETHER PORT-3]
53 transmitted lacpdu
52 received lacpdu
4 start collecting/distributing
3 stop collecting/distributing
#
1) Port number
2) Number of sent lacpdu packets
3) Number of received lacpdu packets
4) Number of times the aggregation link is disabled, changing from the enabled state,
to send or receive packets
5) Number of times the aggregation link is disabled to send or receive packets
6) Number of times the lacpdu packet reception was timed out
7) Number of times the marker pdu packet was sent
8) Number of times the marker pdu packet was received
9) Number of lacpdu or marker pdu packets received when the LACP was disabled
10) Number of times the packet sending has failed
11) Number of times the packet reception has failed
LACP Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation
421
Commands
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.22.2 LACP Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Clear
Commands
This section explains the commands related to LACP counter, log, statistics, and status clear commands.
5.22.2.1 clear lacp statistics
Function
Clear the LACP statistics.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
clear lacp statistics
N/A
Options
Use Mode
Operation mode (admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Clear the LACP statistics.
Execution Example
# clear lacp statistics
#
LACP Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation
Commands
422
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.23 M1 port Status Display command
This section explains the commands related to oob.
5.23.1 M1 port Status Display command
This section explains the commands related to M1 port Status Display command.
5.23.1.1 show oob
Function
Display of M1 port information
Available Model XG2600
Syntax
show oob
N/A
Options
Use Mode
Operation mode (user class/admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
M1 port information is displayed.
Execution Example
#show oob
IP Address
Subnet Mask
IPv6 Address
MAC Address
#
: 192.168.3.1
: 255.255.255.0
: fe80::217:42ff:fed1:a80/64 ---(3)
: 00:17:42:d1:0a:80 ---(4)
---(1)
---(2)
1) The IPv4 address in the M1 port is displayed.
2) The subnet mask in the IPv4 address in the M1 port is displayed.
3) The IPv6 address in the M1 port is displayed. When IPv6 is not used, it is not
displayed.
4) The MAC address in the M1 port is displayed.
M1 port Status Display command
423
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.24 Interface Counter, Log, Statistics, and
Status Display Commands
This section explains the commands related to the interface.
5.24.1 Interface Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display
Commands
This section explains the commands related to interface counter, log, statistics, and status display commands.
5.24.1.1 show interface
Function
Display the interface information.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
show interface [interface <interface_name>]
Options
N/A
Display the status and type of all interfaces.
interface <interface_name>
Display the status and type of the specified interface.
Use Mode
Operation mode (user class/admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Display the interface information.
Execution Example
# show interface
lan0
-(1)-
MTU 1500
-(2)-
<UP,BROADCAST,RUNNING,SIMPLEX,MULTICAST>
------------------(3)-------------------
Type: port vlan
VLAN ID is 20
+
|
MAC address: 00:00:0e:f1:41:dc
Status: up since Jan 1 19:23:45 2011
IP address/masklen:
|
(4)
|
192.168.1.1/24
MTU 1500
Broadcast 192.168.1.255
<UP,BROADCAST,RUNNING,SIMPLEX,MULTICAST>
+
lan1
Type: protocol vlan
VLAN ID is 30
+
|
MAC address: 00:00:0e:f1:41:dc
Status: up since Jan 1 19:23:45 2011
IP address/masklen:
|
(4)
|
192.168.3.1/24
Broadcast 192.168.3.255
+
lo0
MTU 16384
<UP,LOOPBACK,RUNNING,MULTICAST>
Type: loopback
+
|
(4)
+
Status: up since Jan 1 19:23:45 2011
IP address/masklen:
127.0.0.1/32
192.168.1.1/32
Interface Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display Commands
424
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
1) Interface name
2) MTU size
3) Interface flag
4) Type
The interface type is displayed by any of the following character strings.
port vlan : Port VLAN
protocol vlan : Protocol VLAN
loopback : Loopback interface
VLAN ID: The VLAN ID is displayed.
MAC address:The MAC address used for the interface is displayed.
Status
:The interface status and the clock time when the interface
entered in this status are displayed.
: Available
up
down
: Unavailable
IP address/masklen:
The IPv4 address of the interface is displayed.
Interface Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display Commands
425
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.24.1.2 show interface brief
Function
Display the interface information.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
Display interface information briefly.
Options
N/A
Display all interfaces briefly.
interface <interface_name>
Display the specified interface briefly.
Use Mode
Operation mode (user class/admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Display the interface information in a simple format.
Execution Example
# show interface brief
Interface
-------------
Status
--------
(2)
up
up
Type
-----------------
(3)
port vlan
protocol vlan
loopback
(1)
lan0
lan1
lo0
#
up
1) Interface
The interface name is displayed.
2) Status
The interface status is displayed.
up
: Available
down
: Unavailable
3) Type
The interface type is displayed.
port vlan : Port VLAN
protocol vlan : Protocol VLAN
loopback
: Loopback interface
Interface Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display Commands
426
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.24.1.3 show interface summary
Function
Display the number of interface entries (the interface summary).
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
show interface summary
N/A
Options
Use Mode
Operation mode (user class/admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Display the number of interface entries.
Execution Example
# show interface summary
There are 4 interfaces (up status 4 interfaces)
Loopback interface
Port VLAN interface
Protocol VLAN interface :
:
:
1 (up status
2 (up status
1 (up status
1 interfaces) ---(1)
2 interfaces) ---(2)
1 interfaces) ---(3)
#
1) Loopback interface
2) Port VLAN
3) Protocol VLAN
Interface Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display Commands
427
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.25 ARP Entry Display and Clear Operation
Commands
This section explains the commands related to ARP entry.
5.25.1 ARP Entry Display Commands
This section explains the commands related to ARP entry.
5.25.1.1 show arp
Function
Display the ARP entries.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
show arp [<ip_address>]
show arp summary
Options
N/A
Display the details of all ARP entries.
<ip_address>
Display the ARP entries of the specified IP address only.
summary
Display the number of ARP entries.
Use Mode
Operation mode (user class/admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Display the ARP table entries.
Execution Example
# show arp
IP Address
MAC Address
F Rest Interface Port
--------------- ----------------- -- ----- --------- ----
(1)
(2)
(3) (4)
01146 lan0
lan0
(5)
(6)
12
20.0.0.1
20.0.0.2
20.0.0.255
Entry:3
00:00:e2:08:57:89
(incomplete)
00:00:02:01:14:00 P perm lan0
---(7)
# show arp summary
Entry:3
# show arp 20.0.0.1
IP Address
--------------- ----------------- -- ----- --------- ----
20.0.0.1 00:00:e2:08:57:89 01146 lan0 12
Entry:1
MAC Address
F Rest Interface Port
#
1) IP Address
The IP address of ARP entry is displayed.
2) MAC Address
The MAC address of ARP entry is displayed.
If not resolved, "incomplete" is displayed.
ARP Entry Display and Clear Operation Commands
428
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
3)
F
An entry type is displayed. The details are as follows.
P: A permanent entry
4) Rest
The time to live of the ARP entry is indicated in seconds. For the permanent
entry, "perm" is shown.
5) Interface
The ARP entry interface is displayed.
6) Port
The Ethernet port number used for transmission is displayed.
7) Entry
The number of ARP entries is displayed.
ARP Entry Display and Clear Operation Commands
429
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.25.2 ARP Entry Clear Commands
This section explains the commands related to ARP entry clear.
5.25.2.1 clear arp
Function
Clear the ARP entries.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
clear arp [<ip_address>]
Options
N/A
Clear all ARP entries.
<ip_address>
Clear the ARP entries of the specified IP address.
Use Mode
Operation mode (admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Clear the entries from the ARP table.
Execution Example
# clear arp
#
ARP Entry Display and Clear Operation Commands
430
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.26 Routing Table Entry Display Commands
This section explains the commands related to routing table.
5.26.1 IPv4 Routing Table Entry Display Commands
This section explains the commands related to the IPv4 routing table counter, log, statistics, and status display commands.
5.26.1.1 show ip route
Function
Display the routing table information.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
show ip route [all]
show ip route connected [all]
show ip route static [all]
show ip route destination <ip_address>/<mask> [all]
show ip route destination <ip_address>/<mask> longer-prefixes [all]
Options
N/A
Display the route information that has been registered on the routing table.
all
Display all route information including route information not registered on the routing
table.
connected
Display interface route information only.
static
Display static route information only.
destination <ip_address>/<mask>
Display only the route information whose address and mask match the specified ones.
<mask> must be a number of mask bits or a mask value. For the mask value, specify
successive 1s following the most significant bit (MSB).
destination <ip_address>/<mask> longer-prefixes
Display all route information included in the specified route information.
<mask> must be a number of mask bits or a mask value. For the mask value, specify
successive 1s following the most significant bit (MSB).
Use Mode
Operation mode (user class/admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Display the routing table information that routing manager registered.
Routing Table Entry Display Commands
431
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
Execution Example
Display of the entire route information
# show ip route all
FP Destination/Mask
--- ---------------
(1) (2)
*C 192.168.10.0/24
*O 192.168.11.0/24
Gateway
Distance UpTime
Interface
-------------- -------- -------- ---------
(3)
192.168.10.50
192.168.10.20
(4)
(5)
0 00:00:01 lan0
110 00:00:01 lan0
(6)
1) FP
The kernel flag and the protocol type are displayed.
The following shows the kernel flags that may be displayed.
*
: Indicates the route registered in the IP kernel.
Blank:
Indicates the route not registered in the IP kernel.
x
: Indicates the route that cannot be registered in the IP kernel.
(The route count limit has been exceeded.)
The following shows the protocol types that may be displayed.
S : Indicates static route information.
C : Indicates the interface route information.
2) Destination/Mask
The destination address or mask length is displayed.
3) Gateway
The gateway address is displayed.
4) Distance
The routing priority is displayed.
5) UpTime
The elapsed time after the last update of route information is displayed.
01:23:45
1 hour, 23 minutes and 45 seconds have passed (if the elapsed time is within 24
hours).
6d23h45m
6 days, 23 hours and 45 minutes have passed (if the elapsed time is within 7
days).
3w6d23h
3 weeks, 6 days and 23 hours have passed.
6) Interface
The interface name through which the gateway can be reached is displayed. If
status of the interface is invalid, its name is followed by (inactive).
Routing Table Entry Display Commands
432
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.26.1.2 show ip route summary
Function
Display the number of routing table information entries.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
show ip route summary [all]
Options
N/A
Display the number of route information sets that have been registered on the routing
table.
all
Display the number of all route information sets including route information not registered
on the routing table.
Use Mode
Operation mode (user class/admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Display the number of routing table information entries that routing manager registered.
Execution Example
Display of the number of route
# show ip route summary
Route Source
------------
(1)
Networks
--------
(2)
3
Static
Connected
Total
7
10
1) Route Source
The routing protocol type is displayed.
Static
: Indicates the static route information.
Connected : Indicates the interface route information.
2) Networks
The number of route is displayed.
Routing Table Entry Display Commands
433
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.26.1.3 show ip route kernel
Function
Display the routing table of the IP kernel.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
show ip route kernel
show ip route kernel longest-match <ip_address>
show ip route kernel summary
Options
N/A
Display the current entries on the routing table of the IP kernel.
longest-match <ip_address>
Display the entries that match the specified address on the routing table of IP kernel by
longest match.
summary
Display the number of entries (the summary) on the routing table of the IP kernel.
Use Mode
Operation mode (user class/admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Display the current status of IP kernel's routing table.
Execution Example
# show ip route kernel
Routing Tables for Internet
Destination/Masklen Gateway
Flag
Interface
---(1)
------------------- ----------------- ------ ---------
10.0.0.0/8
127.0.0.1
192.168.1.5
127.0.0.1
link#1
link#1
00:a0:c9:d8:90:4e UH
127.0.0.1 UG
UGS
UH
U
lan0
lo0
lan0
lan0
lan0
lo0
192.168.1.0/24
192.168.1.5
192.168.1.11
224.0.0.0/4
Entry:6
UH
---(2)
# show ip route kernel longest-match 10.0.0.1
Routing Tables for Internet
Destination/Masklen Gateway
Flag
Interface
------------------- ----------------- ------ ---------
10.0.0.0/8
Entry:1
192.168.1.5
UGS
lan0
# show ip route kernel longest-match 20.0.0.1
Routing Tables for Internet
Destination/Masklen Gateway
Flag
Interface
------------------- ----------------- ------ ---------
Entry:0
# show ip route kernel summary
Entry:6
#
1) Destination/Masklen
The destination network address and the mask value are displayed.
If routed via the host, no mask value is displayed.
Gateway : The gateway address is displayed.
The direct route indicates the MAC address of the gateway. If the
gateway address is not resolved, link#x is shown (where, x is an
interface index number that the system automatically assigns to
each interface).
Routing Table Entry Display Commands
434
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
Flag
: The entry type is displayed. The details are as follows.
U (Up): Indicates that the route is enabled.
G (Gateway): Indicates the route which requires an intermediate
routing such as gateway.
H (Host): Indicates the host entry.
S (Static): Indicates the static route.
R (Reject): Indicates the discarded route (with ICMP unreach
transmission).
B (Blackhole): Indicates the discarded route (without ICMP unreach
transmission).
Interface : The destination interface is shown.
2) Entry
The number of entries, excluding the route entries used inside the device, is
displayed.
Routing Table Entry Display Commands
435
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.26.2 IPv6 Routing Table Entry Display Commands
This section explains the commands related to IPv6 routing table.
5.26.2.1 show ipv6 route
Function
Display IPv6 routing table information
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
show ipv6 route [all]
show ipv6 route connected [all]
show ipv6 route static [all]
show ipv6 route ra [all]
show ipv6 route destination <prefix>/<prefixlen> [all]
show ipv6 route destination <prefix>/<prefixlen> longer-prefixes [all]
Options
N/A
Display route IPv6 kernel routing table
all
Display all route information
connected
Display interface route information
static
Display static route information
ra
Display only RA receive route information
destination <prefix>/<prefixlen>
Display route which matched specified prefix /prefix length
Use Mode
Operation mode (user class/admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Display IPv6 routing table information
Execution Example
# show ipv6 route all
FP
Destination/Prefixlen
UpTime
(4)
Distance
(5)
(1) (2)
Gateway
(3)
Interface
(6)
-- ------------------------------------------- --------- ------------------
*RA ::/0
00:00:01
00:00:01
00:00:08
12
fe80::2
lan0
lan0
oob0
*C 2001:db8:ffff:1000::/64
2001:db8:ffff:1000::1
*C 11:11::/64
0
0
11:11::22
Routing Table Entry Display Commands
436
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
1) FP
The kernel flag and the protocol type are displayed.
The following shows the kernel flags that may be displayed.
: Indicates the route registered in the IPv6 kernel.
*
Blank : Indicates the route not registered in the IPv6 kernel.
The following shows the protocol types that may be displayed.
RA
S
: Indicates default route by receiving Router Advertisement (RA).
: Indicates static route information.
C
: Indicates the interface route information.
2) Destination/Prefixlen
The destination IPv6 network address and the Prefix length are displayed.
IPv6 link-local addresses are not displayed.
3) Gateway
The gateway address is displayed.
If the default route by receiving Router Advertisement (RA) is not registered in
the IPv6 kernel, the gateway address is not displayed.
4) UpTime
The elapsed time after the last update of route information is displayed.
01:23:45
6d23h45m
3w6d23h
: 1 hour, 23 minutes and 45 seconds have passed (if the elapsed
time is within 24 hours).
: 6 days, 23 hours and 45 minutes have passed (if the elapsed
time is within 7 days).
: 3 weeks, 6 days and 23 hours have passed.
5) Distance
The routing priority is displayed.
6) Interface
The interface name through which the gateway can be reached is displayed.
If status of the interface is invalid, its name is followed by (inactive).
If the default route by receiving Router Advertisement (RA) is not registered in
the IPv6 kernel, the interface name is not displayed.
Routing Table Entry Display Commands
437
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.26.2.2 show ipv6 route summary
Function
Display number of routes registered in IPv6 routing table
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
show ipv6 route summary [all]
Options
N/A
Display number of routes registered in IPv6 routing table
all
Display all IPv6 route information
Use Mode
Operation mode (user class/admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Display number of routes registered in IPv6 routing table
Execution Example
# show ipv6 route summary
Route Source
(1)
Networks
(2)
------------
Static 3
RA
Connected
Total
--------
0
7
10
1) Route Source
The routing protocol type is displayed.
Static
RA
: Indicates the static route information.
: Indicates the default route by receiving Router Advertisement (RA).
Connected : Indicates the interface route information.
Total
: Indicates the total number.
2) Networks
The number of route is displayed.
Routing Table Entry Display Commands
438
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.26.2.3 show ipv6 route kernel
Function
Display routing table of IPv6 kernel
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
show ipv6 route kernel
show ipv6 route kernel summary
Options
N/A
Display the current entry of IPv6 kernel routing table
longest-match <ipv6_address>
Display longestmatch IPv6 entry
summary
Display number of IPv6 kernel routing table entry
Use Mode
Operation mode (user class/admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Display IPv6 kernel routing table information
Execution Example
# show ipv6 route kernel
Routing Tables for Internet6
Destination/Masklen
Flag
Interface
---(1)
Gateway
------------------------------------------- ------ ---------
::1
UH
UGS
U
lo0
::1
2001:db8:ffff:1000::/48
fe80::2a0:c9ff:fed8:904e%lan0
2001:db8:ffff:2000::/64
link#1
fe80::2a0:c9ff:fed8:904e%lan0
00:a0:c9:d8:90:4e
fe80::%lo0/64
fe80::1%lo0
lan0
lan0
lan0
lo0
UH
U
ff01::/32
U
lo0
::1
ff02::%lan0/32
link#1
ff02::%lo0/32
fe80::1%lo0
UC
UC
lan0
lo0
Entry:8
---(2)
# show ipv6 route kernel longest-match 2001:db8:ffff:1000::1
Routing Tables for Internet6
Destination/Masklen
Gateway
Flag
Interface
------------------------------------------- ------ ---------
2001:db8:ffff:1000::/48
fe80::2a0:c9ff:fed8:904e%lan0
Entry:1
UGS
lan0
# show ipv6 route kernel longest-match 2001:db8:ffff:3000::1
Routing Tables for Internet6
Destination/Masklen
Gateway
Flag
Interface
------------------------------------------- ------ ---------
Entry:0
# show ipv6 route kernel summary
Entry:8
#
Routing Table Entry Display Commands
439
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
1) Destination/Masklen
The destination network address and the mask value are displayed.
If routed via the host, no mask value is displayed.
Gateway: The gateway address is displayed.
The direct route indicates the MAC address of the gateway. If the
gateway address is not resolved, link#x is shown (where, x is an
interface index number that the system automatically assigns to each
interface).
Flag
: The entry type is displayed. The details are as follows.
U (Up) : Indicates that the route is enabled.
G (Gateway) : Indicates the route which requires an
intermediaterouting such as gateway.
H (Host)
S (Static)
R (Reject)
: Indicates the host entry.
: Indicates the static route.
: Indicates the discarded route (with ICMP unreach
transmission).
B (Blackhole) : Indicates the discarded route (without ICMP unreach
transmission).
Interface: The destination interface is shown.
2) Entry
The number of entries, excluding the route entries used inside the device, is
displayed.
Routing Table Entry Display Commands
440
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.26.2.4 show ipv6 ra default-router-list
Function
Display default router list
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
show ipv6 ra default-router-list
Options
N/A
Display default router list
Use Mode
Operation mode (user class/admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Display default router list
Execution Example
# show ipv6 ra default-router-list
lan0:
Advertise Router
(1)
Lifetime
(2)
Time
(3)
fe80::1
1800
300
The number of entries : 1
---(4)
1) Advertise Router
Indicates the source address which sending Router Advertisement (RA).
2) Lifetime
Indicates the Router Lifetime (sec) in the Router Advertisement (RA).
3) Time
Indicates the remaining time (sec) before expiry of the Router Lifetime.
4) The number of entries
Indicates the number of default router entries.
Routing Table Entry Display Commands
441
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.26.2.5 show ipv6 ra prefix-list
Function
Display prefix list
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
show ipv6 ra prefix-list
Options
N/A
Display prefix list
Use Mode
Operation mode (user class/admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Display prefix list
Execution Example
# show ipv6 ra prefix-list
Prefix/Prefixlen
(1)
Flag
(2)
Preferred Lifetime
(3)
Valid Lifetime
(4)
Advertise Router
(5)
Interface
(6)
1000::/64
fe80::1
2000::/64
fe80::2
2000:2000:2000:2000::/64
fe80::1000:1000:1000:1001
2001::/64
LA
LA
-A
602800(604800)
lan0
0(604800)
lan0
4800(604800)
2590000(2592000)
3599(2592000)
1992000(2592000)
lan0
LA
infinity
infinity
fe80::10
oob0
The number of entries : 4
---(7)
1) Prefix/Prefixlen
The IPv6 network prefix and the length in the Router Advertisement (RA).
2) Flag
The status of On-link flag and Auto Config flag in the Router Advertisement (RA).
L
A
-
: On-link flag is 1
: Auto Config flag is 1
: flag is 0
3) Preferred Lifetime
The remaining time (sec) before expiry of the Preferred Lifetime.
The Preferred Lifetime (sec) in parentheses.
4) Valid Lifetime
The remaining time (sec) before expiry of the Valid Lifetime.
The Valid Lifetime (sec) in parentheses.
If the Valid Lifetime expire, the enrty is deleted.
5) Advertise Router
The IPv6 address of the router sending the Router Advertisement (RA).
6) Interface
The interface name through which the Router Advertisement (RA) was received.
7) The number of entries
Indicates the number of prefix entries.
Routing Table Entry Display Commands
442
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.27 Packet Statistics Display and Clear
Operation Commands
This section explains the commands related to packet statistics information.
5.27.1 IPv4 Packet Statistics Display Commands
This section explains the commands related to IPv4 packet statistics display.
5.27.1.1 show ip traffic
Function
Display the IP-related statistics.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
show ip traffic
show ip traffic { tcp | udp | ip | icmp | igmp | pim }
Options
N/A
Display all IP statistics.
tcp
Display the TCP packet statistics.
udp
Display the UDP packet statistics.
ip
Display the IP packet statistics.
icmp
Display the ICMP packet statistics.
Use Mode
Operation mode (user class/admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Display the IP statistics.
Packet Statistics Display and Clear Operation Commands
443
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
Execution Example
# show ip traffic
tcp:
170 packets sent
145 data packets (29694 bytes)
1 data packet (18 bytes) retransmitted
0 resends initiated by MTU discovery
19 ack-only packets (10 delayed)
0 URG only packets
0 window probe packets
0 window update packets
5 control packets
217 packets received
145 acks (for 29706 bytes)
1 duplicate ack
0 acks for unsent data
121 packets (14492 bytes) received in-sequence
0 completely duplicate packets (0 bytes)
0 old duplicate packets
0 packets with some dup. data (0 bytes duped)
3 out-of-order packets (42 bytes)
0 packets (0 bytes) of data after window
0 window probes
0 window update packets
0 packets received after close
0 discarded for bad checksums
0 discarded for bad header offset fields
0 discarded because packet too short
3 connection requests
4 connection accepts
0 bad connection attempts
0 listen queue overflows
6 connections established (including accepts)
2 connections closed (including 1 drop)
1 connection updated cached RTT on close
1 connection updated cached RTT variance on close
0 connections updated cached ssthresh on close
1 embryonic connection dropped
145 segments updated rtt (of 145 attempts)
1 retransmit timeout
0 connections dropped by rexmit timeout
0 persist timeouts
0 connections dropped by persist timeout
22 keepalive timeouts
0 keepalive probes sent
0 connections dropped by keepalive
22 correct ACK header predictions
64 correct data packet header predictions
udp:
250 datagrams received
0 with incomplete header
0 with bad data length field
0 with bad checksum
0 dropped due to no socket
224 broadcast/multicast datagrams dropped due to no socket
0 dropped due to full socket buffers
0 not for hashed pcb
26 delivered
0 tunneling packets that can't find gif
(to be continued)
Packet Statistics Display and Clear Operation Commands
444
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
(continued)
26 datagrams output
ip:
467 total packets received
0 bad header checksums
0 with size smaller than minimum
0 with data size < data length
0 with ip length > max ip packet size
0 with header length < data size
0 with data length < header length
0 with bad options
0 with incorrect version number
0 fragments received
0 fragments dropped (dup or out of space)
0 fragments dropped after timeout
0 packets reassembled ok
467 packets for this host
0 packets for unknown/unsupported protocol
0 packets forwarded
0 packets not forwardable
0 redirects sent
197 packets sent from this host
0 packets sent with fabricated ip header
0 output packets dropped due to no bufs, etc.
0 output packets discarded due to no route
0 output datagrams fragmented
0 fragments created
0 datagrams that can't be fragmented
0 tunneling packets that can't find gif
icmp:
0 calls to icmp_error
0 errors not generated because old message was icmp
0 messages with bad code fields
0 messages < minimum length
0 bad checksums
0 messages with bad length
0 message responses generated
#
Packet Statistics Display and Clear Operation Commands
445
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.27.2 IPv4 Packet Statistics Clear Commands
This section explains the commands related to IPv4 packet statistics clearing.
5.27.2.1 clear ip traffic
Function
Clear the IP-related statistics.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
clear ip traffic
Options
N/A
Clear the IP-related statistics.
However, the IP packet statistics are not cleared.
Use Mode
Operation mode (admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Clear the IP-related statistics.
However, the IP packet statistics are not cleared.
Execution Example
# clear ip traffic
#
Packet Statistics Display and Clear Operation Commands
446
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.27.3 IPv6 Packet Statistics Display Commands
This section explains the commands related to IPv6 packet statistics display.
5.27.3.1 show ipv6 traffic
Function
Display IPv6 packets statistics information
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
show ipv6 traffic
show ipv6 traffic { tcp | udp | ip | icmp }
Options
N/A
Display all the IPv6 statistics information
tcp
Display TCP packets statistics information
udp
Display UDP packets statistics information
ip
Display IPv6 packets statistics information
icmp
Display ICMP packets statistics information
Use Mode
Operation mode (user class/admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Display IPv6 packets statistics information
Execution Example
# show ipv6 traffic
tcp6:
0 packets sent
0 data packets (0 bytes)
0 data packets (0 bytes) retransmitted
0 ack-only packets (0 delayed)
0 URG only packets
0 window probe packets
0 window update packets
0 control packets
0 packets received
0 acks (for 0 bytes)
0 duplicate acks
0 acks for unsent data
0 packets (0 bytes) received in-sequence
0 completely duplicate packets (0 bytes)
0 old duplicate packets
0 packets with some dup. data (0 bytes duped)
0 out-of-order packets (0 bytes)
0 packets (0 bytes) of data after window
0 window probes
0 window update packets
0 packets received after close
0 discarded for bad checksums
0 discarded for bad header offset fields
0 discarded because packet too short
(To be continued)
Packet Statistics Display and Clear Operation Commands
447
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
(Continued)
0 connection requests
0 connection accepts
0 bad connection attempts
0 connections established (including accepts)
0 connections closed (including 0 drops)
0 embryonic connections dropped
0 segments updated rtt (of 0 attempts)
0 retransmit timeouts
0 connections dropped by rexmit timeout
0 persist timeouts
0 connections timed out in persist
0 keepalive timeouts
0 keepalive probes sent
0 connections dropped by keepalive
0 correct ACK header predictions
0 correct data packet header predictions
0 PCB cache misses
udp6:
0 datagrams received
0 with incomplete header
0 with bad data length field
0 with bad checksum
0 with no checksum
0 dropped due to no socket
0 multicast datagrams dropped due to no socket
0 dropped due to full socket buffers
0 delivered
0 datagrams output
ip6:
24 total packets received
0 with size smaller than minimum
0 with data size < data length
0 with bad options
0 with incorrect version number
0 fragments received
0 fragments dropped (dup or out of space)
0 fragments dropped after timeout
0 fragments that exceeded limit
0 packets reassembled ok
24 packets for this host
0 packets forwarded
0 packets not forwardable
0 redirects sent
17 packets sent from this host
0 packets sent with fabricated ip header
0 output packets dropped due to no bufs, etc.
0 output packets discarded due to no route
0 output datagrams fragmented
0 fragments created
0 datagrams that can't be fragmented
0 packets that violated scope rules
0 multicast packets which we don't join
Input histogram:
ICMP6: 24
Mbuf statistics:
0 one mbuf
24 one ext mbuf
0 two or more ext mbuf
0 packets whose headers are not continuous
0 tunneling packets that can't find gif
0 packets discarded due to too many headers
0 failures of source address selection
source addresses on an outgoing I/F
11 link-locals
source addresses of same scope
11 link-locals
11 forward cache hit
0 forward cache miss
(To be continued)
Packet Statistics Display and Clear Operation Commands
448
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
(Continued)
icmp6:
0 calls to icmp6_error
0 errors not generated because old message was icmp6 error or so
0 errors not generated because rate limitation
Output histogram:
echo: 5
echo reply: 5
multicast listener report: 1
neighbor solicitation: 4
neighbor advertisement: 2
0 messages with bad code fields
0 messages < minimum length
0 bad checksums
0 messages with bad length
Input histogram:
echo: 5
echo reply: 15
neighbor solicitation: 2
neighbor advertisement: 2
Histogram of error messages to be generated:
0 no route
0 administratively prohibited
0 beyond scope
0 address unreachable
0 port unreachable
0 packet too big
0 time exceed transit
0 time exceed reassembly
0 erroneous header field
0 unrecognized next header
0 unrecognized option
0 redirect
0 unknown
5 message responses generated
0 messages with too many ND options
#
Packet Statistics Display and Clear Operation Commands
449
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.27.4 IPv6 Packet Statistics Clear Commands
This section explains the commands related to IPv6 packet statistics clearing.
5.27.4.1 clear ipv6 traffic
Function
Clear IPv6 packet statistics information
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
clear ipv6 traffic
Options
N/A
Clear all IPv6 statistics information
Use Mode
Operation mode (user or admin class
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Clear IPv6 packet statistics information
Execution Example
# clear ipv6 traffic
#
Packet Statistics Display and Clear Operation Commands
450
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.28 Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and
Status Display and Clear Operation
Commands
This section explains the commands related to bridge.
5.28.1 Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display
Commands
This section explains the commands related to bridge counter, log, statistics, and status display.
5.28.1.1 show bridge
Function
Display the learning table status and statistics.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
show bridge
show bridge summary
Options
N/A
Display the contents of the learning table.
summary
Display the assignment status of the learning table.
Use Mode
Operation mode (user class/admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Display the bridge status and statistics.
Execution Example
Display of learning table contents
# show bridge
Codes: D - Dynamic entry, S - Static entry
Address
VLAN Interface
Status
------------------ ----- ------------------ ------
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
D
S
S
D
00:00:0e:58:a5:dc 100
00:0b:5d:89:00:77 10
00:0b:5d:89:00:77 100
00:e0:00:ad:a9:76 100
08:00:46:6f:19:3b 10
08:00:46:70:84:e4 10
linkaggregation8
self
self
linkaggregation1
ether7
ether8
S
D
1) MAC address registered on the learning table
2) VLAN ID
3) Name of the interface where the entry terminal exists
ether: Ethernet port
linkaggregation: Link aggregation port
self
: Device address
Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation
Commands
451
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
4) Status of learning table
One of the following is displayed.
D
S
: Dynamic learning table
: Static learning table
Display of learning table assignment
#show bridge summary
Registered station blocks :
6
3
1
2
--- (1)
--- (2)
--- (3)
--- (4)
--- (5)
Dynamic entry
Static entry
System entry
:
:
:
Free station blocks
: 16378
1) Number of learning tables currently used
2) Number of dynamically learned tables
3) Number of statically learned tables
4) Number of learned tables used inside the device
5) Number of unused learning tables
Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation
Commands
452
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.28.2 Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Clear
Commands
This section explains the commands related to bridge counter, log, statistics,
and status clearing.
5.28.2.1 clear bridge
Function
Initialize the dynamically learned MAC address from the learning table.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
clear bridge
clear bridge port <portlist>
clear bridge mac <macaddr> <vid>
Options
N/A
Delete all dynamically learned MAC addresses from the learning table.
• port
Specify to delete port by port.
• mac
Specify to delete MAC address by MAC address.
<portlist>
• port list
Specify a list of physical port numbers to initialize learning table.
When specifying multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).
When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8").
<macaddr>
• MAC address
Specify the MAC address to be deleted from the learning table.
(It must be in the xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx format, where "xx" is a 2-digit hexadecimal value.)
<vid>
• VLAN ID
Specify a decimal VLAN ID from 1 to 4094.
Use Mode
Operation mode (admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Caution
Delete dynamically learned MAC address from the learning table.
• The address statically learned by the "vlan forward" command definition is not
initialized.
• If a member port of link aggregation is specified, all learning addresses of the link
aggregation are deleted.
Execution Example
# clear bridge
#
Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation
453
Commands
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.28.3 Spanning Tree Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status
Display Commands
This section explains the commands related to spanning tree counter, log, statistics, and status display.
5.28.3.1 show spanning-tree
Function
Display the spanning tree information.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
show spanning-tree
show spanning-tree root
show spanning-tree bridge
show spanning-tree active
show spanning-tree interface <interface_name>
show spanning-tree detail
Options
N/A
Display all spanning tree information briefly.
root
Display the spanning tree information of the root bridge only.
bridge
Display the spanning tree bridge information of the device only.
active
Display the spanning tree information of the active interface only.
interface <interface_name>
Display the spanning tree information of the specified interface only.
detail
Display all spanning tree information in detail.
Use Mode
Operation mode (user class/admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Display the status of the spanning tree function.
Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation
Commands
454
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
Execution Example
Display of all spanning tree information in a simple format
# show spanning-tree
Spanning tree enabled protocol IEEE
Root ID
Priority
Address
Cost
32768
00:00:e2:08:57:89
200000
---(1)
---(2)
---(3)
---(4)
Port
1 (eth1)
Hello Time 2 sec Max Age 20 sec Forward Delay 15 sec
---------------- -------------- --------------------
(5)
(6)
(7)
Bridge ID Priority
Address
32768
00:0b:5d:89:00:aa
---(8)
---(9)
Hello Time 2 sec Max Age 20 sec Forward Delay 15 sec
---------------- -------------- --------------------
(10)
BPDU Mode off
-------------
(13)
(11)
(12)
STP Mode stp
------------
(14)
Interface
Port ID Cost
Status(Role)
Designated Bridge ID
Sent
Received
--------------- -------- ----------- ----------------------- ----------
eth1
----
(15)
128.1
-----
(16)
128.1
-----
(20)
128.2
-----
(16)
128.2
-----
(20)
200000* Forwarding(Root)
------- -----------------
5
---
(19)
24
---
(23)
25
---
(19)
0
---
(23)
(17)
(18)
0 32768 00:00:e2:08:57:89
---- -----------------------
(21)
(22)
eth2
----
(15)
200000* Forwarding(Designated)
------- ----------------------
(17)
(18)
200000 32768 00:0b:5d:89:00:aa
------- -----------------------
(21)
(22)
1) Priority of root bridge
The priority of the bridge identified by the root bridge ID is displayed.
2) MAC address of the root bridge
The MAC address identified by the root bridge ID is displayed.
3) Root path cost
The path cost to the root bridge is displayed.
4) Port number and interface name
The port number and the interface name are displayed.
If this device operates as the root bridge, the following is displayed.
Port
0 (This bridge is the root)
5) Configuration BPDU send interval
The configuration BPDU send interval (in seconds) is displayed.
6) Maximum wait time
The maximum wait time (in seconds) of configuration BPDUs is displayed.
7) Maximum forwarding delay time
The maximum forwarding delay time (in seconds) is displayed.
8) Bridge priority of local device
The bridge priority used for the bridge identifier of this device is displayed.
9) MAC address of local device
The MAC address used for the bridge identifier of this device is displayed.
Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation
455
Commands
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
10) Configuration BPDU send interval
The configuration BPDU send interval (in seconds) is displayed.
11) Maximum wait time
The maximum wait time (in seconds) of configuration BPDUs is displayed.
12) Maximum forwarding delay time
The maximum forwarding delay time (in seconds) is displayed.
13) BPDU forwarding function
The BPDU forwarding function (on or off) defined on this device is displayed.
14) STP operation mode
The STP operation mode (disable/stp/rstp/mstp) of this device is displayed.
15) Interface name
The interface name is displayed.
16) Port ID
The Port ID is displayed.
17) Port path cost
The path cost of the port is displayed (the cost value is followed by an asterisk
(*) if calculated automatically).
18) Port status and roles
One of the following is displayed for the port status.
Disabled
: The STP is disabled.
Discarding : The port is in the discarding state (it is displayed only when
RSTP or MSTP is active).
Blocking
Listening
Learning
: The port is in the blocking state.
: The port is in the listening state.
: The port is in the learning state.
Forwarding : The port is in the forwarding state.
One of the following is displayed for the port role.
Disabled
Root
: The STP is disabled.
: Root port
Designated Designated port
Blocking
Alternate
: Blocking port
: Alternate port (It is displayed only when RSTP or MSTP is
active.)
Backup
: Backup port (It is displayed only when RSTP or MSTP is active.)
19) Number of BPDU send times
The number of BPDU send times (the total value of all BPDU types) is
displayed.
20) Port ID of designated bridge
The port ID of the designated bridge is displayed.
21) Designated path cost of configuration BPDU
The designated path cost of the configuration BPDU is displayed.
22) Designated bridge ID
The designated bridge ID (the priority and MAC address) is displayed.
23) Number of BPDU receive times
The number of BPDU receive times (the total value of all BPDU types) is
displayed.
Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation
456
Commands
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
Display of spanning tree information of the root bridge
# show spanning-tree root
Root ID
Priority
Address
Cost
32768
00:00:e2:08:57:89
200000
---(1)
---(2)
---(3)
---(4)
Port
1 (eth1)
Hello Time 2 sec Max Age 20 sec Forward Delay 15 sec
---------------- -------------- --------------------
(5)
(6)
(7)
1) Bridge priority
The priority of the root bridge is displayed.
2) MAC address
The MAC address of the root bridge is displayed.
3) Root path cost
The path cost to the root bridge is displayed.
4) Root port
The interface name of the root port is displayed.
If this device operates as the root bridge, the following is displayed.
Port
0 (This bridge is the root)
5) Configuration BPDU send interval
The configuration BPDU send interval (in seconds) is displayed.
6) Maximum wait time (in seconds)
The maximum wait time (in seconds) of configuration BPDUs is displayed.
7) Maximum forwarding delay time (in seconds)
The maximum forwarding delay time (in seconds) is displayed.
Display of spanning tree bridge information of this device
# show spanning-tree bridge
Bridge ID Priority
Address
32768
00:0b:5d:89:00:aa
---(1)
---(2)
Hello Time 2 sec Max Age 20 sec Forward Delay 15 sec
---------------- -------------- --------------------
(3)
BPDU Mode off
-------------
(6)
(4)
(5)
STP Mode stp
------------
(7)
1) Bridge priority
The bridge priority used for the bridge identifier of this device is displayed.
2) MAC address
The MAC address used for the bridge identifier of this device is displayed.
3) Configuration BPDU send interval
The configuration BPDU send interval (in seconds) is displayed.
4) Maximum wait time
The maximum wait time (in seconds) of configuration BPDUs is displayed.
5) Maximum forwarding delay time
The maximum forwarding delay time (in seconds) is displayed.
Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation
457
Commands
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
6) BPDU forwarding function
The BPDU forwarding function (on or off) defined on this device is displayed.
7) STP operation mode
The STP operation mode (disable/stp/rstp/mstp) of this device is displayed.
Display of only spanning tree information of the active interface
# show spanning-tree interface active
eth1 is Forwarding Port Version 0(STP)
------------------ -------------------
(1)
(2)
Port path cost 200000(auto), Port priority 128, Port Identifier 128.1
--------------------------- ----------------- ----------------------
(3)
Port role is Root
-----------------
(6)
(4)
(5)
Designated root has priority 32768, address 00:00:e2:08:57:89
---------------------------------- -------------------------
(7)
(8)
Designated bridge has priority 32768, address 00:00:e2:08:57:89
------------------------------------ -------------------------
(9)
(10)
Designated port id is 128.1, Designated path cost 0
--------------------------- -----------------------
(11)
(12)
BPDU statistics:
Config BPDU: sent 3, sent error 0
------ ------------
(13)
(14)
received 112, discarded 0
------------- -----------
(15)
(16)
TCN BPDU:
sent 2, sent error 0
------ ------------
(17)
(18)
received 0, discarded 0
---------- -----------
(19)
(20)
Other error: bad protocol 0, bad version 0
-------------- -------------
(21)
(22)
bad BPDU type 0
---------------
(23)
eth2 is Forwarding Port Version 0(STP)
------------------ -------------------
(1)
(2)
Port path cost 200000(auto), Port priority 128, Port Identifier 128.2
--------------------------- ----------------- ----------------------
(3)
(4)
(5)
Port role is Designated
-----------------------
(6)
Designated root has priority 32768, address 00:00:e2:08:57:89
---------------------------------- -------------------------
(7)
(8)
Designated bridge has priority 32768, address 00:0b:5d:89:00:aa
------------------------------------ -------------------------
(9)
(10)
Designated port id is 128.2, Designated path cost 200000
--------------------------- ---------------------------
(11)
(12)
(To be continued)
Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation
Commands
458
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
(Continued)
BPDU statistics:
Config BPDU: sent 292, sent error 0
--------- ------------
(13)
(14)
received 0, discarded 0
----------- -----------
(15)
(16)
TCN BPDU:
sent 0, sent error 0
------ ------------
(17)
(18)
received 0, discarded 0
---------- -----------
(19)
(20)
Other error: bad protocol 0, bad version 0
-------------- -------------
(21)
(22)
bad BPDU type 0
---------------
(23)
1) Interface name and port status
One of the following is displayed for the port status.
Disabled : The STP is disabled.
Discarding : The port is in the discarding state (it is displayed only when
RSTP or MSTP is active).
Blocking
Listening
Learning
: The port is in the blocking state.
: The port is in the listening state.
: The port is in the learning state.
Forwarding : The port is in the forwarding state.
2) STP version of port
One of the following is displayed for the STP version.
- (OFF)
: STP unused port
: 802.1d STP
0 (STP)
2 (RSTP)
3 (MSTP)
: 802.1w RSTP
: 802.1s MSTP
3) Port path cost
The path cost of the relevant port is displayed.
4) Port priority
The priority of the relevant port is displayed.
5) Port ID
The port ID (the port priority and port number) is displayed.
6) Port role
One of the following is displayed for the port role.
Disabled
Root
: The STP is disabled.
: Root port
Designated : Designated port
Blocking
Alternate
Backup
: Blocking port
: Alternate port (It is displayed only when RSTP or MSTP is active.)
: Backup port (It is displayed only when RSTP or MSTP is active.)
7) Priority of root bridge
The priority of the root bridge is displayed.
8) MAC address of root bridge
The MAC address of the root bridge is displayed.
Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation
Commands
459
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
9) Designated bridge priority
The priority of the designated bridge is displayed.
10) MAC address of designated bridge
The MAC address of the designated bridge is displayed.
11) Designated port ID
The designated port ID (the port priority and port number) is displayed.
12) Designated port path cost
The path cost of the designated port is displayed.
13) Number of configuration BPDU send times
The number of configuration BPDU send times is displayed.
14) Number of configuration BPDU send error times
The number of configuration BPDU send error times is displayed.
15) Number of configuration BPDU receive times
The number of configuration BPDU receive times is displayed.
16) Number of configuration BPDU receive discarding times
The number of configuration BPDU receive discarding times is displayed.
17) Number of TCN BPDU send times
The number of TCN BPDU send times is displayed.
18) Number of TCN BPDU send error times
The number of TCN BPDU send error times is displayed.
19) Number of TCN BPDU receive times
The number of TCN BPDU receive times is displayed.
20) Number of TCN BPDU receive discarding times
The number of TCN BPDU receive discarding times is displayed.
21) Number of protocol version error times
The number of discarding times due to protocol version error is displayed.
22) Number of version error times
The number of discarding times due to version error is displayed.
23) Number of BPDU type error times
The number of discarding times due to BPDU type error is displayed.
Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation
460
Commands
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
Display of spanning tree information of the specified interface
# show spanning-tree interface 1
eth1 is Forwarding Port Version 0(STP)
------------------ -------------------
(1)
(2)
Port path cost 200000(auto), Port priority 128, Port Identifier 128.1
--------------------------- ----------------- ----------------------
(3)
Port role is Root
-----------------
(6)
(4)
(5)
Designated root has priority 32768, address 00:00:e2:08:57:89
---------------------------------- -------------------------
(7)
(8)
Designated bridge has priority 32768, address 00:00:e2:08:57:89
------------------------------------ -------------------------
(9)
(10)
Designated port id is 128.1, Designated path cost 0
--------------------------- -----------------------
(11)
(12)
BPDU statistics:
Config BPDU: sent 3, sent error 0
------ ------------
(13)
(14)
received 112, discarded 0
------------- -----------
(15)
(16)
TCN BPDU:
sent 2, sent error 0
------ ------------
(17)
(18)
received 0, discarded 0
---------- -----------
(19)
(20)
Other error: bad protocol 0, bad version 0
-------------- -------------
(21)
(22)
bad BPDU type 0
---------------
(23)
1) Interface name and port status
One of the following is displayed for the port status.
Disabled : The STP is disabled.
Discarding : The port is in the discarding state (it is displayed only when
RSTP or MSTP is active).
Blocking
Listening
Learning
: The port is in the blocking state.
: The port is in the listening state.
: The port is in the learning state.
Forwarding : The port is in the forwarding state.
2) STP version of port
One of the following is displayed for the STP version.
- (OFF)
: STP unused port
: 802.1d STP
0 (STP)
2 (RSTP)
3 (MSTP)
: 802.1w RSTP
: 802.1s MSTP
3) Port path cost
The path cost of the relevant port is displayed.
4) Port priority
The priority of the relevant port is displayed.
5) Port ID
The port ID (the port priority and port number) is displayed.
Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation
Commands
461
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
6) Port role
One of the following is displayed for the port role.
Disabled
Root
: The STP is disabled.
: Root port
Designated : Designated port
Blocking
Alternate
Backup
: Blocking port
: Alternate port (It is displayed only when RSTP or MSTP is active.)
: Backup port (It is displayed only when RSTP or MSTP is active.)
7) Priority of root bridge
The priority of the root bridge is displayed.
8) MAC address of root bridge
The MAC address of the root bridge is displayed.
9) Designated bridge priority
The priority of the designated bridge is displayed.
10) MAC address of designated bridge
The MAC address of the designated bridge is displayed.
11) Designated port ID
The designated port ID (the port priority and port number) is displayed.
12) Designated port path cost
The path cost of the designated port is displayed.
13) Number of configuration BPDU send times
The number of configuration BPDU send times is displayed.
14) Number of configuration BPDU send error times
The number of configuration BPDU send error times is displayed.
15) Number of configuration BPDU receive times
The number of configuration BPDU receive times is displayed.
16) Number of configuration BPDU receive discarding times
The number of configuration BPDU receive discarding times is displayed.
17) Number of TCN BPDU send times
The number of TCN BPDU send times is displayed.
18) Number of TCN BPDU send error times
The number of TCN BPDU send error times is displayed.
19) Number of TCN BPDU receive times
The number of TCN BPDU receive times is displayed.
20) Number of TCN BPDU receive discarding times
The number of TCN BPDU receive discarding times is displayed.
21) Number of protocol version error times
The number of discarding times due to protocol version error is displayed.
22) Number of version error times
The number of discarding times due to version error is displayed.
23) Number of BPDU type error times
The number of discarding times due to BPDU type error is displayed.
Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation
462
Commands
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
To display all spanning tree information in detail
# show spanning-tree detail
IEEE compatible spanning tree protocol is being executed.
Bridge Identifier has priority 32768, address 00:0b:5d:89:00:aa
------------------------------------ -------------------------
(1)
(2)
Configured hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15
----------------------- ---------- ----------------
(3)
(4)
(5)
Current root has priority 32768, address 00:00:e2:08:57:89
------------------------------- -------------------------
(6)
(7)
Root port is eth1, cost of root path is 200000
----------------- ---------------------------
(8)
(9)
STP Mode stp, BPDU Mode off
------------ -------------
(38)
(39)
Topology changes 2 Detected date 2011/01/01(Sat) 05:30:28
------------------ --------------------------------------
(33)
(34)
(time since 05:30:28)
-------------------
(35)
eth1 is Forwarding Port Version 0(STP) STP-Compatible(-)
------------------ ------------------- -----------------
(10)
(11)
(36)
Port path cost 200000(auto), Port priority 128, Port Identifier 128.1
--------------------------- ----------------- ----------------------
(12)
Port role is Root
-----------------
(15)
(13)
(14)
Designated root has priority 32768, address 00:00:e2:08:57:89
---------------------------------- -------------------------
(16)
(17)
Designated bridge has priority 32768, address 00:00:e2:08:57:89
------------------------------------ -------------------------
(18)
(19)
Designated port id is 128.1, Designated path cost 0
--------------------------- -----------------------
(20)
(21)
BPDU statistics:
Config BPDU: sent 3, sent error 0
------ ------------
(22)
(23)
received 901, discarded 0
------------- -----------
(24)
(25)
TCN BPDU:
sent 0, sent error 0
------ ------------
(26)
(27)
received 0, discarded 0
---------- -----------
(28)
(29)
Other error: bad protocol 0, bad version 0
-------------- -------------
(30)
(31)
bad BPDU type 0
---------------
(32)
(To be continued)
Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation
Commands
463
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
(Continued)
Other statistics:
changed to forwarding state 1
---
(37)
eth2 is Forwarding Port Version 0(STP) STP-Compatible(-)
------------------ ------------------- -----------------
(10)
(11)
(36)
Port path cost 200000(auto), Port priority 128, Port Identifier 128.2
--------------------------- ----------------- ----------------------
(12)
(13)
(14)
Port role is Designated
-----------------------
(15)
Designated root has priority 32768, address 00:00:e2:08:57:89
---------------------------------- -------------------------
(16)
(17)
Designated bridge has priority 32768, address 00:0b:5d:89:00:aa
------------------------------------ -------------------------
(18)
(19)
Designated port id is 128.2, Designated path cost 20000
--------------------------- --------------------------
(20)
(21)
BPDU statistics:
Config BPDU: sent 902, sent error 0
--------- ------------
(22)
(23)
received 0, discarded 0
------------- -----------
(24)
(25)
TCN BPDU:
sent 0, sent error 0
------ ------------
(26)
(27)
received 0, discarded 0
---------- -----------
(28)
(29)
Other error: bad protocol 0, bad version 0
-------------- -------------
(30)
(31)
bad BPDU type 0
---------------
(32)
Other statistics:
Changed to forwarding state 1
---
(37)
1) Bridge priority
The bridge priority used for the bridge identifier of this device is displayed.
2) MAC address
The MAC address used for the bridge identifier of this device is displayed.
3) Configuration BPDU send interval
The configuration BPDU send interval (in seconds) is displayed.
4) Maximum wait time
The maximum wait time (in seconds) of configuration BPDUs is displayed.
5) Maximum forwarding delay time
The maximum forwarding delay time (in seconds) is displayed.
6) Priority of root bridge
The priority of the root bridge is displayed.
7) MAC address of root bridge
The MAC address of the root bridge is displayed.
Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation
464
Commands
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
8) Root port
The interface name of the root port is displayed.
If this device operates as the root bridge, the root port (Item (8)) and root path
cost (Item (9)) are not displayed. Only the following message is displayed.
This bridge is the root
9) Root path cost
The path cost to the root bridge is displayed.
10) Interface name and port status
One of the following is displayed for the port status.
Disabled
: The STP is disabled.
Discarding : The port is in the discarding state (it is displayed only when
RSTP or MSTP is active).
Blocking
Listening
Learning
: The port is in the blocking state.
: The port is in the listening state.
: The port is in the learning state.
Forwarding : The port is in the forwarding state.
11) STP version of port
One of the following is displayed for the STP version.
- (OFF)
: STP unused port
: 802.1d STP
0 (STP)
2 (RSTP)
3 (MSTP)
: 802.1w RSTP
: 802.1s MSTP
12) Port path cost
The path cost of the relevant port is displayed.
13) Port priority
The priority of the relevant port is displayed.
14) Port ID
The port ID (the port priority and port number) is displayed.
15) Port role
One of the following is displayed for the port role.
Disabled
Root
: The STP is disabled.
: Root port
Designated : Designated port
Blocking
Alternate
Backup
: Blocking port
: Alternate port (It is displayed only when RSTP or MSTP is active.)
: Backup port (It is displayed only when RSTP or MSTP is active.)
16) Priority of root bridge
The priority of the root bridge is displayed.
17) MAC address of root bridge
The MAC address of the root bridge is displayed.
18) Designated bridge priority
The priority of the designated bridge is displayed.
19) MAC address of designated bridge
The MAC address of the designated bridge is displayed.
20) Designated port ID
The designated port ID (the port priority and port number) is displayed.
Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation
465
Commands
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
21) Designated port path cost
The path cost of the designated port is displayed.
22) Number of configuration BPDU send times
The number of configuration BPDU send times is displayed.
23) Number of configuration BPDU send error times
The number of configuration BPDU send error times is displayed.
24) Number of configuration BPDU receive times
The number of configuration BPDU receive times is displayed.
25) Number of configuration BPDU receive discarding times
The number of configuration BPDU receive discarding times is displayed.
26) Number of TCN BPDU send times
The number of TCN BPDU send times is displayed.
27) Number of TCN BPDU send error times
The number of TCN BPDU send error times is displayed.
28) Number of TCN BPDU receive times
The number of TCN BPDU receive times is displayed.
29) Number of TCN BPDU receive discarding times
The number of TCN BPDU receive discarding times is displayed.
30) Number of protocol version error times
The number of discarding times due to protocol version error is displayed.
31) Number of version error times
The number of discarding times due to version error is displayed.
32) Number of BPDU type error times
The number of discarding times due to BPDU type error is displayed.
33) Number of topology change detection times
The number of topology change detection times is displayed.
34) Topology change detection time
The clock time when the topology change was lastly detected.
35) Elapsed time after topology change detection
The elapsed time after the topology change was lastly detected.
36) STP (IEEE802.1D) compatibility mode
One of the following is displayed for the STP (IEEE802.1D) compatible mode
operation of the port.
STP : The port is active in the STP compatible mode when the port version is
RSTP or MSTP.
-
: The port is not active in the compatible mode (but operating in the port's
operation version).
37) Number of forwarding status transition times
The number of times when the port was changed to the forwarding state is
displayed.
38) STP operation mode
The STP operation mode (disable/stp/rstp/mstp) of this device is displayed.
39) BPDU forwarding function
The BPDU forwarding function (on or off) defined on this device is displayed.
Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation
466
Commands
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.28.3.2 show spanning-tree instance
Function
Display the spanning tree information.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
show spanning-tree instance <instance_id> [detail]
Options
<instance_id>
Display the spanning tree information of the specified instance only.
detail
Display the spanning tree information of the specified instance in detail.
Use Mode
Operation mode (user class/admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Display the status of the MSTP spanning tree function.
Execution Example
Display of spanning tree information of instance 0
# show spanning-tree instance 0
MSTP Configuration Information
Region Name : region1 Revision Level : 0
--------------------- ------------------
(1)
Instance ID 0
-------------
(3)
(2)
Vlans 20-30
------------------------
(4)
Root ID
Priority
Address
Cost
32768
00:00:e2:08:57:89
200000
---(5)
---(6)
---(7)
---(8)
Port
1 (eth1)
Hello Time 2 sec Max Age 20 sec Forward Delay 15 sec
---------------- -------------- --------------------
(9)
(10)
(11)
Remaining Hops 20
-----------------
(12)
Bridge ID
Priority
Address
32768
00:0b:5d:89:00:aa
---(13)
---(14)
Hello Time 2 sec Max Age 20 sec Forward Delay 15 sec
---------------- -------------- --------------------
(15)
Hop count 20
-------------
(18)
(16)
(17)
BPDU Mode off
-------------
(19)
STP Mode mstp
-------------
(20)
(To be continued)
Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation
Commands
467
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
(Continued)
Interface
Port ID Cost
Status(Role)
Sent
Designated Bridge ID
Received
--------------- -------- ----------- ----------------------- ----------
eth1
----
(21)
128.1
-----
(22)
128.1
-----
(26)
128.2
128.2
128.3
0.0
128.4
128.4
128.5
128.4
128.6
0.0
128.7
0.0
128.8
0.0
128.9
0.0
128.10
0.0
128.11
0.0
128.12
0.0
128.13
128.2
128.14
0.0
128.15
0.0
20000* Forwarding(Root)
------- -----------------
137
---
(25)
137
---
(29)
137
135
0
(23)
(24)
0 0 00:00:e2:08:57:89
---- -----------------------
(27)
(28)
eth2
20000* Forwarding(Designated)
0 0 00:0b:5d:89:00:bb
0 Discarding(Disabled)
0 0 00:00:00:00:00:00
20000* Forwarding(Designated)
0 0 00:0b:5d:89:00:bb
20000* Discarding(Backup)
0 0 00:0b:5d:89:00:bb
0 Discarding(Disabled)
0 0 00:00:00:00:00:00
0 Discarding(Disabled)
0 0 00:00:00:00:00:00
0 Discarding(Disabled)
0 0 00:00:00:00:00:00
0 Discarding(Disabled)
0 0 00:00:00:00:00:00
0 Discarding(Disabled)
0 0 00:00:00:00:00:00
0 Discarding(Disabled)
0 0 00:00:00:00:00:00
0 Discarding(Disabled)
0 0 00:00:00:00:00:00
20000* Discarding(Backup)
0 0 00:0b:5d:89:00:bb
0 Discarding(Disabled)
0 0 00:00:00:00:00:00
0 Discarding(Disabled)
0 0 00:00:00:00:00:00
0 Discarding(Disabled)
0 0 00:00:00:00:00:00
eth3
0
eth4
137
137
137
136
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
eth5
eth6
eth7
eth8
eth9
eth10
eth11
eth12
eth13
eth14
eth15
eth16
0
138
137
0
0
0
0
0
0
128.16
0.0
1) Region Name
The region name is displayed.
2) Revision Level
The revision level is displayed.
3) Instance ID
The instance ID is displayed.
4) Vlans
The VLAN ID belonging to the instance is displayed.
5) Bridge priority
The priority of MSTI root bridge is displayed.
6) MAC address
The MAC address of MSTI root bridge is displayed.
7) Root path cost
The path cost to the MSTI root bridge is displayed.
8) Root port
The interface name of the root port is displayed.
9) Configuration BPDU send interval
The configuration BPDU send interval (in seconds) is displayed.
Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation
Commands
468
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
10) Maximum wait time (in seconds)
The maximum wait time (in seconds) of configuration BPDUs is displayed.
11) Maximum forwarding delay time (in seconds)
The maximum forwarding delay time (in seconds) is displayed.
12) Remaining hop count from root bridge
The remaining hop count from the root bridge is displayed.
13) Bridge priority
The bridge priority used for the bridge identifier of this device is displayed.
14) MAC address
The MAC address used for the bridge identifier of this device is displayed.
15) Configuration BPDU send interval
The configuration BPDU send interval (in seconds) is displayed.
16) Maximum wait time
The maximum wait time (in seconds) of configuration BPDUs is displayed.
17) Maximum forwarding delay time
The maximum forwarding delay time (in seconds) is displayed.
18) Hop count of maximum forwarding delay
The maximum forwarding delay time is displayed by hop counting.
19) BPDU forwarding function
The BPDU forwarding function (on or off) defined on this device is displayed.
20) STP operation mode
The STP operation mode (disable/stp/rstp/mstp) of this device is displayed.
21) Interface name
The interface name is displayed.
22) Port ID
The Port ID is displayed.
23) Port path cost
The path cost of the port is displayed (the cost value is followed by an asterisk
(*) if calculated automatically).
24) Port status and roles
One of the following is displayed for the port status.
Disabled
: The STP is disabled.
Discarding : The port is in the discarding state (it is displayed only when
RSTP or MSTP is active).
Blocking
Listening
Learning
: The port is in the blocking state.
: The port is in the listening state.
: The port is in the learning state.
Forwarding : The port is in the forwarding state.
One of the following is displayed for the port role.
: The STP is disabled.
: Root port
Disabled
Root
Designated : Designated port
Blocking
Alternate
Backup
: Blocking port
: Blocking port
: Backup port
Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation
Commands
469
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
25) Number of BPDU send times
The number of BPDU send times (the total value of all BPDU types) is
displayed.
26) Port ID of designated bridge
The port ID of the designated bridge is displayed.
27) Designated path cost of configuration BPDU
The designated path cost of the configuration BPDU is displayed.
28) Designated bridge ID
The designated bridge ID (the priority and MAC address) is displayed.
29) Number of BPDU receive times
The number of BPDU receive times (the total value of all BPDU types) is
displayed.
Display of spanning tree information of the specified instance other than
instance 0
# show spanning-tree instance 1
MSTP Configuration Information
Region Name : region1 Revision Level : 0
Instance ID 1
Vlans 120-130
Root ID
Priority
Address
Cost
32768
00:00:e2:08:57:89
200000
Port
1 (eth1)
Hello Time 2 sec Max Age 20 sec Forward Delay 15 sec
Remaining Hops 20
Bridge ID
Priority
Address
32768
00:0b:5d:89:00:aa
Hello Time 2 sec Max Age 20 sec Forward Delay 15 sec
Hop count 20
BPDU Mode off
STP Mode mstp
Interface
Port ID Cost
Status(Role)
Enable
Designated Bridge ID
--------------- -------- ----------- ----------------------- ----------
eth1
----
(1)
128.1
-----
(2)
20000* Forwarding(Root)
------- -----------------
*
---
(5)
(3)
(4)
128.1
-----
(6)
0 0 00:00:e2:08:57:89
---- -----------------------
(7) (8)
eth2
eth4
eth5
eth8
eth13
128.2
128.2
128.4
128.4
128.5
128.4
128.8
0.0
20000* Forwarding(Designated)
0 32769 00:0b:5d:89:00:bb
20000* Forwarding(Designated)
0 32769 00:0b:5d:89:00:bb
20000* Discarding(Backup)
0 32769 00:0b:5d:89:00:bb
0 Discarding(Disabled)
0 0 00:00:00:00:00:00
20000* Discarding(Backup)
0 32769 00:0b:5d:89:00:bb
*
*
*
128.13
128.2
*
1) Interface name
Only the active instances are displayed.
2) Port ID of each instance
The port ID of the specified instance is displayed.
3) Port path cost of each instance
The path cost of the port of the specified instance is displayed (the cost value is
followed by an asterisk (*) if calculated automatically).
4) Port status and role of the specified instance
One of the following is displayed for the port status.
Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation
470
Commands
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
Disabled
: The STP is disabled.
Discarding : The port is in the discarding state (it is displayed only when
RSTP or MSTP is active).
Blocking
Listening
Learning
: The port is in the blocking state.
: The port is in the listening state.
: The port is in the learning state.
Forwarding : The port is in the forwarding state.
One of the following is displayed for the port role.
: The STP is disabled.
: Root port
Disabled
Root
Designated : Designated port
Blocking
Alternate
Backup
: Blocking port
: Master port
: Backup port
5) Port operation status
The operation status of the port is displayed (an asterisk (*) is displayed when
enabled).
6) Port ID of designated bridge
The port ID of the designated bridge of the specified instance is displayed.
7) Designated path cost of BPDU
The designated path cost of BPDU of the specified instance is displayed.
8) Designated bridge ID
The designated bridge ID of the specified instance (the priority and MAC
address) is displayed.
Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation
471
Commands
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
Display of detailed spanning tree information of instance 0
# show spanning-tree instance 0 detail
MSTP Configuration Information
Region Name : region1 Revision Level : 0
Instance ID 1
Vlans 20-30
Root ID
Priority
Address
Cost
32768
00:00:e2:08:57:89
200000
Port
1 (eth1)
Hello Time 2 sec Max Age 20 sec Forward Delay 15 sec
Remaining Hops 20
Bridge ID
Priority
Address
32768
00:0b:5d:89:00:aa
Hello Time 2 sec Max Age 20 sec Forward Delay 15 sec
Hop count 20
BPDU Mode off
STP Mode mstp
Topology changes 2 Detected date 2011/01/01(Sat) 05:30:28
------------------ --------------------------------------
(27)
(28)
(time since 05:30:28)
--------------------
(29)
eth1 is Forwarding Port Version 3(MSTP) STP-Compatible(-) Boundary(*)
------------------ -------------------- ----------------- ----------
(1)
(2)
(30)
(31)
Port path cost 20000(auto), Port priority 128, Port Identifier 128.2
--------------------------- ----------------- ----------------------
(3)
(4)
(5)
Port role is Designated
-----------------------
(6)
Designated root has priority 0, address 00:0b:5d:89:00:bb
------------------------------ -------------------------
(7)
(8)
Designated bridge has priority 0, address 00:0b:5d:89:00:bb
-------------------------------- -------------------------
(9)
(10)
Designated port is 128.2, Designated path cost 0
------------------------- ------------------------
(11)
(12)
Port info type is Mine
---- (13)
Remaining Hops 20
--- (14)
This port is external region
--------------- (15)
(To be continued)
Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation
Commands
472
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
(Continued)
BPDU statistics:
Config BPDU: sent 141, sent error 0
-------- ------------
(16)
(17)
received 138, discarded 1
------------ -----------
(18)
(19)
TCN BPDU:
sent 0, sent error 0
------ ------------
(20)
(21)
received 0, discarded 0
---------- -----------
(22)
(23)
Other error: bad protocol 0, bad version 0
-------------- -------------
(24)
(25)
bad BPDU type 0
---------------
(26)
Other statistics:
changed to forwarding state 1
---
(32)
eth2 is Forwarding Port Version 3(MSTP) STP-Compatible(-) Boundary(-)
Port path cost 20000(auto), Port priority 128, Port Identifier 128.2
Port role is Designated
Designated root has priority 0, address 00:0b:5d:89:00:bb
Designated bridge has priority 0, address 00:0b:5d:89:00:bb
Designated port is 128.2, Designated path cost 0
Port info type is Mine
Remaining Hops 20
This port is internal region
BPDU statistics:
Config BPDU: sent 141, sent error 0
received 138, discarded 1
TCN BPDU:
sent 0, sent error 0
received 0, discarded 0
Other error: bad protocol 0, bad version 0
bad BPDU type 0
Other statistics:
Changed to forwarding state 1
1) Interface name and port status
One of the following is displayed for the port status.
Disabled
: The STP is disabled.
Discarding : The port is in the discarding state (it is displayed only when
RSTP or MSTP is active).
Blocking
Listening
Learning
: The port is in the blocking state.
: The port is in the listening state.
: The port is in the learning state.
Forwarding : The port is in the forwarding state.
2) STP version of port
One of the following is displayed for the STP version.
- (OFF)
: STP unused port
: 802.1d STP
0 (STP)
2 (RSTP)
3 (MSTP)
: 802.1w RSTP
: 802.1s MSTP
3) Port path cost
The path cost of the relevant port is displayed.
4) Port priority
The priority of the relevant port is displayed.
5) Port ID
The port ID (the port priority and port number) is displayed.
Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation
Commands
473
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
6) Port role
One of the following is displayed for the port role.
Disabled
Root
: The STP is disabled.
: Root port
Designated : Designated port
Blocking
Alternate
Backup
: Blocking port
: Master port
: Backup port
7) Priority of root bridge
The priority of the root bridge is displayed.
8) MAC address of root bridge
The MAC address of the root bridge is displayed.
9) Designated bridge priority
The priority of the designated bridge is displayed.
10) MAC address of designated bridge
The MAC address of the designated bridge is displayed.
11) Designated port ID
The designated port ID (the port priority and port number) is displayed.
12) Designated port path cost
The path cost of the designated port is displayed.
13) Port processing type
One of the following is displayed for the port processing type to be set by the
sent or received BPDU.
Disabled: Disabled port
Aged
Mine
: The MSTP BPDU receive timeout detection port
: MSTP BPDU packets sending port considered having
high port priority
Received
Unknown
: MSTP BPDU packets receiving port considered having
low port priority
: The port in the processing state other than above
14) Remaining hop count from root bridge
The remaining hop count from the root bridge is displayed.
15) MST region status
If the port is in a state other than "disabled", the connection status of MST region
is displayed.
internal region : Indicates the connection between the same region.
external region : Indicates the connection between different regions.
16) Number of configuration BPDU send times
The number of configuration BPDU send times is displayed.
17) Number of configuration BPDU send error times
The number of configuration BPDU send error times is displayed.
18) Number of configuration BPDU receive times
The number of configuration BPDU receive times is displayed.
19) Number of configuration BPDU receive discarding times
The number of configuration BPDU receive discarding times is displayed.
Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation
474
Commands
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
20) Number of TCN BPDU send times
The number of TCN BPDU send times is displayed.
21) Number of TCN BPDU send error times
The number of TCN BPDU send error times is displayed.
22) Number of TCN BPDU receive times
The number of TCN BPDU receive times is displayed.
23) Number of TCN BPDU receive discarding times
The number of TCN BPDU receive discarding times is displayed.
24) Number of protocol version error times
The number of discarding times due to protocol version error is displayed.
25) Number of version error times
The number of discarding times due to version error is displayed.
26) Number of BPDU type error times
The number of discarding times due to BPDU type error is displayed.
27) Number of topology change detection times
The number of topology change detection times is displayed.
28) Topology change detection time
The clock time when the topology change was lastly detected.
29) Elapsed time after topology change detection
The elapsed time after the topology change was lastly detected.
30) STP (IEEE802.1D) compatibility mode
One of the following is displayed for the STP (IEEE802.1D) compatible mode
operation of the port.
STP : The port is active in the STP compatible mode when the port version is
RSTP or MSTP.
-
: The port is not active in the compatible mode (but operating in the port's
operation version).
31) Boundary port status
The boundary port status of the region is displayed as follows.
However, if the port role at the opposite device is an alternate or backup, that
port may never receive the "BPDU". In such cases, the boundary port status is
not displayed.
*
-
: Indicates that the port is active as the boundary port.
: Indicates that the port is NOT active as the boundary port.
32) Number of forwarding status transition times
The number of times when the port was changed to the forwarding state is
displayed.
Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation
475
Commands
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
Display of detailed spanning tree information of the specified instance
other than instance 0
# show spanning-tree instance 1 detail
MSTP Configuration Information
Region Name : region1 Revision Level : 0
Instance ID 1
Vlans 120-130
Root ID
Priority
Address
Cost
32768
00:00:e2:08:57:89
200000
Port
1 (eth1)
Hello Time 2 sec Max Age 20 sec Forward Delay 15 sec
Remaining Hops 20
Bridge ID
Priority
Address
32768
00:0b:5d:89:00:aa
Hello Time 2 sec Max Age 20 sec Forward Delay 15 sec
Hop count 20
BPDU Mode off
STP Mode mstp
Topology changes 2 Detected date 2011/01/01(Sat) 05:30:28
------------------ --------------------------------------
(15)
(16)
(time since 05:30:28)
--------------------
(17)
eth2 is Forwarding Port Version 3(MSTP)
------------------ --------------------
(1)
(2)
Port path cost 20000(auto), Port priority 128, Port Identifier 128.2
--------------------------- ----------------- ----------------------
(3)
(4)
(5)
Port role is Designated
-----------------------
(6)
Designated root has priority 40961, address 00:0b:5d:89:00:bb
---------------------------------- -------------------------
(7)
(8)
Designated bridge has priority 40961, address 00:0b:5d:89:00:bb
------------------------------------ -------------------------
(9)
(10)
Designated port is 128.2, Designated path cost 0
------------------------- ------------------------
(11)
(12)
Port info type is Mine
-----
(13)
Remaining Hops 20
--
(14)
Other statistics:
changed to forwarding state 1
---
(18)
eth8 is Forwarding Port Version 3(MSTP)
Port path cost 20000(auto), Port priority 128, Port Identifier 128.8
Port role is Designated
Designated root has priority 40961, address 00:0b:5d:89:00:bb
Designated bridge has priority 40961, address 00:0b:5d:89:00:bb
Designated port is 128.8, Designated path cost 0
Port info type is Mine
Remaining Hops 20
Other statistics:
changed to forwarding state 1
Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation
476
Commands
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
1) Interface name and port status of the specified instance
One of the following is displayed for the port status of the specified instance.
Disabled : The STP is disabled.
Discarding : The port is in the discarding state (it is displayed only when
RSTP or MSTP is active).
Blocking
Listening
Learning
: The port is in the blocking state.
: The port is in the listening state.
: The port is in the learning state.
Forwarding : The port is in the forwarding state.
2) STP version of port
One of the following is displayed for the STP version.
- (OFF)
: STP unused port
: 802.1d STP
0 (STP)
2 (RSTP)
3 (MSTP)
: 802.1w RSTP
: 802.1s MSTP
3) Port path cost
The path cost of the relevant port of the specified instance is displayed.
4) Port priority
The priority of the relevant port of the specified instance is displayed.
5) Port ID
The port ID of the specified instance (the port priority and port number) is
displayed.
6) Port role
One of the following is displayed for the port role of the specified instance.
Disabled
Root
: The STP is disabled.
: Root port
Designated : Designated port
Blocking
Alternate
Backup
Master
: Blocking port
: Master port
: Backup port
: Master port
7) Priority of root bridge
The priority of root bridge of the specified instance is displayed.
8) MAC address of root bridge
The MAC address of root bridge of the specified instance is displayed.
9) Designated bridge priority
The priority of the designated bridge of the specified instance is displayed.
10) MAC address of designated bridge
The MAC address of the designated bridge of the specified instance is
displayed.
11) Designated port ID
The designated port ID of the specified instance (the port priority and port
number) is displayed.
12) Designated port path cost
The path cost of the designated port of the specified instance is displayed.
Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation
477
Commands
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
13) Port processing type of the specified instance
One of the following is displayed for the port processing type to be set by the
sent or received BPDU.
Disabled
Aged
: Disabled port
: The MSTP BPDU receive timeout detection port
: MSTP BPDU packets sending port considered having high port
priority
Mine
Received
Unknown
: MSTP BPDU packets receiving port considered having low port
priority
: The port in the processing state other than above
14) Remaining hop count from root bridge
The remaining hop count from the root bridge of the specified instance is
displayed.
15) Number of topology change detection times
The number of topology change detection times is displayed.
16) Topology change detection time
The clock time when the topology change was lastly detected.
17) Elapsed time after topology change detection
The elapsed time after the topology change was lastly detected.
18) Number of forwarding status transition times
The number of times when the port was changed to the forwarding state is
displayed.
Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation
478
Commands
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.28.4 Spanning Tree Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Clear
Commands
This section explains the commands related to spanning tree counter, log, statistics, and status clearing.
5.28.4.1 clear spanning-tree statistics
Function
Clear the statistics relating to the spanning tree.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
clear spanning-tree statistics
N/A
Options
Use Mode
Operation mode (admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Clear the spanning tree related statistics.
Execution Example
# clear spanning-tree statistics
#
Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation
Commands
479
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.29 LLDP Counter, Log, Statistics, and
Status Display and Clear Operation
Commands
This section explains about commands related to LLDP Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation
Commands.
5.29.1 LLDP Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display
Commands
This section explains about commands related to LLDP Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display Commands.
5.29.1.1 show lldp
Function
Display LLDP Information
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
show lldp [port <portlist>] [detail]
Options
N/A
Disokay all LLDP information of the ports which LLDP function is enabled on
port <portlist>
• Port list
Specify the port list to display LLDP information
When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).
When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-).
(Example: "1-8")
detail
Display detailed LLDP information
Use Mode
Operation mode (user class/admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Display LLDP information
LLDP Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation
480
Commands
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
Execution Example
# show lldp
Send Interval Time
Send Hold Count
Send Delay
Reinit Delay
Notification Interval Time
: 30 seconds
: 4 times
: 2 seconds
: 2 seconds
: 5 seconds
---(1)
---(2)
---(3)
---(4)
---(5)
Port Mode
---- ------- ----
Size
Info P N D C A
--------------
(9)
P p N I
-------
(10)
M P L F
-------
(11)
T
-
(6)
1
2
(7)
enable 274
receive 0
(8)
(12)
-
P N D C A
P p N I
M P L F
8
send
179
P - D C A
P p N -
M - - -
-
Entry:3 ---(30)
#
# show lldp port 1,8 detail
Send Interval Time
Send Hold Count
Send Delay
Reinit Delay
: 30 seconds
: 4 times
: 2 seconds
: 2 seconds
: 5 seconds
---(1)
---(2)
---(3)
---(4)
---(5)
Notification Interval Time
[PORT 1]
---(6)
---(7)
---(8)
---(13)
---(14)
---(15)
---(16)
---(17)
Configuration Mode
Send LLDPDU size
Chassis ID
: enable
: 274 octets
: subtype=4(MAC) info=00:0b:5d:fd:05:b2
: subtype=5(ifName) info="1"
: 120 seconds
Port ID
Time To Live(TTL)
Port Description
System Name
: info="EthernetPort(ether1)"
: info=""
System Description
JST
: info="'SBAX2' '1.2 V01.00' 'Wed Feb 13 15:23:07
2008'"
---(18)
---(19)
System Capabilities
enabled=Bridge
Management Address
: info=Bridge,Router
: address subtype=1(IPv4) info=192.168.2.1 ---(20)
interface number subtype=2(ifIndex) info=3
oid=""
Management Address
: address subtype=6(MAC) info=00:0b:5d:fd:05:b3
interface number subtype=2(ifIndex) info=7001
oid=""
IEEE802.1
Port VLAN ID
Port And Protocol VLAN ID
: PVID=10
: flags=supported,enabled
PPVID=20
---(21)
---(22)
Port And Protocol VLAN ID : flags=supported,enabled
PPVID=21
VLAN Name
VLAN Name
VLAN Name
VLAN Name
IEEE802.3
: VID=10
name="portvlan10"
: VID=20
name="protocolvlan20"
: VID=21
name="protocolvlan21"
: VID=30
name="taggedvlan30"
---(23)
MAC/PHY Configuration/Status : support/status=supported,enabled ---(25)
capability=1(10BASE-T half duplex mode),
2(10BASE-T full duplex mode),
4(100BASE-TX half duplex mode),
5(100BASE-TX full duplex mode),
8(PAUSE for full-duplex links),
11(Asymmetric and Symmetric PAUSE
for full-duplex links),
15(1000BASE-T full duplex mode)
type=16(100BASE-TX full duplex mode)
Power Via MDI
Link Aggregation
Maximum Frame Size
SNMP Notification Trap Send
: support=PSE,not supported
: status=capable,not in aggregation
: size=9216
---(26)
---(27)
---(28)
---(29)
: disable
(To be continued)
LLDP Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation
Commands
481
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
(Continued)
[PORT 8]
Configuration Mode
: send
Send LLDPDU size
Chassis ID
Port ID
: 179 octets
: subtype=4(MAC) info=00:0b:5d:fd:05:b2ц
: subtype=5(ifName) info="8"
Time To Live(TTL)
Port Description
System Description
2008'"
: 120 seconds
: info="EthernetPort(ether8)"
: info="'SBAX2' '1.2 V01.00' 'Wed Feb 13 15:23:07 JST
System Capabilities
: info=Bridge,Router
enabled=Bridge
Management Address
: address subtype=1(IPv4) info=192.168.1.1
interface number subtype=2(ifIndex) info=1
oid=""
Management Address
: address subtype=6(MAC) info=00:0b:5d:fd:05:ba
interface number subtype=2(ifIndex) info=7008
oid=""
IEEE802.1
Port VLAN ID
: PVID=1
Port And Protocol VLAN ID
PPVID=0
: flags=supported,disabled
VLAN Name
: VID=1
name="default"
IEEE802.3
MAC/PHY Configuration/Status
: support/status=supported,enabled
capability=1(10BASE-T half duplex mode),
2(10BASE-T full duplex mode),
4(100BASE-TX half duplex mode),
5(100BASE-TX full duplex mode),
8(PAUSE for full-duplex links),
11(Asymmetric and Symmetric PAUSE
for full-duplex links),
15(1000BASE-T full duplex mode)
type=16(100BASE-TX full duplex mode)
SNMP Notification Trap Send : disable
Entry:2
---(30)
1) LLDPDU send interval time(s)
Setting value by lldp send interval command
2) LLDP hold count (times)
Setting value by lldp send hold command
3) LLDP Send delay time(s)
Setting value by lldp send interval command
4) LLDP Reinit delay time(s)
Seting value by lldp reinit delay command
5) LLDP SNMP Notification Trap interval time (s)
Setting value by lldp notification interval command
6) Physical port number
Ether port number
7) Mode
Setting value by lldp mode command
enable
send
: send and recive
: send only
receive : recive only
When mode is receive, information from (8) to (28) is not displayed.
8) LLDPDU (LLDP Protocol Data Unit) Size
LLDPDU size (octets)
LLDP Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation
Commands
482
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
9) LLDP send information
Setting value by lldp info command
P
N
D
C
A
-
: Send Port Description TLV
: Send System Name TLV
: Send System Description TLV
: Send System Capabilities TLV
: Send Management Address TLV
: disable
10) IEEE802.1 LLDP send information
P
p
N
I
: Port VLAN ID
: Port And Protocol VLAN ID
: VLAN Name
: Protocol Identity
: disable
-
11) IEEE802.3 LLDP send information
M
P
L
F
-
: MAC/PHY Configuration/Status
: Power Via MDI
: Link Aggregation
: Maximum Frame Size
: disable
12) SNMP Trap notification
T
-
: SNMP Notification Trap
: disable
13) Chassis ID information
Value which is sent with Chassis ID TLV
subtype= : subtype value (4 is MAC address)
info= : representative MAC address
14) Port ID information
Value which is sent with Port ID TLV
15) LLDP TTL information (s) information
Value which is sent with Time To Live (TTL) TLV
16) Port description information
Value which is sent with Port Description TLV
When port-description is disabled by lldp info command, this value is not
displayed.
17) System name informationiweowqerwuwqurwqrqwr
Value which is sent with System Name TLV
When system-name is disabled by lldp info command, this value is not
displayed.
18) System description information
Value which is sent with System Description TLV
When system-description is disabled by lldp info command, this value is not
displayed.
LLDP Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation
483
Commands
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
19) System Capabilities information
Value which is sent with System Capabilities TLV
info=
: Available function
enabled= : Enabled function
Bridge
Router
: Bridge functon
: Router function
When system-description is disabled by lldp info command, this value is not
displayed.
20) Management address information
Value which is sent with Management Address TLV
When SNMP agent address is set, IPv4 address and MAC address are
displayed.
When management-address is disabled by lldp info command, this value is not
displayed.
21) Port VLAN ID information
Value which is sen with ID TLV
When port-vlan-id is disabled by lldp info command, this value is not displayed.
22) Protocol information
Value which is sent with ocol VLAN ID TLV
When port-and-protocol-vlan-id is disabled by lldp info command, this value is
not displayed.
23) VLAN name information
Value which is sent with IEEE802.1 VLAN Name TLV
When vlan-name is disabled by lldp info command, this value is not displayed.
24) Protocol ID information
Value which is sent with IEEE802.1 Protocol Identity TLV
This value is not displayed.
25) MAC/PHY Configuration/Status information
Value which is sent with IEEE802.3 MAC/PHY Configuration/Status TLV.
When mac-phy-configuration-status is disabled by lldp info command, this value
is not displayed.
26) Power via MDI information
Value which is sent with IEEE802.3 Power Via MDI TLV
support=
PSE
: Function Information
: Power supply function
: Power demand function
: No function
PD
not supported
supported
disabled
enabled
: Supported
: Disable function
: Enable function
When power-via-mdi is disabled by lldp info command,
this value is not displayed.
27) Linkaggregation information
Value which is sent with linkaggregation TLV
When link-aggregation is disabled by lldp info command, this value is not
displayed.
LLDP Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation
484
Commands
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
28) Maximum Frame length Size
Value which is sent with IEEE802.3 Maximum Frame Size TLV
When maximum-frame-size is disabled by lldp info command, this value is not
displayed.
29) SNMP Notification Trap
SNMP Notification Trap setting
30) Number of ports which LLDP function is enabled in
When port option is not specified, Number of port which LLDP function is
enabled
in is displayed.
LLDP Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation
485
Commands
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.29.1.2 show lldp summary
Function
Display LLDP summary information
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
show lldp summary
N/A
Options
Use Mode
Operation mode (user class/admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Display the number of ports which is LLDP function is enabled in
Execution Example
# show lldp summary
Send Entry : 2
Receive Entry : 2
---(1)
---(2)
#
1) Number of ports which LLDP send is enabled in
2) Number of ports which LLDP receive is enabled in
5.29.1.3 show lldp neighbors
Function
Display neighbor LLDP device information
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
show lldp neighbors [port <portlist>] [detail]
Options
N/A
Display all neighbor LLDP device information
port <portlist>
• port list
Specify the port list to display neignbor LLDP device information.
When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).
When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-).
(Example: "1-8")
detail
Display the detailed neighbor LLDP device information
Use Mode
Operation mode (user class/admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Display neighbor LLDP device information
LLDP Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation
Commands
486
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
Execution Example
# show lldp neighbors
Port Neighbor Counts
---- ---------------
(1) (2)
1
2
1
0
#
# show lldp neighbors port 1-2 detail
[PORT 1]
Neighbor Counts : 1
Neighbor 1
---(1)
---(2)
---(3)
Chassis ID
Port ID
Time To Live(TTL)
Port Description
System Name
: subtype=4(MAC) info=02:00:0e:d1:47:80
: subtype=5(ifName) info="MB/0"
: 120 seconds
: info="EthernetPort(MB/line0)"
: info=""
---(4)
---(5)
---(6)
---(7)
---(8)
System Description
ST 2008'"
: info="'Si-R180B' '128.0 V34.00' 'Wed Feb 13 13:11:14 J
System Capabilities
: info=Router
enabled=Router
: address subtype=1(IPv4) info=192.168.1.181
interface number subtype=2(ifIndex) info=10000
---(10)
---(11)
Management Address
Management Address
oid=""
: address subtype=6(MAC) info=02:00:0e:d1:47:80
interface number subtype=2(ifIndex) info=1
oid=""
IEEE802.1
Port VLAN ID
: PVID=0
---(12)
Port And Protocol VLAN ID
: flags=not supported,disabled
---(13)
PPVID=0
: VID=30
VLAN Name
---(14)
name="lan9"
IEEE802.3
MAC/PHY Configuration/Status
: support/status=supported,enabled
---(16)
capability=1(10BASE-T half duplex mode),
2(10BASE-T full duplex mode),
4(100BASE-TX half duplex mode),
5(100BASE-TX full duplex mode)
type=16(100BASE-TX full duplex mode)
Power Via MDI
Link Aggregation
Maximum Frame Size
: support=PSE,not supported
: status=not capable
: size=1500
---(17)
---(18)
---(19)
[PORT 2]
Neighbor Counts : 0
#
1) Physical port number
Ether port number
2) Number of neighbor devices
Number of neighbor devices information which is received
3) Neighbor ID
Neighbor ID
4) Chassis ID
Value which is received with Chassis ID TLV
subtype= : subtype value (4 is MAC address)
info= : representative MAC address
5) Port ID information
Value which is recived with Port ID TLV
6) LLDP TTL information (s) information
Value which is received with Time To Live (TTL) TLV
LLDP Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation
Commands
487
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
7) Port description information
Value which is sent with Port Description TLV
8) System name informationiweowqerwuwqurwqrqwr
Value which is received with System Name TLV
9) System description information
Value which is received with System Description TLV
10) System Capabilities information
Value which is received with System Capabilities TLV
info=
: Available function
enabled= : Enabled function
Bridge
Router
: Bridge functon
: Router function
11) Management address information
Value which is received with Management Address TLV
12) Port VLAN ID information
Value which is received with ID TLV
13) Protocol information
Value which is received with ocol VLAN ID TLV
14) VLAN name information
Value which is received with IEEE802.1 VLAN Name TLV
15) Protocol ID information
Value which is received with IEEE802.1 Protocol Identity TLV
16) MAC/PHY Configuration/Status information
Value which is received with IEEE802.3 MAC/PHY Configuration/Status TLV.
17) Power via MDI information
Value which is received with IEEE802.3 Power Via MDI TLV
18) Linkaggregation information
Value which is received with linkaggregation TLV
19) Maximum Frame length Size
Value which is received with IEEE802.3 Maximum Frame Size TLV
LLDP Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation
488
Commands
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.29.1.4 show lldp statistics
Function
Display LLDP statistics information
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
show lldp statistics [port <portlist>] [detail]
Options
N/A
Display LLDP statistics information of all ports which LLDP function is enabled in
port <portlist>
• port list
Specify the port to display LLDP statistics information
When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).
When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-).
(Example: "1-8")
detail
Display the detailed LLDP informatuion
Use Mode
Operation mode (user class/admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Display LLDP statistics information
Execution Example
# show lldp statistics
Port Sent packets Received packets
---- ------------ ----------------
(1)
1
2
(2)
76
-
(3)
82
0
8
48
-
1) physical port number
2) Number of times of send
3) Number of times of receive
LLDP Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation
Commands
489
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
# show lldp statistics detail
[Neighbor tables statistics]
Last changed time
Tables inserts
Tables deletes
Tables drops
: Wed Feb 13 16:09:01 2008
---(1)
---(2)
---(3)
---(4)
---(5)
:
:
:
:
3
0
0
2
Tables ageouts
[PORT 1] ---(6)
Sent packets
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
77
82
0
0
0
---(7)
---(8)
---(9)
---(10)
---(11)
---(12)
---(13)
Received packets
Packets discarded total
Packets errors
TLVs discarded total
TLVs unrecognized total
Ageouts total
0
2
[PORT 2]
Sent packets
----(6)
----(7)
----(8)
----(9)
---(10)
---(11)
---(12)
---(13)
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
-
0
0
0
0
0
0
Received packets
Packets discarded total
Packets errors
TLVs discarded total
TLVs unrecognized total
Ageouts total
[PORT 8]
Sent packets
Received packets
----(6)
----(7)
----(8)
:
:
49
-
1) Time which neighbor information is changed at
lldpStatsRemTablesLastChangeTime
2) Number of times which neighbor information is registered
lldpStatsRemTablesInserts
3) Number of times which neighbor device information is deleted
lldpStatsRemTablesDeletes
4) Number of times which neighbor device information is discarded
lldpStatsRemTablesDrops
5) Number of times which neighbor device information is aged out
lldpStatsRemTablesAgeouts
6) Physical port number
lldpStatsTxPortNum, lldpStatsRxPortNum
7) Number of LLDP frames which are sent
lldpStatsTxPortFramesTotal
8) Number of LLDP frames which are received
lldpStatsRxPortFramesTotal
9) Number of LLDP frames are discarded after receive
lldpStatsRxPortFramesDiscardedTotal
10) Number of Error LLDP frames
lldpStatsRxPortFramesErrors
11) Nymber of TLVs are discarded after receive
lldpStatsRxPortTLVsDiscardedTotal
12) Number of unknown TLVs
lldpStatsRxPortTLVsUnrecognizedTotal
13) Number of neighbor device information is aged out
lldpStatsRxPortAgeoutsTotal
LLDP Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation
Commands
490
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.29.2 LLDP Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Clear
Commands
This section explains about commands related to LLDP Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Clear Commands.
5.29.2.1 clear lldp neighbors
Function
Clear LLDP neighbor information
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
clear lldp neighbors
N/A
Options
Use Mode
Operation mode (admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Clear LLDP neighbor information
Execution Example
# clear lldp neighbors
#
5.29.2.2 clear lldp statistics
Function
Clear LLDP statistics information
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
clear lldp statistics
N/A
Options
Use Mode
Operation mode (admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Clear LLDP statistics information
Execution Example
# clear lldp statistics
#
LLDP Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation
Commands
491
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.30 VLAN Counter, Log, Statistics, and
Status Display Commands
This section explains the commands related to VLAN.
5.30.1 VLAN Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display
Commands
This section explains the commands related to VLAN counter, log, statistics, and status display.
5.30.1.1 show vlan
Function
Display the VLAN setting Information.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
show vlan
show vlan summary
show vlan interface
show vlan vid <vlan_id>
Options
N/A
Display all VLAN information and the number of VLANs of the registered VLAN
configuration.
summary
Display only the number of VLANs of the registered VLAN configuration.
interface
Display all VLAN information about the registered VLAN configuration.
vid
Display VLAN configuration specified by the VLAN ID option.
<vlan_id>
VLAN ID: Specify it with a decimal number from 1 to 4094.
Use Mode
Operation mode (user class/admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Display the VLAN setting information.
VLAN Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display Commands
492
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
Execution Example
# show vlan
VID Interface
Tag
Type
Description
---- ---------------- ------------ -------- -----------------------
(1) (2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
1
ether5
ether6
untagged
untagged
port
default
10
ether7
linkaggregation1
dot1q-tagged port
dot1q-tagged
v10
100 ether8
200 ether13
ether14
300 ether15
ether16
1000 linkaggregation8
4000 ether11
ether12
untagged
untagged
untagged
untagged
untagged
untagged
port
protocol v200
v100
ipv4
port
v300
v1000
v4000
dot1q-tagged port
untagged
Category
Count
----------------- -----
(6)
Port VLAN
Protocol VLAN
5
2
----------------- -----
Total
7
#
Display of only the number of registered VLAN
# show vlan interface
VID Interface
Tag
Type
Description
---- ---------------- ------------ -------- -----------------------
1
ether5
ether6
ether7
linkaggregation1
untagged
untagged
dot1q-tagged port
dot1q-tagged
port
default
v10
10
100 ether8
200 ether13
ether14
300 ether15
ether16
1000 linkaggregation8
4000 ether11
ether12
untagged
untagged
untagged
untagged
untagged
untagged
port
protocol v200
v100
ipv4
port
v300
v1000
v4000
dot1q-tagged port
untagged
#
Display of the registered VLAN configuration only
# show vlan vid 10
VID Interface
Tag
Type
Description
---- -------------- ----------- ------- --------------------------
10
#
ether7
linkaggregation1
dot1q-tagged port
dot1q-tagged
v10
1) VLAN number
2) Interface
ether
: Ethernet port number
linkaggregation : Link aggregation port number
VLAN Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display Commands
493
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
3) Tag type
untagged
dot1q-tagged : Tagged vlan
: Untagged vlan
4) VLAN type
por
: Port VLAN
ipv4
: IPv4 protocol VLAN
: IPv6 protocol VLAN
: FNA protocol VLAN
: Protocol VLAN
ipv6
fna
protocol
5) VLAN number
6) Number of entries of each VLAN type, and total number of VLAN entries
5.30.1.2 show vlan brief
Function
Display the VLAN setting Information briefly.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
show vlan brief
N/A
Options
Use Mode
Operation mode (user class/admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Display the VLAN setting information briefly.
Execution Example
# show vlan brief
Codes: U - Untagged, P - Untagged(Protocol VLAN), T - Tagged
VID 1
8 9
16 17
24 25 26
---- -------- -------- -------- -- --
(1) (2)
10 UUUUUUUU -------- -------- T T
11 -------- UUUUUUUU -------- T T
12 -------- -------- PPPPPPPP T T
#
1) VLAN number
2) Tag type
U: Untagged VLAN
P: Untagged VLAN(Protocol VLAN)
T: Tagged VLAN
-: Not in use
VLAN Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display Commands
494
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.31 QoS Counter, Log, Statistics, and
Status Display Commands
This section explains commands related to COS queue.
5.31.1 COS Queue Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display
Commands
This section explains commands related to COS queue counter, log, statistics, and status display.
5.31.1.1 show qos cosmap
Function
Display the correspondence between the COS value and storage queue for a packet.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448
Syntax
show qos cosmap
N/A
Options
Use Mode
Operation mode (user class/admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Display the relationship between packet COS values and their storage queues.
Execution Example
# show qos cosmap
COSvalue Queue
-------- -----
(1)
0
(2)
2
1
0
2
1
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
1) COSvalue
COS value of packet
2) Queue
Storage queue
QoS Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display Commands
495
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.31.1.2 show qos prioritymap
Function
Display the correspondence between the COS value and storage queue for a packet.
Available Model XG2600
Syntax
show qos prioritymap [line <line>]
Options
N/A
Display the relationship between packet COS values and their storage queues of all
ports.
line <line>
• Display the relationship between packet COS values and their storage queues of the
specified port.
Range
Model
1 to 26
XG02600
When specifying multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).
When specifying sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")
Use Mode
Operation mode (user class/admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Display the relationship between packet COS values and their storage queues.
Execution Example
# show qos prioritymap line 1-5
Port Priority value : Queue, ...
---- --------------------------------------
(1) (2)
1 0:1, 1,0, 2:1, 3:3, 4:4, 5:5, 6:6, 7:7
2 0:1, 1,0, 2:1, 3:3, 4:4, 5:5, 6:7, 7:6
3 0:1, 1,0, 2:1, 3:3, 4:4, 5:5, 6:5, 7:5
4 0:1, 1,0, 2:1, 3:3, 4:5, 5:4, 6:6, 7:7
5 0:1, 1,0, 2:1, 3:3, 4:4, 5:5, 6:6, 7:7
1) Port
: Ethernet physical port number
: Queue
2) Priority value
COS value of packet :Storage queue
QoS Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display Commands
496
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.32 SSH Counter, Log, Statistics, and
Status Display Commands
This section explains about commands related to SSH.
5.32.1 SSH Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display
Commands
This section explains about commands related to SSH counter, log, statistics, and status display commands.
5.32.1.1 show ssh server key
Function
Display the public key for SSH host authentication.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
show ssh server key {dsa|rsa}
Options
dsa
Display the DSA public key for SSH host authentication of this device.
rsa
Display the RSA public key for SSH host authentication of this device.
Use Mode
Operation mode (user class/admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Display the public key for SSH host authentication of this device.
This key is used for SSH protocol version 2 (SSH2) host authentication.
As the DSA public key encryption system or the RSA public key encryption system is
used for SSH host authentication, specify either of the public key.
If the host authentication public key needs to be set in the ssh client or sftp client in
advance, set the information displayed by this command.
Caution
If all of the SSH-related functions are disabled by the "serverinfo ssh" and "serverinfo
sftp" commands, the SSH host authentication public key is not created. Therefore,
nothing is displayed.
However, if those functions are enabled and then disabled, a public key for SSH host
authentication is created and displayed.
SSH Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display Commands
497
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
Execution Example
Display of the DSA public key
# show ssh server key dsa
ssh-dss AzaCJB5CpVUXI1LXjzNVo1kt/LHGhWlOleJQDj11tGeeAAAFKoNjMatP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 root@localhost
#
--- (1)
1) The DSA public key for host authentication of this device
Display of the RSA public key
# show ssh server key rsa
ssh-rsa AA94UAATdVfYAAxsAArx3AAIF7QAsTsTwAEeKogAFAlNoAA0OAAAAj3F
AAD3C1yc2EAAAABIwAAAHsMXKAAB+shGQAHDmIABBSpjAARVYAAERAAJZ/IAAAAB
0AB9QAB+2kSY6AAUAygACvAAB3NzaA7wtAAJ/kAADRQgABwmQAThHAAUtOySgAEJ
JMBAAX4= root@localhost
#
--- (1)
1) The RSA public key for host authentication of this device
SSH Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display Commands
498
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.33 IGMP Snooping Counter, Log,
Statistics, and Status Display and
Clear Operation Commands
This section explains commands related to IGMP snooping.
5.33.1 IGMP Snooping Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status
Display Commands
This section explains commands related to IGMP snooping counter, log, statistics, and status display.
5.33.1.1 show igmpsnoop brief
Function
Display the brief information on IGMP snooping.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
show igmpsnoop brief
Options
N/A
Display the number of groups held by IGMP snooping.
Use Mode
Operation mode (user class/admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Display IGMP snooping information in a simple format.
Execution Example
# show igmpsnoop brief
IGMP snoop briefing information:
(1) total registered entries: 0
1) The number of group address held by IGMP snooping
IGMP Snooping Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear
Operation Commands
499
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.33.1.2 show igmpsnoop mrouter
Function
Display the multicast router port information.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
show igmpsnoop mrouter [<vidlist>]
Options
N/A
Display information about all VLANs with the valid IGMP snooping.
<vidlist>
Specify a VID of VLAN to display the IGMP snooping information.
When specifying multiple VLANs, separate them with commas (,).
Also, when specifying the range, specify them with hyphens (-). (Example: 1-3)
The available description format is as follows:
• To specify values 1, 2, 3, 5 and 7 in the "vidlist"
Example: 1-3, 5, 7
• To specify values 1, 3 and 5 in the "vidlist"
Example: 1, 3, 5
Use Mode
Operation mode (user class/admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Display the multicast router port information held by IGMP snooping.
Execution Example
# show igmpsnoop mrouter
VLAN querier
port
---- ---------- --------
(1)
1
(2)
(3)
other(off) 1
2
3
4
other
me
me
5
5
-
1) VLAN ID
2) Querier operation display
One of the following is displayed.
me
: Indicates that the port is operating as the querier.
other
: Indicates that the port is NOT operating as the querier.
other (off) : Indicates that the port is NOT operating as the querier due to the
settings.
3) Number of the multicast router connection port
A hyphen (-) shows that no router port exists.
IGMP Snooping Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear
500
Operation Commands
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.33.1.3 show igmpsnoop reporter
Function
Display the multicast listener information.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
show igmpsnoop reporter [<vidlist>]
Options
N/A
Display information about all VLANs with the valid IGMP snooping.
<vidlist>
Specify a VID of VLAN to display the IGMP snooping information.
When specifying multiple VLANs, separate them with commas (,).
Also, when specifying the range, specify them with hyphens (-). (Example: 1-3)
The available description format is as follows:
• To specify values 1, 2, 3, 5 and 7 in the "vidlist"
Example: 1-3, 5, 7
• To specify values 1, 3 and 5 in the "vidlist"
Example: 1, 3, 5
Use Mode
Operation mode (user class/admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Display the multicast listener information being held by IGMP snooping.
Execution Example
# show igmpsnoop reporter 1-3
IGMP Snooping statistics: VLAN 1
#sources: 0
#hosts:
(1)
(2)
4
Source/Group
Port Reporter
Join
------------------------------- ---- --------------- --------
(3)
0.0.0.0
(4) (5)
(6)
1:10:00
1:10:02
1:10:03
1:10:03
-
/239.1.1.1
1
2
3
3
-
10.5.20.18
10.5.20.31
10.5.20.22
10.5.20.25
-
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
/239.1.1.2
/239.1.1.3
/239.1.1.10
1) The number of source address information
2) The number of registered listener information
3) Source address and multicast group address
4) Port number
A hyphen (-) shows a group where no listener exists.
5) IP address to which the Membership-Report has been sent
A hyphen (-) shows a group where no listener exists.
6) The elapsed time after participation in the multicast group
If no listener exists, a hyphen (-) is shown.
IGMP Snooping Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear
Operation Commands
501
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.33.1.4 show igmpsnoop statistics
Function
Display the IGMP snooping statistics.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
show igmpsnoop statistics [<vidlist>]
Options
N/A
Display information about all VLANs with the valid IGMP snooping.
<vidlist>
Specify a VID of VLAN to display the IGMP snooping information.
When specifying multiple VLANs, separate them with commas (,).
Also, when specifying the range, specify them with hyphens (-). (Example: 1-3)
The available description format is as follows:
• To specify values 1, 2, 3, 5 and 7 in the "vidlist"
Example: 1-3, 5, 7
• To specify values 1, 3 and 5 in the "vidlist"
Example: 1, 3, 5
Use Mode
Operation mode (user class/admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Caution
Display IGMP snooping statistics.
The statistics are cleared if the device is restarted.
Execution Example
# show igmpsnoop statistics 4094
VLAN 4094
---(1)
----------------------------------------
IGMP V1/V2 query packet received count : 4
IGMP V1/V2 query packet ignored count : 0
IGMP V3 query packet received count : 0
IGMP V3 query packet ignored count : 0
IGMP V1 membership report received count : 0
IGMP V2 membership report received count : 16
IGMP V3 membership report received count : 0
IGMP leave received count : 0
membership joined count : 0
membership left count : 0
IGMP checksum error detected count : 0
malformed packet detected count : 0
failure to register count(limit over) : 0
failure to register count(other cause) : 0
--------------------
---(2)
---(3)
---(4)
---(5)
---(6)
---(7)
---(8)
---(9)
---(10)
---(11)
---(12)
---(13)
---(14)
---(15)
1) VLAN ID to be displayed
2) Number of received IGMP V1 or IGMP V2 Query packets
3) Number of IGMP V1 or IGMP V2 Query packets which were ignored due to packet
formatting errors or other errors
4) Number of received IGMP V3 Query packets
5) Number of IGMP V3 Query packets which were ignored due to packet formatting
errors or other errors
6) Number of received IGMP V1 Membership report packets
7) Number of received IGMP V2 Membership report packets
8) Number of received IGMP V3 Membership report packets
IGMP Snooping Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear
502
Operation Commands
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
9) Number of received IGMP Leave packets
10) Number of registration times of group address entries
11) Number of deletion times of group address entries
12) Number of header received checksum error packets of IGMP packet
13) Number of received packet-format error packets, except for checksum errors
14) Number of unsuccessful registration times due to an excess of the upper limit on
the number of entries
15) Number of unsuccessful registration times due to reasons other than the excess of
the upper limit on the number of entries
IGMP Snooping Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear
503
Operation Commands
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.33.2 IGMP Snooping Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status
Clear Commands
This section explains commands related to IGMP snooping counter, log, statistics, and status clear.
5.33.2.1 clear igmpsnoop statistics
Function
Clear the IGMP snooping statistics.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
clear igmpsnoop statistics [<vidlist>]
Options
N/A
Clear the statistics of all VLANs with the valid IGMP snooping.
<vidlist>
Specify a VID of VLAN to clear the IGMP snooping statistics.
When specifying multiple VLANs, separate them with commas (,). Also, when specifying
the range, specify them with hyphens (-). (Example: 1-3)
The available description format is as follows:
• To specify values 1, 2, 3, 5 and 7 in the "vidlist"
Example: 1-3, 5, 7
• To specify values 1, 3 and 5 in the "vidlist"
Example: 1, 3, 5
Use Mode
Operation mode (admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Clear IGMP snooping statistics.
Execution Example
# clear igmpsnoop statistics
#
IGMP Snooping Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear
504
Operation Commands
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.33.2.2 clear igmpsnoop group
Function
Clear the IGMP snooping entries.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
clear igmpsnoop group <vid> <address>
Options
<vid>
Specify an ID of VLAN with the entries to clear. If "all" is specified, all VLANs are
selected.
<address>
Specify an address to clear the entry.
Use Mode
Operation mode (admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Clear listener information held by IGMP snooping.
Execution Example
# clear igmpsnoop group 2048 01:00:5e:01:81:19
#
Caution
Specify "all" or the MAC address whose entry is to be cleared. If "all" is specified, then all
group addresses other than the group address entries in the range 01:00:5e:00:00:00 - ff
will be cleared. If a particular MAC address is specified, the all group address entries
using the specified address will be cleared. This means that all entries with the same
lower bytes in their group address will be cleared. To calculate the MAC address, take the
group address (A.B.C.D), convert the lower 23bits (B'.C.D) to 2-digit hexadecimal
numbers, and prepend "01:00:5e" to get "01:00:5e:B':C:D".
For example, if you would like to clear 224.129.1.1 (0e.81.01.01), please set
01:00:5e:01:01:01 as MAC address.
You can't clear 01:00:5e:00:00:01-01:00:5e:00:00:ff for 224.0.0.0-224.0.0.255.
IGMP Snooping Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear
505
Operation Commands
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.34 Loopdetection Counter, Log,
Statistics, and Status Display and
Clear Operation Commands
This section explains about commands related to Loopdetection.
5.34.1 Loopdetection Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status
Display Commands
5.34.1.1 show loopdetect
Function
Displays loop detection status.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
show loopdetect
N/A
Options
Use Mode
Operation mode (user class/admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Displays loop detection status.
Execution Example
XG0224 example:
# show loopdetect
interval : 10s
recovery : 60
---(1)
---(2)
port
status
count
----- ---------------------- ------------
(3)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
(4)
(5)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
undetected
undetected
undetected
undetected
undetected
undetected
undetected
detected(portblock)
detected(portblock)
undetected
undetected
undetected
undetected
undetected
undetected
undetected
0/60
0/60
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
1) Frame transmission interval for loop detection.
2) Recovery monitor count for loop detection status.
3) Ethernet port number.
Loopdetection Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear
Operation Commands
506
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
4) Loop detection status
undetected : Loop has not been detected.
detected
: Loop has been detected (the loop detection frame sent by this port
has been received by a port on this device).
*If the port has been disabled, "(portdisable)" is displayed.
*If the port has been blocked, "(portblock)" is displayed.
: Loop detection on an invalid port.
-
5) Monitor status during loop detection
The monitor status after a loop has been detected is displayed as follows:
(consecutive number of times no loop has been detected) / (recovery monitor
count)
Loopdetection Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear
507
Operation Commands
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.35 AAA Status Display and Clear
Operation Commands
This section explains about commands related to AAA status display.
5.35.1 AAA Status Display Commands
This section explains commands related to AAA status display.
5.35.1.1 show aaa radius client server-info
Function
Display the RADIUS server information.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
show aaa radius client server-info [group <group_id>]
Options
N/A
Display all server information of the AAA group.
group <group_id>
Display the server information of the specified group.
Use Mode
Operation mode (user class/admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Display the RADIUS server status.
Execution Example
# show aaa radius client server-info group 0
[aaa group 0]
Type No. Server Address
Port Pri State recover
---- ---- ----------------------------------- ---- --- ----- -------
(1) (2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
Auth
Auth
Acct
0 192.168.0.101
1 192.168.0.100
0 192.168.0.100
1812
1812
1813
10 dead
20 alive
0 alive
293/300
-
-
1) Server type
Auth : Authentication server
Acct : Accounting server
2) Server definition number
3) Server IP address
4) Server port number
5) Priority
6) Server status
alive : Available
dead : Unavailable due to failure of response
7) Unavailable due to failure of response
Displayed with a hyphen (-) when server status is usable.
AAA Status Display and Clear Operation Commands
508
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.36 NETTIME (time/sntp) Server and Client
Statistics Display and Clear Operation
Commands
This section explains about commands related to NETTIME statistics information.
5.36.1 NETTIME (time/sntp) Statistics Display Commands
This section explains commands related to NETTIME (time/sntp) statistics information display.
5.36.1.1 show nettime status
Function
Display the status with the NETTIME (time/sntp) function.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
show nettime status
N/A
Options
Use Mode
Operation mode (user class/admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Caution
Display the NETTIME (time/sntp) status.
NETTIME (time/sntp) status.
Execution Example
# show nettime status
Server Status Server Address
Protocol Last Update Time
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Active
172.16.0.1
SNTP UDP
Wed Jan 5 14:51:45 2011
1) status of the time information server
Active : The switch clock has been automatically synchronized.
Inactive : The switch clock has not been automatically synchronized.
2) IP address of the time information server
The IP address of the time information server is displayed.
When Server Status is Inactive, "-" is displayed.
3) Time protocol
TIME TCP : TIME protocol
TIME TCP6 : TIME protocol (IPv6)
SNTP UDP : simple NTP protocol
SNTP UDP6 : simple NTP protocol (IPv6)
When Server Status is Inactive, "-" is displayed.
4) Last update time
The time recorded when the swtich clock was last synchronized.
NETTIME (time/sntp) Server and Client Statistics Display and Clear
509
Operation Commands
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.36.1.2 show nettime statistics
Function
Display the statistics with the NETTIME (time/sntp) function.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
show nettime statistics [<mode> [<protocol>]]
Options
N/A
Display all the currently operating device information.
<mode>
Specify the display mode.
• server
Display the information of the server function (the clock data provider).
• client
Display the information of the client function (the clock data receiver).
<protocol>
Specify the protocol to display.
• time
Display the TIME protocol information.
• sntp
Display the simple NTP protocol information.
Use Mode
Operation mode (user class/admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Caution
Display the NETTIME (time/sntp) statistics.
NETTIME (time/sntp) statistics.
Execution Example
The following gives an example of a command execution with each option.
<mode> <protocol>
Only the active protocol in the specified mode is displayed.
# show nettime statistics client time
NETTIME client statistics information:
[time tcp]
0 request transmission error
0 transmitted synchronized request
0 received response
0
0
received invalid packet
received clock not synchronized
0 local clock updated
#
NETTIME (time/sntp) Server and Client Statistics Display and Clear
Operation Commands
510
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
No option
If options are omitted, all NETTIME information running on this device is displayed.
# show nettime statistics
NETTIME server statistics information:
[sntp udp]
0 received synchronized request
received invalid packet
0 request discard (clock not synchronized)
0 response transmission error
0 transmitted response
--- (1)
--- (2)
--- (3)
--- (4)
--- (5)
0
[sntp udp6]
0 received synchronized request
received invalid packet
0
0 request discard (clock not synchronized)
0 response transmission error
0 transmitted response
[time tcp]
[time udp]
[time tcp6]
[time udp6]
0 received synchronized request
0
received invalid packet
0 request discard (clock not synchronized)
0 response transmission error
0 transmitted response
0 received synchronized request
0
received invalid packet
0 request discard (clock not synchronized)
0 response transmission error
0 transmitted response
0 received synchronized request
0
received invalid packet
0 request discard (clock not synchronized)
0 response transmission error
0 transmitted response
0 received synchronized request
0
received invalid packet
0 request discard (clock not synchronized)
0 response transmission error
0 transmitted response
NETTIME client statistics information:
[sntp udp]
0 request transmission error
0 transmitted synchronized request
0 received response
--- (6)
--- (7)
--- (8)
--- (9)
--- (10)
--- (11)
0
0
received invalid packet
received clock not synchronized
0 local clock updated
[sntp udp6]
[time tcp]
[time tcp6]
#
0 request transmission error
0 transmitted synchronized request
0 received response
0
0
received invalid packet
received clock not synchronized
0 local clock updated
0 request transmission error
1 transmitted synchronized request
1 received response
0
0
received invalid packet
received clock not synchronized
1 local clock updated
0 request transmission error
0 transmitted synchronized request
0 received response
0
0
received invalid packet
received clock not synchronized
0 local clock updated
NETTIME (time/sntp) Server and Client Statistics Display and Clear
Operation Commands
511
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
• server
1) Total number of received synchronized request packets
2) Total number of invalid packets among the synchronized request packets of Item
(1)
3) Total number of discarded synchronized request packets due to the out of
synchronized status of this device
4) Total number of unsuccessful response transmission packets
5) Total number of response transmission packets
• client
6) Total number of unsuccessfully transmitted synchronized request packets
7) Total number of forwarded synchronized request packets
8) Total number of response packets received from the server
9) Total number of invalid packets among the response packets of Item (8)
10) Total number of invalid response packets among those of Item (9) due to the out of
synchronized status of the server
11) Total number of clock updating times of this device by response packets
NETTIME (time/sntp) Server and Client Statistics Display and Clear
512
Operation Commands
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.36.2 NETTIME (time/sntp) Statistics Clear Commands
This section explains commands related to NETTIME (time/sntp) statistics information display.
5.36.2.1 clear nettime statistics
Function
Clear the NETTIME (time/sntp) statistics.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
clear nettime statistics [<mode>]
Options
N/A
Clear all NETTIME (time/sntp) statistics.
<mode>
Specify the mode to clear.
• server
Clear the server function statistics.
• client
Clear the client function statistics.
Use Mode
Operation mode (admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Clear the NETTIME (time/sntp) statistics.
Execution Example
# clear nettime statistics
#
NETTIME (time/sntp) Server and Client Statistics Display and Clear
Operation Commands
513
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.37 ProxyDNS Statistics Display and Clear
Operation Commands
This section explains commands related to proxyDNS statistics information.
5.37.1 ProxyDNS Statistics Display Commands
This section explains commands related to proxyDNS statistics information display.
5.37.1.1 show proxydns statistics
Function
Display the statistics with Proxy DNS function.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
show proxydns statistics
N/A
Options
Use Mode
Operation mode (user class/admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Display the proxy DNS statistics.
Execution Example
# show proxydns statistics
ProxyDNS statistics information:
0 Total request packets
--- (1)
--- (2)
--- (3)
--- (4)
--- (5)
--- (6)
--- (7)
--- (8)
--- (9)
--- (10)
--- (11)
--- (12)
0
0
Send Query packets
Send Query packets Error
0 Total reply packets
0
0
0
0
Send Reply packets
Send Reply packets Error
Send Error Reply packets
Send Error Reply packets Error
0 Total discard packets
0
0
0
QTYPE Unknown Char
QNAME Filter
Short header
#
1) Total number of transmitted DNS request messages
2) Total number of successful transmitted DNS inquiry messages
3) Total number of unsuccessful transmitted DNS inquiry messages
4) Total number of transmitted DNS response messages
5) Total number of successful transmitted DNS response messages
6) Total number of unsuccessful transmitted DNS response messages
7) Total number of successful transmitted DNS error response messages
8) Total number of unsuccessful transmitted DNS error response messages
9) Total number of discarded packets
10) Number of packets discarded due to invalid character codes
ProxyDNS Statistics Display and Clear Operation Commands
514
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
11) Number of packets discarded by the URL filtering function
12) Number of packets discarded due to insufficient header length
ProxyDNS Statistics Display and Clear Operation Commands
515
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.37.2 ProxyDNS Statistics Clear Commands
This section explains commands related to proxyDNS statistics information clear.
5.37.2.1 clear proxydns statistics
Function
Clear the ProxyDNS statistics.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
clear proxydns statistics
N/A
Options
Use Mode
Operation mode (admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Clear the proxy DNS statistics.
Execution Example
# clear proxydns statistics
#
ProxyDNS Statistics Display and Clear Operation Commands
516
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.38 SNMP Statistics Display and Clear
Operation Commands
This section explains about commands related to SNMP statistic information.
5.38.1 SNMP Statistics Display Commands
This section explains commands related to the SNMP statistic information display.
5.38.1.1 show snmp statistics
Function
Display the statistics with SNMP function.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
show snmp statistics
N/A
Options
Use Mode
Operation mode (user class/admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Display the SNMP statistics.
Execution Example
# show snmp statistics
SNMP statistics information:
0 Input Packets
--- (1)
--- (2)
--- (3)
--- (4)
--- (5)
--- (6)
--- (7)
--- (8)
--- (9)
--- (10)
--- (11)
--- (12)
--- (13)
--- (14)
--- (15)
--- (16)
--- (17)
--- (18)
--- (19)
--- (20)
--- (21)
--- (22)
--- (23)
--- (24)
--- (25)
--- (26)
--- (27)
0 Output Packets
0 Input Bad Versions
0 Input Bad Community Names
0 Input Bad Community Uses
0 Input ASN Parse Errors
0 Input Too Bigs
0 Input No Such Names
0 Input Bad Values
0 Input Read Only
0 Input Gen Errors
0 Input Total Request Vars
0 Input Total Set Vars
0 Input Get Requests
0 Input Get Next
0 Input Set Requests
0 Input Get Responses
0 Input Traps
0 Output Too Bigs
0 Output No Such Names
0 Output Bad Values
0 Output Gen Errors
0 Output Get Requests
0 Output Get Next
0 Output Set Requests
0 Output Get Responses
0 Output Traps
#
1) Total number of SNMP received messages
2) Total number of SNMP sent messages
3) Total number of unsupported SNMP received messages
SNMP Statistics Display and Clear Operation Commands
517
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
4) Total number of SNMP received messages of the unused community
5) Total number of received messages that indicate the operations not allowed in the
community
6) Total number of received messages with ASN.1 errors
7) Total number of receive PDU packets with the tooBig error status
8) Total number of receive PDU packets with the noSuchName error status
9) Total number of receive PDU packets with the badValue error status
10) Total number of receive PDU packets with the readOnly error status
11) Total number of receive PDU packets with the genErr error status
12) Total number of successfully collected MIB objects
13) Total number of successfully set MIB objects
14) Total number of received GetRequestPDU packets
15) Total number of received GetNextRequestPDU packets
16) Total number of received SetRequestPDU packets
17) Total number of received GetResponsePDU packets
18) Total number of received trap PDU packets
19) Total number of sent PDU packets with the tooBig error status
20) Total number of sent PDU packets with the noSuchNam error status
21) Total number of sent PDU packets with the badValue error status
22) Total number of sent PDU packets with the genErr error status
23) Total number of sent GetRequestPDU packets
24) Total number of sent GetNextRequestPDU packets
25) Total number of sent SetRequestPDU packets
26) Total number of sent GetResponsePDU packets
27) Total number of sent trap PDU packets
SNMP Statistics Display and Clear Operation Commands
518
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.38.2 SNMP Statistics Clear Commands
This section explains commands related to the SNMP statistic clearing.
5.38.2.1 clear snmp statistics
Function
Clear the SNMP statistics.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
clear snmp statistics
N/A
Options
Use Mode
Operation mode (admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Clear the SNMP statistics.
Execution Example
# clear snmp statistics
#
SNMP Statistics Display and Clear Operation Commands
519
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.39 Ethernet L3 Monitor Function Counter,
Log, Statistics, and Status Display and
Clear Operation Commands
This section explains about commands related to Ethernet L3 monitor function.
5.39.1 Ethernet L3 Monitor Function Counter, Log, Statistics,
and Status Display Commands
This section explains about commands related to Ethernet L3 monitor function counter, log, statistics, and status display.
5.39.1.1 show icmpwatch
Function
Display various information collected by the Ethernet L3 monitor function.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
show icmpwatch
N/A
Options
Use Mode
Operation mode (user class/admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Display the monitoring information provided by the Ethernet L3 monitor function.
Execution Example
# show icmpwatch
[PORT-1]
icmpwatch status
port type
---(1)
---(2)
---(3)
---(4)
: Normal
: Backup (group1, master)
: 192.168.2.1
destination address
[PORT-2]
icmpwatch status
port type
destination address
: Disable
: Backup (group1, backup)
: 192.168.2.1
[PORT-4]
icmpwatch status
port type
destination address
: Error
: Normal
: 10.1.1.10
[LA GROUP-1]
---(5)
icmpwatch status
port type
: Normal
: Normal
destination address
: 172.16.1.50
1) Ethernet port number
2) Monitoring status
Normal: Indicates that the monitoring is normal.
Error: Indicates that the monitoring is abnormal due to failure detection.
Disable: Indicates that the monitoring function is disabled.
3) Port type
Normal: Indicates that the port is used as the normal port.
Backup: Indicates that the port is used as the backup port.
The group number and the port type, master or backup, are displayed.
Ethernet L3 Monitor Function Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display
520
and Clear Operation Commands
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
4) The address to be monitored
5) Link aggregation group number
5.39.1.2 show icmpwatch statistics
Function
Display the statistics of Ethernet L3 monitor function.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
show icmpwatch statistics
Options
N/A
Display all statistics.
Use Mode
Operation mode (user class/admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Display the statistics provided by the Ethernet L3 monitor function.
Information about the Ethernet ports where the Ethernet L3 monitor function is enabled,
and the link aggregation group is displayed.
Execution Example
# show icmpwatch statistics
[PORT-1]
---(1)
---(2)
---(3)
---(4)
---(5)
---(6)
---(7)
20 transmitted icmp echo request packets
0 transmitted icmp echo request packets error
19 received icmp echo reply packets
0 received error
5 retransmitted icmp echo request packets
1 icmpwatch timeout
[PORT-3]
37 transmitted icmp echo request packets
0 transmitted icmp echo request packets error
37 received icmp echo reply packets
0 received error
0 retransmitted icmp echo request packets
0 icmpwatch timeout
[LA GROUP-1]
14 transmitted icmp echo request packets
---(8)
1 transmitted icmp echo request packets error
14 received icmp echo reply packets
0 received error
0 retransmitted icmp echo request packets
0 icmpwatch timeout
#
1) Ethernet port number
2) Number of sent ICMP ECHO requests
3) Number of sent ICMP ECHO request errors
4) Number of received ICMP ECHO replies
5) Number of received errors
6) Number of retransmitted ICMP ECHO packets
7) The number of Timeouts
8) Link aggregation group number
Ethernet L3 Monitor Function Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display
and Clear Operation Commands
521
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.39.2 Ethernet L3 Monitor Function Counter, Log, Statistics,
and Status Clear Commands
This section explains about commands related to Ether L3 monitor function counter, log, statistics, and status clearing.
5.39.2.1 clear icmpwatch statistics
Function
Clear the statistics of Ethernet L3 monitor function.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
clear icmpwatch statistics
N/A
Options
Use Mode
Operation mode (admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Clear the statistics provided by the Ethernet L3 monitor function.
Execution Example
# clear icmpwatch statistics
#
Ethernet L3 Monitor Function Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display
and Clear Operation Commands
522
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.40 Login Information Operations and
Display Commands
This section explains about commands related to Login information.
5.40.1 Login Information Display Commands
This section explains the display command related to Login information.
5.40.1.1 show users
Function
Display the login information.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
show users [all]
Options
N/A
Display current login user's information.
all
Display login information about all the lines.
Use Mode
Operation mode (user class/admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Display login information.
Execution Example
XG2600# show users
U No Line
User Name
Class Remote Host
Since
Idle
- -- --------- --------------- ----- ------------------ ----------- ---------
(1)(2) (3)
* 1 console 0 admin
2 vty 0 admin
(4)
(5)
admin -
admin 192.168.10.100
(6)
(7)
01/20.10:28
01/20.11:58
(8)
0:00:00
0:00:09
XG2600# show users all
U No Line User Name
Class Remote Host
Since
Idle
- -- --------- --------------- ----- ------------------ ----------- ---------
* 1 console 0 admin
admin -
admin 192.168.10.100
01/20.10:28
01/20.11:58
01/20.10:26
01/20.10:26
01/20.10:26
01/20.10:26
01/20.10:26
01/20.10:26
01/20.10:26
0:00:00
0:00:58
0:00:00
0:00:00
0:00:00
0:00:00
0:00:00
0:00:00
0:00:00
2 vty 0
3 vty 1
4 vty 2
5 vty 3
6 ftp 0
7 ssh 0
8 sftp 0
9 http 0
admin
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
1) The line indicator
*: Indicating the current line(executing this command).
2) The Login line number
3) The Login line name
4) The user name
If the line isn’t used, "-" is displayed.
Login Information Operations and Display Commands
523
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5) The user class
If the line isn't used, "-" is displayed.
6) The Remote Host
The Host Ip address that the user login from.
7) The date of login or logout.
8) The idle time for the line.
Login Information Operations and Display Commands
524
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.40.2 Login Information Operation Commands
This section explains the operation command related to Login information.
5.40.2.1 clear line
Function
Logout user forcibly.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
clear line <line_number>
clear line <line_name> <interface_number>
Options
<line_number>
Specify the line number to logout.
The line number is displayed by "show users" command.
<line_name>
Specify the name of the line to logout.
- Console
- vty
- ftp
- ssh
- sftp
- http
<interface_number>
Specify the interface number of the line.
If you'd like to logout the user via vty2, please specify "vty" as <line_name> and "2" as
<interface_number>.
Use Mode
Operation mode (admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Logout user forcibly.
Execution Example
XG2600# clear line 2
XG2600# clear line vty 2
Login Information Operations and Display Commands
525
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.41 Socket Status Display Commands
This section explains about commands related to socket status display.
5.41.1 Socket Status Display Commands
This section explains commands related to socket status display.
5.41.1.1 show socket
Function
Display the socket status.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
show socket
Options
N/A
Display the status of all sockets.
Use Mode
Operation mode (user class/admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Display the status of sockets used by application layer software.
Execution Example
# show socket
Active sockets for IPv4 (including servers)
Proto Recv-Q Send-Q Local Address
----- ------ ------ -------------
Foreign Address
---------------
(5)
*.*
127.0.0.1.1025
127.0.0.1.2600
*.*
*.*
*.*
*.*
*.*
*.*
*.*
*.*
*.*
*.*
*.*
*.*
*.*
*.*
*.*
*.*
*.*
*.*
*.*
*.*
*.*
*.*
*.*
State
-------
(6)
(1)
tcp
(2)
(3)
(4)
0 *.22
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
LISTEN
ESTABLISHED
ESTABLISHED
LISTEN
LISTEN
LISTEN
LISTEN
LISTEN
LISTEN
tcp
tcp
tcp
tcp
tcp
tcp
tcp
tcp
udp
udp
udp
udp
udp
udp
udp
udp
udp
udp
udp
udp
udp
udp
udp
udp
udp
0 127.0.0.1.2600
0 127.0.0.1.1025
0 *.37
0 *.21
0 *.80
0 *.23
0 127.0.0.1.61225
0 127.0.0.1.2600
0 127.0.0.1.2611
0 *.68
0 *.68
0 *.68
0 *.68
0 *.68
0 *.68
0 *.68
0 *.68
0 *.68
0 *.68
0 *.68
0 *.68
0 *.68
0 *.68
0 *.68
0 *.68
(To be continued)
Socket Status Display Commands
526
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
(Continued)
udp
udp
udp
udp
udp
udp
udp
udp
udp
udp
udp
udp
udp
udp
udp
udp
udp
udp
udp
udp
udp
udp
udp
udp
udp
udp
udp
udp
udp
udp
udp
udp
udp
udp
udp
udp
udp
udp
udp
udp
udp
udp
udp
udp
udp
udp
udp
udp
udp
udp
udp
#
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 *.68
0 *.68
0 *.68
0 *.68
0 *.68
0 *.67
0 *.67
0 *.67
0 *.67
0 *.67
0 *.67
0 *.67
0 *.67
0 *.67
0 *.67
0 *.67
0 *.67
0 *.67
0 *.67
0 *.67
0 127.0.0.1.2645
0 *.67
0 *.53
0 *.67
0 127.0.0.1.52000
0 *.67
*.*
*.*
*.*
*.*
*.*
*.*
*.*
*.*
*.*
*.*
*.*
*.*
*.*
*.*
*.*
*.*
*.*
*.*
*.*
*.*
*.*
*.*
*.*
*.*
*.*
*.*
*.*
*.*
*.*
*.*
*.*
*.*
*.*
*.*
*.*
*.*
*.*
*.*
*.*
*.*
*.*
*.*
*.*
*.*
*.*
*.*
*.*
*.*
*.*
*.*
*.*
0 *.67
0 127.0.0.1.2642
0 *.37
0 *.67
0 127.0.0.1.2639
0 127.0.0.1.2638
0 127.0.0.1.161
0 127.0.0.1.8900
0 127.0.0.1.2631
0 *.123
0 *.67
0 127.0.0.1.2633
0 127.0.0.1.2632
0 127.0.0.1.2634
0 127.0.0.1.2635
0 127.0.0.1.2637
0 *.500
0 127.0.0.1.2628
0 127.0.0.1.2629
0 127.0.0.1.2621
0 127.0.0.1.2623
0 127.0.0.1.2627
0 127.0.0.1.2624
0 127.0.0.1.2625
0 127.0.0.1.2622
1) Protocol
tcp or udp is displayed.
2) Amount of queued data awaiting readout
The amount of data awaiting readout by the application layer software is
displayed among the data received by the device.
3) Amount of data transmission awaiting acknowledgment
The amount of data, whose transmission has not been acknowledged yet, is
displayed among the data sent from application layer software.
4) Local address and port number
The local address and its port number are displayed. If omitted, an asterisk (*) is
displayed instead.
Socket Status Display Commands
527
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5) Remote address and port number
The remote address and its port number are displayed. If omitted, an asterisk (*)
is displayed instead.
6) Internal status of protocol
For TCP protocol, one of the following is displayed.
CLOSED : No session is established yet.
CLOSE_WAIT : After the session was released, the close processing by the
application layer software has been awaited.
CLOSING
: After the close processing was requested by application layer
software, and FIN was exchanged, an ACK reception has been
awaited.
ESTABLISHED: The session has been established.
FIN_WAIT_1 : After a FIN was sent, an ACK reception has been awaited.
FIN_WAIT_2 : A FIN reception has been awaited.
LAST_ACK
: After a FIN was exchanged, an ACK reception has been
awaited.
LISTEN
: A session can be received.
SYN_RCVD : After a SYN-ACK was sent, an ACK reception has been
awaited.
SYN_SENT : After a SYN was sent, an SYN-ACK reception has been
awaited.
TIME_WAIT : Holding after release of session
Socket Status Display Commands
528
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.42 Trace Show and Clear Operation
Commands
This section explains about commands related to trace information.
5.42.1 Trace Show Commands
This section explains about commands related to trace show.
5.42.1.1 show trace ssh
Function
Show the information traced by the SSH server function.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
show trace ssh
N/A
Options
Use Mode
Operation mode (user class/admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Caution
Display the trace information of SSH server function.
The trace information of SSH server function is cleared when this device is restarted.
Execution Example
# show trace ssh
[1] sshd
--- ----
(1) (2)
Sat Jan 15 14:34:37 2011
------------------------
(3)
This platform does not support both privilege separation and compression
-------------------------------------------------------------------
(4)
[2] sshd
[3] sshd
[4] sshd
[5] sshd
[6] sshd
[7] sshd
[8] sshd
[9] sshd
Sat Jan 15 14:34:37 2011
Compression disabled
Sat Jan 15 14:34:37 2011
info1: sshd version OpenSSH_3.9p1
Sat Jan 15 14:34:37 2011
info1: private host key: #0 type 0 RSA1
Sat Jan 15 14:34:37 2011
info1: read PEM private key done: type RSA
Sat Jan 15 14:34:37 2011
info1: private host key: #1 type 1 RSA
Sat Jan 15 14:34:37 2011
info1: read PEM private key done: type DSA
Sat Jan 15 14:34:37 2011
info1: private host key: #2 type 2 DSA
Sat Jan 15 14:34:37 2011
info1: Bind to port 22 on 0.0.0.0.
[10] sshd
Sat Jan 15 14:34:37 2011
Server listening on 0.0.0.0 port 22.
[11] sshd
Sat Jan 15 14:34:37 2011
info1: Bind to port 22 on ::.
[12] sshd
Sat Jan 15 14:34:37 2011
Server listening on :: port 22.
[13] sshd
Sat Jan 15 14:34:37 2011
Generating 768 bit RSA key.
[14] sshd
Sat Jan 15 14:34:38 2011
RSA key generation complete.
1) Trace number
A decimal trace number is displayed.
Trace Show and Clear Operation Commands
529
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
2) Thread name
The thread name is displayed.
3) Trace dump time
The trace dump time is displayed.
4) Trace information
The trace information is displayed.
Trace Show and Clear Operation Commands
530
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.42.2 Trace Clear Commands
This section explains about commands related to trace clear.
5.42.2.1 clear trace ssh
Function
Clear the information traced by the SSH server function.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
clear trace ssh
N/A
Options
Use Mode
Operation mode (admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Caution
Clear the trace information of SSH server function.
The trace information of SSH server function is cleared when this device is restarted.
Execution Example
# clear trace ssh
#
Trace Show and Clear Operation Commands
531
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.43 Ethernet Port Control Commands
This section explains about commands related to Ethernet port control.
5.43.1 Ethernet Port Control Commands
This section explains commands related to Ethernet port control.
5.43.1.1 offline
Function
Offline the Ethernet ports.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
offline ether [<port>]
Options
ether
Offline all ports (linkdown).
ether <port>
Offline the specified ports (linkdown).
When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).
When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")
Range
Model
1 to 26
1 to 52
XG0224
XG0448
XG2600
1 to 26, m1
Use Mode
Operation mode (admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Disconnect or place the port offline for communication.
Execution Example
# offline ether 1
#
Ethernet Port Control Commands
532
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.43.1.2 online
Function
Execute connecting or unblocking.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
online ether [<port>]
Options
ether
Online all ports.
ether <port>
Online the specified ports.
When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).
When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")
Range
Model
1 to 26
1 to 52
XG0224
XG0448
XG2600
1 to 26, m1
Use Mode
Operation mode (admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Connect or place the port online.
Execution Example
# online ether 1
#
Ethernet Port Control Commands
533
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.44 RADIUS Control Commands
This section explains commands related to RADIUS control.
5.44.1 RADIUS Control Commands
This section explains RADIUS control commands.
5.44.1.1 radius recovery
Function
Recover the RADIUS server.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
radius recovery group <group_id> auth <number>
Options
<group_id>
• Group ID
Specify the ID of AAA group to be applied by the command.
auth <number>
• Authentication server definition number
Specify the definition number of the authentication server to be applied by the
command.
Use Mode
Operation mode (admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
The RADIUS server can be recovered manually from dead state to alive state.
Even the RADIUS server recovers from dead state, server remains dead when it cannot
communicate with the RADIUS server.
Execution Example
# radius recovery group 1 auth 2
#
RADIUS Control Commands
534
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.45 USB Port Control Commands
This section explains about commands related to USB Port Control Commands.
5.45.1 USB Port Control Commands
5.45.1.1 usbctl
Function
Disables or enables USB ports.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
usbctl <mode>
Options
<mode>
• enable
Enable USB port.
• disable
Disable USB port.
Use Mode
Operation mode (admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Enables/disables USB ports.
When enabled, if overcurrent status is detected, recommences supply of electricity and
clears overcurrent detection status.
When disabled, connected USB memory will appear to be disconnected in order to cease
supply of electricity.
Execution Example
# usbctl enable
#
USB Port Control Commands
535
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.46 I’m here Commands
This section explains about "I’m here" commands.
5.46.1 I’m here Commands
5.46.1.1 iamhere
Function
Blink the READY LED and the CHECK LED alternately.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
iamhere <mode> [<time>]
Options
<mode>
• on
Blink the READY LED and the CHECK LED alternately.
- [<time>]
Specify the LED blinking time (1s-86400s,1m-1440m,1h-24h,1d).
The unit shall be d (day), h (hour), m (minute), or s (second).
• off
Stop blinking.
Use Mode
Operation mode (admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Blink the READY LED and the CHECK LED alternately. This allows visually locating a
switch quickly within a rack or series of racks.
During blinking, the following LEDs are turned off:
XG2600
STATUS LED, ERROR LED, FLASH LED, FAN LED.
XG0224/XG0448
ERROR LED, FLASH LED
Execution Example
# iamhere 0n 30m
I’m here Commands
536
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.47 Other Commands
This section explains commands not previously covered.
5.47.1 Other Commands
This section explains other commands.
5.47.1.1 ping
Function
Sends ICMP echo request packets.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
ping <ip_address> [source <ip_address>] [repeat [<count>]] [size <dec>] [tos <hex>] [ttl
<dec>] [timeout <dec>] [df]
ping <host_name> [{v4|v6}] [source <ip_address>] [repeat [<count>]] [size <dec>] [tos
<hex>] [ttl <dec>] [timeout <dec>] [df]
Options
<ip_address>
• Target IP address
Specifies the target IPv4 or IPv6 address.
If specifying a link-local IPv6 address, append "%<interface>" to the address,
specifying which interface to use. For example: "fe80::1%lan0"
Either <ip_address> or <host_name> must be specified.
<host_name>
• Target host name
Specifies the target host name.
If specifying a host name, the host name must be registered in the host database or the
switch must have access to a DNS server.
Either <ip_address> or <host_name> must be specified.
{v4|v6}
• Specifies the IP version of the target host name.
When specifying the <host_name> parameter, this option specifies the version of the
IP address that the target <host_name> resolves to. Default is v4. If the version of the
resolved IP address does not match the specified version an error will occur.
source <ip_address>
• Source IP address
Specifies the source IP address. Addresses not defined on the switch cannot be
specified.
If the version does not match with the target IP address an error will occur.
repeat [<count>]
• Number of times to repeat
Specifies the number of times to repeat expressed as a base 10 value in the range of 0
to 65535. Default is 0.
size <dec>
• Data size
Specifies the length (in bytes) of the ICMP data to send as a base 10 value in the range
of 46 to 9600.
Default is 46 bytes.
Other Commands
537
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
tos <hex>
• TOS value
Specifies the TOS value as a hexadecimal value in the range of 0x00 to 0xff. Default is
0x00.
Only valid for IPv4.
ttl <dec>
• TTL value
Specifies the TTL value as a decimal value in the range of 0 to 255. Default is 128 for
IPv4, 64 for IPv6.
timeout <dec>
• Time to wait for response
Specifies the time to wait for a response (in seconds) as a base 10 value in the range of
1 to 300.
Default is 20 seconds.
df
• Don’t fragment
Sets the Don’t Fragment bit on the packets to be sent so they won’t be fragmented en
route.
Only valid for IPv4.
Use Mode
Operation mode (user class/admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Explanation
Sends an ICMP ECHO_REQUEST to the specified host (IP address or host name), and
confirms receipt of an ICMP ECHO_RESPONSE.
Execution Example
(a) Without options (only the IP address is specified)
# ping 192.168.1.1
192.168.1.1 is alive.
#
(b) Host name specified
# ping jp.fujitsu.com
192.168.1.2 is alive.
#
(c) Host name specified (IPv6)
# ping jp.fujitsu.com v6
fe80:::fffe:c100:e00:5555:80c2 is alive.
#
(b) Repeat (3 times specified)
# ping 192.168.1.1 repeat 3
PING 192.168.1.1: 56 data bytes.
64 bytes from 192.168.1.1: icmp_seq=0 ttl=255 time=0.768 ms
64 bytes from 192.168.1.1: icmp_seq=1 ttl=255 time=0.736 ms
64 bytes from 192.168.1.1: icmp_seq=2 ttl=255 time=0.736 ms
----192.168.1.1 PING Statistics----
3 packets transmitted, 3 packets received, 0% packet loss
round-trip (ms) min/ave/max = 0.736/0.746/0.768
#
*When specifying options, do so in the order in which they appear in the syntax.
Other Commands
538
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.47.1.2 traceroute
Function
Displays network route.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
Syntax
Options
traceroute <ip_address> [ source <src_ip_address> ] [ size <data_size> ] [ timeout
<timeout> ] [ mpls] [ df ]
traceroute <host_name> [{v4 | v6}] [ source <src_ip_address> ] [ size <data_size> ] [
timeout <timeout> ] [ mpls ] [ df ]
<ip_address>
• Target IP address
Specifies the target IPv4 or IPv6 address.
Either <ip_address> or <host_name> must be specified.
<host_name>
• Target host name
Specifies the target host name.
If specifying a host name, the host name must be registered in the host database or the
switch must have access to a DNS server.
Either <ip_address> or <host_name> must be specified.
{ v4 | v6 }
• Specifies the IP version of the target host name.
When specifying the <host_name> parameter, this option specifies the version of the
IP address that the target <host_name> resolves to. Default is v4. If the version of the
resolved IP address does not match the specified version an error will occur.
source <src_ip_address>
• Source IP address
Specifies the source IP address. Addresses not defined on the switch cannot be
specified.
If the version does not match with the target IP address an error will occur.
size <data_size>
• Data size
Specifies the length (in bytes) of the packet to be sent, including the IP header, as a
base 10 value in the range of 46 to 9600. Default is 46 bytes.
If the target IP is an IPv6 address, or if the target host name’s IP version is specified as
IPv6, values in the range of 46 to 59 will automatically be read as 60.
timeout <timeout>
• Time to wait for response
Specifies the time to wait for a response (in seconds) as a base 10 value in the range of
1-300.
Default is 20 seconds.
df
• Don’t fragment
Sets the Don’t Fragment bit on the packets to be sent so they won’t be fragmented en
route.
Use Mode
Operation mode (user class/admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Other Commands
539
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
Explanation
Displays network route.
Displays the route to the specified host (IP address or host name) by sending test
packets to the host with the time-to-live value in the IP datagram header set to 1 at first,
then incrementally increasing by 1, and analyzing the ICMP time exceeded packets and
ICMP destination unreachable packets received.
The meanings of the letter codes displayed by traceroute are listed below.
[Destination is an IPv4 address]
xx.xxx ms
: Round trip time
!N
!H
!P
!F
!S
!
: Destination unreachable (no route to network)
: Destination unreachable (no route to host)
: Destination unreachable (protocol unreachable)
: Destination unreachable (fragment needed)
: Source route error
: Abnormal TTL value
*
: Probe timeout
[Destination is an IPv6 address]
xx.xxx ms
: Round trip time
!N
!H
!P
!F
!S
!
: Destination unreachable (no route to network)
: Destination unreachable (no route to address)
: Destination unreachable (not a neighbor)
: Festination unreachable (administrative reason)
: Source route error
: Abnormal HopLimit value
*
: probe timeout
In addition, traceroute reports the following errors.
traceroute: unknown host <host_name>
Cannot resolve destination IP address for <host_name> specified.
traceroute: can't assign source address
Assignment of source IP address failed.
(In cases such as when the specified address does not exist for the switch.)
Execution Example
Host is responding
# traceroute 192.168.1.1
traceroute to 192.168.1.1 from 192.168.5.2, 30 hops max, 46 byte packets
1
2
#
192.168.5.1
192.168.1.1
20.000 ms 20.000 ms 20.000 ms
41.000 ms 41.000 ms 41.000 ms
No response from host
# traceroute 192.168.1.1
traceroute to 192.168.1.1 from 192.168.5.2, 30 hops max, 46 byte packets
1
2
3
4
* * *
* * *
* * *
* * *
:
30
#
* * *
Other Commands
540
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.47.1.3 telnet
Function
Connects to a telnet server.
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Syntax
telnet <host> [<port>] [{ipv4|ipv6}] [escape {<char>|none}] [srcaddr <srcaddr>] [tos
<tos>]
Options
<host>
Target host (telnet server), specified in the format below.
• Host name
• IPv4 address
• IPv6 address
If specifying a link-local address, append "%<interface>" to the address, specifying
which interface to use. For example: "fe80::1%lan0"
<port>
Port number specified as a base 10 value in the range of 1 to 65535.
Default is the telnet port, 23.
ipv4
Specified when making a telnet connection to an IPv4 address.
If a host name is specified in <host> and that host has both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses,
connect via the IPv4 address.
ipv6
Specified when making a telnet connection to an IPv6 address.
If a host name is specified in <host> and that host has both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses,
use the IPv6 address.
If both ipv4 and ipv6 options are omitted, if an address is specified in <host> connection
will be made via that address; if it is a host name connection will be made via IPv4 if it
resolves to an IPv4 address or IPv6 if it resolves to an IPv6 address, or if both an IPv4
and IPv6 address are available connection will be made via the IPv6 address.
escape {<char>|none}
Specifies the escape character. For no escape character specify "none".
To force-disconnect while connected via telnet enter the escape character followed by "q".
To set a control character as an escape character, prefix the specified character with the
"^" character. For example, to set CTRL+A as the escape character, specify "^A".
If a string of characters is specified (other than "none"), the first character in that string
will be set as the escape character.
Default is "^]" (CTRL+]).
srcaddr <srcaddr>
Source address (the address of this router), specified in the format below.
• IPv4 address
• IPv6 address
Specify an address with the same version and scope as the address specified in <host>.
The appropriate address will be set by default.
tos <tos>
TOS value specified as a hexadecimal value in the range of 0 to ff.
Default is 0.
Use Mode
Operation mode (user class/admin class)
Configuration mode (admin class)
Other Commands
541
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
Explanation
Allows connection to and remote operation of a host/router running a telnet server.
If the telnet server demands the following information, enter the information for this
device as listed within the parentheses.
• Terminal type (VT100)
• Terminal speed (9600bps)
• Screen size (number of lines, number of columns)
Execution Example
# telnet 192.168.1.2
Trying 192.168.1.2...
Make a telnet connection to another router
connecting
Connected to 192.168.1.2. connected
Escape character is '^]'
Escape character is displayed
Login:
Enter login for the connected router
Password:
# exit
Enter password for the connected router
Execute exit command on the connected router
Connection closed by foreign host.
#
Disconnection
Prompt for local router is displayed
Other Commands
542
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
5.48 Effect by "commit" Command
Execution
The effects of running the commit command after changing the configuration via configuration commands are described
for each command below. In addition, modification/addition/deletion of each configuration command has the same effect.
Type
Command Name
Effect of "commit"
(3)
Port
ether use
ether media
ether mode
ether duplex
ether mdia
ether flowctl
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
ether type mirror
(5):XG2600
(1):XG0224/XG0448
ether type linkaggregation
ether type backup
ether vlan
(3)
(3)
(1) *1 *2:XG2600
ether egress permission
ether loopdetect
ether startup
(1)
(1)
(3)-1
(1)
ether recovery limit
ether downrelay port
ether description
ether mac storm
ether stp
(1)
(0)
(3)
(1) *3
ether macfilter
(6):XG2600
(1):XG0224/XG0448
ether qos aclmap
(6):XG2600
(1):XG0224/XG0448
ether qos priority
ether qos mode
(3)
(1)
ether qos prioritymap
ether lacp port-priority
ether icmpwatch
ether snmp trap
(1):XG2600 *4:XG2600
(1)
(1)
(6)
ether ratecontrol
linkaggregation
(1)
LINKAGGREGATION
(3)
linkaggregation mode
linkaggregation icmpwatch
linkaggregation downrelay
linkaggregation description
backup
(3)-LA
(1)
(1)
(0)
BACKUP
LACP
(3)
lacp
(1)
Effect by "commit" Command Execution
543
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
Type
Command Name
Effect of "commit"
VLAN
vlan name
(0)
vlan protocol
(1) *1 *5 *6:XG2600
(1) *1:XG0224/XG0448
vlan forward
(1) *1
(0)
vlan description
vlan igmpsnoop
vlan macfilter
(1) *1
(6):XG2600
(1):XG0224/XG0448
vlan ip6filter
(1):XG0224/XG0448
vlan qos aclmap
(6):XG2600
(1):XG0224/XG0448
vlan ip6qos aclmap
mac age
(1):XG0224/XG0448
MAC
LAN
(1) *1
mac learning
mac flush
(1) *1
(1):XG0224/XG0448
lan description
lan ip address
lan ip route
(0)
(1)
(1)
lan ip filter
(6):XG2600
(1):XG0224/XG0448
lan ip dscp
(6):XG2600
(1):XG0224/XG0448
lan ip arp static
lan vlan
(1)
(1)
lan ip6 use
lan ip6 ifid
(1)
(1)
lan ip6 address
lan ip6 ra mode
lan ip6 route
lan ip6 filter
lan ip6 dscp
lan llmnr use
oob ip address
oob ip route
oob ip6 use
oob ip6 ifid
oob ip6 address
oob ip6 ra mode
oob ip6 route
oob llmnr use
ip arp age
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1):XG0224/XG0448
(1):XG0224/XG0448
(1)
Management LAN port
(1):XG2600
(1):XG2600
(1):XG2600
(1):XG2600
(1):XG2600
(1):XG2600
(1):XG2600
(1):XG2600
(1)
IP
QoS
qos cosmap
stp
(4):XG0224/XG0448
(1) *3
STP
LLDP
Loop Detect
lldp
(1)
loopdetect
(1)
Effect by "commit" Command Execution
544
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
Type
Command Name
Effect of "commit"
ACL
acl
(6)*6:XG2600
(1):XG0224/XG0448
AAA
aaa
(1)
Device
snmp
syslog
time
(1)
(1)
(1)
proxydns
host
(1)
(1)
password format
password admin set
password user set
password aaa
password authtype
schedule
(0)
(0)
(0)
(1)
(1)
(1)
resource
(4):XG0224/XG0448
watchdog service
consoleinfo
(4)
(1)
telnetinfo
(1)
mflag
(1)
dumpswitch
(1):XG0224/XG0448
sysname
(4)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
serverinfo
Login banner
login banner telnet
login banner ftp
login banner ssh
login banner description
(0)
The settings are enabled immediately after the command has been executed.
Only the relevant function is stopped or restarted.
(1)
(1)-1
In addition to operation (1), the relevant route is added or deleted with the route
change for this device and the neighboring routers.
(2)
The communication via the relevant logical interface is interrupted briefly.
The relevant Ethernet port is linked down or linked up.
(3)
(3)-LA
If changed from "static" to "passive" or "active" or vice versa, the relevant Ethernet
port is linked down or linked up.
If changed from "passive" to "active" or vice versa, the operation is the same as (1).
(3)-1
(4)
If changed from "online" to "offline", the relevant Ethernet port is linked down or
linked up.
If changed from "offline" to "online", the operation is the same as (1).
To enable the settings, the device needs to be restarted (or reset).
Effect by "commit" Command Execution
545
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 5 Command Reference
(5)
The port which is set to be target port, is used for monitoring function only, and
can not be used for forwarding.
(6)
*1
*2
Forwarding frames is interrupted briefly.
The registered learning table may be deleted.
If changed the VLAN ID which used by system for the Management Port, the
communication via the Management Port is interrupted briefly, and the TCP
session is closed.
*3
If the bridge network configuration is changed, the registered learning table may
be deleted or the communication via the relevant interface may be interrupted
briefly.
*4
*5
If configured to use ACL Filter/QoS, the forwarding frames is interrupted briefly.
If there are "vlan protocol" definitions over 16, the definition, the VLAN and the
ports belong to the VLAN are invalid.
*6
The system reconfigure the Protocol VLAN and the ACL Filter/QoS, the
communication via the all ports is interrupted briefly.
Effect by "commit" Command Execution
546
Chapter 6
Managing the
Device
This chapter describes the Managing the Device.
6.1 Verifying the Device Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
6.1.1 Verifying Hardware Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
6.1.2 Verifying System Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556
6.1.3 Reviewing Log Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
6.2 Saving/Restoring Configuration Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
6.2.1 Saving/restoring configuration information using FTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
6.2.2 Saving/restoring configuration information using a Compact Flash Card . . . . . . . . . . . . 564
6.2.3 Saving/restoring configuration information using USB memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
6.3 Updating Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
6.3.1 Updating Firmware Using FTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
6.3.2 Updating Firmware Using CompactFlash card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570
6.3.3 Updating Firmware Using USB memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572
6.4 Actions When Firmware Update Failes (Backup Firm Function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
6.4.1 Preparing the Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
6.4.2 Updating the Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
6.5 Extracting of Maintenance Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577
Occurred. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 6 Managing the Device
6.1 Verifying the Device Operations
This chapter describes the management of the device.
•
•
•
Hardware status
System status
Log messages
6.1.1 Verifying Hardware Status
Verify the status of hardware by entering the "show system status" command and "show ether media-info" command in the
operation mode (admin class) or the configuration mode (admin class).
The following example shows the information that is displayed when the "show system status" command is entered.
Execution Example
XG0224
When no Expansion Card is installed.
# show system status
Current-time
Startup-time
restart_cause
machine_state
power0_state
fan0_state
: Wed Dec 10 06:07:43 2008
: Wed Dec 10 06:05:05 2008
: power on
: RUNNING
: NORMAL
: NORMAL
---(1)
---(2)
---(3)
---(4)
---(5)
---(6)
---(7)
inspiration_state
phy_state
: NORMAL
: NORMAL
slot1_state
inspiration_temp
phy_temp
slot1_temp
Slot Information
slot1
: UNKNOWN
: 26 C
: 40 C
: -- C
---(8)
---(9)
: NO_PRESENT
When a CX4 Card is installed.
# show system status
Current-time
Startup-time
restart_cause
machine_state
power0_state
fan0_state
: Wed Dec 10 05:55:40 2008
---(1)
---(2)
---(3)
---(4)
---(5)
---(6)
---(7)
: Wed Dec 10 05:52:11 2008
: power on
: RUNNING
: NORMAL
: NORMAL
: NORMAL
inspiration_state
phy_state
: NORMAL
slot1_state
inspiration_temp
phy_temp
slot1_temp
Slot Information
slot1
: UNKNOWN
: 25 C
: 40 C
---(8)
---(9)
: -- C
: SJ10GCX4Z
Verifying the Device Operations
548
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 6 Managing the Device
When a SFP+ Card is installed.
# show system status
Current-time
Startup-time
restart_cause
machine_state
power0_state
fan0_state
: Wed Dec 10 06:03:04 2008
: Wed Dec 10 06:02:19 2008
: reset
: RUNNING
: NORMAL
: NORMAL
---(1)
---(2)
---(3)
---(4)
---(5)
---(6)
---(7)
inspiration_state
phy_state
: NORMAL
: NORMAL
slot1_state
inspiration_temp
phy_temp
slot1_temp
Slot Information
slot1
: NORMAL
: 25 C
: 39 C
: 39 C
---(8)
---(9)
: SJ10GSFPZ
1) Current time
Present date and time.
2) Startup time
Date and time when the system started up.
3) restart_cause
Cause for the system startup.
The following system startup causes are displayed:
power on
reset
: The power has been turned on.
: The reset command has been issued.
reset switch
system down
: The [RESET] switch has been pressed.
: System-down has occurred.
4) machine_state
State of the device
RUNNING
: The device is active.
5) power0_state
State of the power unit.
NORMAL
: The power unit works normally.
NO_PRESENT : The power unit is not installed.
FAIL
: The power unit has been turned off.
: The power unit is invalid state.
UNKNOWN
6) fan0_state
State of the fan 0.
NORMAL
: The fan works normally.
: The fan has been abnormal.
: The fan is invalid state.
ABNORMAL
UNKNOWN
7) inspiration_state
State of environment temperature monitor.
phy_state
State of temperature monitor around PHY.
slot1_state
State of Expansion Card temperature monitor (SLOT1).
Verifying the Device Operations
549
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 6 Managing the Device
NORMAL
: The temperature is normal.
HIGHWARNING : The device changes to a high temperature state.
HIGHALARM
UNKNOWN
: Thermal alarm occurs in the device.
: There are three following states.
The Expantion Card without Thermal Sensor is installed. (CX4).
The Invalid Expantion Card is installed.
The Expantion Card is not installed.
8) inspiration_temp
Environment temperature.
phy_temp
temperature around PHY.
slot1_temp
temperature around Expansion Card (SLOT1).
At the time of three following states, "--" is displayed.
The Expantion Card without Thermal Sensor is installed. (CX4)
The Invalid Expantion Card is installed.
The Expantion Card is not installed.
9) Slot Information
The type of Expansion Card.
SJ10GCX4Z
SJ10GSFPZ
: Installed Expansion Card is SJ10GCX4Z. (CX4)
: Installed Expansion Card is SJ10GSFPZ. (SFP+)
NO_PRESENT : The Expantion Card is not installed.
UNKNOWN : Installed Expansion Card is Invalid Card.
XG0448
When a CX4 Card is installed in Slot 1 and a SFP+ Card is installed in Slot 2.
# show system status
Current-time
Startup-time
restart_cause
machine_state
power0_state
power_consumption
fan0_state
: Tue Dec 9 20:43:01 2008
: Tue Dec 9 20:42:48 2008
: power on
: RUNNING
: NORMAL
---(1)
---(2)
---(3)
---(4)
---(5)
---(10)
---(6)
: 79 W
: NORMAL
fan1_state
: NORMAL
fan2_state
: NORMAL
inspiration_state
phy_state
slot1_state
slot2_state
inspiration_temp
phy_temp
: NORMAL
: NORMAL
: UNKNOWN
: NORMAL
: 31 C
---(7)
---(8)
: 38 C
slot1_temp
: -- C
slot2_temp
: 29 C
Slot Information
slot1
slot2
: SJ10GCX4Z
: SJ10GSFPZ
---(9)
1) Current time
Present date and time.
2) Startup time
Date and time when the system started up.
Verifying the Device Operations
550
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 6 Managing the Device
3) restart_cause
Cause for the system startup.
The following system startup causes are displayed:
power on
reset
: The power has been turned on.
: The reset command has been issued.
reset switch : The [RESET] switch has been pressed.
system down : System-down has occurred.
4) machine_state
State of the device
RUNNING: The device is active.
5) power0_state
State of the power unit.
NORMAL
: The power unit works normally.
NO_PRESENT : The power unit is not installed.
FAIL
: The power unit has been turned off.
: The power unit is invalid state.
UNKNOWN
6) fan0_state
State of the fan 0.
fan1_state
State of the fan 1.
fan2_state
State of the fan 2.
NORMAL
: The fan works normally.
: The fan has been abnormal.
: The fan is invalid state.
ABNORMAL
UNKNOWN
7) inspiration_state
State of environment temperature monitor.
phy_state
State of temperature monitor around PHY.
slot1_state
State of Expansion Card temperature monitor (SLOT1).
slot2_state
State of Expansion Card temperature monitor (SLOT2).
NORMAL : The temperature is normal.
HIGHWARNING : The device changes to a high temperature state.
HIGHALARM
UNKNOWN
: Thermal alarm occurs in the device.
: There are three following states.
The Expantion Card without Thermal Sensor is installed. (CX4)
The Invalid Expantion Card is installed.
The Expantion Card is not installed.
8) inspiration_temp
Environment temperature.
phy_temp
temperature around PHY.
slot1_temp
temperature around Expansion Card (SLOT1).
At the time of three following states, "--" is displayed.
The Expantion Card without Thermal Sensor is installed. (CX4)
The Invalid Expantion Card is installed.
The Expantion Card is not installed.
Verifying the Device Operations
551
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 6 Managing the Device
slot2_temp
temperature around Expansion Card (SLOT2).
At the time of three following states, "--" is displayed.
The Expantion Card without Thermal Sensor is installed. (CX4)
The Invalid Expantion Card is installed.
The Expantion Card is not installed.
9) Slot Information
The type of Expansion Card.
SJ10GCX4Z
SJ10GSFPZ
: Installed Expansion Card is SJ10GCX4A. (CX4)
: Installed Expansion Card is SJ10GSFPA. (SFP+)
NO_PRESENT : The Expantion Card is not installed.
UNKNOWN
: Installed Expansion Card is Invalid Card.
10) power_consumption
Power consumption of the device.
XG2600
# show system status
Current-time
Startup-time
restart_cause
machine_state
access_direction
power_redundancy
PSU1 state
: Thu Dec 21 16:04:50 2008
: Thu Dec 21 16:04:36 2008
---(1)
---(2)
---(3)
---(4)
---(5)
---(6)
---(7)
: power on
: RUNNING
: front access
: redundant
: NORMAL
PSU2 state
: NORMAL
PSU1 type
: AC
---(8)
PSU2 type
: AC
power_consumption
FAN1 state
: 75 W
: NORMAL
---(9)
---(10)
FAN2 state
: NORMAL
inspiration_state
inspiration_temp
warning time
recover time
internal_state
inspiration_temp
internal_temp
: NORMAL
: NORMA
: Fri Dec 26 14:00:45 2008
: Fri Dec 26 14:12:30 2008
: NORMAL
---(11)
---(12)
: 35 C
: 32 C
---(13)
1) Current time
Present date and time.
2) Startup time
Date and time when the system started up.
3) restart_cause
Cause for the system startup.
The following system startup causes are displayed:
power on
reset
: The power has been turned on.
: The reset command has been issued.
reset switch : The [RESET] switch has been pressed.
system down : System-down has occurred.
4) machine_state
State of the device
RUNNING
FALLBACK
: The device is active.
: The device is into fallback state.
Verifying the Device Operations
552
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 6 Managing the Device
5) access_direction
Direction where a device is installed in.
front access
rear access
: The device should be installed forward.
: The device should be installed backward.
6) power_redundancy
State of the redundant power unit.
single
: The device has no redundant power unit.
: The device has a redundant power unit.
redundant
7) PSU1 state
State of the power unit (PSU1).
PSU2 state
Type of the power unit (PSU2).
NORMAL
: The power unit works normally.
NO_PRESENT : The power unit is not installed.
NO_POWER
FAIL
: The power unit has been turned off.
: The power unit has been abnormal.
: The power unit is invalid type.
UNKNOWN
WARNING
: The power unit has been incorrectly mounted.
8) PSU1 type
Type of the power unit (PSU1).
PSU2 type
Type of the power unit (PSU2).
AC
--
: The power unit is AC.
: The power unit is not installed or invalid type.
9) power_consumption
Power consumption of the device.
10) FAN1 state
State of the fan module 1.
FAN2 state
State of the fan module 2.
NORMAL
FAIL
: The fan module works normally.
: The fan module has been abnormal.
NO_PRESENT : The fan module is not installed.
UNKNOWN
WARNING
: The fan module is invalid direction.
: The fan module has been incorrectly mounted.
11) inspiration_state
State of environment temperature monitor.
internal_state
State of device inside temperature monitor.
NORMAL
WARNING
ALARM
: The temperature is normal.
: The device changes to a high temperature state.
: Thermal alarm occurs in the device.
12) State of changing thermal state
warning time
recover time
: The time when a device changed in a high temperature state.
: The time when a device returned to a normal state.
13) inspiration_temp
Environment temperature.
internal_temp
Device inside temperature.
Verifying the Device Operations
553
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 6 Managing the Device
The following example shows the information that is displayed when the "show ether media-info" command is entered.
Execution Example
Execution Example (XG0224)
# show ether media-info
Port media type Vendor PN
---- ---------- ----------------
(1) (2)
(3)
21
22
23
24
25
26
SFP(SX)
HFBR-5710L
SFP(ZX)
SFP(LX)
SFP(FX)
SFP+(LR)
SFP+(SR)
SCP6P94-F7-BMH
SCP6P44-F7-BMH
HFBR-57E0P
FTLX1471D3BCL
TRS2000EN-S002
Execution Example (XG0448)
# show ether media-info
Port media type Vendor PN
---- ---------- ----------------
(1) (2)
(3)
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
NONE
NONE
SFP(LX)
NONE
SFP+(LR)
SFP+(SR)
SFP+(SR)
NONE
SCP6P44-F7-BMH
FTLX1471D3BCL
TRS2000EN-S002
TRS2000EN-S002
Execution Example (XG2600)
# show ether media-info
Port media type Vendor PN
---- ---------- ----------------
(1) (2)
(3)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
SFP+(SR)
FTLX8571D3BCL
FTLX8571D3BCL
FTLX8571D3BCL
FTLX8571D3BCL
FTLX8571D3BCL
FTLX8571D3BCL
FTLX8571D3BCL
FTLX8571D3BCL
FTLX8571D3BCL
FTLX8571D3BCL
FTLX8571D3BCL
FTLX8571D3BCL
FTLX8571D3BCL
FTLX8571D3BCL
FTLX8571D3BCL
FTLX8571D3BCL
FTLX8571D3BCL
FTLX8571D3BCL
FTLX8571D3BCL
FTLX8571D3BCL
FTLX8571D3BCL
FTLX8571D3BCL
FTLX8571D3BCL
FTLX8571D3BCL
SFP+(SR)
SFP+(SR)
SFP+(SR)
SFP+(SR)
SFP+(SR)
SFP+(SR)
SFP+(SR)
SFP+(SR)
SFP+(SR)
SFP+(SR)
SFP+(SR)
SFP+(SR)
SFP+(SR)
SFP+(SR)
SFP+(SR)
SFP+(SR)
SFP+(SR)
SFP+(SR)
SFP+(SR)
SFP+(SR)
SFP+(SR)
SFP+(SR)
SFP+(SR)
NONE
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
NONE
1) Port number
Verifying the Device Operations
554
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 6 Managing the Device
2) Media information
The type of the installed module is displayed
SFP(SX)
SFP(LX)
SFP(FX)
SFP (1000BASE-SX) module is installed
SFP (1000BASE-LX) module is installed
SFP (1000BASE-FX) module is installed
SFP(BX-D) SFP (1000BASE-BX-D) module is installed
SFP(BX-U) SFP (1000BASE-BX-U) module is installed
SFP(ZX)
CX4
SFP (1000BASE-ZX) module is installed
The CX4 expansion card is mounted. (Only for XG0448/XG0224. )
SFP+ (10GBASE-SR) module is installed
SFP+(SR)
SFP+(LR)
SFP+ (10GBASE-LR) module is installed
UNKNOWN Type of the installed module is unknown
NONE SFP+ module is not installed or the module of the unsupport is
mounted.
3) Vendor Part Number
Vendor part number of the installed module is displayed.
The information is displayed even if the type of the module is unknown.
Verifying the Device Operations
555
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 6 Managing the Device
6.1.2 Verifying System Status
Verify the system status by entering the "show system information" command in the operation mode (admin class) or the
configuration mode (admin class).
The following example shows the information that is displayed when the "show system information" command is entered.
Execution Example
# show system information
Current time : Fri Jan 14 14:00:45 2011
Startup time : Fri Jan 14 08:40:05 2011
System : XG2600
Serial No. : 00000123
ROM Ver. : 1.3
---(1)
---(2)
---(3)
---(4)
---(5)
---(6)
---(7)
---(8)
---(9)
---(10)
---(11)
ASIC Firm Ver. : 090203PL1
Firm Ver. : V01.00 NY0001 Tue Nov 14 17:52:15 JST 2006
Startup-config : Sat Jan 01 13:08:04 2011 config1
Running-config : Sat Jan 01 13:08:04 2011
MAC : 000b5d89011
Memory : 256MB
1) Current time
Displays the current date and time.
2) Startup time
Displays the date and time when the device started up.
3) System
Displays the device name.
4) Serial No.
Displays the device serial number.
5) ROM Ver.
Displays the ROM version number in the xx.yy format. xx.yy is indicated by a
decimal value.
6) ASIC Firm Ver. (XG2600 Only)
Displays the ASIC firmware version number in the yymmddPLn format.
yymmdd is indicated by date (year-month-day). PLn shows patch level and n is
indicated by digit decimal value.
7) Firm Ver.
Displays the firmware version number in the Vxx.yy format.
"xx.yy is indicated by a two-digit decimal value.
8) Startup-config
Displays the date and time when you have saved the configuration to be read
during device startup, as well as the file name.
9) Running-config
Displays the date and time, when you applied the configuration that is currently
active.
10) MAC
Displays the MAC address with a 12-digit hexadecimal value.
11) Memory
Displays the memory size installed in the device.
Verifying the Device Operations
556
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 6 Managing the Device
6.1.3 Reviewing Log Messages
6.1.3.1 Format of System Log Message
System log messages from the device are classified into 4 levels -- error, info, notice and warn.
In the default setting, 3 levels of system log messages (error,warn and info) are put.
To display system logs, run the "show logging syslog" command in the operation mode (admin class) or the configuration
mode (admin class).
An example of the format of a system log message displayed by the "show logging syslog" command is shown below.
Execution Example
# show logging syslog
Dec 13 15:52:31 192.168.1.1 XG2600: init: system startup now.
Dec 13 15:52:31 192.168.1.1 XG2600: sshd: generating public/private host key pair.
Dec 13 15:52:40 192.168.1.1 XG2600: protocol: ether 1 link up
Dec 13 15:52:40 192.168.1.1 XG2600: protocol: lan 0 link up
Verifying the Device Operations
557
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 6 Managing the Device
6.1.3.2 Reviewing Error Logs
If a fault occurred, review the error log to check fault messages.
To review error logs, enter the "show logging error" command in the operation mode (admin class) or the configuration
mode (admin class).
The following examples show the information that is displayed when the "show logging error" command is entered.
Execution Example
# show logging error
Error Logs on FLASH:
[0] Error Log:
flag=80,mode=00,unit=10,regsp=00000000
Firm information:
XG2600 V01.00 PTF:NY0010
Error information:
error code [85020000]
Logging time:
2011/01/01(Sat) 11:51:17
Hardware diagnostic error information:
Detail [00142224 00142228 00000080 0000341f]
[00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000]
[00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000]
[00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000]
[00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000]
[00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000]
Extended Error Logs:
[1] Error Log:
flag=80,mode=00,unit=10,regsp=00000000
Firm information:
XG2600 V01.00 PTF:NY0010
Error information:
error code [85020000]
Logging time:
2011/01/01(Sat) 11:59:37
Hardware diagnostic error information:
Detail [00142224 00142228 00000080 00003520]
[00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000]
[00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000]
[00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000]
[00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000]
[00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000]
Error Logs on DRAM:
[0] Error Log:
flag=80,mode=00,unit=80,regsp=04ae9e60
Firm information:
XG2600 V01.00 PTF:NY0010
System down information:
down code [00000080:00000002]
Logging time:
2011/01/01(Sat) 13:05:23
Register:
srr0
[0086dab4] srr1
[0002d000] csrr0
[00000000] csrr1
[00000000] mcsr
[00000000] tsr
[00000000]
[00000000]
[00000000]
[01124844]
[a2c9bdbc]
[00000000]
[00000000]
[00000000]
[00000000]
[00000000]
[04aea174]
mcsrr0 [00000000] mcsrr1 [00000000] mcar
lr
[00886d74] dear
[00000000] gpr01
[0087a01c] gpr05
[c1bcb0a1] gpr09
[aca5a4a5] gpr13
[00000000] gpr17
[00000000] gpr21
[04aea1e0] gpr25
[00000000] gpr29
[0087a01c] esr
gpr00
gpr04
gpr08
gpr12
gpr16
gpr20
gpr24
gpr28
[04ae9f60] gpr02
[00000005] gpr06
[00000005] gpr10
[00000000] gpr14
[00000000] gpr18
[00000000] gpr22
[04aea1f0] gpr26
[ffffffff] gpr30
[00000005] gpr03
[010cf924] gpr07
[d8c4eab7] gpr11
[00000000] gpr15
[00000000] gpr19
[00000000] gpr23
[0121ff74] gpr27
[0121ff7c] gpr31
Peripheral Register:
err_det [00000000] l2errdet[00000000] eedr
[00000000] ltesr
[00000000]
(To be continued)
Verifying the Device Operations
558
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 6 Managing the Device
(Continued)
User Stack:
+0
+4
+8
+C
+0 +4 +8 +C
04ae9f60 04aea1d0 00886d58 04ae9fb8 04ae9fa0
04ae9f70 00c6fcbb fea4cebb d8c4eab7 c1bcb0a1
04ae9f80 a2c9bdbc a8b7c1bc b0a4f2a5 aca5a4a5
04ae9f90 c9a5e9a5 a4a5f3a4 cba4a2a4 efa4bba4
04ae9fa0 eba1a30a 00000000 00000000 00000000
04ae9fb0 04aea1c0 00000000 00000000 00000000
04ae9fc0 85004100 04aea0b0 0000000a 00000000
04ae9fd0 04ae9ff0 04ae9fb0 04ae9fb0 00000100
04ae9fe0 00000000 85004100 00000100 04aea068
04ae9ff0 04aea020 00000000 00000000 00000000
04aea000 00000000 04aea0f0 00000007 00000000
04aea010 00000001 04ae9ff0 04aea000 2066696c
04aea020 73666572 000002bf 5472616e 01e89be0
04aea030 42000082 00000000 00000000 00000000
04aea040 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
04aea050 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
04aea060 010b0000 04b22114 0000005d 00000000
04aea070 04aea148 0124269c ffffffff ffffffff
04aea080 00405cfc 0002d000 ffffffff ffffffff
04aea090 0087b9dc 00000000 00000000 42002088
04aea0a0 00000001 00000000 00000000 42002088
04aea0b0 00000001 0002d000 00000100 00000001
04aea0c0 0087b6d4 00000000 00000000 42000084
04aea0d0 00000001 00000100 00000002 035fc300
04aea0e0 04aea110 01260af0 00004e43 00000020
04aea0f0 04aea100 01260af0 00004e43 00000020
04aea100 04aea130 0087b810 01261d28 035fcdc0
04aea110 04aea140 01260af0 00004e43 42000082
04aea120 04aea140 00000022 00000000 035fcdc0
04aea130 04aea140 0087b8c0 00000000 035fcdc0
04aea140 04aea170 0087a23c 00000022 01230168
04aea150 04aea1d0 04b11152 00769eec 01230168
04aea160 00000000 00000022 04b22114 0000005d
04aea170 00000000 0087a01c 00000000 00000200
04aea180 04b71ee0 04b22114 01230168 00000022
04aea190 04aea1a0 00869238 00000000 00000000
04aea1a0 04aea1c0 00867cd8 00000000 00000000
04aea1b0 010b0000 04b11152 00769eec 01230168
04aea1c0 04b71ee0 01240000 010ed184 01230168
04aea1d0 04aea210 00768d20 00000000 00000000
04aea1e0 04b71ee0 04aea220 01230168 0121fd30
04aea1f0 04aea210 007697d4 00769eec 01230168
04aea200 04b71ee0 01240000 01230168 01240000
04aea210 04aea330 007685d4 04aea200 fffffffb
04aea220 4649524d 57415245 2d494e46 4f000000
04aea230 53522d53 37313643 32000000 00000000
04aea240 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
04aea250 4e593030 31302056 30322e30 30000000
04aea260 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
04aea270 4d6f6e20 46656220 20372031 343a3239
04aea280 3a353920 4a535420 32303035 00000000
......mX........
................
................
................
................
................
..A.............
................
......A........h
... ............
................
............ fil
sfer....Tran....
B...............
................
................
......!....]....
...H.$&.........
.@\.............
............B. .
............B. .
................
............B...
............._..
.....&....NC...
.....&....NC...
...0.....&.(._..
...@.&....NCB...
...@..."....._..
...@........._..
...p...<...".#.h
.......R.v...#.h
......."..!....]
................
......!..#.h..."
.......8........
......|.........
.......R.v...#.h
.....$.......#.h
.....v. ........
....... .#.h.!.0
.....v...v...#.h
.....$...#.h.$..
...0.v..........
FIRMWARE-INFO...
XG2600............
................
NY0010 V01.00...
................
Thu Jan 1 14:29
:59 JST 2011....
(To be continued)
Verifying the Device Operations
559
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 6 Managing the Device
(Continued)
04aea290 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
................
04aea2a0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
04aea2b0 00000000 00000000 00000000 000001d4
04aea2c0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
04aea2d0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
04aea2e0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
04aea2f0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
04aea300 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
04aea310 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
04aea320 011395e0 00000004 01240000 01240000
04aea330 04aea360 00769fe4 00000000 035fcdc0
04aea340 04aea360 0087a23c 7ffffff0 01230168
04aea350 00000004 04aea370 01240000 04b71ee0
................
................
................
................
................
................
................
................
.........$...$..
...`.v......._..
...`...<.....#.h
.......p.$......
Interrupt Stack:
+0
+4
+8
+C
+0 +4 +8 +C
04ae9e60 00000000 04aea1f0 0121ff74 00000000
04ae9e70 00000000 04ae9f60 00000005 01124844
04ae9e80 0087a01c 00000005 010cf924 a2c9bdbc
04ae9e90 c1bcb0a1 00000005 d8c4eab7 00000000
04ae9ea0 aca5a4a5 00000000 00000000 00000000
04ae9eb0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
04ae9ec0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
04ae9ed0 04aea1e0 04aea1f0 0121ff74 00000000
04ae9ee0 00000000 ffffffff 0121ff7c 04aea174
04ae9ef0 0086dab4 0002d000 00000000 00000000
04ae9f00 00886d74 00000005 00000000 42000082
04ae9f10 00000001 0087a01c 00000000 00000000
04ae9f20 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
04ae9f30 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
04ae9f40 00000000 00000000 00000000 04aea170
04ae9f50 04ae9f60 01260af0 00004e43 00000008
# exit
.........!.t....
.......`......HD
...........$....
................
................
................
................
.........!.t....
.........!.|...t
................
..mt........B...
................
................
................
...............p
...`.&....NC....
Verifying the Device Operations
560
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 6 Managing the Device
6.2 Saving/Restoring Configuration
Information
This device allows you to save/restore configuration information using the following methods:
•
•
•
Saving/restoring configuration information using FTP
Saving/restoring configuration information using a CompactFlash card
Saving/restoring configuration information using USB memory
6.2.1 Saving/restoring configuration information using FTP
All models
Available Model
This device provides FTP and SFTP server functions, and allows you to use PC or UNIXR system ftp and sftp commands
to save/restore configuration information.
This section presents an example of using the XG2600’s FTP server function with ftp commands.
To use the SFTP server function, sftp client software supporting SSH protocol version 2 is necessary. This would allow
you to use sftp commands just as you use ftp commands.
Use the following user name and password with the FTP server function:
•
•
User name
Password
: ftp-admin
: Specify the password configured with the password command
Note When the password is not defined, the FTP server function works assuming that no password exists.
z Files for maintenance
The FTP server function maintains files with the following names:
•
•
Configuration information 1
Configuration information 2
: config1
: config2
z Restart method
Enter "get reset" as a subcommand for the ftp command to restart the device.
To switch the configuration information, use "get reset1" or "get reset2" to restart the device.
•
•
•
When get reset" is entered
When "get reset1" is entered
When "get reset2" is entered
: The current configuration information takes effect after restart.
: Configuration information 1 takes effect after restart.
: Configuration information 2 takes effect after restart.
Precautions
•
It is strongly recommended to define the password to ensure security.
While no password is defined, anyone can access to the device from the network, resulting in a very dangerous
situation.
Reference
Saving/Restoring Configuration Information
561
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 6 Managing the Device
•
The following error message may be displayed while using ftp commands:
502 PASV command not implemented.
Passive mode regused.
If this error message is displayed, perform the following operation and retry the failed operation:
ftp> passive : Change the passive mode.
Passive mode off.
Saving configuration information using the FTP server function
The following explains how to save configuration information using ftp commands on a PC.
Get configuration information
with an ftp command
FTP client
IP address
192.168.1.1
Precautions
Be sure to observe the following precautions while performing maintenance operations:
•
•
•
Do not cut power to the device.
Ensure that no data communication is taking place on the device.
Perform these operations only when no configuration is taking place on the console.
z Example of using an ftp command
The following example saves configuration information 1 to the config1-1 file on the PC.
C:\>cd Directory in which to store configuration information
C:\tmp>ftp 192.168.1.1
: Connect to the device.
Connected to 192.168.1.1.
220 XG2600 V01.00 FTP server (config1) ready.
Name(192.168.1.1:root): ftp-admin
: Enter the user name.
331 Password required for ftp-admin.
Password:
: Enter the password.
230 User ftp-admin logged in.
ftp>bin
: Enter binary mode.
200 Type set to I.
fftp>get config1 config1-1
: Save configuration information 1 (config1) to the config1-1 file.
local: config1 remote: config1-1
200 PORT command successful.
150 Opening BINARY mode data connection for ‘config1’(2753 bytes)
•
226- Transfer complete.
2857 bytes received in 1.10 seconds (2.44 Kbytes/s)
ftp>bye
: Finish
221 Goodbye.
C:\tmp>
Saving/Restoring Configuration Information
562
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 6 Managing the Device
Reference
Restoring configuration information using the FTP server function
The following explains how to restore configuration information using ftp commands on a PC.
Put configuration information
with an ftp command
FTP client
IP address
192.168.1.1
Precautions
Be sure to observe the following precautions while performing maintenance operations:
•
•
•
Do not cut power to the device.
Ensure that no data communication is taking place on the device.
Perform only when no configuration is taking place on the console.
z Example of using an ftp command
The following example restores configuration information 1 from the config1-1 file on the PC.
C:\>cd Directory in which to store configuration information
C:\tmp>ftp 192.168.1.1
: Connect to the device.
Connected to 192.168.1.1.
220 XG2600 V01.00 FTP server (config1) ready.
Name(192.168.1.1:root): ftp-admin
331 Password required for ftp-admin.
Password:
: Enter the user name.
: Enter the password.
230 User ftp-admin logged in.
ftp>bin
: Enter binary mode.
200 Type set to I.
ftp>put config1-1 config1
local: config1-1 remote: config1
200 PORT command successful.
: Write the config1-1 file as configuration information 1.
150 Opening BINARY mode data connection for ‘config1’
226- Transfer complete.
update : File information check now!
update : File information check ok.
•
•
226 Write complete.
2856 bytes sent in 1.10 seconds (2.44 Kbytes/s)
ftp>get reset
: Restart the device.
local: reset remote: reset
200 PORT command successful.
421 Reset request ok. bye.
ftp>bye
: Finish
C:\tmp>
Saving/Restoring Configuration Information
563
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 6 Managing the Device
Be sure to restart the device to so that the restored configuration information can take effect.
Note
Enter "get reset" as a subcommand for the ftp command to restart.
To switch the configuration information, enter "get reset1" or "get reset2" and restart the device.
• When "get reset" is entered
• When "get reset1" is entered
• When "get reset2" is entered
: The current configuration information takes effect after restart.
: Configuration information 1 takes effect after restart.
: Configuration information 2 takes effect after restart.
6.2.2 Saving/restoring configuration information using a
Compact Flash Card
XG0224
Available Model
You can save the device’s configuration information on a CompactFlash card. If necessary, you can also restore the
configuration information saved on a CompactFlash card.
z Configuration information which can be saved
•
•
Configuration information 1
Configuration information 2
: config1
: config2
The following explains how to save/restore configuration information using a CompactFlash card.
Saving configuration information using a Compact Flash Card
The following explains how to save the configuration information of this device to a CompactFlash card.
1.
2.
Insert a CompactFlash card on which you will save configuration information into the CompactFlash
card slot of this device.
Save the configuration information to the CompactFlash card.
z Example
The following example saves configuration information 1 to the config1-1 file.
# copy config1 /cf0/config1-1
Saving/Restoring Configuration Information
564
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 6 Managing the Device
Restoring configuration information using a CompactFlash card
The following explains how to restore device configuration information that has been saved to a CompactFlash card.
1.
2.
Insert the CompactFlash card containing the configuration information into the device’s
CompactFlash card slot.
Restore configuration information from the CompactFlash card.
z Example
The following example restores configuration information 2 from the config2-1 file.
# copy /cf0/config2-1 config2
# reset
: Restart the device.
Note Be sure to restart the device to so that the restored configuration information can take effect.
6.2.3 Saving/restoring configuration information using USB
memory
XG0448 / XG2600
Available Model
You can save the device’s configuration information on USB memory. If necessary, you can also restore the configuration
information saved on USB memory.
z Configuration information which can be saved
•
•
•
•
Candidate configuration
Running configuration
: candidate-config
: running-config
: config1
Configuration information 1
Configuration information 2
: config2
The following explains how to save/restore configuration information using USB memory.
Saving configuration information using USB memory
The following explains how to save the configuration information of this device to USB memory.
1.
2.
Insert USB memory on which you will save the configuration information into the USB port of the
device.
Release the block status of the USB port.
# usbctl enable
3.
Confirm that the block status of the USB port has been released.
Run a show usb hcd status command and ensure that the status displays "enable".
# show usb hcd status
[USB HCD STATUS]
status
: enable
Saving/Restoring Configuration Information
565
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 6 Managing the Device
4.
Save configuration information to the USB memory.
z Example
The following example saves configuration information 1 to the config1-1 file.
# copy config1 /um0/config1-1
5.
6.
Block the USB port.
# usbctl disable
Confirm that the USB port has been blocked.
Run a show usb hcd status command and ensure that the status displays "disable".
# show usb hcd status
[USB HCD STATUS]
status
: disable
7.
Remove the USB memory from the device.
Restoring configuration information using USB memory
The following explains how to restore device configuration information that has been saved to USB memory.
1.
2.
Insert USB memory containing the saved configuration information into the USB port of the device.
Release the block status of the USB port.
# usbctl enable
3.
4.
5.
Confirm that the block status of the USB port has been released.
Run a show usb hcd status command and ensure that the status displays "enable".
# show usb hcd status
[USB HCD STATUS]
status
: enable
Restore configuration information from the USB memory.
z Example
The following example restores configuration information 2 from the config2-1 file.
# copy /um0/config2-1 config2
# reset
: Restart the device.
Block the USB port.
# usbctl disable
Saving/Restoring Configuration Information
566
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 6 Managing the Device
6.
Confirm that the USB port has been blocked.
Run a show usb hcd status command and ensure that the status displays "disable".
# show usb hcd status
[USB HCD STATUS]
status
: disable
7.
Remove the USB memory from the device.
Note Be sure to restart the device to so that the restored configuration information can take effect.
Saving/Restoring Configuration Information
567
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 6 Managing the Device
6.3 Updating Firmware
This section explains how to update the firmware and initialize the settings of the device.
Precautions
•
Before updating the firmware, do not connect the switch via the serial interface.
•
While updating the firmware, do not power off or reset the device or the chassis main or remove the device from the
chassis; otherwise the device will become inoperable.
•
•
•
Verify that the device is not communicating.
Verify that no configuration work using the CLI is in process.
Before updating the firmware, back up the configuration data to an external device.
6.3.1 Updating Firmware Using FTP
All models
Available Model
The following is an example of updating the device firmware using a FTP client.
Update the firmware using FTP
FTP client
192.168.1.1
Connect the device and the Personal Computer Using LAN
Connect the device and the personal computer (FTP client) using LAN. Set an IP address which has the same network as
the device for the personal computer. This section explains about the IP address of the device when set as "192.168.1.1",
and the subnet mask when set as "255.255.255.0" as an example.
Update the Firmware
This section explains how to update the firmware using Windows command prompt.
1.
2.
Save the new firmware in a work folder of the PC.
The storing destination and file name are explained when they are set as "D:\FIRM\XG2600SOFT.ftp" as an example.
Open the command prompt.
1) Click "Start" menu → "Run".
2) Type "cmd" and press the [Enter] key.
The command prompt is displayed.
3.
Change the current directory to the one where the firmware is stored.
C:\> d:
D:\> cd \FIRM
Updating Firmware
568
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 6 Managing the Device
4.
Log in with the account name "ftp-admin".
Log in to the device using FTP command.
Login name: ftp-admin
Password: The password is the one made with the "password set" command.
If no password has been set, there is no need to enter one.
Confirm the password with the system administrator.
D:\FIRM>ftp 192.168.1.1
Connected to 192.168.1.1
220 XG2600 V01.00 FTP server ready.
User (192.168.1.1:(none)): ftp-admin
331 Password required for ftp-admin.
Password:
: Connect the device
(Specify IP address of the device)
: Type login name
: Type password
230 User ftp-admin logged in.
ftp>
5.
Transfer the firmware to the device.
Transfer the firmware to the device in "binary" mode.
Input "put [the file name of the put personal computer (XG2600SOFT.ftp)] [the file name of the device (firmware)]" in the
"put" command.
ftp>binary
: Set "binary" mode
200 Type set to I.
ftp>put XG2600SOFT.ftp firmware
local: XG2600SOFT.ftp remote: firmware
200 PORT command successful.
: Write the "XG2600SOFT.ftp" file as a firmware
150 Opening BINARY mode data connection for `firmware´.
226- Transfer complete.
update : Transfer file check now!
update : Transfer file check ok.
.
.
When forwarding firmware to this product, the destination file name must be input as "firmware". Anything other than
"firmware" cannot be input.
Note
6.
Check that the firmware is completely transferred.
When "Write complete" message is displayed, it indicates that the process is terminated successfully.
.
.
226 Write complete.
ftp>
7.
8.
Exit the ftp mode.
ftp> quit
221 Goodbye.
D:\FIRM>
: Exit "ftp" command
Remove the device from the chassis, wait about 10 seconds, and reinsert the device to the chassis.
The power is turned on again, and the firmware is enabled.
Updating Firmware
569
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 6 Managing the Device
9.
Check that the firmware is successfully updated.
After restarting the device, log in to the device using the telnet or the terminal PC connected via the master management
blade. Enter the "show system information" command to verify the firmware version.
# show system information
:
System : XG2600
:
Firm Ver. : V01.00 (firmware version)
:
6.3.2 Updating Firmware Using CompactFlash card
XG0224
Available Model
This section explains how to update the firmware using a compact flash card.
Firmware Update with a telnet or a console
Follow the instructions below to transfer the firmware saved in a compact flash card using the telnet command or a
console.
1.
2.
3.
Insert the compact flash card into the compact flash card slot on the back of this device.
Login as admin class (admin).
Transfer the firmware from the compact flash card to this device.
For <filename>, enter the filename of the firmware saved in the compact flash card.
copy / cf0 / <filename> firmware
4.
5.
Make sure that the prompt is displayed.
Pull out the power cable of this device and insert it again.
The power is turned on again and the firmware is enabled.
6.
Check that the firmware is updated correctly.
After restarting this device, login to this device using telnet or console. Run the "show system information" command to
check that the product name of this device and the firmware version are correctly displayed.
# show system information
:
System : XG2600 (product name)
:
Firm Ver. : V01.00 (firmware version)
:
Updating Firmware
570
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 6 Managing the Device
Firmware Update with a WWW browser
Follow the instructions below to transfer the firmware saved in a compact flash card using the WWW browser.
1.
Connect this device and a PC via LAN.
Set an IP address which has the same network as the device for the personal computer.
This section explains about the IP address of the device when set as "192.168.1.1", and the subnet mask when set as
"255.255.255.0" as an example.
Precautions
•
The IP address of the device is not set at the initial condition,please set the IP address via serial port.
•
When someone login via serial port or via telnet, you can't connect from WWW browser.
Reference
2.
3.
4.
Insert the compact flash card into the compact flash card slot on the back of this device.
Start the WWW browser.
Specify the URL [http://192.168.1.1/] of this device.
The top page of this device will be displayed.
5.
6.
Login as admin class (admin).
Click [Maintenance] tab on the left side of the top page screen.
The login screen will be displayed.
7.
8.
Click [Compact flash] in the Maintenance menu.
[Compact flash ] page will be displayed.
Click [Update Firmware].
[Update Firmware] page will be displayed.
9.
Specify Firmware file name and click [Update].
Firmware will be updated.
Updating Firmware
571
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 6 Managing the Device
6.3.3 Updating Firmware Using USB memory
XG0448 / X2600
Available Model
This section explains how to update the firmware using a compact USB memory.
Firmware Update with a telnet or a console
Follow the instructions below to transfer the firmware saved in a USB memory using the telnet command or a console.
Insert the USB memory into the USB port on the back of this device.
Login as admin class (admin).
1.
2.
3.
Transfer the firmware from the USB memory to this device.
For <filename>, enter the filename of the firmware saved in the compact flash card.
# copy /um0/<filename> firmware
4.
5.
Make sure that the prompt is displayed.
Pull out the power cable of this device and insert it again.
The power is turned on again and the firmware is enabled.
6.
Check that the firmware is updated correctly.
After restarting this device, login to this device using telnet or console. Run the "show system information" command to
check that the product name of this device and the firmware version are correctly displayed.
# show system information
:
System : XG2600 (product name)
:
Firm Ver. : V01.00 (firmware version)
:
Updating Firmware
572
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 6 Managing the Device
Firmware Update with a WWW browser
Follow the instructions below to transfer the firmware saved in a USB memory using the WWW browser.
1.
Connect this device and a PC via LAN.
Set an IP address which has the same network as the device for the personal computer.
This section explains about the IP address of the device when set as "192.168.1.1", and the subnet mask when set as
"255.255.255.0" as an example.
Precautions
•
The IP address of the device is not set at the initial condition,please set the IP address via serial port.
•
When someone login via serial port or via telnet, you can't connect from WWW browser.
Reference
2.
3.
4.
Insert the USB memory into the USB port on the back of this device.
Start the WWW browser.
Specify the URL [http://192.168.1.1/] of this device.
The top page of this device will be displayed.
5.
6.
Login as admin class (admin).
Click [Maintenance] tab on the left side of the top page screen.
The login screen will be displayed.
7.
8.
Click [USB memory] in the Maintenance menu.
[USB memory ] page will be displayed.
Click [Update Firmware].
[Update Firmware] page will be displayed.
9.
Specify Firmware file name and click [Update].
Firmware will be updated.
Updating Firmware
573
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 6 Managing the Device
6.4 Actions When Firmware Update
Failes (Backup Firm Function)
If the firmware update fails due to power failure or some other reason and you cannot start this device, you can restore the
device to its normal condition by starting the backup firmware and transferring the firmware with an FTP client on the
network or by a compact flash card.
6.4.1 Preparing the Device
Precautions
When the device boots up Backup Firm, the IP address of Management-port (XG2600) or LAN port (XG0224 /
XG0448) is set 192.168.1.1.
A problem has come up, so please connect only this device and a PC.
1.
2.
Make sure that the power of this device is turned off.
Connect this device and a PC via LAN.
•
XG2600
Directly connect a cable to Management Port (10/100BASE-TX port) of this device and the PC instead of using a HUB
in between.
Note Management-port of XG2600 (10/100BASE-TX) is MDI fixed.
•
XG0224 / XG0448
Directly connect a cable to 10/100/1000BASE-T ports of this device and the PC instead of using a HUB in between.
[XG0224]
[XG0448]
As this device supports AutoMDI/MDI-X function, you can connect a cable to 10/100/1000BASE-T ports without being
conscious of the PC and HUB.
Note
Actions When Firmware Update Failes (Backup Firm Function)
574
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 6 Managing the Device
3.
Connect the power cable to the power outlet.
4.
Insert the power cable into the power connector while pressing the reset switch on the back of this
device using a pointed tool. After about five seconds, release the reset switch.
The power is turned on and the backup firmware is started.
Precautions
If you do not release the reset switch within 10 seconds after turning on the device, it is regarded as reset switch failure.
Be sure release the reset switch within 10 seconds.
• It takes about one minute to start the backup firmware.
Note
• The Ready LED blinks in green when the backup firmware is running.
• If you start the backup firmware to logon with the console connected, the "backup#" message is displayed on the console
screen.
•
XG2600
•
XG0224/XG0448
[XG0224]
[XG0448]
Actions When Firmware Update Failes (Backup Firm Function)
575
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 6 Managing the Device
6.4.2 Updating the Firmware
You can perform firmware update by transferring the firmware from an FTP client or a compact flash card.
"6.3.1 Updating Firmware Using FTP" (pg.568), "6.3.2 Updating Firmware Using CompactFlash card" (pg.570),
Reference
Actions When Firmware Update Failes (Backup Firm Function)
576
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 6 Managing the Device
6.5 Extracting of Maintenance Information
If a fault occurred, maintenance information may be requested by the device sales representative to investigate the cause of
the fault. This section provides procedures for extracting maintenance information.
6.5.1 Procedure for Extracting Maintenance Information when a
System/Subsystem Failure Occurred
This section describes the procedures for extracting maintenance information when a system or subsystem failure
occurred.
•
•
Viewing maintenance information
Using the "show tech-support detail" command, you can view the detailed information.
Saving maintenance information
Using the "show tech-support save" command, you can save the maintenance information to the external media.
Using the "show tech-support detail save" command, you can save the detailed information.
Extracting of Maintenance Information
577
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
This chapter describes the Troubleshooting.
7.1 To Return to the Initial Shipment Settings (Initializing Switch Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
XG Series User's Guide
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting
7.1 To Return to the Initial Shipment Settings
(Initializing Switch Configuration)
In case of incorrect settings or problems, this device status can be returned to its initial shipment settings.
When relocating this device, initialize the settings to the time of shipment before setting.
Note Initialization of the setting will erase all the set data. Back up the configuration data or note the contents of settings.
1.
2.
Connect to the device from the terminal PC via the master management blade using the serial
connection.
Type user name and password to log in.
User name: admin
Password: Confirm with the system administrator.
3.
Type "reset clear", and press the [Return] or [Enter] key.
The configuration of the device is initialized.
# reset clear <enter>
>
To Return to the Initial Shipment Settings (Initializing Switch
579
Configuration)
Appendix
This appendix explains the specification for the switch and technical information.
A.1 Trap List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581
XG Series User's Guide
Appendix
A SNMP Traps
This appendix lists the SNMP traps supported by the device.
A.1 Trap List
An SNMP agent can trap events and notify the SNMP manager asynchronously.
An SNMP agent sends trap when an event occurs.
The following is the list of supported traps.
•
•
•
•
•
•
coldStart
Notified once if the device starts or restarts.
linkDown
Notified if a link fails. May be notified at reboot or if the configuration becomes reactivated.
linkUp
Notified if a communication link of the device becomes activated.
authenticationFailure
Notified if SNMP authentication fails.
newRoot
Notified if the device becomes the root bridge.
topologyChange
Notified if a change in the bridge network configuration is detected, i.e., if the network status changes from learning to
forwarding or from forwarding to blocking.
•
•
nosError
Notified if a hardware failure occurs. Only the occurrence of a failure is notified.
lldpRemTablesChange
Notified if the neighbor LLDP device information table changes.
SNMP Traps
581
XG Series User's Guide
Appendix
B List of MIBs
This appendix lists the MIBs supported by the device.
B.1 Standard MIB Definitions
All models
Available Model
The following shows meaning of MIB ACCESS column.
RO
RW
–
:MIB can be read only.
:MIB can be read and written.
:MIB can not be accessed.
B.1.1
system Group
No.
Name
sysDescr
sysObjectID
Object identifier
MIB ACCESS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
system.1
system.2
system.3
system.4
system.5
system.6
system.7
RO
RO
RO
sysUpTime
sysContact
sysName
sysLocation
RW (*)
RW (*)
RW (*)
RO
sysServices
*) Written MIB works on until reset.
List of MIBs
582
XG Series User's Guide
Appendix
B.1.2
interfaces Group
No.
Name
Object identifier
interfaces.1
interfaces.2
ifTable.1
ifEntry.1
MIB ACCESS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
ifNumber
ifTable
ifEntry
RO
–
–
ifIndex
ifDescr
ifType
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RW
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
ifEntry.2
ifEntry.3
ifMtu
ifSpeed
ifPhysAddress
ifEntry.4
ifEntry.5
ifEntry.6
10 ifAdminStatus
11 ifOperStatus
12 ifLastChange
13 ifInOctets
14 ifInUcastPkts
15 ifInNUcastPkts
16 ifInDiscards
17 ifInErrors
18 ifInUnknownProtos
19 ifOutOctets
20 ifOutUcastPkts
21 ifOutNUcastPkts
22 ifOutDiscards
23 ifOutErrors
ifEntry.7
ifEntry.8
ifEntry.9
ifEntry.10
ifEntry.11
ifEntry.12
ifEntry.13
ifEntry.14
ifEntry.15
ifEntry.16
ifEntry.17
ifEntry.18
ifEntry.19
ifEntry.20
ifEntry.21
ifEntry.22
24 ifOutQLen
25 ifSpecific
B.1.3
address translation Group
No.
Name
Object identifier
MIB ACCESS
1
2
3
4
5
atTable
atEntry
at.1
–
–
atTable.1
atEntry.1
atEntry.2
atEntry.3
atIfIndex
atPhysAddress
atNetAddress
RO
RO
RO
B.1.4
ip Group
ip Group
No.
1
Name
Object identifier
MIB ACCESS
ipForwarding
ipDefaultTTL
ipInReceives
ipInHdrErrors
ipInAddrErrors
ipForwDatagrams
ipInUnknownProtos
ipInDiscards
ip.1
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
2
3
4
ip.2
ip.3
ip.4
5
6
ip.5
ip.6
7
8
9
ip.7
ip.8
ip.9
ipInDelivers
10 ipOutRequests
11 ipOutDiscards
12 ipOutNoRoutes
13 ipReasmTimeout
14 ipReasmReqds
ip.10
ip.11
ip.12
ip.13
ip.14
List of MIBs
583
XG Series User's Guide
Appendix
No.
Name
Object identifier
MIB ACCESS
15 ipReasmOKs
16 ipReasmFails
17 ipFragOKs
ip.15
ip.16
ip.17
ip.18
ip.19
ip.23
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
18 ipFragFails
19 ipFragCreates
20 ipRoutingDiscards
ipAddr Group
No.
1
Name
Object identifier
MIB ACCESS
ipAddrTable
ip.20
–
2
3
ipAddrEntry
ipAdEntAddr
ipAddrTable.1
ipAddrEntry.1
ipAddrEntry.2
ipAddrEntry.3
ipAddrEntry.4
ipAddrEntry.5
–
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
4
5
6
ipAdEntIfIndex
ipAdEntNetMask
ipAdEntBcastAddr
ipAdEntReasmMaxSize
7
ipRoute Group
No.
Name
Object identifier
MIB ACCESS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
ipRouteTable
ipRouteEntry
ip.21
–
–
ipRouteTable.1
ipRouteEntry.1
ipRouteEntry.2
ipRouteEntry.3
ipRouteEntry.4
ipRouteEntry.5
ipRouteEntry.6
ipRouteEntry.7
ipRouteEntry.8
ipRouteEntry.9
ipRouteEntry.10
ipRouteEntry.11
ipRouteEntry.12
ipRouteEntry.13
ipRouteDest
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
ipRouteIfIndex
ipRouteMetric1
ipRouteMetric2
ipRouteMetric3
ipRouteMetric4
ipRouteNextHop
10 ipRouteType
11 ipRouteProto
12 ipRouteAge
13 ipRouteMask
14 ipRouteMetric5
15 ipRouteInfo
ipNetToMedia Group
No.
Name
Object identifier
MIB ACCESS
1
2
3
4
5
6
ipNetToMediaTable
ipNetToMediaEntry
ipNetToMediaIfIndex
ipNetToMediaPhysAddress
ipNetToMediaNetAddress
ipNetToMediaType
ip.22
–
ipNetToMediaTable.1
ipNetToMediaEntry.1
ipNetToMediaEntry.2
ipNetToMediaEntry.3
ipNetToMediaEntry.4
–
RO
RO
RO
RO
List of MIBs
584
XG Series User's Guide
Appendix
ipCidrRoute Group
No.
Name
Object identifier
ipForward.3
ipForward.4
MIB ACCESS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
ipCidrRouteNumber
ipCidrRouteTable
ipCidrRouteEntry
ipCidrRouteDest
ipCidrRouteMask
ipCidrRouteTos
RO
–
–
ipCidrRouteTable.1
ipCidrRouteEntry.1
ipCidrRouteEntry.2
ipCidrRouteEntry.3
ipCidrRouteEntry.4
ipCidrRouteEntry.5
ipCidrRouteEntry.6
ipCidrRouteEntry.7
ipCidrRouteEntry.8
ipCidrRouteEntry.9
ipCidrRouteEntry.10
ipCidrRouteEntry.11
ipCidrRouteEntry.12
ipCidrRouteEntry.13
ipCidrRouteEntry.14
ipCidrRouteEntry.15
ipCidrRouteEntry.16
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
ipCidrRouteNextHop
ipCidrRouteIfIndex
ipCidrRouteType
10 ipCidrRouteProto
11 ipCidrRouteAge
12 ipCidrRouteInfo
13 ipCidrRouteNextHopAS
14 ipCidrRouteMetric1
15 ipCidrRouteMetric2
16 ipCidrRouteMetric3
17 ipCidrRouteMetric4
18 ipCidrRouteMetric5
19 ipCidrRouteStatus
inetCidrRoute Group
No.
Name
Object identifier
MIB ACCESS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
inetCidrRouteNumber
inetCidrRouteTable
inetCidrRouteEntry
inetCidrRouteDestType
inetCidrRouteDest
ipForward.6
ipForward.7
RO
–
inetCidrRouteTable.1
inetCidrRouteEntry.1
inetCidrRouteEntry.2
inetCidrRouteEntry.3
inetCidrRouteEntry.4
inetCidrRouteEntry.5
inetCidrRouteEntry.6
inetCidrRouteEntry.7
inetCidrRouteEntry.8
inetCidrRouteEntry.9
inetCidrRouteEntry.10
inetCidrRouteEntry.11
inetCidrRouteEntry.12
inetCidrRouteEntry.13
inetCidrRouteEntry.14
inetCidrRouteEntry.15
inetCidrRouteEntry.16
inetCidrRouteEntry.17
ipForward.8
–
–
–
inetCidrRoutePfxLen
inetCidrRoutePolicy
–
–
inetCidrRouteNextHopType
inetCidrRouteNextHop
–
–
10 inetCidrRouteIfIndex
11 inetCidrRouteType
12 inetCidrRouteProto
13 inetCidrRouteAge
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
14 inetCidrRouteNextHopAS
15 inetCidrRouteMetric1
16 inetCidrRouteMetric2
17 inetCidrRouteMetric3
18 inetCidrRouteMetric4
19 inetCidrRouteMetric5
20 inetCidrRouteStatus
21 inetCidrRouteDiscards
ipv6 Group
No.
1
Name
Object identifier
MIB ACCESS
RO
RO
ipv6IpForwarding
ip.25
ip.26
2
ipv6IpDefaultHopLimit
List of MIBs
585
XG Series User's Guide
Appendix
ipv4Interface Group
No.
Name
Object identifier
MIB ACCESS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
ipv4InterfaceTableLastChange
ipv4InterfaceTable
ipv4InterfaceEntry
ip.27
ip.28
RO
–
–
ipv4InterfaceTable.1
ipv4InterfaceEntry.1
ipv4InterfaceEntry.2
ipv4InterfaceEntry.3
ipv4InterfaceEntry.4
ipv4InterfaceIfIndex
–
ipv4InterfaceReasmMaxSize
ipv4InterfaceEnableStatus
ipv4InterfaceRetransmitTime
RO
RO
RO
ipv6Interface Group
No.
Name
Object identifier
MIB ACCESS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
ipv6InterfaceTableLastChange
ipv6InterfaceTable
ip.29
ip.30
RO
–
ipv6InterfaceEntry
ipv6InterfaceIfIndex
ipv6InterfaceTable.1
ipv6InterfaceEntry.1
ipv6InterfaceEntry.2
ipv6InterfaceEntry.3
ipv6InterfaceEntry.5
ipv6InterfaceEntry.6
ipv6InterfaceEntry.7
ipv6InterfaceEntry.8
–
–
ipv6InterfaceReasmMaxSize
ipv6InterfaceIdentifier
ipv6InterfaceEnableStatus
ipv6InterfaceReachableTime
ipv6InterfaceRetransmitTime
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
10 ipv6InterfaceForwarding
ipSystemStats Group
No.
Name
Object identifier
MIB ACCESS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
ipSystemStatsTable
ipSystemStatsEntry
ipSystemStatsIPVersion
ipTrafficStats.1
–
ipSystemStatsTable.1
ipSystemStatsEntry.1
ipSystemStatsEntry.3
ipSystemStatsEntry.7
ipSystemStatsEntry.10
ipSystemStatsEntry.11
ipSystemStatsEntry.12
ipSystemStatsEntry.14
ipSystemStatsEntry.15
ipSystemStatsEntry.16
ipSystemStatsEntry.18
ipSystemStatsEntry.20
ipSystemStatsEntry.22
ipSystemStatsEntry.23
ipSystemStatsEntry.25
ipSystemStatsEntry.26
ipSystemStatsEntry.27
ipSystemStatsEntry.28
ipSystemStatsEntry.29
ipSystemStatsEntry.30
ipSystemStatsEntry.46
ipSystemStatsEntry.47
–
–
ipSystemStatsInReceives
ipSystemStatsInHdrErrors
ipSystemStatsInUnknownProtos
ipSystemStatsInTruncatedPkts
ipSystemStatsInForwDatagrams
ipSystemStatsReasmReqds
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
10 ipSystemStatsReasmOKs
11 ipSystemStatsReasmFails
12 ipSystemStatsInDelivers
13 ipSystemStatsOutRequests
14 ipSystemStatsOutNoRoutes
15 ipSystemStatsOutForwDatagrams
16 ipSystemStatsOutDiscards
17 ipSystemStatsOutFragReqds
18 ipSystemStatsOutFragOKs
19 ipSystemStatsOutFragFails
20 ipSystemStatsOutFragCreates
21 ipSystemStatsOutTransmits
22 ipSystemStatsDiscontinuityTime
23 ipSystemStatsRefreshRate
List of MIBs
586
XG Series User's Guide
Appendix
ipAddressPrefix Group
No.
Name
Object identifier
MIB ACCESS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
ipAddressPrefixTable
ipAddressPrefixEntry
ipAddressPrefixIfIndex
ipAddressPrefixType
ipAddressPrefixPrefix
ipAddressPrefixLength
ipAddressPrefixOrigin
ip.32
–
–
–
ipAddressPrefixTable.1
ipAddressPrefixEntry.1
ipAddressPrefixEntry.2
ipAddressPrefixEntry.3
ipAddressPrefixEntry.4
ipAddressPrefixEntry.5
ipAddressPrefixEntry.6
ipAddressPrefixEntry.7
ipAddressPrefixEntry.8
ipAddressPrefixEntry.9
–
–
–
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
ipAddressPrefixOnLinkFlag
ipAddressPrefixAutonomousFlag
10 ipAddressPrefixAdvPreferredLifetime
11 ipAddressPrefixAdvValidLifetime
ipAddress Group
No.
1
Name
Object identifier
ip.34
MIB ACCESS
–
ipAddressTable
ipAddressEntry
ipAddressAddrType
ipAddressAddr
ipAddressIfIndex
ipAddressType
ipAddressPrefix
ipAddressOrigin
ipAddressStatus
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
ipAddressTable.1
ipAddressEntry.1
ipAddressEntry.2
ipAddressEntry.3
ipAddressEntry.4
ipAddressEntry.5
ipAddressEntry.6
ipAddressEntry.7
ipAddressEntry.8
ipAddressEntry.9
ipAddressEntry.10
ipAddressEntry.11
–
–
–
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
10 ipAddressCreated
11 ipAddressLastChanged
12 ipAddressRowStatus
13 ipAddressStorageType
ipNetToPhysical Group
No.
Name
Object identifier
ip.35
MIB ACCESS
–
–
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
ipNetToPhysicalTable
ipNetToPhysicalEntry
ipNetToPhysicalIfIndex
ipNetToPhysicalTable.1
ipNetToPhysicalEntry.1
ipNetToPhysicalEntry.2
ipNetToPhysicalEntry.3
ipNetToPhysicalEntry.4
ipNetToPhysicalEntry.5
ipNetToPhysicalEntry.6
ipNetToPhysicalEntry.7
ipNetToPhysicalEntry.8
–
–
–
ipNetToPhysicalNetAddressType
ipNetToPhysicalNetAddress
ipNetToPhysicalPhysAddress
ipNetToPhysicalLastUpdated
ipNetToPhysicalType
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
ipNetToPhysicalState
10 ipNetToPhysicalRowStatus
List of MIBs
587
XG Series User's Guide
Appendix
B.1.5
icmp Group
icmp Group
No.
Name
Object identifier
MIB ACCESS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
icmpInMsgs
icmpInErrors
icmp.1
icmp.2
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
icmpInDestUnreachs
icmpInTimeExcds
icmpInParmProbs
icmpInSrcQuenchs
icmpInRedirects
icmpInEchos
icmp.3
icmp.4
icmp.5
icmp.6
icmp.7
icmp.8
icmpInEchoReps
icmp.9
10 icmpInTimestamps
11 icmpInTimestampReps
12 icmpInAddrMasks
13 icmpInAddrMaskReps
14 icmpOutMsgs
icmp.10
icmp.11
icmp.12
icmp.13
icmp.14
icmp.15
icmp.16
icmp.17
icmp.18
icmp.19
icmp.20
icmp.21
icmp.22
icmp.23
icmp.24
icmp.25
icmp.26
15 icmpOutErrors
16 icmpOutDestUnreachs
17 icmpOutTimeExcds
18 icmpOutParmProbs
19 icmpOutSrcQuenchs
20 icmpOutRedirects
21 icmpOutEchos
22 icmpOutEchoReps
23 icmpOutTimestamps
24 icmpOutTimestampReps
25 icmpOutAddrMasks
26 icmpOutAddrMaskReps
icmpStat Group
No.
1
Name
Object identifier
MIB ACCESS
–
icmpStatsTable
icmp.29
2
icmpStatsEntry
icmpStatsTable.1
icmpStatsEntry.1
icmpStatsEntry.2
icmpStatsEntry.3
icmpStatsEntry.4
icmpStatsEntry.5
–
3
4
5
icmpStatsIPVersion
icmpStatsInMsgs
icmpStatsInErrors
icmpStatsOutMsgs
icmpStatsOutErrors
–
RO
RO
RO
RO
6
7
icmpMsgStats Group
No.
Name
Object identifier
MIB ACCESS
1
2
3
4
5
6
icmpMsgStatsTable
icmpMsgStatsEntry
icmpMsgStatsIPVersion
icmpMsgStatsType
icmpMsgStatsInPkts
icmpMsgStatsOutPkts
icmp.30
–
icmpMsgStatsTable.1
icmpMsgStatsEntry.1
icmpMsgStatsEntry.2
icmpMsgStatsEntry.3
icmpMsgStatsEntry.4
–
–
–
RO
RO
List of MIBs
588
XG Series User's Guide
Appendix
B.1.6
tcp Group
tcp Group
No.
Name
Object identifier
MIB ACCESS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
tcpRtoAlgorithm
tcpRtoMin
tcp.1
tcp.2
tcp.3
tcp.4
tcp.5
tcp.6
tcp.7
tcp.8
tcp.9
tcp.10
tcp.11
tcp.12
tcp.14
tcp.15
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
tcpRtoMax
tcpMaxConn
tcpActiveOpens
tcpPassiveOpens
tcpAttemptFails
tcpEstabResets
tcpCurrEstab
10 tcpInSegs
11 tcpOutSegs
12 tcpRetransSegs
13 tcpInErrs
14 tcpOutRsts
tcpConn Group
No.
Name
Object identifier
MIB ACCESS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
tcpConnTable
tcpConnEntry
tcp.13
–
–
tcpConnTable.1
tcpConnEntry.1
tcpConnEntry.2
tcpConnEntry.3
tcpConnEntry.4
tcpConnEntry.5
tcpConnState
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
tcpConnLocalAddress
tcpConnLocalPort
tcpConnRemAddress
tcpConnRemPort
tcpConnection Group
No.
Name
Object identifier
MIB ACCESS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
tcpConnectionTable
tcpConnectionEntry
tcpConnectionLocalAddressType
tcpConnectionLocalAddress
tcpConnectionLocalPort
tcpConnectionRemAddressType
tcpConnectionRemAddress
tcpConnectionRemPort
tcp.19
–
tcpConnectionTable.1
tcpConnectionEntry.1
tcpConnectionEntry.2
tcpConnectionEntry.3
tcpConnectionEntry.4
tcpConnectionEntry.5
tcpConnectionEntry.6
tcpConnectionEntry.7
tcpConnectionEntry.8
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
RO
RO
tcpConnectionState
10 tcpConnectionProcess
List of MIBs
589
XG Series User's Guide
Appendix
tcpListener Group
No.
Name
Object identifier
MIB ACCESS
1
2
3
4
5
6
tcpListenerTable
tcpListenerEntry
tcpListenerLocalAddressType
tcpListenerLocalAddress
tcpListenerLocalPort
tcp.20
–
–
–
tcpListenerTable.1
tcpListenerEntry.1
tcpListenerEntry.2
tcpListenerEntry.3
tcpListenerEntry.4
–
–
RO
tcpListenerProcess
B.1.7
udp Group
udp Group
No.
Name
Name
Name
Object identifier
MIB ACCESS
1
2
3
4
udpInDatagrams
udpNoPorts
udpInErrors
udp.1
udp.2
udp.3
udp.4
RO
RO
RO
RO
udpOutDatagrams
udpListener Group
No.
Object identifier
MIB ACCESS
–
1
2
3
4
udpTable
udp.5
udpEntry
udpLocalAddress
udpLocalPort
udpTable.1
udpEntry.1
udpEntry.2
–
RO
RO
udpEndpoint Group
No.
Object identifier
MIB ACCESS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
udpEndpointTable
udpEndpointEntry
udpEndpointLocalAddressType
udpEndpointLocalAddress
udpEndpointLocalPort
udpEndpointRemoteAddressType
udpEndpointRemoteAddress
udpEndpointRemotePort
udpEndpointInstance
udp.7
–
–
–
udpEndpointTable.1
udpEndpointEntry.1
udpEndpointEntry.2
udpEndpointEntry.3
udpEndpointEntry.4
udpEndpointEntry.5
udpEndpointEntry.6
udpEndpointEntry.7
udpEndpointEntry.8
–
–
–
–
–
–
10 udpEndpointProcess
RO
List of MIBs
590
XG Series User's Guide
Appendix
B.1.8
dot3 Group
dot3Stats Group
No.
Name
Object identifier
MIB ACCESS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
dot3StatsTable
dot3StatsEntry
dot3StatsIndex
dot3StatsAlignmentErrors
dot3StatsFCSErrors
dot3.2
–
–
dot3StatsTable.1
dot3StatsEntry.1
dot3StatsEntry.2
dot3StatsEntry.3
dot3StatsEntry.4
dot3StatsEntry.5
dot3StatsEntry.6
dot3StatsEntry.7
dot3StatsEntry.8
dot3StatsEntry.9
dot3StatsEntry.10
dot3StatsEntry.11
dot3StatsEntry.13
dot3StatsEntry.16
dot3StatsEntry.17
dot3StatsEntry.18
dot3StatsEntry.19
dot3StatsEntry.20
dot3StatsEntry.21
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
dot3StatsSingleCollisionFrames
dot3StatsMultipleCollisionFrames
dot3StatsSQETestErrors
dot3StatsDeferredTransmissions
10 dot3StatsLateCollisions
11 dot3StatsExcessiveCollisions
12 dot3StatsInternalMacTransmitErrors
13 dot3StatsCarrierSenseErrors
14 dot3StatsFrameTooLongs
15 dot3StatsInternalMacReceiveErrors
16 dot3StatsEtherChipSet
17 dot3StatsSymbolErrors
18 dot3StatsDuplexStatus
19 dot3StatsRateControlAbility
20 dot3StatsRateControlStatus
dot3Control Group
No.
Name
Object identifier
MIB ACCESS
1
dot3ControlTable
dot3ControlEntry
dot3ControlFunctionsSupported
dot3ControlInUnknownOpcodes
dot3.9
–
–
RO
RO
2
3
4
dot3ControlTable.1
dot3ControlEntry.1
dot3ControlEntry.2
dot3Pause Group
No.
Name
Object identifier
MIB ACCESS
1
2
3
4
5
6
dot3PauseTable
dot3PauseEntry
dot3.10
–
–
dot3PauseTable.1
dot3PauseEntry.1
dot3PauseEntry.2
dot3PauseEntry.3
dot3PauseEntry.4
dot3PauseAdminMode
dot3PauseOperMode
dot3InPauseFrames
dot3OutPauseFrames
RO
RO
RO
RO
List of MIBs
591
XG Series User's Guide
Appendix
B.1.9
snmp Group
No.
Name
Object identifier
MIB ACCESS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
snmpInPkts
snmpOutPkts
snmpInBadVersions
snmp.1
snmp.2
snmp.3
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
snmpInBadCommunityNames
snmpInBadCommunityUses
snmpInASNParseErrs
snmpInTooBigs
snmpInNoSuchNames
snmpInBadValues
snmp.4
snmp.5
snmp.6
snmp.8
snmp.9
snmp.10
snmp.11
snmp.12
snmp.13
snmp.14
snmp.15
snmp.16
snmp.17
snmp.18
snmp.19
snmp.20
snmp.21
snmp.22
snmp.24
snmp.25
snmp.26
snmp.27
snmp.28
snmp.29
snmp.30
10 snmpInReadOnlys
11 snmpInGenErrs
12 snmpInTotalReqVars
13 snmpInTotalSetVars
14 snmpInGetRequests
15 snmpInGetNexts
16 snmpInSetRequests
17 snmpInGetResponses
18 snmpInTraps
19 snmpOutTooBigs
20 snmpOutNoSuchNames
21 snmpOutBadValues
22 snmpOutGenErrs
23 snmpOutGetRequests
24 snmpOutGetNexts
25 snmpOutSetRequests
26 snmpOutGetResponses
27 snmpOutTraps
28 snmpEnableAuthenTraps
B.1.10 rmon Group
rmonEthernetStatistics Group
No.
1
Name
Object identifier
statistics.1
MIB ACCESS
–
etherStatsTable
2
3
4
etherStatsEntry
etherStatsIndex
etherStatsDataSource
etherStatsDropEvents
etherStatsOctets
etherStatsTable.1
etherStatsEntry.1
etherStatsEntry.2
etherStatsEntry.3
etherStatsEntry.4
etherStatsEntry.5
etherStatsEntry.6
etherStatsEntry.7
etherStatsEntry.8
etherStatsEntry.9
etherStatsEntry.10
etherStatsEntry.11
etherStatsEntry.12
etherStatsEntry.13
etherStatsEntry.14
etherStatsEntry.15
etherStatsEntry.16
etherStatsEntry.17
etherStatsEntry.18
etherStatsEntry.19
etherStatsEntry.20
etherStatsEntry.21
–
RO
RO
5
6
7
RO
RO
RO
etherStatsPkts
8
9
etherStatsBroadcastPkts
etherStatsMulticastPkts
RO
RO
RO
10 etherStatsCRCAlignErrors
11 etherStatsUndersizePkts
12 etherStatsOversizePkts
13 etherStatsFragments
RO
RO
RO
14 etherStatsJabbers
15 etherStatsCollisions
RO
RO
16 etherStatsPkts64Octets
17 etherStatsPkts65to127Octets
18 etherStatsPkts128to255Octets
19 etherStatsPkts256to511Octets
20 etherStatsPkts512to1023Octets
21 etherStatsPkts1024to1518Octets
22 etherStatsOwner
RO / – (XG2600)
RO / – (XG2600)
RO / – (XG2600)
RO / – (XG2600)
RO / – (XG2600)
RO / – (XG2600)
RO
23 etherStatsStatus
RO
List of MIBs
592
XG Series User's Guide
Appendix
rmonHistoryControl Group
No.
1
2
Name
Object identifier
MIB ACCESS
historyControlTable
historyControlEntry
historyControlIndex
history.1
–
–
historyControlTable.1
historyControlEntry.1
historyControlEntry.2
historyControlEntry.3
historyControlEntry.4
historyControlEntry.5
historyControlEntry.6
historyControlEntry.7
3
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
4
5
6
historyControlDataSource
historyControlBucketsRequested
historyControlBucketsGranted
historyControlInterval
7
8
9
historyControlOwner
historyControlStatus
rmonEthernetHistory Group
No.
1
2
Name
Object identifier
MIB ACCESS
etherHistoryTable
etherHistoryEntry
etherHistoryIndex
history.2
–
–
etherHistoryTable.1
etherHistoryEntry.1
etherHistoryEntry.2
etherHistoryEntry.3
etherHistoryEntry.4
etherHistoryEntry.5
etherHistoryEntry.6
etherHistoryEntry.7
etherHistoryEntry.8
etherHistoryEntry.9
etherHistoryEntry.10
etherHistoryEntry.11
etherHistoryEntry.12
etherHistoryEntry.13
etherHistoryEntry.14
etherHistoryEntry.15
3
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
4
5
6
etherHistorySampleIndex
etherHistoryIntervalStart
etherHistoryDropEvents
etherHistoryOctets
7
8
9
etherHistoryPkts
etherHistoryBroadcastPkts
10 etherHistoryMulticastPkts
11 etherHistoryCRCAlignErrors
12 etherHistoryUndersizePkts
13 etherHistoryOversizePkts
14 etherHistoryFragments
15 etherHistoryJabbers
16 etherHistoryCollisions
17 etherHistoryUtilization
B.1.11 dot1dBridge Group
dot1dBase Group
No.
1
2
Name
dot1dBaseBridgeAddress
dot1dBaseNumPorts
dot1dBaseType
Object identifier
MIB ACCESS
dot1dBase.1
dot1dBase.2
dot1dBase.3
RO
RO
RO
–
3
4
5
6
dot1dBasePortTable
dot1dBasePortEntry
dot1dBasePort
dot1dBase.4
dot1dBasePortTable.1
dot1dBasePortEntry.1
dot1dBasePortEntry.2
dot1dBasePortEntry.3
dot1dBasePortEntry.4
dot1dBasePortEntry.5
–
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
7
8
9
dot1dBasePortIfIndex
dot1dBasePortCircuit
dot1dBasePortDelayExceededDiscards
10 dot1dBasePortMtuExceededDiscards
List of MIBs
593
XG Series User's Guide
Appendix
dot1dStp Group
No.
Name
Object identifier
dot1dStp.1
dot1dStp.2
MIB ACCESS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
dot1dStpProtocolSpecification
dot1dStpPriority
dot1dStpTimeSinceTopologyChange
dot1dStpTopChanges
dot1dStpDesignatedRoot
dot1dStpRootCost
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
–
dot1dStp.3
dot1dStp.4
dot1dStp.5
dot1dStp.6
dot1dStpRootPort
dot1dStpMaxAge
dot1dStpHelloTime
dot1dStp.7
dot1dStp.8
dot1dStp.9
10 dot1dStpHoldTime
dot1dStp.10
dot1dStp.11
dot1dStp.12
11 dot1dStpForwardDelay
12 dot1dStpBridgeMaxAge
13 dot1dStpBridgeHelloTime
14 dot1dStpBridgeForwardDelay
15 dot1dStpPortTable
dot1dStp.13
dot1dStp.14
dot1dStp.15
16 dot1dStpPortEntry
17 dot1dStpPort
18 dot1dStpPortPriority
dot1dStpPortTable.1
dot1dStpPortEntry.1
dot1dStpPortEntry.2
dot1dStpPortEntry.3
dot1dStpPortEntry.4
dot1dStpPortEntry.5
dot1dStpPortEntry.6
dot1dStpPortEntry.7
dot1dStpPortEntry.8
dot1dStpPortEntry.9
dot1dStpPortEntry.10
–
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
19 dot1dStpPortState
20 dot1dStpPortEnable
21 dot1dStpPortPathCost
22 dot1dStpPortDesignatedRoot
23 dot1dStpPortDesignatedCost
24 dot1dStpPortDesignatedBridge
25 dot1dStpPortDesignatedPort
26 dot1dStpPortForwardTransitions
dot1dTp Group
No.
Name
dot1dTpLearnedEntryDiscards
dot1dTpAgingTime
dot1dTpFdbTable
Object identifier
MIB ACCESS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
dot1dTp.1
dot1dTp.2
dot1dTp.3
RO
RO
–
dot1dTpFdbEntry
dot1dTpFdbAddress
dot1dTpFdbPort
dot1dTpFdbTable.1
dot1dTpFdbEntry.1
dot1dTpFdbEntry.2
dot1dTpFdbEntry.3
dot1dTp.4
dot1dTpPortTable.1
dot1dTpPortEntry.1
dot1dTpPortEntry.2
dot1dTpPortEntry.3
dot1dTpPortEntry.4
dot1dTpPortEntry.5
–
RO
RO
RO
–
dot1dTpFdbStatus
dot1dTpPortTable
dot1dTpPortEntry
–
10 dot1dTpPort
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
11 dot1dTpPortMaxInfo
12 dot1dTpPortInFrames
13 dot1dTpPortOutFrames
14 dot1dTpPortInDiscards
dot1dExtBase Group
No.
Name
Object identifier
MIB ACCESS
1
2
3
4
5
6
dot1dDeviceCapabilities
dot1dExtBase.1
RO
RO
RO
–
dot1dTrafficClassesEnabled
dot1dGmrpStatus
dot1dPortCapabilitiesTable
dot1dPortCapabilitiesEntry
dot1dPortCapabilities
dot1dExtBase.2
dot1dExtBase.3
dot1dExtBase.4
dot1dPortCapabilitiesTable.1
dot1dPortCapabilitiesEntry.1
–
RO
List of MIBs
594
XG Series User's Guide
Appendix
dot1dPriority Group
No.
Name
Object identifier
dot1dPriority.1
dot1dPortPriorityTable.1
dot1dPortPriorityEntry.1
dot1dPortPriorityEntry.2
dot1dPriority.3
dot1dTrafficClassTable.1
dot1dTrafficClassEntry.1
dot1dTrafficClassEntry.2
MIB ACCESS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
dot1dPortPriorityTable
dot1dPortPriorityEntry
–
–
RO
RO
–
dot1dPortDefaultUserPriority
dot1dPortNumTrafficClasses
dot1dTrafficClassTable
dot1dTrafficClassEntry
dot1dTrafficClassPriority
dot1dTrafficClass
–
–
RO
List of MIBs
595
XG Series User's Guide
Appendix
B.1.12 qBridgeMIB Group
dot1qBase Group
No.
1
2
Name
dot1qVlanVersionNumber
dot1qMaxVlanId
Object identifier
dot1qBase.1
dot1qBase.2
dot1qBase.3
dot1qBase.4
dot1qBase.5
MIB ACCESS
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
3
4
5
dot1qMaxSupportedVlans
dot1qNumVlans
dot1qGvrpStatus
dot1qVlan Group
No.
Name
Object identifier
MIB ACCESS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
dot1qVlanNumDeletes
dot1qVlan.1
dot1qVlan.2
RO
–
–
dot1qVlanCurrentTable
dot1qVlanCurrentEntry
dot1qVlanTimeMark
dot1qVlanIndex
dot1qVlanCurrentEgressPorts
dot1qVlanCurrentUntaggedPorts
dot1qVlanStatus
dot1qVlanCurrentTable.1
dot1qVlanCurrentEntry.1
dot1qVlanCurrentEntry.2
dot1qVlanCurrentEntry.4
dot1qVlanCurrentEntry.5
dot1qVlanCurrentEntry.6
dot1qVlan.3
–
–
RO
RO
RO
–
dot1qVlanStaticTable
10 dot1qVlanStaticEntry
11 dot1qVlanStaticName
dot1qVlanStaticTable.1
dot1qVlanStaticEntry.1
dot1qVlanStaticEntry.2
dot1qVlanStaticEntry.3
dot1qVlanStaticEntry.4
dot1qVlanStaticEntry.5
dot1qVlan.4
–
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
–
12 dot1qVlanStaticEgressPorts
13 dot1qVlanForbiddenEgressPorts
14 dot1qVlanStaticUntaggedPorts
15 dot1qVlanStaticRowStatus
16 dot1qNextFreeLocalVlanIndex
17 dot1qPortVlanTable
dot1qVlan.5
18 dot1qPortVlanEntry
19 dot1qPvid
20 dot1qPortAcceptableFrameTypes
21 dot1qPortIngressFiltering
22 dot1qPortGvrpStatus
dot1qPortVlanTable.1
dot1qPortVlanEntry.1
dot1qPortVlanEntry.2
dot1qPortVlanEntry.3
dot1qPortVlanEntry.4
–
RO
RO
RO
RO
B.1.13 ifMIB Group
ifx Group
No.
1
2
Name
Object identifier
ifMIBObjects.1
ifXTable.1
MIB ACCESS
–
–
ifXTable
ifXEntry
3
4
5
ifName
ifXEntry.1
ifXEntry.2
ifXEntry.3
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
ifInMulticastPkts
ifInBroadcastPkts
ifOutMulticastPkts
ifOutBroadcastPkts
ifHCInOctets
ifHCInUcastPkts
6
7
8
ifXEntry.4
ifXEntry.5
ifXEntry.6
9
ifXEntry.7
ifXEntry.8
ifXEntry.9
10 ifHCInMulticastPkts
11 ifHCInBroadcastPkts
12 ifHCOutOctets
ifXEntry.10
ifXEntry.11
13 ifHCOutUcastPkts
List of MIBs
596
XG Series User's Guide
Appendix
No.
Name
Object identifier
ifXEntry.12
MIB ACCESS
14 ifHCOutMulticastPkts
15 ifHCOutBroadcastPkts
16 ifLinkUpDownTrapEnable
17 ifHighSpeed
18 ifPromiscuousMode
19 ifConnectorPresent
20 ifAlias
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
ifXEntry.13
ifXEntry.14
ifXEntry.15
ifXEntry.16
ifXEntry.17
ifXEntry.18
ifXEntry.19
21 ifCounterDiscontinuityTime
ifStack Group
No.
1
Name
Object identifier
MIB ACCESS
–
ifStackTable
ifMIBObjects.2
ifStackTable.1
ifStackEntry.1
ifStackEntry.2
ifStackEntry.3
2
3
4
ifStackEntry
–
–
–
ifStackHigherLayer
ifStackLowerLayer
ifStackStatus
5
RO
ifMIB Group
No.
Name
Object identifier
MIB ACCESS
1
2
ifTableLastChange
ifStackLastChange
ifMIBObjects.5
ifMIBObjects.6
RO
RO
B.1.14 radiusMIB Group
radiusAuthClient Group
No.
1
2
Name
radiusAuthClientInvalidServerAddresses
radiusAuthClientIdentifier
Object identifier
radiusAuthClient.1
radiusAuthClient.2
MIB ACCESS
RO
RO
–
3
radiusAuthServerTable
radiusAuthClient.3
4
5
radiusAuthServerEntry
radiusAuthServerIndex
radiusAuthServerTable.1
radiusAuthServerEntry.1
radiusAuthServerEntry.2
radiusAuthServerEntry.3
radiusAuthServerEntry.4
radiusAuthServerEntry.5
radiusAuthServerEntry.6
radiusAuthServerEntry.7
radiusAuthServerEntry.8
radiusAuthServerEntry.9
radiusAuthServerEntry.10
radiusAuthServerEntry.11
radiusAuthServerEntry.12
radiusAuthServerEntry.13
radiusAuthServerEntry.14
radiusAuthServerEntry.15
–
–
6
7
8
radiusAuthServerAddress
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
radiusAuthClientServerPortNumber
radiusAuthClientRoundTripTime
radiusAuthClientAccessRequests
9
10 radiusAuthClientAccessRetransmissions
11 radiusAuthClientAccessAccepts
12 radiusAuthClientAccessRejects
13 radiusAuthClientAccessChallenges
14 radiusAuthClientMalformedAccessResponses
15 radiusAuthClientBadAuthenticators
16 radiusAuthClientPendingRequests
17 radiusAuthClientTimeouts
18 radiusAuthClientUnknownTypes
19 radiusAuthClientPacketsDropped
List of MIBs
597
XG Series User's Guide
Appendix
radiusAccClient Group
No.
Name
Object identifier
radiusAccClient.1
radiusAccClient.2
MIB ACCESS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
radiusAccClientInvalidServerAddresses
radiusAccClientIdentifier
RO
RO
–
radiusAccServerTable
radiusAccClient.3
radiusAccServerEntry
radiusAccServerIndex
radiusAccServerTable.1
radiusAccServerEntry.1
radiusAccServerEntry.2
radiusAccServerEntry.3
radiusAccServerEntry.4
radiusAccServerEntry.5
radiusAccServerEntry.6
radiusAccServerEntry.7
radiusAccServerEntry.8
radiusAccServerEntry.9
radiusAccServerEntry.10
radiusAccServerEntry.11
radiusAccServerEntry.12
radiusAccServerEntry.13
–
–
radiusAccServerAddress
radiusAccClientServerPortNumber
radiusAccClientRoundTripTime
radiusAccClientRequests
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
10 radiusAccClientRetransmissions
11 radiusAccClientResponses
12 radiusAccClientMalformedResponses
13 radiusAccClientBadAuthenticators
14 radiusAccClientPendingRequests
15 radiusAccClientTimeouts
16 radiusAccClientUnknownTypes
17 radiusAccClientPacketsDropped
List of MIBs
598
XG Series User's Guide
Appendix
B.2 Fujitsu Extension MIB
XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600
Available Model
The following shows meaning of MIB ACCESS column.
RO
RW
–
:MIB can be read only.
:MIB can be read and written.
:MIB can not be accessed.
B.2.1
nonosSystem Group
No.
1
Name
Object identifier
nonosSystem.1
MIB ACCESS
RW
nosResetSystem
B.2.2
nonosSystemError Group
No.
1
Name
nosSystemErrorPoint
nosSystemErrorText1
nosSystemErrorText2
nosSystemErrorText3
nosSystemErrorText4
nosSystemErrorText5
nosSystemErrorText6
nosSystemErrorText7
nosSystemErrorText8
Object identifier
nonosSystemError.1
MIB ACCESS
RO
2
3
4
nonosSystemError.2
nonosSystemError.3
nonosSystemError.4
nonosSystemError.5
nonosSystemError.6
nonosSystemError.7
nonosSystemError.8
nonosSystemError.9
nonosSystemError.10
nonosSystemError.11
nonosSystemError.12
nonosSystemError.13
nonosSystemError.14
nonosSystemError.15
nonosSystemError.16
nonosSystemError.17
nonosSystemError.18
nonosSystemError.19
nonosSystemError.20
nonosSystemError.21
RO
RO
RO
5
6
7
RO
RO
RO
8
9
RO
RO
RO
10 nosSystemErrorText9
11 nosSystemErrorText10
12 nosSystemErrorText11
13 nosSystemErrorText12
14 nosSystemErrorText13
15 nosSystemErrorText14
16 nosSystemErrorText15
17 nosSystemErrorText16
18 nosSystemErrorText17
19 nosSystemErrorText18
20 nosSystemErrorText19
21 nosSystemErrorText20
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
B.2.3
nonosLineset Group
XG0224 / XG0448
Available Model
No.
1
2
Name
Object identifier
MIB ACCESS
nosLineset
nonosLineset.1
nosLineset.1
nosLinesetTable.1
nosLinesetEntry.1
nosLinesetEntry.2
nosLinesetEntry.4
–
–
–
nosLinesetTable
nosLinesetEntry
nosLinesetIndex
nosLinesetId
3
4
5
6
RO
RO
RO
nosLinesetStatus
List of MIBs
599
XG Series User's Guide
Appendix
B.2.4
nosDualPower Group
XG2600
Available Model
No.
1
Name
Object identifier
nosDualPower.1
MIB ACCESS
–
dualPowerBase
dualPowerSet
dualPowerState
2
3
dualPowerBase.1
nosDualPower.2
RO
–
4
dualPowerStateTable
dualPowerStateEntry
dualPowerStateUnitIndex
dualPowerStateUnit
dualPowerState.1
–
5
6
7
dualPowerStateTable.1
dualPowerStateEntry.1
dualPowerStateEntry.2
–
RO
RO
List of MIBs
600
XG Series User's Guide
Appendix
B.3 IEEE802.1MIB
All models
Available Model
The following shows meaning of MIB ACCESS column.
RO
RW
–
:MIB can be read only.
:MIB can be read and written.
:MIB can not be accessed.
B.3.1
lldpMIB Group
lldpConfiguration Group
No.
1
2
Name
Object identifier
lldpConfiguration.1
lldpConfiguration.2
lldpConfiguration.3
lldpConfiguration.4
lldpConfiguration.5
MIB ACCESS
lldpMessageTxInterval
lldpMessageTxHoldMultiplier
lldpReinitDelay
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
3
4
5
lldpTxDelay
lldpNotificationInterval
lldpPortConfig Group
No.
Name
Object identifier
MIB ACCESS
1
2
3
4
5
6
lldpPortConfigTable
lldpPortConfigEntry
lldpPortConfigPortNum
lldpPortConfigAdminStatus
lldpPortConfigNotificationEnable
lldpPortConfigTLVsTxEnable
lldpConfiguration.6
–
lldpPortConfigTable.1
lldpPortConfigEntry.1
lldpPortConfigEntry.2
lldpPortConfigEntry.3
lldpPortConfigEntry.4
–
–
RO
RO
RO
lldpConfigManAddr Group
No.
1
Name
Object identifier
lldpConfiguration.7
MIB ACCESS
–
lldpConfigManAddrTable
lldpConfigManAddrEntry
2
3
lldpConfigManAddrTable.1
lldpConfigManAddrEntry.1
–
RO
lldpConfigManAddrPortsTxEnable
lldpStatistics Group
No.
Name
Object identifier
lldpStatistics.1
lldpStatistics.2
MIB ACCESS
1
2
3
4
5
lldpStatsRemTablesLastChangeTime
lldpStatsRemTablesInserts
lldpStatsRemTablesDeletes
lldpStatsRemTablesDrops
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
lldpStatistics.3
lldpStatistics.4
lldpStatistics.5
lldpStatsRemTablesAgeouts
List of MIBs
601
XG Series User's Guide
Appendix
lldpStatsTxPort Group
No.
Name
Object identifier
lldpStatistics.6
lldpStatsTxPortTable.1
lldpStatsTxPortEntry.1
lldpStatsTxPortEntry.2
MIB ACCESS
–
–
1
2
3
4
lldpStatsTxPortTable
lldpStatsTxPortTable
lldpStatsTxPortNum
–
RO
lldpStatsTxPortFramesTotal
lldpStatsRxPort Group
No.
Name
Object identifier
MIB ACCESS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
lldpStatsRxPortTable
lldpStatsRxPortEntry
lldpStatsRxPortNum
lldpStatsRxPortFramesDiscardedTotal
lldpStatsRxPortFramesErrors
lldpStatistics.7
–
–
lldpStatsRxPortTable.1
lldpStatsRxPortEntry.1
lldpStatsRxPortEntry.2
lldpStatsRxPortEntry.3
lldpStatsRxPortEntry.4
lldpStatsRxPortEntry.5
lldpStatsRxPortEntry.6
lldpStatsRxPortEntry.7
–
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
lldpStatsRxPortFramesTotal
lldpStatsRxPortTLVsDiscardedTotal
lldpStatsRxPortTLVsUnrecognizedTotal
lldpStatsRxPortAgeoutsTotal
lldpLocalSystemData Group
No.
1
2
Name
lldpLocChassisIdSubtype
lldpLocChassisId
Object identifier
lldpLocalSystemData.1
lldpLocalSystemData.2
lldpLocalSystemData.3
lldpLocalSystemData.4
lldpLocalSystemData.5
lldpLocalSystemData.6
MIB ACCESS
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
3
lldpLocSysName
4
5
6
lldpLocSysDesc
lldpLocSysCapSupported
lldpLocSysCapEnabled
lldpLocPort Group
No.
Name
Object identifier
lldpLocalSystemData.7
lldpLocPortTable.1
lldpLocPortEntry.1
MIB ACCESS
1
2
3
4
5
6
lldpLocPortTable
lldpLocPortEntry
lldpLocPortNum
lldpLocPortIdSubtype
lldpLocPortId
–
–
–
lldpLocPortEntry.2
lldpLocPortEntry.3
lldpLocPortEntry.4
RO
RO
RO
lldpLocPortDesc
lldpLocManAddr Group
No.
1
Name
Object identifier
lldpLocalSystemData.8
lldpLocManAddrTable.1
lldpLocManAddrEntry.1
lldpLocManAddrEntry.2
lldpLocManAddrEntry.3
lldpLocManAddrEntry.4
lldpLocManAddrEntry.5
lldpLocManAddrEntry.6
MIB ACCESS
–
lldpLocManAddrTable
lldpLocManAddrEntry
lldpLocManAddrSubtype
lldpLocManAddr
2
3
4
–
–
–
5
6
7
lldpLocManAddrLen
lldpLocManAddrIfSubtype
lldpLocManAddrIfId
lldpLocManAddrOID
RO
RO
RO
RO
8
List of MIBs
602
XG Series User's Guide
Appendix
lldpRem Group
No.
Name
Object identifier
lldpRemoteSystemsData.1
lldpRemTable.1
lldpRemEntry.1
lldpRemEntry.2
lldpRemEntry.3
MIB ACCESS
–
–
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
lldpRemTable
lldpRemEntry
lldpRemTimeMark
lldpRemLocalPortNum
lldpRemIndex
–
–
–
lldpRemChassisIdSubtype
lldpRemChassisId
lldpRemEntry.4
lldpRemEntry.5
lldpRemEntry.6
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
lldpRemPortIdSubtype
lldpRemPortId
lldpRemEntry.7
lldpRemEntry.8
lldpRemEntry.9
10 lldpRemPortDesc
11 lldpRemSysName
12 lldpRemSysDesc
13 lldpRemSysCapSupported
14 lldpRemSysCapEnabled
lldpRemEntry.10
lldpRemEntry.11
lldpRemEntry.12
lldpRemManAddr Group
No.
1
Name
Object identifier
lldpRemoteSystemsData.2
lldpRemManAddrTable.1
lldpRemManAddrEntry.1
lldpRemManAddrEntry.2
lldpRemManAddrEntry.3
lldpRemManAddrEntry.4
lldpRemManAddrEntry.5
MIB ACCESS
–
lldpRemManAddrTable
lldpRemManAddrEntry
lldpRemManAddrSubtype
lldpRemManAddr
2
3
4
–
–
–
5
6
7
lldpRemManAddrIfSubtype
lldpRemManAddrIfId
lldpRemManAddrOID
RO
RO
RO
lldpRemUnknownTLV Group
No.
1
2
Name
lldpRemUnknownTLVTable
lldpRemUnknownTLVEntry
lldpRemUnknownTLVType
lldpRemUnknownTLVInfo
Object identifier
lldpRemoteSystemsData.3
lldpRemUnknownTLVTable.1
lldpRemUnknownTLVEntry.1
lldpRemUnknownTLVEntry.2
MIB ACCESS
–
–
–
3
4
RO
lldpRemOrgDefInfo Group
No.
1
2
Name
Object identifier
lldpRemoteSystemsData.4
lldpRemOrgDefInfoTable.1
lldpRemOrgDefInfoEntry.1
lldpRemOrgDefInfoEntry.2
lldpRemOrgDefInfoEntry.3
lldpRemOrgDefInfoEntry.4
MIB ACCESS
lldpRemOrgDefInfoTable
lldpRemOrgDefInfoEntry
lldpRemOrgDefInfoOUI
–
–
–
3
4
5
6
lldpRemOrgDefInfoSubtype
lldpRemOrgDefInfoIndex
lldpRemOrgDefInfo
–
–
RO
lldpXdot3PortConfig Group
No.
1
Name
lldpXdot3PortConfigTable
Object identifier
lldpXdot3Config.1
MIB ACCESS
–
2
3
lldpXdot3PortConfigEntry
lldpXdot3PortConfigTLVsTxEnable
lldpXdot3PortConfigTable.1
lldpXdot3PortConfigEntry.1
–
RO
List of MIBs
603
XG Series User's Guide
Appendix
lldpXdot3LocPort Group
No.
1
Name
Object identifier
lldpXdot3LocalData.1
MIB ACCESS
–
lldpXdot3LocPortTable
2
lldpXdot3LocPortEntry
lldpXdot3LocPortTable.1
lldpXdot3LocPortEntry.1
lldpXdot3LocPortEntry.2
lldpXdot3LocPortEntry.3
lldpXdot3LocPortEntry.4
–
3
4
5
lldpXdot3LocPortAutoNegSupported
lldpXdot3LocPortAutoNegEnabled
lldpXdot3LocPortAutoNegAdvertisedCap
lldpXdot3LocPortOperMauType
RO
RO
RO
RO
6
lldpXdot3LocPower Group
No.
1
2
Name
Object identifier
lldpXdot3LocalData.2
MIB ACCESS
lldpXdot3LocPowerTable
lldpXdot3LocPowerEntry
–
–
lldpXdot3LocPowerTable.1
lldpXdot3LocPowerEntry.1
lldpXdot3LocPowerEntry.2
lldpXdot3LocPowerEntry.3
lldpXdot3LocPowerEntry.4
lldpXdot3LocPowerEntry.5
lldpXdot3LocPowerEntry.6
3
lldpXdot3LocPowerPortClass
lldpXdot3LocPowerMDISupported
lldpXdot3LocPowerMDIEnabled
lldpXdot3LocPowerPairControlable
lldpXdot3LocPowerPairs
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
4
5
6
7
8
lldpXdot3LocPowerClass
lldpXdot3LocLinkAgg Group
No.
1
Name
lldpXdot3LocLinkAggTable
Object identifier
lldpXdot3LocalData.3
MIB ACCESS
–
2
lldpXdot3LocLinkAggEntry
lldpXdot3LocLinkAggStatus
lldpXdot3LocLinkAggPortId
lldpXdot3LocLinkAggTable.1
lldpXdot3LocLinkAggEntry.1
lldpXdot3LocLinkAggEntry.2
–
3
4
RO
RO
lldpXdot3LocMaxFrameSize Group
No.
1
Name
lldpXdot3LocMaxFrameSizeTable
lldpXdot3LocMaxFrameSizeEntry
lldpXdot3LocMaxFrameSize
Object identifier
lldpXdot3LocalData.4
MIB ACCESS
–
2
3
lldpXdot3LocMaxFrameSizeTable.1
lldpXdot3LocMaxFrameSizeEntry.1
–
RO
lldpXdot3RemPort Group
No.
1
2
Name
Object identifier
lldpXdot3RemoteData.1
lldpXdot3RemPortTable.1
lldpXdot3RemPortEntry.1
lldpXdot3RemPortEntry.2
lldpXdot3RemPortEntry.3
lldpXdot3RemPortEntry.4
MIB ACCESS
–
–
lldpXdot3RemPortTable
lldpXdot3RemPortEntry
3
4
5
lldpXdot3RemPortAutoNegSupported
lldpXdot3RemPortAutoNegEnabled
lldpXdot3RemPortAutoNegAdvertisedCap
lldpXdot3RemPortOperMauType
RO
RO
RO
RO
6
lldpXdot3RemPower Group
No.
1
Name
lldpXdot3RemPowerTable
Object identifier
lldpXdot3RemoteData.2
MIB ACCESS
–
2
3
lldpXdot3RemPowerEntry
lldpXdot3RemPowerPortClass
lldpXdot3RemPowerMDISupported
lldpXdot3RemPowerTable.1
lldpXdot3RemPowerEntry.1
lldpXdot3RemPowerEntry.2
–
RO
RO
4
List of MIBs
604
XG Series User's Guide
Appendix
No.
Name
Object identifier
lldpXdot3RemPowerEntry.3
lldpXdot3RemPowerEntry.4
lldpXdot3RemPowerEntry.5
lldpXdot3RemPowerEntry.6
MIB ACCESS
5
6
7
8
lldpXdot3RemPowerMDIEnabled
lldpXdot3RemPowerPairControlable
lldpXdot3RemPowerPairs
RO
RO
RO
RO
lldpXdot3RemPowerClass
lldpXdot3RemLinkAgg Group
No.
1
Name
lldpXdot3RemLinkAggTable
Object identifier
lldpXdot3RemoteData.3
MIB ACCESS
–
2
3
lldpXdot3RemLinkAggEntry
lldpXdot3RemLinkAggStatus
lldpXdot3RemLinkAggPortId
lldpXdot3RemLinkAggTable.1
lldpXdot3RemLinkAggEntry.1
lldpXdot3RemLinkAggEntry.2
–
RO
RO
4
lldpXdot3RemMaxFrameSize Group
No.
1
2
Name
lldpXdot3RemMaxFrameSizeTable
lldpXdot3RemMaxFrameSizeEntry
lldpXdot3RemMaxFrameSize
Object identifier
lldpXdot3RemoteData.4
lldpXdot3RemMaxFrameSizeTable.1
MIB ACCESS
–
–
3
lldpXdot3RemMaxFrameSizeEntry.1 RO
lldpXdot1ConfigPortVlan Group
No.
1
Name
lldpXdot1ConfigPortVlanTable
lldpXdot1ConfigPortVlanEntry
lldpXdot1ConfigPortVlanTxEnable
Object identifier
lldpXdot1Config.1
MIB ACCESS
–
2
3
lldpXdot1ConfigPortVlanTable.1
lldpXdot1ConfigPortVlanEntry.1
–
RO
lldpXdot1ConfigVlanName Group
No.
1
Name
lldpXdot1ConfigVlanNameTable
lldpXdot1ConfigVlanNameEntry
lldpXdot1ConfigVlanNameTxEnable
Object identifier
lldpXdot1Config.2
MIB ACCESS
–
2
3
lldpXdot1ConfigVlanNameTable.1
lldpXdot1ConfigVlanNameEntry.1
–
RO
lldpXdot1ConfigProtoVlan Group
No.
1
2
Name
lldpXdot1ConfigProtoVlanTable
lldpXdot1ConfigProtoVlanEntry
lldpXdot1ConfigProtoVlanTxEnable
Object identifier
lldpXdot1Config.3
lldpXdot1ConfigProtoVlanTable.1
lldpXdot1ConfigProtoVlanEntry.1
MIB ACCESS
–
–
3
RO
lldpXdot1ConfigProtocol Group
No.
1
2
Name
lldpXdot1ConfigProtocolTable
lldpXdot1ConfigProtocolEntry
lldpXdot1ConfigProtocolTxEnable
Object identifier
lldpXdot1Config.4
lldpXdot1ConfigProtocolTable.1
lldpXdot1ConfigProtocolEntry.1
MIB ACCESS
–
–
RO
3
List of MIBs
605
XG Series User's Guide
Appendix
lldpXdot1Loc Group
No.
Name
Object identifier
lldpXdot1LocalData.1
lldpXdot1LocTable.1
lldpXdot1LocEntry.1
MIB ACCESS
–
–
1
2
3
lldpXdot1LocTable
lldpXdot1LocEntry
lldpXdot1LocPortVlanId
RO
lldpXdot1LocProtoVlan Group
No.
1
Name
lldpXdot1LocProtoVlanTable
Object identifier
MIB ACCESS
lldpXdot1LocalData.2
–
2
3
lldpXdot1LocProtoVlanEntry
lldpXdot1LocProtoVlanId
lldpXdot1LocProtoVlanTable.1
lldpXdot1LocProtoVlanEntry.1
lldpXdot1LocProtoVlanEntry.2
lldpXdot1LocProtoVlanEntry.3
–
–
4
5
lldpXdot1LocProtoVlanSupported
lldpXdot1LocProtoVlanEnabled
RO
RO
lldpXdot1LocVlanName Group
No.
1
Name
lldpXdot1LocVlanNameTable
Object identifier
lldpXdot1LocalData.3
MIB ACCESS
–
2
lldpXdot1LocVlanNameEntry
lldpXdot1LocVlanId
lldpXdot1LocVlanName
lldpXdot1LocVlanNameTable.1
lldpXdot1LocVlanNameEntry.1
lldpXdot1LocVlanNameEntry.2
–
3
4
–
RO
lldpXdot1LocProtocol Group
No.
1
Name
lldpXdot1LocProtocolTable
Object identifier
lldpXdot1LocalData.4
MIB ACCESS
–
2
lldpXdot1LocProtocolEntry
lldpXdot1LocProtocolIndex
lldpXdot1LocProtocolId
lldpXdot1LocProtocolTable.1
lldpXdot1LocProtocolEntry.1
lldpXdot1LocProtocolEntry.2
–
3
4
–
RO
lldpXdot1Rem Group
No.
Name
Object identifier
lldpXdot1RemoteData.1
lldpXdot1RemTable.1
lldpXdot1RemEntry.1
MIB ACCESS
–
1
2
3
lldpXdot1RemTable
lldpXdot1RemEntry
lldpXdot1RemPortVlanId
–
RO
lldpXdot1RemProtoVlan Group
No.
1
Name
lldpXdot1RemProtoVlanTable
Object identifier
lldpXdot1RemoteData.2
MIB ACCESS
–
2
lldpXdot1RemProtoVlanEntry
lldpXdot1RemProtoVlanId
lldpXdot1RemProtoVlanSupported
lldpXdot1RemProtoVlanEnabled
lldpXdot1RemProtoVlanTable.1
lldpXdot1RemProtoVlanEntry.1
lldpXdot1RemProtoVlanEntry.2
lldpXdot1RemProtoVlanEntry.3
–
3
4
5
–
RO
RO
List of MIBs
606
XG Series User's Guide
Appendix
lldpXdot1RemVlanName Group
No.
1
2
Name
lldpXdot1RemVlanNameTable
lldpXdot1RemVlanNameEntry
lldpXdot1RemVlanId
Object identifier
lldpXdot1RemoteData.3
lldpXdot1RemVlanNameTable.1
lldpXdot1RemVlanNameEntry.1
lldpXdot1RemVlanNameEntry.2
MIB ACCESS
–
–
3
4
–
RO
lldpXdot1RemVlanName
lldpXdot1RemProtocol Group
No.
1
Name
lldpXdot1RemProtocolTable
Object identifier
lldpXdot1RemoteData.4
MIB ACCESS
–
2
lldpXdot1RemProtocolEntry
lldpXdot1RemProtocolIndex
lldpXdot1RemProtocolId
lldpXdot1RemProtocolTable.1
lldpXdot1RemProtocolEntry.1
lldpXdot1RemProtocolEntry.2
–
3
4
–
RO
List of MIBs
607
XG Series User's Guide
Index
H
E
I
K
L
F
609
XG Series User's Guide
Index
M
N
O
P
610
XG Series User's Guide
Index
Q
R
Restoring configuration information using
Restoring configuration information using
Restoring configuration information using
S
Saving configuration information using
Saving configuration information using
Saving configuration information using
611
XG Series User's Guide
Index
T
612
XG Series User's Guide
Index
U
V
W
613
XG Series User’s Guide
P3NK-4452-01ENZ0
Issued on
Issued by
February, 2011
FUJITSU LIMITED
• The contents may be revised without prior notice.
• Fujitsu assumes no liability for damages to third party copyrights or other rights arising from the use of
any information in this manual.
• No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form without the prior written permission of Fujitsu.
|